Class 12 Shiv Das

2021-22
CBSE
Term 1
(Nov-Dec)
Chapterwise
QUESTION BANK
MC Q s
PHYSICS
Competency Based Questions
• Case Studies with MCQs  • Objective Type MCQs
• Assertion-Reasoning

Chapterwise
• Keynotes
• Questions & Answers

OMR Based
Sample Question Paper

FOLLOW US
R.P.A. shivdasbooks
 © All
• No part of this book may be reproduced or cop-
ied in any form or by any means without the
written permission of the publishers.
Rights • The publishers have taken all possible
Reserved precautions in publishing this book, yet if any
mistake has crept in, the publishers shall not be
responsible for the same.
• All disputes shall be subject to the jurisdiction
of court at Delhi only.

PUBLISHED BY SHIV DAS & SONS

C-8, Sector 6, Noida
Uttar Pradesh-201 301, India

+91-9910055604, 7840040400
0120-4197490, 4305480

[email protected] • www.shivdas.in
Trade contact: [email protected]

Printed at:
First Impression
Corporate Services Pvt. Ltd., E-114, Sector-63
Noida, Uttar Pradesh-201301
During the course of the year if there are any updates
in the Curriculum due to the Pandemic, we will
provide all the updates for free with the help of the
given Barcode.

FOR LATEST CBSE

2022 UPDATES
Scan The QR CODE

FREE DOWNLOADS
AND OTHER CONTENT

Scan QR Code

Scan The QR CODE

FOLLOW US
Shivdasbooks
C ontents
Term–1

Latest Syllabus (Issued by CBSE) ... (vi)

Competency Based Questions (CBQs)

Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields C-1
Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance C-7
Chapter 3 Current Electricity ... C-14
Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism ... C-21
Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter ... C-29
Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction C-36
Chapter 7 Alternating Current ... C-42
Chapterwise CBSE Examination Questions
Chapter 1 Electric Charges and Fields 1
Chapter 2 Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 20
Chapter 3 Current Electricity ... 44
Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism ... 77
Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter ... 111
Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction 118
Chapter 7 Alternating Current ... 136

OMR Based Sample Question Paper ... OMR-1

✽••••✽

(iv)
 CBSE BOARD EXAM 2021-22

NEW PATTERN
(CBSE Circular no. Acad-51/2021) dated 5th July, 2021

TERM-1
50% Syllabus for Nov-Dec. 2021
Questions Types (90 Minutes)

CASE BASED MULTIPLE CHOICE ASSERTION-REASON

MCQs QUESTIONS TYPE MCQs

✰ CBSE to send Question Papers with marking scheme.

✰ Exams will be conducted in the school.
✰ OMR sheet to be used for Evaluation.
✰ Term-1 marks will add to the final result.

Internal Assessment
✰ 3 Periodic Tests
✰ Student Enrichment
✰ Portfolio
✰ Practical
✰ Speaking listening activities
✰ Projects
(v)
 Latest Syllabus (Issued by CBSE) (24 TH
July 2021)

PHYSICS (2021-22)
COURSE STRUCTURE—CLASS XII

TERM-I
Time: 90 Minutes Max. Marks: 35
Units No. of Periods Marks
Unit-I Electrostatics
Chapter 1 : Electric Charges and Fields
23
Chapter 2 : Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 17
Unit-II Current Electricity
15
Chapter 3 : Current Electricity
Unit-III Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism
Chapter 4 : Moving Charges and Magnetism 16
Chapter 5 : Magnetism and Matter
18
Unit-IV Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Currents
Chapter 6 : Electromagnetic Induction 19
Chapter 7 : Alternating Currents
Total 73 35

UNIT I : ELECTROSTATICS 23 Periods

1. Electric Charges and Fields:
Electric Charges; Conservation of charge, Coulomb’s law-force between two-point charges, forces between

multiple charges; superposition principle and continuous charge distribution. Electric field, electric field
due to a point charge, electric field lines, electric dipole, electric field due to a dipole, torque on a dipole
in uniform electric field. Electric flux, statement of Gauss’s theorem and its applications to find field due
to infinitely long straight wire, uniformly charged infinite plane sheet.
2. Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance
Electric potential, potential difference, electric potential due to a point charge, a dipole and system of charges;
equipotential surfaces, electrical potential energy of a system of two-point charges and of electric dipole
in an electrostatic field. Conductors and insulators, free charges and bound charges inside a conductor.
Dielectrics and electric polarisation, capacitors and capacitance, combination of capacitors in series and in
parallel, capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with and without dielectric medium between the plates,
energy stored in a capacitor.

UNIT II: CURRENT ELECTRICITY 15 Periods

3.
Current Electricity:
Electric current, flow of electric charges in a metallic conductor, drift velocity, mobility and their relation
with electric current; Ohm’s law, electrical resistance, V-I characteristics (linear and nonlinear), electrical
energy and power, electrical resistivity and conductivity; temperature dependence of resistance. Internal
resistance of a cell, potential difference and emf of a cell, combination of cells in series and in parallel,

(vi)
 Kirchhoff’s laws and simple applications, Wheatstone bridge, metre bridge (qualitative ideas only).
Potentiometer — principle and its applications to measure potential difference and for comparing EMF of
two cells; measurement of internal resistance of a cell (qualitative ideas only)

UNIT III: MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT AND MAGNETISM 16 Periods

4.
Moving Charges and Magnetism:
Concept of magnetic field, Oersted’s experiment. Biot - Savart law and its application to current carrying
circular loop. Ampere’s law and its applications to infinitely long straight wire. Straight and toroidal
solenoids (only qualitative treatment), force on a moving charge in uniform magnetic and electric fields.
Force on a current-carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field, force between two parallel current-
carrying conductors-definition of ampere, torque experienced by a current loop in uniform magnetic field;
moving coil galvanometer-its current sensitivity and conversion to ammeter and voltmeter.
5.
Magnetism and Matter
Current loop as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment, magnetic dipole moment of a revolving
electron, bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid, magnetic field lines; earth’s magnetic field and magnetic
elements.

UNIT IV: ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENTS

19 Periods
6.
Electromagnetic Induction
Electromagnetic induction; Faraday’s laws, induced EMF and current; Lenz’s Law, Eddy currents. Self and
mutual induction.
7.
Alternating Current
Alternating currents, peak and RMS value of alternating current/voltage; reactance and impedance; LC
oscillations (qualitative treatment only), LCR series circuit, resonance; power in AC circuits. AC generator
and transformer.

✽••••✽

(vii)
 Syllabus Assigned for Practical for Term 1
Total Periods: 16
First term practical examination will be organised by schools as per the directions of CBSE. The record
to be submitted by the students at the time of first term examination has to include a record of at
least 4 Experiments and 3 Activities to be demonstrated by teacher.

Time Allowed: One and Half Hours Max. Marks: 15

(vi)
Two experiments to be performed by students at time of examination 8 marks
Practical record [experiments and activities] 2 marks
Viva on experiments and activities 5 marks
Total 15 marks

EXPERIMENTS ASSIGNED FOR TERM 1

1. To determine resistivity of two / three wires by plotting a graph between potential difference
versus current.
2. To find resistance of a given wire / standard resistor using metre bridge.
Or
To verify the laws of combination (series) of resistances using a metre bridge.
Or
To verify the laws of combination (parallel) of resistances using a metre bridge.
3. To compare the EMF of two given primary cells using potentiometer.
Or
To determine the internal resistance of given primary cell using potentiometer.
4. To determine resistance of a galvanometer by half-deflection method and to find its figure of
merit.
5. To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit) into a voltmeter of
desired range and to verify the same.
Or
To convert the given galvanometer (of known resistance and figure of merit) into an ammeter of
desired range and to verify the same.
6. To find the frequency of AC mains with a sonometer.

✽••••✽

(viii)
 Chapter: One

Electric Charges and Fields

COMPETENCY BASED
Competency Based Questions

a s
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs) 6. The SI unit of electric flux is

iv D
(a) N C–1 m–2 (b) N C m–2
1. SI unit of permittivity of free space is

Sh
(c) N C m–2 2 (d) N C–1 m2 [Ans. (d)
(a) Farad (b) Weber
2 –1 –2
7. The unit of electric dipole moment is
(c) C N m (d) C2N–1m–2 [Ans. (c)
(a) newton (b) coulomb
2. A charge Q is placed at the centre of the line
(c) farad (d) debye [Ans. (d)
joining two point charges +q and +q as shown
in the figure. The ratio of charges Q and q is 8. Consider a region inside which, there are
various types of charges but the total charge is
+q Q +q
zero. At points outside the region
x x
(a) the electric field is necessarily zero.
(a) 4 (b) 1/4 (b) the electric field is due to the dipole moment
(c) – 4 (d) – 1/4 [Ans. (d) of the charge distribution only.
3. The force per unit charge is known as (c) the dominant electric field is inversely pro-
(a) electric flux (b) electric current portional to r3, for large r (distance from origin).
(c) electric potential (d) electric field [Ans. (d) (d) the work done to move a charged particle
4. Electric field lines provide information about along a closed path, away from the region
(a) field strength (b) direction will not be zero. [Ans. (c)

(c) nature of charge (d) all of these [Ans. (d) 9. The surface considered for Gauss’s law is called
5. Which of the following figures represent the (a) Closed surface (b) Spherical surface
electric field lines due to a single negative (c) Gaussian surface (d) Plane surface [Ans. (c)
charge? 10. The total flux through the faces
of the cube with side of length a
if a charge q is placed at corner A
(a) – (b) – of the cube is
q q
(a) (b) A
8 e0 4 e0

(c) – (d) – [Ans. (b) (c) q (d) q

[Ans. (a)
2e0 e0

Competency Based Questions (CBQs) C-1

 C-2 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

11. Which of the following statements is not true Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
about Gauss’s law? statements but reason is not correct explanation
(a) Gauss’s law is true for any closed surface. for assertion.
(b) The term q on the right side of Gauss’s law The electric field intensity is equal to force experienced by
unit positive test charge qo placed at that point i.e.
includes the sum of all charges enclosed by 
the surface.  F dV

E thus − is also a vector quantity.
qo dr
(c) Gauss’s law is not much useful in calculating 
As, E  F  Newton .

electrostatic field when the system has some
symmetry. qo Coulomb
4. Assertion: The surface densities of two spherical
(d) Gauss’s law is based on the inverse square
conductors of different radii are equal. Then the
dependence on distance contained in the
electric field intensities near their surface are also
coulomb’s law. [Ans. (c)
Electric Charges and Fields

equal.
 Assertion-Reason Questions Reason: Surface charge density is equal to charge
per unit area.
DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A) Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option statements but reason is not correct explanation
out of the options given below: for assertion.
(a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements Given. σ1 = σ2
and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion. q1 q q r2
(b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements ∴ 2
 2 2 , or 1  1 2
4 r1 4 r2 q2 r2
but Reason is not correct explanation for
Then the ratio of electric field intensities near the surface of
Assertion. spherical conductors,

s
(c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is

a
E1 q1 4 0r2 2
wrong statement.  

iv D
E2 4 0r12 q2
(d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is

Sh
correct statement. E q r 2
q q
 1  1  2 2  1  2  1
1. Assertion: If there exists coulomb attraction E2 q2 r1 q 2 q1
between two bodies, both of them may not be ....[Let r1 and r2 be two different radii
charged.
i.e. E1 = E2

Reason: In coulomb attraction two bodies are 5. Assertion: The electric lines of forces diverges
oppositely charged. from a positive charge and converge at a negative
Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct charge.
statements but reason is not correct explanation Reason: A charged particle free to move in an
for assertion. electric field always move along an electric line

Coulomb attraction exists even when one body is charged, of force.
and the other is uncharged. Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is
2. Assertion: Electric force acting on a proton and wrong statement.
an electron, moving in a uniform electric field is If the charged particle is initially at rest in an electric field,
same, where as acceleration of electron is 1836 it will move along the electric line of force. But when the
times that a proton. initial velocity of charged particle makes some angle with
Reason: Electron is lighter than proton. the line of force then the resultant path is not along the line
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct of force because electric line of force may not coincide with
statements and reason is correct explanation for the line of velocity of the charge.
assertion. 6. Assertion: Range of Coulomb force is infinite.
As F = qE, and charge (q) on an electron and on a proton Reason: Coulomb force acts between two charged
has the same magnitude, therefore force (F) on each is same. particles.
Now, acceleration, a =F/m. Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
1 statements but reason is not correct explanation
Mass of electron, m = 1836 × mass of a proton. for assertion.

∴ Acceleration of electron is 1836 times that of a proton. Coulomb’s force or electric force given by Coulomb’s law, is
valid over nuclear distances (10–15m) as well as over very
3. Assertion: As force is a vector quantity, hence large distance.
electric field intensity is also a vector quantity. k | q1 || q 2 |

Reason: The unit of electric field intensity is From Coulomb’s law, F =
.
r2
newton per coulomb.
 Competency Based Questions (CBQs) C-3

This generally holds only for charged objects whose size are  Case Based Questions
much smaller than the distance between them.
7. Assertion: A small metal ball is suspended in a 1. Read the para given below and answer the
uniform electric field with an insulated thread. If questions that follow:
high energy X-ray beam falls on the ball, the ball Potentiometer. A potentiometer is a device used

to measure/compare unknown voltages. The
will be deflected in the electric field.
device shown has a 4 metre long wire and draws
Reason: X-rays emits photoelectron and metal
current from a source of emf ‘E’.
becomes negatively charged.
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct A B
statements and reason is correct explanation for
K
assertion.

COMPETENCY BASED
When high energy X-ray beam falls on the ball, the metal
will emit photoelectrons, thus leaving the positive charge on E
A 100 cm
the ball. As a result of this, ball is deflected in the direction (i) The potentiometer can compare emf E1 and E2
of electric field. of two sources.
8. Assertion: If a point charge be rotated in a circle (a) If both E1 and E2 exceed E.
around a charge, the work done will be zero. (b) If both E1 and E2 are less than E.
Reason: Work done is equal to dot product of (c) If either E1 and E2 exceed E.
force distance. (d) For all values of E1 and E2.
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct Ans. (b) If both E1 and E2 are less than E.
statements and reason is correct explanation for
(ii) The sensitivity of potentiometer
assertion. (a) is independent of the length of the wire used.
Work done will be zero because in rotating the charge in a

s

(b) increases if the wire is longer.

a
circle, force is along the radius and direction of motivation (c) decreases if the wire is longer.

iv D
is perpendicular to it.
(d) increases with rise in temperature of the wire.
→ →

Sh

∴ Work done, W = F . S = FS cos θ = FS cos 90˚ = 0 Ans. (b) increases if the wire is longer.
9. Assertion: No two electric lines of force can (iii) The Potentiometer wire should have;
intersect each other. (a) uniform area of cross section.
Reason: Tangent at any point of electric line of (b) very large cross section.
force gives the direction of electric field. (c) gradually increasing area of cross section
from A to B.
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct
(d) gradually decreasing area of cross section
statements and reason is correct explanation for from A to B.
assertion. Ans. (a) Uniform area of cross section.
It the two electric lines of force can intersect each other than
(iv) Which of the following is not essential in a
at the point of intersection, we can draw two tangents to
potentiometer?
the two lines of force. This would mean two directions of
(a) The wire should have uniform area of cross
electric field intensity at the point of intersection, which is
section.
not possible.

(b) The wire should be made of copper.
10. Assertion: Sharper is the curvature of spot on a
(c) The current through the wire should be steady.
charged body lesser will be the surface charge
(d) The strips used to connect the parallel one
density at that point. metre long wire should be thick.
Reason: Electric field is non-zero inside a charge Ans. (b) The wire should be made of copper.
conductor. (v) In order to use the above potentiometer to find
Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is the internal resistance of cell.
correct statement. (a) The positive terminal of the cell should be
Surface of a charged conductor is always an equipotential connected to A.
surface, whatever may be its shape, Hence σR = constant,
(b) The negative terminal of the cell should be
at every point on the surface of charged conductor i.e. at the connected to A.
sharpest point (R 0) of the surface, charge density will (c) The cell should have an emf exceeding E
be maximum. A uniformly conductor exerts no electrostatic
(d) Either of the two terminals positive or
force on a point charge located anywhere inside the conductor negative can be connected to A.
or electric filed is zero. Ans. (a) The positive terminal of the cell should be
connected to A.
 C-4 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

2. Read the para given below and answer the (iv) A charge is a property associated with the matter
questions that follow: due to which it produces and experiences:
A charge is a property associated with the matter
(a) electric effects only
due to which it experiences and produces an (b) magnetic effects only
electric and magnetic field. Charges are scalar in (c) both electric and magnetic effects
nature and they add up like real number. Also, (d) none of these.
the total charge of an isolated system is always Ans. (c) both electric and magnetic effects
conserved. When the objects rub against each (v) The cause of quantization of electric charges is:
other charges acquired by them must be equal (a) Transfer of an integral number of neutrons.
and opposite. (b) Transfer of an integral number of protons.
(c) Transfer of an integral number of electrons.
(d) None of the above.
Ans. (c) Transfer of an integral number of electrons.
Electric Charges and Fields

3. Read the para given below and answer the

+
questions that follow:
Surface Charge Density . Surface charge density

is defined as the charge per unit surface area the
surface (Arial) charge symmetric distribution and
Electric field lines of a
positive point change
follow Gauss law of electro statics mathematical
∆Q
term of surface charge density s= ∆S .

+ –

s
 

a
(I) + + (II) – –

D
(III)
– +

v
–

h i
A B

S

Two large thin metal plates are parallel and close
to each other. On their inner faces, the plates
Electric field lines of a have surface charge densities of opposite sign (±
negative point change
s). Having magnitude 8.8 × 10–12 cm–2 as shown
(i) The cause of a charing is: here. The intensity of electrified at a point is E =
(a) the actual transfer of protons. s Æ Æ

(b) the actual transfer of electrons. and flux is f = E D S , where DS = 1 m2 (unit
e0
(c) the actual transfer of neutrons. arial plate)

(d) none the above (i) E in the outer region (I) of the first (A) plate is
Ans. (d) the actual transfer of electrons. (a) 1.7 × 10–22 N/C (b) 1.1 × 10–12 V/m
(ii) Pick the correct statement. (c) Zero (d) Insufficient data

(a) The glass rod gives protons to silk when they Ans. (c) Zero
are rubbed against each other. (ii) E in the outer region (III) of the second plate (B)

(b) The glass rod gives electrons to silk when is
they are rubbed against each other. (a) 1 N/C (b) 0.1 V/m
(c) The glass rod gains protons from silk when (c) 0.5 N/C (d) zero
they are rubbed against each other. Ans. (d) zero

(d) The glass rod gains electrons when they are
(iii) E between (II) the plate is
rubbed against each other. (a) 1 N/C (b) 0.1 V/m
Ans. (b) The glass rod gives electrons to silk when (c) 0.5 N/C (d) None of these
they are rubbed against each other. Ans. (d) None of these
(iii) If two electrons are each 1.5 × 10–10 m from a
(iv) The ratio of E from left side of plate A at
proton, the magnitude of the net electric force
distance 1 cm and 2 m respectively is
they will exert on the proton is
(a) 1.97 × 10–8 N (b) 2.73 × 10–8 N (a) 1 : 2 (b) 10 : 2
(c) 3.83 × 10–8 N (d) 4.63 × 10–8 N (c) 1 : 1 (d) 20 : 1
Ans. (a) 1.97 × 10–8 N Ans. (c) 1 : 1
 Competency Based Questions (CBQs) C-5

(v) In order to estimate the electric field due to MLT 2  L

FS
a thin finite plane metal plate the Gaussian V= ⇒ V = AT
It
surface considered is
(a) Spherical (b) Linear  V = ML2 T-3 A–1
(c) Cylindrical (d) Cybic (iii) Two metallic spheres of radii 1 cm and 3 cm
Ans. (c) Cylindrical are given charges of –1 × 10–2 C and 5 × 10–2
C respectively. If these are connected by a
4. Read the para given below and answer the conducting wire, the final charge on the bigger
questions that follow: sphere is:
Work is done in moving a unit positive charge.
(a) 2 × 10–2 C (b) 3 × 10–2 C
From infinity to a point in an electric field, against (c) 4 × 10 C–2 (d) 1 × 10–2 C

COMPETENCY BASED
the direction of electric field, is called electric Ans. (b) 3 × 10 C –2
potential. It is a scalar quantity and is measured
Given. r1 = 1 cm ; r2 = 3 cm ; q1 = –1×102 C and
in volts. q2 = 5 × 102 C
Electric intensity at a point is equal to the negative 4 × 10 -2
q
dV As we know, V = C = 4 (r + r )
of the potential gradient i.e, E = − 0 1 2
dr
Electric potential due to a single charge is given  q’2 = C2V
by V = kq/r. 4 × 10 -2 4 × 10 -2 × 3
= 4pe0r2 × 4 (r + r ) = = 3×10-2 C
Electric potential due to an electric dipole is 0 1 2 (1 + 3)
given by: (iv) Changes are placed on the vertices of a square
kp cos 
V = as shown in figure. Let E be the electric field and
(r 2  l 2 cos 2 )
V be the potential at the centre. If the charges
Electric potential energy is given by: on A and B are interchanged with those on D

s
U = electric potential × Change = kq1 q2/r and C respectively then,

iv D a
(i) Two concentric spheres r1 and r2 carry charges A B
q1 and q2 respectively. If the surface charge +q +q

Sh
density σ is the same for both spheres, the
electric potential at the common centre will be:
 r1  r1 O
(a) (b)  r
0 r2 0 2
  –q –q
(c)  r1 r2  (d) (r1  r2 ) D C
0 0
 (a) E Changes, V remains constant.
Ans. (d) (r1  r2 ) (b) E remains unchanged, V changes.
0
Given. σ1 = σ2 q1 (c) Both E and V Changes.
r1 (d) E and V remains unchanged.
q1 q q1 q 2 O Ans. (a) E Changes, V remains constant.
2
 22  2= 2
4 r1 4 r2 r1 r2 (v) The electric potential difference V at any point
Kq 1 Kq 2 r2 (x,y,z) in space is given by V = 3x2 where x, y
V0 = V1 + V2 = + q2 and z are all in meters. The electric field at the
r1 r2
2
point (1 m, 0, 2 m) is:
1  × 4 r1 1  × 4 r22  q1
=
4 0

r1

4 0 r2
...  = (a) 6V/m along positive x–axis.
 4 r12
(b) 6V/m along negative x–axis.
r 1 2r
=    = (r1 + r2) (c) 12V/m along negative x–axis.
0 0 0
(ii) Dimensions of electrostatic potential are: (d) 12V/m along positive x–axis.
(a) [M1 L–2 T–3 A–1] Ans. (b) 6V/m along negative x–axis.
(b) [M1 L2 T2]
Given. V = 3x2
Electric field, E at ( 1m, 0, 2m)
(c) [M–1 L–2 T–3 A–2]
dV
(d) [M1 L2 T–3 A–1]
E = − dx
Ans. (d) M1 L2 T–3 A–1
d
W FS
⇒ E= − (3x2) = –3 × 2x = –6x
Given. V = ⇒ V= dx
q q

 E = –6V/m
 C-6 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

5. Read the para given below and answer the 2Q

questions that follow: Ans. (b) 
0
Gauss Theorem: The total flux through a closed Y
1
surface, enclosing a volume, in vacuum is
e0
time the net change, enclosed by the surface. -2Q +Q
X
  q enclosed (0,0) (a, 0) (4a,0)
φ =  E× d S =
s e0
Gaussian Surface: Any closed surface imagined qins 2Q
Electric flux, φ = = 
around the charge distribution, so that Gauss e0 0
theorem can be conveniently applied to find (iv) A charge q is placed at the centre of a cube of
electric field due to the give charge distribution. side l. What is the electric flux passing through
Electric Charges and Fields

Electric field due to infinitely long straight each face to the cube?
charged wire of linear charge density λ ; q q
 (a) 5 e
(b) 9 e
E = , where r is the perpendicular distance 0 0
2 0r
q q
of the observation point from the wire. Electric
(c) 6 e
(d) e
0 0
field due to an infinite plane sheet of charge of
surface charge density σ. q
Ans. (c) 6 e
 0
E = q
2 0 As we know, φ = e0
(i) S.I unit of electric flux is .................... .
(a) N2 m C (b) Nm C–2 ∴ Electric flux passing through each face of cube,

a s
(c) Nm2 C–1 (d) Nm–2 C q q 1

iv D
2 –1 φ =   6 = 6e
Ans. (c) Nm C 0 0
 

Sh
Given. φ = E. dS
(v) The figure shows three charges +2q , –q and
N 2 +3q. Two charges + 2q and –q are enclosed with
 φ = m  φ= Nm2C-1
C in a surface ‘S’. What is the electric flux due to
(ii) Electric flux is a ...................... .
this configuration through the surface ‘S’ ?
(a) Constant quantity (b) Vector quantity
5q 3q
(c) Scalar quantity (d) None of these (a) 2 e (b) e
0
Ans. (c) Scalar quantity 0
4q q
(iii) Two charges of magnitude –2Q and +Q are (c) (d)
e0 e0
located at points (a, 0) and (4a, 0) respectively.
What is the electric flux due to these charges q
Ans. (d)
through a sphere of radius ‘3a’ with its centre e0
at origin?
+2q - q q
Q 2Q
φs = = e
(a)
(b)  e0 0
e0 0
3Q 3Q
(c)
(d) 
e0 0

----------
 Chapter: Two
Electrostatic Potential
and Capacitance

COMPETENCY BASED
Competency Based Questions

a s
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs) 5. Equipotential surfaces

iv D
1. Which of the following statement is true? (a) are closer in regions of large electric fields

Sh
compared to regions of lower electric fields.
(a) Electrostatic force is a conservative force.
(b) will be more crowded near sharp edges of a
(b) Potential at a point is the work done per unit
conductor.
charge in bringing a charge from any point to
infinity. (c) will always be equally spaced.
(c) Electrostatic force is non-conservative. (d) both (a) and (b) are correct. [Ans. (d)

(d) Potential is the product of charge and work. 6. In a region of constant potential
[Ans. (a)
(a) the electric field is uniform.
2. 1 volt is equivalent to (b) the electric field is zero.
(c) there can be no charge inside the region.
(a) newton (b) newton (d) both (b) and (c) are correct. [Ans. (d)
second coulomb
joule 7. A test charge is moved from lower potential
joule
(c) (d)  [Ans. (c) point to a higher potential point. The potential
coulomb second
energy of test charge will
3. The work done in bringing a unit positive (a) remain the same (b) increase
charge from infinite distance to a point at
(c) decrease (d) become zero [Ans. (c)
distance x from a positive charge Q is W. Then →
the potential f at that point is 8. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in a
→
WQ uniform electric field E . Then
(a) (b) W → →
x (i) the torque on the dipole is p × E
→ →
W (ii) the potential energy of the system is p . E
(c) (d) WQ [Ans. (b)
x
(iii) the resultant force on the dipole is zero.
4. Consider a uniform electric field in the
Choose the correct option.
z-direction. The potential is a constant
(a) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct
(a) for any x for a given z
(b) (i) and (iii) are correct and (ii) is wrong
(b) for any y for a given z
(c) only (i) is correct
(c) on the x – y plane for a given z
(d) (i) & (ii) are correct & (iii) is wrong [Ans. (b)
(d) all of these [Ans. (d)
Competency Based Questions n C–7
 C–8 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

9. If a conductor has a potential V ≠ 0 and there (d) The potential difference remains constant.
are no charges anywhere else outside, then [Ans. (c)
(a) there must be charges on the surface or inside 16. A capacitor has some dielectric between its
itself. plates, and the capacitor is connected to a dc
(b) there cannot be any charge in the body of the source. The battery is now disconnected and
conductor. then the dielectric is removed, then
Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

(c) there must be charges only on the surface. (a) capacitance will increase.
(d) both (a) and (b) are correct. [Ans. (c) (b) energy stored will decrease.
10. Which of the following statements is false for a (c) electric field will increase.
perfect conductor? (d) voltage will decrease. [Ans. (c)
(a) The surface of the conductor is an 17. Two spherical conductors each of capacity C are
equipotential surface. charged to potential V and –V. These are then
(b) The electric field just outside the surface of a connected by means of a fine wire. The loss of
conductor is perpendicular to the surface. energy is
(c) The charge carried by a conductor is always 1
(a) zero (b) CV2
uniformly distributed over the surface of the 2
conductor. (c) CV2 (d) 2 CV2 [Ans. (c)
(d) None of these. [Ans. (d)
11. Dielectric constant for a metal is  Assertion-Reason Questions
(a) zero (b) infinite DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A)
(c) 1 (d) 10 [Ans. (b) and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option
12. When air is replaced by a dielectric medium out of the options given below:
(a) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are correct

s
of constant K, the maximum force of attraction

a
between two charges separated by a distance statements and Reason is correct explanation for

iv D
(a) increases K times (b) remains unchanged Assertion.

Sh
(c) decreases K times (d) increases K–1 times (b) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are correct
statements but Reason is not correct explanation
 [Ans. (c)
for Assertion.
13. In a parallel plate capacitor, the capacity (c) Assertion (A) is correct statement but Reason (R)
increases if is wrong statement.
(a) area of the plate is decreased. (d) Assertion (A) is wrong statement but Reason (R)
(b) distance between the plates increases. is correct statement.
(c) area of the plate is increased. 1. Assertion: Positive charge always moves from a
(d) dielectric constantly decreases. [Ans. (c) higher potential point to a lower potential point.
14. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged Reason: Electric potential is a vector quantity.
to a potential difference of V volts. After Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is
disconnecting the charging battery the distance wrong statement.
between the plates of the capacitor is increased If two points P and Q in an electric field are separated by

using an insulating handle. As a result the an infinitesimal distance ∆x and have a potential difference
potential difference between the plates V
∆V between then, E = x .
(a) increases (b) decreases
→
(c) does not change (d) becomes zero Here negative sign implies that E has got a direction
[Ans. (a) opposite to the potential gradient i.e., in the direction of
→
15. Two identical capacitors are joined in parallel, E the potential decreases i.e., positive charge always move
charged to a potential V, separated and then from a higher potential point to a lower potential point.
connected in series, the positive plate of one is 2. Assertion: Electric potential of the earth is zero.
connected to the negative of the other. Which of Reason: The electric field due to the earth is zero.
the following is true? Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is
(a) The charges on the free plated connected wrong statement.
together are destroyed. Earth is a good conductor of very large size. When some

(b) The energy stored in this system increases. small charge is given to earth, its potential does not change.
Hence potential of earth is assumed to be zero. It is just
(c) The potential difference between the free
like sea level which does not alter materially when water is
plates is 2V. added to it or removed from it. Thus the potential of all other
 Competency Based Questions n C–9

bodies are measured with reference to the earth. For this, if Reason: After breakage potential, capacitor is
the connection of a charged body to the ground by a metallic destroyed.
conductor would cause electrons to flow to that body from Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct
ground, the body is at positive potential. Conversely, is also statements but Reason is not correct explanation
true. In either case the conductor is neutralised and brought
for Assertion.
to zero potential. In fact the atmosphere does possess
When large amount of charges are placed on capacitor a high
significant electric field.
potential difference is established between its conducting
3. Assertion: When air between the plates of components. If this potential, an electric discharge results,
a parallel plate condenser is replaced by an destroying the capacitor. If the capacitor contains an
insulating medium of dielectric constant its insulator between its conducting components, the insulator
capacity increases. will be burnt at the atomic/molecular level. A capacitor

COMPETENCY
Reason: Electric field intensity between the plates subjected to voltage exceeding the breakage potential cannot
with dielectric in between it is reduced. be recovered. It should be discarded and replaced.
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct 7. Assertion: Charge on all the condensers
statements and Reason is correct explanation connected in series is the same.
for Assertion. Reason: Capacitance of capacitor is directly
q proportional to charge on it.

Given. Capacity of parallel plate condenser, C = ...(i) Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
V
1 wrong statement.
Electric field intensity becomes times [as K = Eo/E],
K Let two capacitors be connected in series. If +q charge is
1 installed on left plate of the first capacitor then –q charge is
Therefore potential V also becomes times. Hence, from induced on right plate of this capacitor. This charge comes
K
equation (i) capacity becomes K times. Thus electric field from electron drawn from the left plate of second capacitor.
decreases and capacitance increases when condenser is filled Thus there will be equal charge +q on the left plate of second

s
with insulated medium of some dielectric constant. capacitor and –q charge induced on the right plate of second

a
capacitor. Thus each capacitor has same charge (q) when

iv D
4. Assertion: Two adjacent conductors, carrying the
connected in series. Capacitance is quantity dependent on
same positive charge have no potential difference construction of capacitor and independent of charge.

Sh
between them.
8. Assertion: The surface of a conductor is an
Reason: The potential of a conductor does not
equipotential surface.
depend upon the charge given to it.
Reason: Conductor allows the flow of charge.
Ans. (d) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct
wrong statement.
statements and Reason is correct explanation
The potential of a conductor depends upon the charge given
to it and there exist a potential difference between two
for Assertion.
adjacent conductors.
If two points on a conductor were at different potentials,
charge would flow from higher potential to lower potentials,
5. Assertion: A capacitor is connected to a battery.

BASED
till their potentials become equal. A surface on which
If we move its plate further apart, work will be the potential has the same value everywhere is called an
done against the electrostatic attraction between equipotential surface.
the plates and the energy of the capacitor gets 9. Assertion: No work is done in taking a positive
decreased. charge from one point to other inside a positive
Reason: The energy stored in capacitor is charged metallic sphere while outside the sphere
dissipated in the form of heat energy. work is done in taking the charge toward the
Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct sphere.
statements but Reason is not correct explanation Reason: Inside the sphere electric potential is
for Assertion. same at each potential, but outside it is different
When the plates of a capacitor are moved further apart, the for different points.
capacitance gets decreased. As battery remains connected,
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct
hence charge q(= CV) on the plates is decreased and
energy U = [1/2 CV2) also decreases. Some charge from the
statements and Reason is correct explanation
plates flows to the battery i.e., some energy of capacitor is for Assertion.
transferred to the battery. Work done against electrostatic Inside the charged metallic sphere every point is at the
attraction between plates is used in the transference of same electric potential, hence W = q∆V = 0. But outside
energy and is dissipated in the form of heat energy in the sphere, three exists a potential gradient at every point,
connected wires. hence W = 0.
6. Assertion: A capacitor can be broken by placing 10. Assertion: An electric field is preferred in
large amount of charge on it. comparison to magnetic field for detecting the
 C–10 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

electron beam in a television picture tune. (a) 1.6 × 108 ms–1 (b) 2.77 × 106 ms–1
Reason: Electric field requires low voltage. (c) 2.77 × 104 ms–1 (d) 1.6 × 106 ms–1
Ans. (d) Assertion is false statement but reason is Ans. (b) 2.77 × 10 ms6 –1
correct statement. (v) If in place of charged plates, two similar point
If electric field is used for detecting the electron beam, then charges of 1C have kept in air at 1m distance
very high voltage will have to be applied and very long tube from each other. Then, potential energy is
Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

will have to be taken.

(a) 1 J (b) 1 eV
(c) 9 × 10–3 J (d) Zero
 Case Based Questions Ans. (c) 9 × 10–3 J
1. Read the para given below and answer the
questions that follow: 2. Read the para given below and answer the
questions that follow:
Potential difference (∆v) between two points A
and B separated by a distance x, in a uniform An arrangement of two conductors separated
electric field E is given by ∆v = –Ex, where x is by an insulating medium can be used to store
measured parallel to the field lines. If a charge q0 electric charge and electric energy. Such a system
moves from A to B, the change in potential energy is called a capacitor. The more charge a capacitor
(∆v) is given as ∆v = q0 ∆v. A proton is released can store, the greater is its capacitance. Usually,
from rest in uniform electric field of magnitude a capacitor consists of two capacitors having
8.0 × 104 Vm–1 directed along the positive X–axis. equal and opposite charge + Q and –Q. Hence,
The Proton undergoes a displacement of 0.50 m there is a potential difference V between them.
in the direction of E. By the capacitance of a capacitor, we mean the
ratio of the charge Q to the potential difference
Mass of a Proton = 1.66 × 10–27 Kg V. By the charge on a capacitor we mean only the
and charge on a proton = 1.6 × 10–19 C. charge Q on the positive plate. Total charge of the

a s
E capacitor is Zero. The capacitance of a capacitor
+ -

iv D
is a constant and depends on geometric factors,
+ - such as the shapes, sizes and relative positions of

Sh
+ - the two conductors, and the nature of the medium
+ - between them. The unit of capacitance Farad (F),
+A
+
- but the more convenient units are F and pF. A
B
0.5m
commonly used capacitor consists of two long
With the help of the passage given above, choose strips or metal foils, separated by two long strips
the most appropriate alternative for each of the of dielectrics, rolled up into a small cylinder.
following questions: Common dielectric materials are plastics (such
(i) As the Proton moves from A to B, then as polyestor and polycarbonates) and aluminum
(a) The Potential energy of Proton decreases oxide. Capacitors are widely used in television,
(b) The Potential energy of Proton Increases computer, and other electric circuits.
(c) The Proton loses kinetic energy. (i) A parallel plate capacitor C has charge Q. The
(d) Total energy of the proton Increases. actual charge on its plates are:
Ans. (a) T he Potential energy of Proton decreases (a) Q, Q (b) Q/2, Q/2
(ii) The change in electric potential of the Proton (c) Q, –Q (d) Q/2, –Q/2
between the points A and B is Ans. (c) Q, –Q
(a) 4.0 × 104 V (b) –4.0 × 104 V (ii) A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the plate
(c) 6.4 × 10–19 V (d) –6.4 × 10–19 V are pulled apart,
Ans. (b) –4.0 × 104 V (a) the capacitance increases.
Given. ∆V = –Fx (b) the potential difference increases.
∆V = –8 × 104 × 5 = –4 × 104 V (c) the total charge increases.
(iii) The change in electric potential energy of the (d) the charge and the potential difference
proton for displacement from A to B is remains the same.
(a) –6.4 × 1019 J (b) 6.4 × 10–19 J Ans. (b) The potential difference increases.
(c) –6.4 × 10–15 J (d) 6.4 × 10–15 J (iii) If n capacitors, each of capacitance C, are
Ans. (c) –6.4 × 10–15 J connected in series, then the equivalent
 ) of the proton after it has capacitance of the combination will be.
(iv) The velocity ( VB
(a) n C (b) n2 C
moved 0.50 m starting from rest is
(c) C/n (d) C/n2
 Competency Based Questions n C–11

Ans. (c) C/n the line of charges. Two point charges Q1 and Q2
As capacitance are connected in series lie along a line at a distance from each other.
1 1 1
 
C C1 C2
C
’=
∴ C
n
(iv) Three capacitors 2.0, 3.0 and 6.0 microfarad are
connected in series to a 10 v source. The charge
Q1 Q2
on the 3.0 microfarad capacitor is: r
(a) 5 microcoulomb (b) 10 microcoulomb 1 2 3

COMPETENCY
(c) 12 microcoulomb (d) 15 microcoulomb
Ans. (b) 10 microcoulomb
2F 3F 6F

q=?
(i) At which the points 1, 2 and 3 is the electric
field is zero?
+ –
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) Both (a) and (b)
10 V

1 1 1 1 3+ 2+1 Ans. (c) 3

C
= 2+ 3+6 = 6 = 1
−dV

As = dr
= Er, the negative of the slope of V versus r
∴ c = 1mF  q = CV
curve represent the component of electric field along r. Slope
∴ q = 1 × 10 = 10 mC

s
of curve is zero only at point 3. Therefore, the electric field

a
vector is zero at point 3.

iv D
(v) What is the potential difference across 2
microfarad capacitor in the circuit shown? (ii) The signs of charges Q1 and Q2 respectively are

Sh
6V (a) positive and negative
(b) negative and positive
(c) positive and positive
2mF 3mF (d) negative and negative
Ans. (a) positive and negative
16V
Near positive charge, net potential is positive and near a
negative charge, net potential is negative. Thus charge Q1 is
(a) 12 V (b) 4 V positive and Q2 is negative.
(c) 6 V (d) 18 V (iii) Which of the charges Q1 and Q2 is greater in

BASED
Ans. (c) 6 V magnitude?
Given. Total potential, V = 16 - 6 = 10 V (a) Q2 (b) Q1
...[As batteries are placed in same direction
(c) Same (d) Cannot determined
2× 3 6
Total Capcitance, C = = 5 mF Ans. (b) Q1
2+ 3
6

From the figure, it can be seen that net potential due to two
Total charge, q = CV = 5 ×10 = 12 mC charges is positive everywhere in the region left to charge
q 12mC Q1. Therefore the magnitude of potential due to charge Q1
 Potential difference across 2 mC, V1 = c = = 6V is greater than due to Q2.
2mC
...[ q is same for both as they are in series (iv) Which of the following statement is not true?
(a) Electrostatic force is a conservative force.
3. Read the para given below and answer the (b) Potential energy of charge q at a point is
questions that follow: the work done per unit charge in bringing a
Potential of Two Point Charges. The potential at charge form any point to infinity.
any observation point P of a static electric field (c) When two like charges lie infinite distance
is defined as work done by the external agent apart, their potential energy is zero.
(or negative of work done by electrostatic field) (d) Both (a) and (c).
in slowly bringing a unit positive point charge Ans. (b) Potential energy of charge q at a point is
form infinity to the observation point. The figure the work done per unit charge in bringing a
given below shows the potential variation along charge form any point to infinity.
 C–12 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(v) Positive and negative point charges of equal (d) The work done to move a test charge on the
 a equipotential surface is positive.
magnitude are kept at  0,0,  and resp-
 2 Ans. (d) The work done to move a test charge on the
ectively. The work done by the electric field equipotential surface is positive.
when another positive point charge is moved (ii) Nature of equipotential surface for a point
from (–a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is charge is
Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance

(a) positive
(a) Ellipsoid with charge at foci.
(b) negative
(c) zero (b) Sphere with charge at the centre of the
(d) depends on the path connecting the initial sphere.
and final positions. (c) Sphere with charge on the surface of the
Ans. (c) zero sphere.
It can be seen that potential at the points both A and B are
(d) Plane with charge on the surface.
zero. When the charge is moved from A to B, work done by Ans. (b) Sphere with charge at the centre of the sphere.
the electric field on the charge will be zero. (iii) A spherical equipotential surface is not possible
y (a) inside a uniformly charged sphere.
(b) for a dipole.
B (0, a, 0)
(c) inside a spherical condenser.
(d) for a point charge.
–q Ans. (b) for a dipole.
(iv) The work done in carrying a charge q once
A a/2 round a circle of radius a with a charge Q at its
x
(–a, 0, 0) centre is
a/2 qQ

s
qQ

(a)
(b) 4  a2

a
+q
4 0 a

iv D
0

q
(c)
(d) zero

Sh
z
4 0 a
4. Read the para given below and answer the Ans. (d) zero
questions that follow: The electrical potential at any point on
circle of a radius due to charge Q a
Equipotential Surfaces. For the various charge
1 Q Q
systems, we represent equipotential surfaces at its centre is V = .
4 0 a
by curves and line of force by full line curves. It is an equipotential surface.

Between any two adjacent equipotential surfaces, Hence, work done in carrying a charge q round the circle is
we assume a constant potential difference the zero.
equipotential surfaces of a single point charge (v) The work done to move a unit charge along an
are concentric spherical shells with their centres equipotential surface from P to Q
at the point charge. As the lines of force point Q
radially outwards, so they are perpendicular to (a) must be defined as    
E.d l
P
the equipotential surfaces at all points. (b) is zero
A (c) can have a non-zero value
(d) Both (a) and (b) are correct
B Ans. (d) Both (a) and (b) are correct
Work done to move a unit charge along an equipotential
+q Q
 
surface from P to Q is W = –  E .d l
P
E
 
As we know, on equipotential surface E  d l
(i) Identify the wrong statement.
Q
(a) Equipotential surfaces due to a single point  W = – ∫ E(dl) cos 90º = 0
charge is spherical. P

(b) Equipotential surfaces can be constructed for 5. Read the para given below and answer the
dipoles too. questions that follow:
(c) The electric field is normal to the equipotential Spherical Capacitor. The electrical capacitance of
surfaces through the point. a conductor is the measure of its ability to hold
 Competency Based Questions n C–13

electric charge. An isolated spherical conductor of (ii) How much charge should be placed on a
radius R. The charge Q is uniformly distributed capacitance of 25 pF to raise its potential 105 V?
over its entire surface. It can be assumed to be (a) 1 µC (b) 1.5 µC
concentrated at the sphere. The potential at any (c) 2 µC (d) 2.5 µC
point on the surface of the surface of the spherical Ans. (d) 2.5 µC
conductor will be V = 1 Q . As q = CV = 25 × 10–12 × 105 = 2.5 µC
4 0 R
(iii) Dimensions of capacitance is
(a) [M–1 L–2 T4 A2]
+Q
+ (b) [M–1 L–1 T3 A1]
+
Q (c) [M L–2 T4 A2]

COMPETENCY
+ (d) [M0 L–2 T4 A1]
R +
Ans. (a) [M–1 L–2 T4 A2].
+
+
(iv) Metallic sphere of radius R is charged to
+ potential V. Then charge q is proportional to
(a) V (b) R
Capacitance of the spherical conductor situated
(c) Both V and R (d) none of these
Q Q Ans. (c) Both V and R
in vacuum is C = 
1 Q
or C = 4πε0 R
V As charge, q = CV = (4πε0R)V
.
4 0 R ∴ q depends on both V and R.
Clearly, the capacitance of a spherical conductor (v) If 64 identical spheres of charge q and
is proportional to its radius. capacitance C each are combined to form sphere
The radius of the spherical conductor of 1F the charge and capacitance of the large sphere is

s
1 (a) 64q, C (b) 16q, 4C

a
capacitance is R = . C and this radius is

iv D
4 0 (c) 64q, 4C (d) 16q, 64C

about 1500 times the radius of the earth Ans. (c) 64q, 4C

Sh
64 drops have formed a single drop of radius R.
(∼ 6 × 103 km). Volume of large sphere = 64 × Volume of small sphere
(i) If an isolated sphere has a capacitance 50pF. 4 3 4
∴ πR = 64 πr 3
Then radius is 3 3
(a) 90 cm (b) 45 cm ⇒ R = 4r and Qtotal = 64q
(c) 45 m (d) 90 m
C’ = 4πε0 R ⇒ C’ = (4πε0 ). 4r
Ans. (b) 45 cm
⇒ C’ = 4C
Given. C = 50 pF = 50 × 10–12 F,

BASED
 R = 1 .C = 9 × 109 mF–1 × 50 × 10–12 F
4 0
= 45 × 102 m = 45 cm
----------
 Chapter: Three

Current Electricity
Current Electricity

Competency Based Questions

s
I

a
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

iv D
(a) ohmic conductors
(b) non-ohmic conductors

Sh
1. A charge is moving across a junction, then V
(c) insulators
(a) momentum will be conserved.
(d) superconductors
(b) momentum will not be conserved.

(c) at some places momentum will be conserved [Ans. (b)
and at some other places momentum will not
be conserved. 4. Which of the following is correct for V-I graph
of a good conductor?
(d) none of these.
V V
[Ans. (d)
2. Which of the following I-V graph represents
ohmic conductors?
(a) (b)
I I

I I
(a) (b) V V

O V O V
(c) (d)
I I
I I
(c) (d) [Ans. (a)
5. The resistivity of alloy manganin is
O V O V (a) Nearly independent of temperature.
[Ans. (a) (b) Increases rapidly with increase in temperature
(c) Decreases with increase in temperature.
3. The I-V characteristics shown in figure
(d) Increases rapidly with decrease in
represents
temperature. [Ans. (a)

C–14 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Competency Based Questions n C–15

6. An electric heater is connected to the voltage (c) not change

supply. After few seconds, current gets its (d) none of these. [Ans. (c)
steady value then its initial current will be 13. When a metal conductor connected to left gap
(a) equal to its steady current. of a meter bridge is heated, the balancing point
(b) slightly higher than its steady current. (a) shifts towards right
(c) slightly less than its steady current. (b) shifts towards left
(d) zero [Ans. (b) (c) remains unchanged
7. In the series combination of two or more than (d) remains at zero [Ans. (b)
two resistances 14. In a potentiometer of 10 wires, the balance point
(a) the current through each resistance is same. is obtained on the 7th wire. To shift the balance

COMPETENCY
(b) the voltage through each resistance is same. point to 9th wire, we should
(c) neither current nor voltage through each (a) decrease resistance in the main circuit.
resistance is same. (b) increase resistance in the main circuit.
(d) both current and voltage through each (c) decrease resistance in series with the cell
resistance are same. [Ans. (a) whose emf is to be measured.
8. Combine three resistors 5 W, 4.5 W and 3 W (d) increase resistance in series with the cell
in such a way that the total resistance of this whose emf is to be determined. [Ans. (d)
combination is maximum 15. AB is a wire of potentiometer with the increase
(a) 12.5 W (b) 13.5 W in the value of resistance R, the shift in the
(c) 14.5 W (d) 16.5 W [Ans. (a) balance point J will be
e R
9. A cell having an emf e and internal resistance r
is connected across a variable external resistance

s
J

a
R. As the resistance R is increased, the plot of A B

iv D
potential difference V across R is given by G
(a) towards B

Sh
e
(b) towards A
e
(a) V (b) V (c) remains constant
(d) first towards B then back towards A.
0 0 [Ans. (a)
R R

V  Assertion-Reason Questions
e DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A)
(c) (d) and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option

BASED
V
out of the options given below:
0 0 (a) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are correct
R
R statements and Reason is correct explanation for
[Ans. (b) Assertion.
10. In parallel combination of n cells, we obtain (b) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are correct
(a) more voltage (b) more current statements but Reason is not correct explanation
(c) less voltage (d) less current [Ans. (b) for Assertion.
(c) Assertion (A) is correct statement but Reason (R)
11. If n cells each of emf e and internal resistance
is wrong statement.
r are connected in parallel, then the total emf
(d) Assertion (A) is wrong statement but Reason (R)
and internal resistance will be
is correct statement.
(a) e, r (b) e,nr
n 1. Assertion: The drift velocity of electrons in a
r metallic wire will decrease, if the temperature of
(d) ne, (d) ne, nr [Ans. (a)
the wire is increased.
n
12. In a wheatstone bridge if the battery and Reason: On increasing temperature, conductance
galvanometer are interchanged then the of metallic wire decrease.
deflection in galvanometer will Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct
(a) change in previous direction statements but Reason is not correct explanation
for Assertion.
(b) change in opposite direction
 C–16 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

On increasing temperature of wire the kinetic energy of free Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
electrons increase and so they collide more rapidly with each wrong statement.
other and hence their drift velocity decreases. Also when Fuse wire must have high resistance because in series

temperature increases, resistance increase and resistance is current remains same. Therefore according to Joule’s law
inversely proportional to conductivity of material. i 2 Rt
H = , heat produced is high if R is high. The melting
2. Assertion: Chemical reactions involved in 4.2
primary cells are irreversible and in secondary point must be low so that wire may melt with increase in
cells are reversible. temperature. As a current equal to maximum safe value
Reason: Primary cells can be recharged, but flows through the fuse wire it heat up, melt and breaks the
secondary cells cannot be recharged. circuit.
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is 7. Assertion: Two electric bulbs of 30 Watt and 100
wrong statement. watt are given. When connected in series 50 watt
Primary cells cannot be recharged because they involve
bulb glows more but when connected in parallel
irreversible reactions. Secondary cells can be recharged 100 watt bulb glows more.
because they involve reversible reactions. Reason: In series combination, power is directly
3. Assertion: It the length of the conductor is proportional to the resistance of circuit. But
doubled, the drift velocity will become half of in parallel combination, power is inversely
the original value (keeping potential) difference proportional to the resistance of the circuit.
unchanged).
Current Electricity

Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct

Reason: At constant potential difference, drift statements and reason is correct explanation for
velocity is inversely proportional to the length of assertion.
the conductor. Resistance of 50 watt bulb is two times the resistance of 100

Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct watt bulb. When bulbs are connected in series, 50 watt bulb
statements and Reason is correct explanation will glow more as P = I2 R (current remains same in series).
for Assertion.

s
In parallel, the 100 watt bulb will glow more as P = V2 /R

a
eE (potential difference remain same in parallel).

iv D
As we know, Drift velocity of free electrons, Vd = m 

8. Assertion: It is advantageous to transmit electric
eV

Sh
Potential difference V
∴ Vd = ml  ...[Where, E = = l power at high voltage.
length
Reason: High voltage implies high current.
Vd  1/l
Ans. (c) Assertion is true statement but Reason is
Therefore if l is double, the drift velocity will become half of wrong statement.
the original value.
As P = Vi, hence for the transmission of same power, high
4. Assertion: Material used in the construction of a voltage implies less current. Therefore heat energy loses
standard resistance is constantan or manganin. (H = i2 Rt / 4.2) are minimized if power is transmitted at
Reason: Temperature coefficient of constantan is high voltage.
very small. 9. Assertion: Though the same current flows
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct through the line wires and the filament of the
statements and Reason is correct explanation bulb but heat produced in the filament is much
for Assertion. higher than that in line wires.
These alloys (Constanan or manganin) are used for making
Reason: The filament of bulbs is made of a material
standard resistance because they possess high resistivity and of high resistance and high melting point.
low temperature coefficient of resistance. Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct
5. Assertion: The 200 W bulbs glows with more statements but Reason is not correct explanation
brightness than 100 W bulbs. for Assertion.
Reason: A 100 watt bulb has more resistance As filament of bulb and line wire are in series hence current

than a 200 W bulb. i 2 Rt
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct through both is same. Now because H = 4.2 and resistance
statements and Reason is correct explanation of the filament of the bulb is much higher than that of live
for Assertion. wries, hence heat produced in the filament is much higher
V2
As we know, Resistance, R = , than that in line wries.
P
 R  1/P 10. Assertion: The current in a wire is due to flow of
as higher is the wattage of a bulb, lesser used is the resistance free electrons in a definite direction.
and so it will glow bright. Reason: A current carrying wire should have
6. Assertion: Fuse wire must have high resistance non-zero charge.
and low melting point. Ans. (c) Assertion is true statement but Reason is
Reason: Fuse is used for small current flow only. wrong statement.
 Competency Based Questions n C–17

The current in a wire is due to flow of free electrons in a

definite direction. But the number of protons in the wire l
any instant is equal to number of electrons and charge on
electrons is equal an opposite to that of proton. Hence, net
charge on the wire is zero.
(a) electron density (b) current density
 Case Based Questions (c) drift velocity (d) electric field
1. Read the para given below and answer the Ans. (a) electron density
questions that follow: When a constant current is flowing through a conductor of
The flow of charge in a particular direction non-uniform cross-section, electron density does not depend
upon the area of cross section, while current density, drift

COMPETENCY
constitutes the electric current. Current is
velocity and electric field all vary inversely with area of
measured in Ampere. Quantitatively, electric
cross-section.
current in a conductor across an area held flowing
(v) When a current of 40 A flows through a conductor
across that area per unit time. Current density at
of area 10 m2, then the current density is
a point in a conductor is the ratio of the current
(a) 4 A/m2 (b) 1 A/m2
at that point in the conductor to the area of cross 2
section of the conductor of that point. The given (c) 2 A/m (d) 8 A/m2
figure shows a steady current flows in a metallic Ans. (a) 4 A/m2
conductor of non uniform cross section. Current Given, I = 40 A ; A = 10 m2
density depends inversely on area, so, here J1 >J2 I 40
as A1 < A2. ∴ Current density, J = A = 10 = 4 A/m2

2. Read the para given below and answer the

questions that follow:

a s
A1 A 2 If two or more capacitors are connected in series,

iv D
the overall effect is that of a single (equivalent)
capacitor having the sum total of the plate

Sh
spacing of the individual capacitors. If two
or more capacitors are connected in parallel,
(i) What is the current flowing through a conductor,
the overall effect is that of a single equivalent
if one million electrons are crossing in one
capacitor having the sum total of the plate areas
millisecond through a cross-section of it?
–10 –10 of the individual capacitors
(a) 2.5 × 10 A (b) 1.6 × 10 A
–9 –11 Q1 –Q1
(c) 7.5 × 10 A (d) 8.2 × 10 A + –
Ans. (b) 1.6 × 10–10 A + –
q = 106 × 1.6 ×10–19 C = 1.6 × 10–13 C + –

BASED
t = 10–3 s + –
−13 + – Q –Q
q 1.6 ×10 C1 + – Q –Q
I = = = 1.6 × 10–10 A
t 10 −3 + – + –
Q2 –Q2 + –
(ii) SI unit of electric current is + –
+ – + –
+ –
(a) C s (b) N s–2 + –
+ – + –
+ –
(c) C s–1 (d) C–1 s–1 + –
C1 C2
+ –
Ans. (c) C s–1
+ – (b)
(iii) A steady current flows in a metallic conductor C2 Series Combination
of non-uniform cross-section. Which of these
quantities is constant along the conductor? V
(a) Electric field (b) Drift velocity (a)
Parallel Combination
(c) Current (d) Current density
Ans. (c) Current (i) Capacity can be increased by connecting
The current flowing through a conductor of non-uniform capacitors in:
cross-section, remain same in the whole of the conductor. (a) Parallel
(iv) A constant current I is flowing along the length (b) Series
of a conductor of variable cross-section as (c) Both (a) and (b)
shown in the figure. The quantity which does (d) None the these
not depend upon the area of cross-section is Ans. (a) Parallel
 C–18 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(ii) Three capacitors having a capacitance equal to (ii) If 1 A current flows through a conductor when
2F, 4F and 6F are connected in parallel. Calculate potential difference of 2 volt is applied across
the effective parallel capacitance: its ends, then the resistance of the conductor
(a) 10 F (b) 11 F is
(c) 12 F (d) 13 F (a) 2 × 106 Ω (b) 3 × 105 Ω
5
(c) 1.5 × 10 Ω (d) 5 × 107 Ω
Ans. (c) 12 F
When capacitors are connected in parallel, the total Ans. (a) 2 × 106 Ω
capacitance is equal to the sum of capacitance of each of the
V 2
capacitor. R = = =2 × 106 Ω
l 10 -6
 C = C1 + C2 + C3 = 2F + 4F + 6F = 12F
(iii) Specific resistance of a wire depends upon
(iii) When capacitors are connected in the series
(a) length (b) cross-sectional area
............... remains the same.
(c) mass (d) none of these
(a) Voltage (b) Capacitance
Ans. (d) none of these
(c) Charge (d) Resistance
Specific resistance of a wire depends upon the nature of
Ans. (c) Charge material and is independent of mass and dimensions of the
(iv) The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are 10 material.
cm apart and have an area equal to 2m2. If the
Current Electricity

(iv) The slope of the graph between potential

charge on each plate is 8.85 × 10–10 C the electric difference and current through a conductor is
field at a point (a) a straight line
(a) between the plates will be zero. (b) cure
(b) outside the plates will be zero. (c) first curve then straight line
(c) between the plates will change from point to (d) first straight line then curve

s
point. Ans. (a) a straight line

a
(v) The resistivity of the material of a wire 1.0 m

iv D
(d) between the plates will be 25NC – 125NC–1.
Ans. (b) outside the plates will be zero. long, 0.4 mm in diameter and having a resistance

Sh
(v) Four 10F capacitors are connected in series the of 2.0 ohm is
equivalent capacitance is (a) 1.57 × 10–6 Ω m
(b) 5.25 × 10–7 Ω m
(a) 1.5 F (b) 2.5 F
(c) 7.12 × 10–5 Ω m
(c) 3.5 F (d) 4.5 F
Ans. (b) 2.5 F (d) 2.55 × 10–7 Ω m
Ans. (d) 2.55 × 10–7 Ω m
3. Read the para given below and answer the
questions that follow: Given. l = 1.0 m; D = 0.4 mm = 4 × 10–4 m
R = 2 Ω
According to Ohm’s law, the current flowing
πD2 π × (4 ×10 -4 )2
through a conductor is directly proportional to A = = = 4π × 10–8 m2
4 4
the potential difference across the ends of the -8

conductor i.e., l V  V = R, where R is resistan-

Now, ρ = RA = 2× 4π ×10 = 2.55 × 10–7 Ω m
l 1
l
ce of the conductor. Electrical resistance of 4. Read the para given below and answer the
a conductor is the obstruction posed by the questions that follow:
conductor to the flow of electric current through Temperature Dependance of Resistivity. The of a
it. It depend upon length, area of cross-section conductor at temperature tºC is given by Rt = R0
nature of material and temperature of the (1 + αt) where Rt is the resistance at tºC and α is
l l the characteristics constants of the material of the
conductor. We can write, R  or R = ρ
A A conductor. Over a limited range of temperatures,
where ρ is electrical resistivity of the material of that is not too large. The resistivity of a metallic
the conductor. conductor is approximately given by ρt = ρ0 (1
(i) Dimensions of electric resistance is + αt) where α is the temperature coefficient of
(a) [ML2 T–2 A2] resistivity. Its unit is K–1 or ºC–1. For metals, α
(b) [ML2 T–3 A–2] is positive i.e., resistance increases with rise in
(c) [M-1 L–2 T–1 A] temperature. For insulators and semiconductors,
(d) [M–1 L2 T2 A–1] α is negative i.e., resistance decreases with rise in
temperature.
Ans. (b) [ML2 T–3 A–2]
 Competency Based Questions n C–19

(v) For a metallic wire, the ratio V/I (V = applied

Resistivity ρT (10–3 Ω m)
0.4

Resistivity ρT (µ Ω cm)
1.20
potential difference and I = current flowing) is
(a) independent of temperature
0.2
(b) increases as the temperature rises
1.10
(c) decreases as the temperature rises
(d) increases or decreases as temperature rises
1.00
0
50 100 150 200 400 600 800 depending upon the metal
Temperature T (K) Temperature T (K) Ans. (b) increases as the temperature rises
Resistance ρT of copper as Resistance ρT of copper as a
a function of temperature T function of temperature T Resistance of a metallic wire at temperature tºC, Rt = R0
(1 + αt), where α is the temperature coefficient of resistance

COMPETENCY
ρ
and R0 is the resistance of a wire at 0ºC. For metals α is
positive. Hence, resistance of a wire increases with increase
in temperature.
5. Read the para given below and answer the
T questions that follow:
Temperature dependence of the
Grouping of Cells. A single cell provides a

resistance of a typical semiconductor
feeble current. In order to get a higher current
(i) Fractional increase in resistivity per unit
increase in temperature is defined as in a circuit, we often use a combination of cells.
(a) resistivity A combination of cells is called a battery. Cells
(b) temperature coefficient of resistivity can be joined in series, parallel or in mixed
(c) conductivity way. Two cells are said to be connected in series
when negative terminal of one cell is connected

s
(d) drift velocity

a
Ans. (b) temperature coefficient of resistivity to positive terminal of the other cell and so on.

iv D
(ii) The material whose resistivity is insensitive to Two cells are said to be connected in parallel if
positive terminal of each cell is connected to one

Sh
temperature is
(a) silicon (b) copper point and negative terminal of each cell connected
(c) silver (d) nichrome to the other point. In mixed grouping of cells, a
Ans. (d) nichrome certains number of identical cells are joined in
Nichrome (which is an alloy of nickel, iron and chromium) series, and all such rows are then connected in
exhibits a very weak dependence of resistivity with parallel with each other.
temperature.
n
(iii) The temperature coefficient of the resistance of a
wire is 0.00125 perºC. At 300 K its resistance is 1

BASED
ohm. The resistance of wire will be 2 ohms at m
(a) 1154 K (b) 1100 K
(c) 1400 K (d) 1127 K
Ans. (d) 1127 K I I
Using, RT = R0 (1 + T) R
RT2 R0 (1+ αT2 )

2 (1+ T2 )
∴ = ⇒ 
RT 1 R0 (1+ αT1 ) 1 (1+  × 300) (i) To draw the maximum current form a
combination of cells, how should the cells be
 2 + α × 600 = 1 + αT2
1
grouped?
 1 = α (T2 – 600) ⇒ 0.00125 = (T2 – 600) (a) Parallel
 800ºC = T2 – 600 (b) Series
 T2 = 800 – 273 + 600 (c) Mixed grouping
 T2 = 1127 K (d) Depends upon the relatives values of internal
(iv) The temperature coefficient of resistance of an and external resistances
alloy used for making resistors is Ans. (d) Depends upon the relatives values of internal
(a) small and positive (b) small and negative and external resistances
(c) large and positive (d) large and negative
(ii) The total emf of the cells when n identical cells
Ans. (a) small and positive each of emf ε are connected in parallel is
 C–20 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(a) nε (b) n2ε Ans. (c) II is correct but I is wrong.

e Let two cells of emf’s ε1 and ε2 and of internal resistance r1
(c) ε (d)
n and r2 respectively are connected in parallel.
Ans. (c) ε ε1 r1
For parallel combination of n cells, εeq = ε.
(iii) 4 cells each of emf 2 V and internal resistance of
1 Ω are connected in parallel to a load resistor of
2 Ω . Then the current through the load resistor is ε2 r2
(a) 2 A (b) 1.5 A
(c) 1 A 1r2   2r1
(d) 0.888 A Equivalent emf, εeq = .....(i)
r1  r2
Ans. (d) 0.888 A 1 1 1
Given. m, number of cells = 4, E = 2 V, R = 2 Ω,r = 1 Ω Equivalent internal resistance, r = r + r
eq 1 2
mE r2r1
As we know, I = mR + r ,  req = r + r .....(ii)
1 2

8 8 As we assume, two cells connected in parallel of same

 I = 8 + 1 = 9 = 0.888 A
emf ε and same internal resistance, r.
(iv) If two cells out of n number of cells each of
Current Electricity

r + r
internal resistance ‘r’ are wrongly connected in From equation (i), we get, εeq = r  r = ε
series, then total resistance of the cell is r2 r
(a) 2nr (b) nr – 4r From equation (ii), we get, req = r  r  2
(c) nr (d) r (vi) What will be the grouping of cells when the
Ans. (b) nr – 4r ne
current in the circuit is R + nr .

s
(v) Two identical non-ideal batteries are connected

a
in parallel. Consider the following statements. (a) Parallel (b) Series

iv D
I. The equivalent emf is smaller than either of the (c) Mixed (d) No grouping

Sh
two emfs. Ans. (b) Series
II. The equivalent internal resistance is smaller
Equivalent Internal Resistance in series = nr
than either of the two internal resistances.
Equivalent emf in series = n
(a) Both I and II are correct.
(b) I is correct but II is wrong. Total Resistence = R + n
(c) II is correct but I is wrong. ne
 I =
R + nr
(d) Both I and II are wrong.

----------
 Chapter: Four
Moving Charges
And Magnetism

COMPETENCY
Competency Based Questions

a s
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

iv D
charge
(c) changed due to change in velocity of charged
1. When a magnetic compass needle is carried

Sh
particle
nearby to a straight wire carrying current, then (d) changed due to change in field direction
(I) the straight wire cause a noticeable deflection
[Ans. (c)
in the compass needle.
4. Which one of the following is correct statement
(II) the alignment of the needle is tangential to about magnetic forces?
an imaginary circle with straight wire as its
(a) Magnetic forces always obey Newton’s third
centre and has a plane perpendicular to the
law.
wire.
(b) Magnetic forces do not obey Newton’s third
(a) (I) is correct

BASED
law.
(b) (II) is correct
(c) For very high current, magnetic forces obey
(c) both (I) and (II) are correct Newton’s third law.
(d) neither (I) nor (II) is correct [Ans. (c) (d) Inside low magnetic field, magnetic forces
2. A strong magnetic field is applied on a stationary obey Newton’s third law. [Ans. (b)
electron. Then the electron 5. A charged particle is moving on circular path
(a) moves in the direction of the field. with velocity v in a uniform magnetic field B, if
(b) remained stationary. the velocity of the charged particle is doubled
(c) moves perpendicular to the direction of the and strength of magnetic field is halved, then
field. radius becomes
(d) moves opposite to the direction of the field. (a) 8 times (b) 4 times
[Ans. (b) (c) 2 times (d) 16 times [Ans. (b)
3. In an inertial frame of reference, the magnetic 6. Two a-particles have the ratio of their velocities
force on a moving charged particle is F . Its
→ as 3 : 2 on entering the field. If they move in
value in another inertial frame of reference will different circular paths, then the ratio of the
be radii of their paths is
(a) remained same (a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2
(b) changed due to change in the amount of (c) 9 : 4 (d) 4 : 9 [Ans. (b)

Competency Based Questions n C–21

 C–22 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

7. A charged particle is moving in a cyclotron, 12. Two identical current carrying coaxial loops,
what effect on the radius of path of this charged carry current I in opposite sense. A simple
particle will occur when the frequency of the amperian loop passes through both of them
ratio frequency field is doubled? once. Calling the loop as C, then which
(a) It will also be doubled. statement is correct?
→ →
(b) It will be halved. (a) ∫ B .dl = ± 2m0I
(c) It will be increased by four times. c
→ →
(d) It will remain unchanged. [Ans. (d)
(b) the value of ∫ B .dl is independent of sense of
C. c
8. Which of the following is not correct about
(c) there may be a point on C where B and dl are
cyclotron?
Moving Charges And Magnetism

parallel.
(a) It is a machine to accelerate charged particles
(d) none of these [Ans. (b)
or ions to high energies.
(b) Cyclotron uses both electric and magnetic 13. The correct plot of the magnitude of magnetic
→
fields in combination to increase the energy field B vs distance r from centre of the wire is,
of charged particles. if the radius of wire is R
(c) The operation of the cyclotron is based on the B B
fact that the time for one revolution of an ion
is independent of its speed or radius of its (a) (b)
orbit. r r
0 R 0 R
(d) The charged particles and ions in cyclotron
B B
can move on any arbitrary path. [Ans. (d)
9. If an electron is moving with velocity →

s
v (c) (d)

a
→
produces a magnetic field B , then

iv D
→ r r
0 R
(a) the direction of field B will be same as the R

Sh
0
direction of velocity →
v. [Ans. (b)
→ 14. The nature of parallel and anti-parallel currents
(b) the direction of field B will be opposite to are
the direction of velocity →
v. (a) parallel currents repel and anti-parallel
→ currents attract.
(c) the direction of field B will be perpendicular
(b) parallel currents attract and anti-parallel
to the direction of velocity →
v. currents repel.
→
(d) the direction of field B does not depend (c) both currents attract.
upon the direction of velocity → v . [Ans. (c) (d) both currents repel. [Ans. (b)
10. Current flows through uniform, square frames as 15. The magnetic moment of a current I carrying
shown in the figure. In which case is the magnetic circular coil of radius r and number of turns N
field at the centre of the frame not zero? varies as
1
(a) 1 (b) (c) r (d) r2
r2 r
(a) (b) [Ans. (d)
16. A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of
0.65 J T–1, then the magnitude and direction of
the magnetic field produced by the magnet at a
distance 8 cm from the centre of magnet on the
(c) (d) axis is
(a) 2.5 × 10–4 T, along NS direction
[Ans. (c) (b) 2.5 × 10–4 T, along SN direction
11. Ampere’s circuital law is given by (c) 4.5 × 10–4 T, along NS direction
→ → → →
(a) ∫ H .dl = m0Ienc (b) ∫ B .dl = m0Ienc (d) 4.5 × 10–4 T, along SN direction [Ans. (b)
→ → → → 17. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform
(c) ∫ B .dl = m0J (d) ∫ H .dl = m0J magnetic field. The torque acting on it does not
[Ans. (b) depend upon
 Competency Based Questions n C–23

(a) area of loop (b) value of current its core. A straight solenoid has two ends. If the field entire
(c) magnetic field (d) None of these flux were confined between these ends, the flux throughout
the cross-section at each end would be non-zero
[Ans. (d)
18. In a moving coil galvanometer the deflection () 2. Assertion: A spark occurs between the pole of
on the scale by a pointer attached to the spring is the switch when the switch is opened.
Reason: Current flowing in the conductor
(a)  NA   I (b)  N   I produces magnetic field.
 kB   kAB  Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
statements but reason is not correct explanation
(c)  NAB   I (d)  NAB  [Ans. (c) for assertion.
 k   kI 
According to lenz’s law, induced emf are in a direction

COMPETENCY
19. A moving coil galvanometer can be converted such as to attempt to maintain the original magnetic
into an ammeter by flux when a change occurs. When the switch is opened,
(a) introducing a shunt resistance of large value the sudden drop in the magnetic field in the circuit
in series. induces an emf in direction that attempts to keep the
(b) introducing a shunt resistance of small value original current flowing. This can cause a spark as the
in parallel. current bridges the air gap between the poles of the
(c) introducing a resistance of small value in switch.
series. 3. Assertion: When a charged particle moves
(d) introducing a resistance of large value in perpendicular to magnetic field then its kinetic
parallel. [Ans. (b) energy and momentum gets affected.
20. The conversion of a moving coil galvanometer Reason: Force changes velocity of charged
into a voltmeter is done by particle.
(a) introducing a resistance of large value in Ans. (d) Assertion is false statement but reason is

a s
series. correct statement.

iv D
(b) introducing a resistance of small value in When a charged particle moves perpendicular to magnetic

parallel. field, it experiences a force which changes the direction of

Sh
(c) introducing a resistance of large value in motion of the particle without changing the magnitude
parallel. of velocity of the particle. Hence kinetic energy remains
constant but momentum of electron changes.
(d) introducing a resistance of small value in
series. [Ans.(a) 4. Assertion: When two long parallel wires, hanging
freely are connected in parallel to a battery, they
 Assertion-Reason Questions come closer to each other.
Reason: Wires carrying current in opposite
DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A)
direction repel each other.
and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option
Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct

BASED
out of the options given below:
statements but reason is not correct explanation
(a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements
for assertion.
and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion. The wries are parallel to each other but the direction of

(b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements current in it is in same direction so they attract each other.
but Reason is not correct explanation for If the current in the wries is in opposite direction then
assertion. wries repel each other. When the currents are in opposite
(c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is directions, the magnetic forces are reversed and the wries
wrong statement. repels each other.
(d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct 5. Assertion: A solenoid tends to expand, when a
statement. current passes through it.
1. Assertion: Magnetic field lines can be entirely Reason: Two straight parallel metallic wires
confined within the core of a toroid, but not carrying current in same direction attract each
within a straight solenoid. other.
Reason: The magnetic field inside the solenoid is Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is
uniform. correct statement.
When current flows through a solenoid, the currents in the

Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct various turns of the solenoid are parallel and in the same
statements but reason is not correct explanation direction. Since the currents flowing through parallel wires
for assertion. in the same direction lead to force of attraction between
Magnetic field lines can be entirely confined to the core of a
them, the turns of the solenoid will also attract each other
toroid because toroid has no ends. It can confined the within and as a result, the solenoid tends to contract.
 C–24 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

6. Assertion: When force is zero, the charged The magnetic field at the centre of circular coil is given by.

particle follows linear path. µ0 2πnl
Reason: A charged particle enters in a uniform B = 4π . a
magnetic field, whose velocity makes an angle θ So if current through coil is double then magnetic field is B’
with magnetic field will cover a linear path. = 2B.
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is The magnetic field also get doubled. The magnetic field is
false statement. directly proportional to the current in conductor.
When charged particle enters the uniform filed they makes

angle θ with the field. Then its path is decided by combined  Case Based Questions
effect of two component of velocity. ( cos θ) parallel to the
field. Due to the parallel field the charge will follow a linear
1. Read the para given below and answer the
Moving Charges And Magnetism

path and due to the perpendicular component ( sin θ) of questions that follow:
the field will be circular. This results in a helical path whose The force experienced by a particle of charge q
axis is parallel to the component of the field. → → →
moving with a velocity  given by F = q [ ν × B ]
7. Assertion: An electron and proton enters a which is perpendicular to Both  and B. Since
magnetic field with equal velocities, then the →
force experienced by proton will be more than F is perpendicular to , no work is done on the
charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic
electron.
field. If  is perpendicular to B, the charged
Reason: The mass of proton is 1837 times more
particle follows a circular path whose radius is
than the mass of electron.
mv
Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is given by r = .
qB
correct statement.
The force experienced by a charge particle in a magnetic field
The frequency of revolution of the particle along
is given by, → → → qB
F = q( v × B ) the circular path is given by  = 2pm .

a s
which is independent of mass. As q, v and B are same for

iv D
both the electron and proton, hence both will experience (i) A proton and an alpha particle are projected
same force. perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field with

Sh
8. Assertion: When a magnetic dipole is placed in equal velocities. The mass of an alpha particle
a non uniform magnetic field, only a torque acts is 4 times that of a proton and its charge is twice
on the dipole. that of a proton. If the rp and rα are the radii of
Reason: Force would act on dipole if magnetic rp
field is uniform. their circular path, then the ratio is.
ra
Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is 1 1
correct statement. (a) (b)
2 2
In a non-uniform magnetic field, a torque and a net force

both act on the dipole. If magnetic field is uniform, net force (c) 1 (d) 2
on dipole would be zero.
1
9. Assertion: An ammeter is a connected in series in Ans. (b)
2
the circuit. Given. m = 4mp,  = p, q = 2qp, B = Bp

Reason: An ammeter is a high resistance
galvanometer. mν
As we
know r =
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is qB
wrong statement. mp ν
An ammeter is a low resistance galvanometer. It is used to rp q B
p q m
α p 2q m
p p 1
measure the current in amperes. To measure the current of r=
= m ν =q m = =
ra α p α q p 4 mp 2
a circuit, the ammeter is connected in series in the circuit so qα B
that the current to be measured must pass through it.
rp 1
10. Assertion: The magnetic field at the centre of  =
circular coil carrying current changes, if the rα 2
rp
current through the coil is doubled. (ii) In (i) part, what is the ratio r if the two parti-
a
Reason: The magnetic field intensity is dependent
cles have equal kinetic energies before entering
on current in conductor.
the region of the magnetic field.
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct
1
statements and reason is correct explanation for
(a) (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 4
2
assertion.
Ans. (b) 1
 Competency Based Questions n C–25

Given. KE = KEp 2. Read the para given below and answer the
questions that follow:
mν 2 mK
r= = ...Where[m = 2mK
qB qB Helical Motion. The path of a charged particle

in magnetic field depends upon angle between
2 mp K →
velocity and magnetic field. If velocity ν is at
rp q pB qα mp →
= = = angle θ to B , component of velocity parallel
rα 2 mα K q p mα to magnetic field ( cos θ) remains constant and
qα B component of velocity perpendicular to magnetic
field ( sin θ) is responsible for circular motion,
2q p mp 1 thus the charge particle moves in a helical path.

COMPETENCY
= . = 2× =1
qp 4mp 4
 sin θ
rp
(iii) In (i) part, what is the ratio if two particles
ra
Helical path
have equal linear moments before entering the
region of the magnetic field.
(a) 1 (b) 2 → r
θ B
(c) 2 (d) 2 2
Ans. (c) 2  cos θ

Given. (m) = (m)p
( mν ) p P
The plane of the circle is perpendicular to the

s
rp q pB qα 2q p

a
= = = magnetic field and the axis of the helix is parallel
( mν )α

iv D
rα qp qp
qα B
to the magnetic field. The charged particle moves
along helical path touching the line parallel to

Sh
rp 2 the magnetic field passing through the starting
 = =2:1
rα 1 point after each rotation.
(iv) In (i) part, what is the is the ratio if two mν sin θ
particles are accelerated through the same Radius of circular path, r =

qB
potential difference before entering the region Hence the resultant path of the charged particle
of the magnetic field. will be helix, with its axis along the direction of
(a) 1 / 2 (b) 1 →
B shown in figure.
(c) 2
(d) 2 (i) When a positively charged particle enters into

BASED
a uniform magnetic field with uniform velocity,
Ans. (a) 1 / 2 its trajectory can be (I) a straight line (II) a circle

Given.  = p (III) a helix.
2mK (a) (I) only (b) (I) or (II)
 r =  ...Where[K = q (c) (I) or (III)
qB
(d) any one of (I), (II) and (III)
1 2 mqν 1 2 mν Ans. (d) any one of (I), (II) and (III)
r = 2
=
B q B q (ii) Two charged particles A and B having the same
charge, mass and speed enter into a magnetic
1 2 mp ν
field in such a way that initial path of A makes
rp B qp qα mp 2 q p mp 1 an angle of 30º and that of B makes an angle of
 = = = =
rα 1 2 mα ν mα q p 4mp mp 2 90º with the field. Then the trajectory of
B qα (a) B will have smaller radius of curvature than
that of A
(v) Which of the following in motion cannot be (b) both will have the same curvature
deflected by magnetic field? (c) A will have smaller radius of curvature than
(a) Protons (b) Beta particles that of B
(c) Alpha particles (d) Neutrons (d) both will move along the direction of their
Ans. (d) Neutrons original velocities.
 C–26 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (a) B will have smaller radius of curvature than 3. Read the para given below and answer the
that of A questions that follow:
mν 2 Motion of charge in magnetic field. An electron

Using, q sin θ =
r with speed 0 << c moves in a circle of radius
1
r ∝ for the same values of m, , q and B r0 in a uniform magnetic field. This electron is
sin θ
able to traverse a circular path as magnetic field
rA sin 90 º
∴ = =2 is perpendicular to the velocity of the electron. A
rB sin 30 º
force acts on the particle perpendicular to both
∴ rA = 2rB or rB < rA → →
ν 0 and B This force continuously deflects the
(iii) An electron having momentum 2.4 × kg 10–23 particle sideways without changing its speed and
Moving Charges And Magnetism

m/s enters a region of uniform magnetic field the particle will move along a circle perpendicular
of 0.15 T. The field vector makes an angle of 30º to the field. The time required for one revolution
with initial velocity vector of the electron. The of the electron is T0.
radius of the helical path of the electron in the →
B
field shall be ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
××××××
0× × × × ×
×
(a) 2 mm (b) 1 mm × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
r 0
(c) 3 × × × × × ×
F
× × × × × × × ×× × ×
mm (d) 0.5 mm × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
F
×× ×
q
×
2 × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
Ans. (d) 0.5 mm F
× × × × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × 
××
0
× ×
mν ⊥ mν sin θ (2.4 ×10 -23 kg m/s)× sin 30º × ×
q× × × × × × × × × × × ×× × ×
r =
qB
=
eB
=
(1.6 ×10 -19 C)× 0.15 T
(i) If the speed of the electron is now doubled to 2 0.
= 5 × 10–4 m = 0.5 × 10–3 m = 0.5 mm The radius of the circle will change to

s
(iv) The magnetic field in a certain region of space (a) 4r0 (b) 2r0

iv D a
→ (c) r (d) r0/2
is given by B = 8.35-2 × 10 -2 i T . A proton is shot Ans. (c) r
0
0

Sh
→
into the field with velocity ν = (2 × 10 5 i + 4 × 10 5 j ) mν m(2ν0 )
As, r0
= qB ⇒ r’ = = 2r0
m/s. The proton follows a helical path in the qB
field. The distance moved by proton in the (ii) If 0 = 20, then time required for one revolution
x-direction during the period of one revolution of the electron will change to
in the yz-plane will be (a) 4T0 (b) 2T0
(a) 0.053 m (b) 0.136 m (c) T
0 (d) T0/2
(c) 0.157 m (d) 0.236 m Ans. (c) T
0
Ans. (d) 0.157 m
2pm
→ → As we
know, T = qB
Given, B = 8.35 ×10 −2 i T , ν = (2×10 i + 4 ×10 j) m/s ,
5 5
Thus, it remains same as it is independent of velocity.
m = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg
(iii) A charged particles is projected in a magnetic
→
Pitch of the helix =
2πmν filed B = (2 i + 4 j )× 10 2 T. The acceleration of the
qB →
particle is found to be a = ( xi + 2 j )ms -2 . Find
2× 3.14 ×1.67 ×10 -27 × 2×10 5 the value of x.
= = 0.157 m (a) 4 ms–2 (b) –4 ms–2
1.6 ×10 -19 × 8.35 ×10 -2
(c) –2 ms–2 (d) –2 ms–2
(v) The frequency of revolution of the particle is Ans. (b) –4 ms–2
m qB 2πR 2πR

(a) qB (b) 2≠m (c) (d) As F ⊥ B, Hence, a ⊥ B
ν cos θ ν sin θ → →

∴ a B = 0
Ans. (b)
qB
2≠m ⇒ (xi + 2j) . (2i + 4 j ) = 0 ⇒ 2x + 8 = 0 ∴ x = –4 ms–2

2πR

Period of revolution, T = (iv) If the given electron has a velocity not
ν sin θ
perpendicular to B, then trajectory of the
 mνsin θ 
2π   electron is

⇒ T =  qB  = 2≠m (a) straight line (b) circular
ν sin θ qB
(c) helical (d) zig-zag
1 qB Ans. (c) helical

∴ Frequency,ν = =
T 2πm
 Competency Based Questions n C–27
→
(ii) The magnetic field due to a current in a straight

If the charged particle has a velocity not perpendicular to B
then component of velocity along remains unchanged as the wire segment of length L at a point on its
→ → perpendicular bisector at a distance r (r >>L)
motion along the B will not be affected by B .
Then, the motion of the particle in a plane perpendicular to (a) decreases as 1
→
r
B is as before one. Thereby, producing helical motion.
1
(v) If this electron of charge (e) is moving parallel
(b) decreases as
r2
to uniform magnetic field with constant velocity
, the force acting on the electron is (c) decreases 1
as
Be B r3
(a) Be
(b) (c) (d) zero
ν eν (d) approaches a finite limit as r → ∞

COMPETENCY
Ans. (d) zero
Force on electron, F = qB sin θ Ans. (b) decreases 1
as
As the electron is moving parallel to B So, θ = 0º r2
⇒ qB sin 0º = 0 µ0 Idl -1
According to Biot-Savart’s law, dB = ⇒ dB α 2
4π r 2 r
4. Read the para given below and answer the
questions that follow: (iii) Two long straight wires are set
parallel to each other. Each carries a
Biot-Savart Law. A magnetic field can be
produced by moving, charges or electric currents. current i in the same direction
The basic equation governing the magnetic field and the separation between them
P
due to a current distribution is the Biot-Savart is 2r. The intensity of the magnetic
law. Finding the magnetic field resulting from a field midway between them is
current distribution involves the vector product, (a) µ0i/r (b) 4µ0i/r
(c) zero

s
and is inherently a calculus problem when the (d) µ0i/4r

a
Ans. (c) zero
distance from the current to the field point is

iv D
continuously changing. According to this law,
B=
µ0 i µ0 i
. − . =0

Sh
the magnetic field at a point due to a current 2π r 2π r
→ (iv) A long straight wire carries a current along
element of length d l carrying current I, at a the z-axis for any two points m the x-y plane.
→ →
→ µ0 I( d l × r ) Which of the following is always false?
distance r from the element is d B = .
4π r3 (a) The magnetic fields are equal.
Biot-Savart law has certain similarities as well as (b) The directions of the magnetic fields are the
difference with Coulomb's law for electrostatic same.
(c) The magnitudes of the magnetic fields are
field e.g., there is an angle dependence in Biot
-Savart law which is not present in electrostatic equal

BASED
case. (d) The field at one point is opposite to that at
→ the other point.
(i) The direction of magnetic field d B due to Ans. (a) The magnetic fields are equal.
→ →
a current Id l at a point of distance r from (v) Biot-Savart law can be expressed alternatively
it, when a current I passes through a long as
conductor is in the direction (a) Coulomb’s Law
(a) of position vector → (b) Ampere’s circuital law
r of the point (c) Ohm’s Law
(b) of current element d →l (d) Gauss’s Law
Ans. (b) Ampere’s circuital law
(c) perpendicular to both → and →
d l r
→ 5. Read the para given below and answer the
(d) perpendicular to d l only questions that follow:
→ →
Ans. (c)
perpendicular to both d l and r Moving Coil Galvanometer. Moving coil

galvanometer operates on Permanent Magnet

According to Biot-Savart’s law, the magnetic induction due
→ →
Moving Coil (PMMC) mechanism and was
→ µ0 I( d l × r ) designed by the scientist D’arsonval. Moving coil
to a current element, d B = which is perpendi-
4π r3 galvanometers are two types—(i) Suspended coil
→
cular to both d l and r .
→ (ii) Pivoted coil types or tangent galvanometer.
Its working is based on the fact that when a
 C–28 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic (iii) The deflection in a moving coil galvanometer is
field, it experiences a torque. This torque tends to (a) directly proportional to torsional constant of
rotate the coil about its axis of suspension in such spring
a way that the magnetic flux passing through the (b) directly proportional to the number of turns
coil the maximum. in the coil
(c) inversely proportional to the area of the coil

(d) inversely proportional to the current in the

Scale coil
Ans. (b) directly proportional to the number of turns
Pointer
in the coil
Moving Charges And Magnetism

N The Deflection in a moving coil galvanometer, φ = NAB I

S k
or φ ∝ N,
...[where N = number of turns in a coil,
Coil Soft-iron core B = magnetic field and A = area of cross-section.
(iv) In a moving coil galvanometer, having a coil
(i) A moving coil galvanometer is an instrument of N-turns of area A and carrying current I is
which placed in a radial field of strength B. The torque
(a) is used to measure emf. acting on the coil is
(b) is used to measure potential difference . (a) NA2B2I (b) NABI2
(c) is used to measure resistance.
(c) N2ABI (d) NABI
(d) is a deflection instrument which gives Ans. (d) NABI
deflection when a current flows through its
coil. Deflecting torque acting on the coil, deflection = NIAB

s
Ans. (d) is a deflection instrument which gives (v) To increase the current sensitivity of a moving

a
coil galvanometer, we should decrease

iv D
deflection when a current flows through its
coil. (a) strength of magnet

Sh
(ii) To make the field radial in a moving coil (b) torsional constant of spring
galvanometer (c) number of turns in coil
(a) number of turns coil is kept small (d) area of coil
(b) magnet is taken in the form of horse-shoe Ans. (b) torsional constant of spring

(c) poles are of very strong magnets φ NAB

Current Sensitivity of galvanometer I
= Si =
k
(d) poles are cylindrically cut
Hence to increases (Current Sensitivity) Si (torsional
Ans. (d) poles are cylindrically cut
constant of spring) k must be decrease.

----------
 Chapter: Five

Magnetism and Matter

COMPETENCY
Competency Based Questions

a s
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs) (a) zero

iv D
(b) directed along OP
1. The primary origin of magnetism lies in

Sh
(c) directed along PO
(a) atomic current and intrinsic spin of electrons.
(d) directed perpendicular to the plane of paper
(b) polar and non polar nature of molecules.
[Ans. (a)
(c) pauli exclusion principle. 5. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform
(d) electronegative nature of materials. [Ans. (a) magnetic field in four different orientations as
2. Magnetic moment for solenoid and correspon- shown in figure. Arrange them in the decreasing
ding bar magnet is order of potential energy.
(a) equal for both (b) more for solenoid →
B → n →
→
(c) more for bar magnet

BASED
n B B B
(d) none of these [Ans. (a)
3. Which of the following is correct about magnetic n n
monopole?
1 2 3 4
(a) Magnetic monopole exist.
(b) Magnetic monopole does not exist. (a) 4, 2, 3, 1 (b) 1, 4, 2, 3
(c) Magnetic monopole have constant value of (c) 4, 3, 2, 1 (d) 1, 2, 3, 4 [Ans. (b)
monopole momentum. 6. Which of the following is not showing the
(d) The monopole momentum increase due to essential difference between electrostatic
increase at its distance from the field. shielding by a conducting shell and magneto-
[Ans. (b) static shielding?
4. Two identical bar magnets are fixed with their (a) Electrostatic field lines can end on charges
centres at a distance d apart. A stationary charge and conductors have free charges.
Q is placed at P in between the gap of the two (b) Magnetic field lines can end but conductors
magnets at a distance D from the centre O as cannot end them.
shown in the figure. The force on the charge Q is (c) Lines of magnetic field cannot end on any
Q
P material and perfect shielding is not possible.
D
S N N S (d) Shells of high permeability materials can be
O
used to divert lines of magnetic field from the
d interior region. [Ans. (b)

Competency Based Questions n C–29

 C–30 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

7. The net magnetic flux through any closed 13. Let the magnetic field on earth be modelled by
surface, kept in a magnetic field is that of a point magnetic dipole at the centre
µ0 of earth. The angle of dip at a point on the
(a) zero (b) geographical equator is
4π
(a) always zero
(c) 4 pm0 (d) 4µ0 [Ans. (a) (b) positive, negative or zero
π (c) unbounded
8. Point out the correct direction of magnetic field (d) always negative [Ans. (b)
in the given figures. 14. The angle of dip at a certain place where the
horizontal and vertical components of the
earth’s magnetic field are equal is
(a) 30° (b) 75°
(a) (b) (c) 60° (d) 45° [Ans. (d)
15. The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field
at a place is 3 times the horizontal component
Magnetism and Matter

the value of angle of dip at this place is

(a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 90° [Ans. (c)
16. At a given place on earth's surface the horizontal
N component of earth’s magnetic field is 2 × 10–5
(c) (d)
S T and resultant magnetic field is 4 × 10–5 T. The
angle of dip at this place is
(a) 30° (b) 60°

a
[Ans. (d) (c) 90° (d) 45° [Ans. (b)

iv D
9. The earth behaves as a magnet with magnetic 17. Which of the following property shows the

Sh
field pointing approximately from the property of ferromagnetic substances?
geographic (a) The ferromagnetic property depends on
(a) North to South temperature.
(b) The ferromagnetic property does not depend
(b) South to North
on temperature.
(c) East to West
(c) At high enough temperature ferromagnet
(d) West to East  [Ans.(b) becomes a diamagnet.
10. The strength of the earth’s magnetic field is (d) At low temperature ferromagnet becomes a
(a) constant everywhere. paramagnet. [Ans.(a)
(b) zero everywhere.
(c) having very high value.  Assertion-Reason Questions
(d) vary from place to place on the earths DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A)
surface. [Ans. (d) and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option
11. Which of the following is responsible for the out of the options given below:
earth’s magnetic field? (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements
(a) Convective currents in earth’s core. and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion.
(b) Diversive current in earth’s core. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements
(c) Rotational motion of earth. but Reason is not correct explanation for
(d) Translational motion of earth. [Ans. (a) Assertion.
12. Which of the following independent quantities (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
is not used to specify the earth’s magnetic field? wrong statement.
(a) Magnetic declination (q). (d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is
(b) Magnetic dip (d). correct statement.
(c) Horizontal component of earth’s field (BH). 1. Assertion: Magnetic moment of an atom is due
(d) Vertical component of earth’s field (BV). to both, the orbital motion and spin motion of
every electron.
[Ans. (d)
Reason: A charged particle produces a magnetic
field.
 Competency Based Questions n C–31

Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is Geographic

axis
wrong statement. Magnetic
In an atom, electrons revolve around the nucleus and as
axis
such the circular orbits of electrons may be considered as
the small current loops. In addition to orbital motion, an GN
MS
electron has got spin motion also. So the total magnetic = 20°

moment of electrons is the vector sum of its magnetic B’

moments due to orbital and spin motion. A B
2. Assertion: The ends of a magnet suspended
A’
freely point out always along north south.

COMPETENCY
MN
Reason: Earth behaves as a hugs magnet.
GS
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct
statements and Reason is the correct explanation
for Assertion.
Earth’s magnetic field can be represented as the field of
From the compass we are able to know the direction of the
a huge bar magnet. If the magnet is freely suspended its magnetic poles. The north of compass points towards the
north-pole points towards geographic north pole (really a geographic south pole. If we know the magnetic declination
south magnet pole of earth). at that particular place (which is angle between geographic
3. Assertion: At neutral point, a compass needle meridian and magnetic meridian) we can easily find out the
point out in any arbitrary direction. true geographic north-south direction.
Imaginary lines drawn along the earth’s surface in the
Reason: Magnetic field of earth is balanced by
direction of the horizontal component of the magnetic field of
field due to magnets at the neutral points. the earth at all points passing through the north and south

s
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct magnetic poles. This is similar to the longitudes of the earth,

a
statements and Reason is the correct explanation

iv D
which pass through the geographic north and south poles.
for Assertion. 6. Assertion: The earth’s magnetic field is due to

Sh
A neutral point in the magnetic field of a bar magnet is
iron present in its core.
that point, where the field due to magnet is completely Reason: At a low temperature magnet losses its
neutralised by the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic magnetic property is magnetism.
field. The net horizontal field is zero at such a point. If a
Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is
compass needle is placed at such a point, it can stay in any
correct statement.
position.
The temperature inside the earth is so high that it is

4. Assertion: Earth’s magnetic field does not affect impossible for iron core to behave as a magnet and act as
the working of a moving coil galvanometer. a source of magnetic field. The magnetic field of earth is
Reason: The earth’s magnetic field is quite weak considered to be due to circulating electric current in the

BASED
iron (in molten state) and other conducting materials inside
as compared to magnetic field produced in the
the earth.
moving coil galvanometer.
Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct 7. Assertion: A compass needle when placed on
the magnetic north pole of the earth rotates in
statements and Reason is correct explanation
vertical direction.
for Assertion.
Reason: The earth has only vertical component
The field magnet used in a moving coil galvanometer

is very strong. The earth’s magnetic field is quite weak
of its magnetic field at the north poles.
as compared to the magnetic field produced by the field Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is
magnet. Practically the coil rotates under the effect of the correct statement.
strong magnetic field due to the field magnet and the weak The earth has only vertical component of its magnetic field at

magnetic field due to the earth does not affect the working the magnetic poles. Since compass needle is only free to rotate
in horizontal plane. At north pole the vertical component of
of the moving coil galvanometer.
earth’s field will exert torque on the magnetic needle so
5. Assertion: The true geographic north direction is as to align it along it direction. As the compass needle can
found by using a compass needle. not rotate in vertical plane, It will rest horizontally, when
Reason: The magnetic meridian of the earth is placed on the magnetic north pole of the earth.
along the axis of rotation of the earth. 8. Assertion: Magnetic moment is measured in
Ans. (d) Assertion is false statement but reason is joule/tesla or amp m2.
correct statement. Reason: Joule/tesla is equivalent to amp m2.
 C–32 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct (i) In a certain place, the horizontal component
statements but reason is the correct explanation of magnetic field is 1/ 3 times the vertical
for assertion. component. The angle of dip at this place is
= =
Joule W W (a) Zero (b) π/3
Magnetic moment = tesla
B F / qv (c) π/2 (d) π/6
Ans. (b) π/3
Wqv  ML2T -2  [ AT ] LT -1 
   
= F = = [AL2] = amp m2 BV
 MLT -2 
 
As we know, tan θ =

BH
9. Assertion: Aclinic lines on the magnetic map BV BV

 tan  = B / 3  ...[Given BH =
represents lines of equal dip. V 3
Reason: When the horizontal and vertical p
components of the earth magnetic field are equal,  tan θ =
3  θ=
3
the angle of dip is 45º.
(ii) The angle between the true geographic north
Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is
and the north shown by a compass needle is
correct statement.
The angle of dip is the angle between the axis of the dip
called as
Magnetism and Matter

needle in the magnetic meridian and the horizontal direction. (a) inclination (b) magnetic declination
(c) angle of meridian (d) magnetic pole
Vertical component of the earth's magnetic field Ans. (b) magnetic declination
tan θ =
Horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field
The angle between the true geographic north and the north
B shown by a compass needle is called as magnetic declination
= V when BV = BH, tan θ = 1 ⇒ θ = 45º
BH or simply declination.
10. Assertion: There is only one neutral point on a (iii) The angle of dip at the poles and the equator
horizontal board when a magnet is held vertically respectively are

s
on the board. (a) 30º, 60º (b) 0º, 90º

iv D a
Reason: At the neutral point the net magnetic (c) 45º, 90º (d) 90º, 0º
field due to the magnetic and magnetic field of Ans. (d) 90º, 0º

Sh
the earth is zero. Since angle of dip at a place is defined as the angle , which
Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct is the direction of total intensity of earth magnetic field B
statements but Reason is not correct explanation makes with a horizontal line in magnetic meridian.
for Assertion. At poles B = BV and BV = B sin   sin  = 1   = 90º
There will be only one neutral point on the horizontal board.
At equator B = BH and BH = B cos 
This is because fled of earth magnetic field is from south to  cos  = 1   = 0º.
north; and the field of pole on the board is radially outwards. (iv) A compass needle which is allowed to move
At any point towards south of magnetic pole, field of earth in a horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic
and field of pole will cancel out to give a neutral point.
pole.
(a) It will become rigid showing no movement.
 Case Based Questions
(b) It will stay in any position.
1. Read the para given below and answer the (c) It will stay in north-south direction only.
questions that follow: (d) It will stay in east-west direction only.
Elements of the Earth’s Ans. (a) It will become rigid showing no movement
BH 
Magnetic Field. The O A compass needle which is allowed to move in a horizontal
earth’s magnetic field  plane is taken to a geomagnetic pole. It will stay in any
Bv position as the horizontal component of earth magnetic field
at a point on its surface B
is usually characterised Magnetic becomes zero at the geomagnetic pole.
by three quantities: meridian (v) Select the correct statement from the following:
(a) declination (b) Geographic meridian (a) The magnetic dip is zero at the centre of the
inclination or dip and earth.
(c) horizontal component of the field. These are (b) Magnetic dip decreases as we move away
known as the elements of the earth’s magnetic from the equator towards the magnetic pole.
field. At a place, angle between geographic (c) Magnetic dip increases as we move away
meridian and magnetic meridian is defined as from the equator towards the magnetic pole.
magnetic declination, whereas angle made by (d) Magnetic dip does not vary from place to
the earth’s magnetic field with the horizontal in place.
magnetic meridian is known as magnetic dip.
 Competency Based Questions n C–33

Ans. (c) Magnetic

dip increases as we move away (ii) The net magnetic flux through any closed
from the equator towards the magnetic pole. surface, kept in a magnetic field is

At equator ,  = 0º µ0
t equator ,  = 90º

A (a) zero (b) 4 π

∴  Increases as we move from equator towards poles. 4µ
(c) 4πµ0 (d) 0

2. Read the para given below and answer the π

Ans. (a) zero
questions that follow: The net magnetic flux through a closed surface will be zero
Gauss’s Law for Magnetism. By analogy to → →
i.e., ∫ B . d s = 0 , because there are no magnetic monopoles.
Gauss’s law of electrostatics, we can write
→ → (iii) A closed surface S encloses a magnetic dipole

COMPETENCY
Gauss’s law of magnetism as ∫ B .d s = µ0 minside of moment 2ml. The magnetic flux emerging
→ →
where ∫ B .d s is the magnetic flux and minside from the surface is
is the net pole strength inside the closed surface. (a) µ0m (b) zero
We do not have an isolated magnetic pole in 2m
(c) 2µ0m (d) ∝
nature. At least none has been found to exist 0
Ans. (b) zero
till date. The smallest unit of the source of
magnetic field is a magnetic dipole where the net (iv) Which of the following is not a consequence of
magnetic pole is zero. Hence, the net magnetic Gauss’s law?
pole enclosed by any closed surface is always (a) The magnetic poles always exist as unlike
pairs of equal strength.
zero. Correspondingly, the flux of the flux of the
(b) If several magnetic lines of force enter in a
magnetic field through any closed surface is zero.
closed surface, then an equal number of lines
of force must leave that surface.

a s
(c) There are abundant sources or sinks of the

iv D
magnetic field inside a closed surface.
S N (d) Isolated magnetic poles do not exist.

Sh

Ans. (c) There are abundant sources or sinks of the

magnetic field inside a closed surface.

Gauss’s law indicates that there are no sources or sinks of

the magnetic field inside a closed surface. In other words,
(i) Consider the two idealised systems there are no free magnetic charges.
I. a parallel plate capacitor with large plates (v) The surface integral of a magnetic field over a
and small separation and surface
II. a long solenoid of length L >> R, radius of (a) is proportional to mass enclosed.
(b) is proportional to charge enclosed.

BASED
cross-section.
(c) is zero.
In I is ideally treated as a constant between plates
(d)
equal to its magnetic flux through that
and zero outside. In II magnetic field is constant
surface.
inside the solenoid and zero outside. These Ans. (d) equal to its magnetic flux through that surface.
idealised assumptions, however, contradict
The surface integral of a magnetic field over a surface gives
fundamental laws as
magnetic flux through that surface.
(a) case I contradicts Gauss’s law for electrostatic
fields. 3. Read the para given below and answer the
(b) case II contradicts Gauss’s law for magnetic questions that follow:
fields. Magnetisation and Magnetic Intensity. When
→ → the atomic dipoles are aligned partially or fully,
(c) case I agrees ∫ Ε . d l = 0 .
→ →
there is a net magnetic moment in the direction of
(d) case II contradicts ∫ H . d l = I en . the field in any small volume of the material. The
Ans. (b) case II contradicts Gauss’s law for magnetic actual magnetic field inside material placed in
fields. magnetic field is the sum of the applied magnetic
→ → field and the magnetic field due to magnetisation.
According to Gauss’s law in magnetism ∫ B . d s = 0 , which
implies that number of magnetic field lines entering the This field is called magnetic intensity (H).
Gaussian surface is equal to the number of magnetic field B
H= − M ...[where M = The magnetisation of the material,
lines leaving it. Therefore, case (ii) is not possible. µ 0 µ0 = The permittivity of vacuum,
B = The total magnetic field
 C–34 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

The measure that tells us is how a magnetic Earth’s Magnetic Field. The magnetic field of the

material responds to an external field is given by earth resemble that of a hypothetical magnetic
a dimensionless quantity is appropriately called dipole located at the centre of the earth. The axis of
the magnetic susceptibility: for a certain class of the dipole is presently tilted by approximately 11.3º
magnetic materials, intensity of magnetisation is with respect to the axis of rotation of the earth.
directly proportional to the magnetic intensity.
(i) Magnetization of a sample is
Ng Magnetic equator
(a) volume of sample per unit magnetic moment
(b) net magnetic moment per unit volume 11.3º
(c) ratio of magnetic moment and pole strength Nm
(d) ratio
of pole strength to magnetic moment
Ans. (b) net magnetic moment per unit volume

(ii) Identify the wrongly matched quantity and unit

Sm Geographical equator
pair.
(a) Pole strength — Am
Sg
(b) Magnetic susceptibility — dimensionless no
Magnetism and Matter

(c) Intensity of magnetisation — A m-1
The pole near the geographic North pole of the
(d)
Magnetic permeability — Henry m earth is called North magnetic pole and the pole
Ans. (d) Magnetic permeability — Henry m near the geographic South pole is called South
(iii) A bar magnetic has length 3 cm, cross-sectional magnetic pole.
area 2 cm2 and magnetic moment 3 A m2. The
(i) The strength of the earth’s magnetic field varies
intensity of magnetisation of bar magnet is
from place on the earth’s surface, its value being
(a) 2 × 105 A/m (b) 3 × 105 A/m
of the order of

s
(c) 4 × 105 A/m (d) 5 × 105 A/m

a
(a) 105 T (b) 10-6 T

iv D
Ans. (d) 5 × 105 A/m -5
(c) 10 T (d) 108 T
Given. l = 3 cm, A = 2 cm2, M = 3 A m2 Ans. (c) 10-5 T

Sh
M 3 (ii) A bar magnet is placed North-South with

Intensity of magnetisation = lA = its North-pole due North. The points of zero
3 × 10 -2 × 2× 10 -4
1 magnetic field will be in which direction from
= = 0.5 × 106 = 5 × 105 A/m centre of magnet?
2 × 10 -6
(iv) A solenoid has core of a material with relative
(a) North-South
permeability 500 and its windings carry a (b) East-West
current of 1 A. The number of turns of the (c) North- East and South-West
solenoid is 500 per metre. The magnetization of (d) None of these
Ans. (b) East-West
the material is nearly
(a) 2.5 × 103 A m-1 (b) 2.5 × 105 A m-1 (iii) The value of angle of dip is zero at the magnetic
(c) 2.0 × 103 A m-1 (d) 2.0 × 105 A m-1 equator because on it
Ans. (b) 2.5 × 105 A m-1 (a) V and H are equal
Here, n = 500 turns/m; I = 1 A; µr = 500
(b) the values of V and H zero
Magnetic intensity, H = nI = 500 m–1 (c) the value of V is zero
As µr = 1 + χ or χ = (µr –1) (d) the value of H is zero
Magnetic intensity, M = χH Ans. (c) the value of V is zero
= (µr –1) H = (500 –1) × 500 A m-1 (iv) The angle of dip at a certain place, where the
= 2.495 × 105 A m-1 ≈ 2.5 × 105 A m-1 horizontal and vertical components of the
(v) The relative permeability of iron is 6000. Its earth’s magnetic field are equal, is
magnetic susceptibility is (a) 30º (b) 90º
(a) 5999 (b) 6001 (c) 60º (d) 45º
(c) 6000 × 10-7 (d) 6000 × 107 Ans. (d) 45º
Ans. (a) 5999 V

Given. V = H, ∴ tan  = = 1 or  = 45º
Relative permeability of iron, µr = 6000 H
Magnetic susceptibility χm = µr–1 = 5999. (v) At a place, angle of dip is 30º. If horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field is H, then
4. Read the para given below and answer the
the total intensity of magnetic field will be
questions that follow:
 Competency Based Questions n C–35

(ii) The current density in a wire a is

H 2H
(a) 2 (b) (a) greater than in wire c
3 (b) less than in wire c
3 (c) equal to that in wire c
(c) H (d) 2H (d) not comparable to that of in wire c due to lack
2
of information
Ans. (b) 2H Ans. (b) less than in wire c
3
µ0 I dB µ0 I

Given. Biot-Savart law can be expressed alternatively as
Inside the wire, B(r) = 2π R 2
⇒ =
d 2π R 2
Ampere circuital law.
1
5. Read the para given below and answer the i.e., slope ∝ ∝ Current density

COMPETENCY
pR 2
questions that follow:
(iii) Which wire has the greatest radius?
Magnetic Field Due to a Hollow Wire. The (a) a (b) b
field of a hollow wire with constant current is (c) c (d) d
homogeneous. Curves in the graph shown give, Ans. (c) c
as functions of radius distance r, the magnitude (iv) A direct current I flows along the length of an
B of magnetic field inside and outside four long infinitely long straight thin walled pipe, than
wires a, b, c and d, carrying current that are the magnetic field is
uniformly distributed across the cross sections of (a) uniform throughout the pipe not zero.
the wires Overlapping portions of the plots are (b) zero only along the axis of the pipe.
indicated by double labels. (c) zero at any point inside the pipe.
B (d) max. at the centre and min. at the edges.
Ans. (c) zero at any point inside the pipe.

s
(v) In a coaxial, straight cable, the central conductor

a
a

iv D
and the outer conductor carry equal current in
b a, c opposite direction. The magnetic field is zero

Sh
c (a) outside the cable
a, b d (b) inside the inner conductor
b, d (c) inside the outer conductor
c, b
r
(d) in between the two conductor
(i) Which wire has the greatest magnitude of the
magnetic field on the surface? Ans. (a) outside the cable
(a) a (b) b
(c) c (d) d
Ans. (a) a

BASED
----------
 Chapter: Six

Electromagnetic Induction
Electromagnetic Induction

Competency Based Questions

a s
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs) (b) Q increases while in P decreases

iv D
(c) both P and Q increases
1. The north pole of a long bar magnet was

Sh
(d) both P and Q decreases [Ans. (d)
pushed slowly into a short solenoid connected
to a short galvanometer. The magnet was held 5. Direction of current induced in a wire moving
stationary for a few seconds with the north in a magnetic field is found using
pole in the middle of the solenoid and then (a) Fleming’s left hand rule
withdrawn rapidly. The maximum deflection (b) Fleming’s right hand rule
of the galvanometer was observed when the (c) Ampere’s rule
magnet was (d) Right hand clasp rule [Ans. (b)
(a) moving towards the solenoid 6. Lenz’s law is a consequence of the law of
(b) moving into the solenoid conservation of
(c) at rest inside the solenoid (a) charge (b) energy
(d) moving out of the solenoid [Ans. (d) (c) induced emf (d) induced current
2. The magnetic flux linked with a coil of N turns [Ans. (b)
of area of cross section A held with its plane 7. A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a
parallel to the field B is steady current flows through it. If an iron core
NAB is inserted into the solenoid, the current will
(a) (b) NAB
2 (a) increase (b) decrease
(c) NAB (d) zero [Ans. (d)
(c) remain same
4 (d) first increase then decrease [Ans. (b)
3. Faraday’s laws are consequence of the 8. Which of the following statements is not
conservation of correct?
(a) charge (b) energy (a) Whenever the amount of magnetic flux linked
(c) magnetic field (d) both (b) and (c) with a circuit changes, an emf is induced in
[Ans. (b) circuit.
4. Two identical coaxial coils P and Q carrying (b) The induced emf lasts so long as the change
equal amount of current in the same direction in magnetic flux continues.
are brought nearer. The current in (c) The direction of induced emf is given by
(a) P increases while in Q decreases Lenz’s law.
C–36 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)
 Competency Based Questions n C–37

(d) Lenz’s law is a consequence of the law of (c) LED lights

conservation of momentum. [Ans. (d) (d) Magnetic brakes in trains [Ans. (c)
9. There is a uniform magnetic field directed 15. If number of turns in primary and secondary
perpendicular and into the plane of the paper. coils is increased to two times each, the mutual
An irregular shaped conducting loop is slowly inductance
changing into a circular loop in the plane of the (a) becomes 4 times (b) becomes 2 times
paper. Then
(a) current is induced in the loop in the anti- (c) becomes 1 times (d) remains unchanged
4
clockwise direction. [Ans. (a)
(b) current is induced in the loop in the clockwise 16. When the rate of change of current is unity, the

COMPETENCY
direction. induced emf is equal to
(c) ac is induced in the loop. (a) thickness of coil
(d) no current is induced in the loop. [Ans. (a) (b) number of turns in coil
10. In the given figure current (c) coefficient of self inductance
from A to B in the straight (d) total flux linked with coil [Ans. (c)
wire is decreasing. The
17. Two inductors of inductance L each are
direction of induced current
connected in series with opposite magnetic
in the loop is A B fluxes. The resultant inductance is (Ignore
(a) clockwise (b) mutual inductance)
anticlockwise
(a) zero (b) L
(c) changing (d) nothing can be said
(c) 2L (d) 3L [Ans. (c)
[Ans. (b)
 Assertion-Reason Questions

s
11. The north pole of a bar magnet is rapidly

a
introduced into a solenoid at one end (say A).

iv D
Which of the following statements correctly DIRECTION: Read the two statement Assertion (A)
depicts the phenomenon taking place? and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option

Sh
(a) No induced emf is developed. out of the options given below:
(a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements
(b) The end A of the solenoid behaves like a
south pole. and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion.
(b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements
(c) The end A of the solenoid behaves like north
but Reason is not correct explanation for
pole.
Assertion.
(d) The end A of the solenoid acquires positive
(c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
potential. [Ans. (c)
wrong statement.
12. A metal plate can be heated by
(d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is

BASED
(a) passing either a direct or alternating current correct statement.
through the plate.
1. Assertion: When two coil are wound on each
(b) placing in a time varying magnetic field.
other, the mutual induction between the coils is
(c) placing in a space varying magnetic field, but
maximum.
does not vary with time.
Reason: Mutual induced does not depend on the
(d) both (a) and (b) are correct. [Ans. (d)
orientation of the coils.
13. Identify the wrong statement. Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is
(a) Eddy currents are produced in a steady wrong statement.
magnetic field. The manner in which the two coils are oriented determines

(b) Eddy currents can be minimized by using M
laminated core. the coefficient of coupling between them i.e., K =
L1L 2
(c) Induction furnace uses eddy current to
produce heat. where L1 and L2 are self inductance of two coils. When the
two coils are wound on each other the coefficient of coupling
(d) Eddy current can be used to produce braking is maximum and mutual inductance between the coil is
force in moving trains. [Ans. (a) maximum.
14. Which of the following does not use the 2. Assertion: An induced emf is generated when
application of eddy current? magnet is withdrawn from the solenoid.
(a) Electric power meters
Reason: The relative motion between magnet
(b) Induction furnace and solenoid induces emf.
 C–38 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct 7. Assertion: Acceleration of a magnet falling
statements and reason is correct explanation for through a copper ring decreases.
assertion. Reason: The induced current produced in a
According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic inductor, circuit always flow in such direction that it
induced emf will be generated in the solenoid. opposes the change or cause that produced it.
3. Assertion: A copper sheet is placed in a magnetic Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct
field. If we pull it out of the field or push it into statements and reason is correct explanation for
the field, we experience an opposing force. assertion.
Reason: According to Lenz’s law, eddy current When the magnet falls, the magnetic flux through the
produced in sheet opposes the motion of the copper ring increases and induced emf is produced in the
sheet. ring. The induced emf so produced, opposes the motion of
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct falling magnet. Therefore, the acceleration of the falling
magnet will be less than that due to gravity.
statements and reason is correct explanation for
8. Assertion: An aircraft flies along the meridian,
assertion.
Electromagnetic Induction

the potential develops at the ends of its wings is

According to Lenz’s law when we pull a copper plate
out of the magnetic field or push it into the magnetic field,
same.
magnetic flux linked with the plate changes. As a result of Reason: Whenever there is change in the
this eddy currents are produced in the plate which oppose its magnetic flux emf induces.
motion. Ans. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is
4. Assertion: Induced emf depends on number of correct statement.
turns and area of the coil. As the aircraft files, magnetic flux changes through its
wings due to the vertical component of the earth’s magnetic
Reason: Induced emf increase with increase in
field. Due to this, induced emf is produced across the wings
number of turns of coil. of the aircraft. Therefore, the wimgs of the aircrafts will not
Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct

s
be at the same potential.

a
statements but reason is not correct explanation 9. Assertion: An induced current is developed

iv D
for assertion. when the number of magnetic lines of force
According to faraday’s law, the induced emf, () =

Sh
associated with conductor is changed.
− d( Nφ) − d( NBA ) dB
= = −NA . Reason: An induced current develop in a
dt dt dt conductor moved in a direction parallel to the
Thus the induced emf depends on the rate of change of magnetic field.
magnetic flux, number of turns of coil and area of the coil. Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is
If any of these factor increases (or decreases) then induced wrong statement.
emf also increases (or decreases). An induced current develop in a conductor cannot moved in
5. Assertion: Self-inductance is called the inertia of a direction parallel to magnetic field.
electricity. 10. Assertion: Changing magnetic flux can produce
Reason: Self-inductance is the phenomenon, induced emf.
according to which an opposing induced emf is Reason: Faraday established induced emf
produced in a coil as a result of change in current experimentally.
or magnetic flux linked with the coil. Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
Ans. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct explanation
statements and reason is correct explanation for for assertion.
assertion. Emf induces, when there is change in magnetic flux. The

Self-inductance of a coil is its property by virtue of which magnitude of induced emf depends upon the rate at which
the coil opposes any change in the current flowing through the magnetic flux changes. When magnetic flux is steady
it. It is because, the induced emf produced opposes the or constant no emf is induced. Faraday did experiment in
change in current. For this reason, self induction is called which, there is relative motion between the coil and magnet,
inertia of electricity. the flux linked with the coil changes and emf induces.
6. Assertion: The coil in the resistance boxes are
made by doubling the wire.  Case Based Questions
Reason: Thick wire is required in resistance box. 1. Read the para given below and answer the
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is questions that follow:
wrong statement. Motional emf from Lorentz Force. The emf
The coil in the resistance boxes are made from double wire.
induced across the ends of a conductor due to its
Due to this current in two wires flows in opposite directions motion in a magnetic field is called motional emf.
i.e, magnetic flux linked with the each coil cancel each other. It is produced due to the magnetic Lorentz force
Thus no emf is induced in the resistance. acting on the free electrons of the conductor.
 Competency Based Questions n C–39

For a circuit shown in figure, if a conductor of → → →

length l moves with velocity  in a magnetic Here, B . l and ν are mutually perpendicular
field B perpendicular to both its length and For given B and l, ε ∝ .
the direction of the magnetic filed, then all the 5
ε1 ν 1 15 ×
1.5 18 = 3
induced parameters are possible in the circuit. ∴ =  =
ε2 ν2 ε 2 10 × 5 2
18
B
Uniform I ∴ ε2 = 1 V
l  = Constant
R (v) The dimensional formula for emf ε in MKS
system will be

COMPETENCY
(a) [ML2T–3A-1] (b) [ML2T-1A]

(c) [ML2A] (d) [MLT-2A-2]
(i) Direction of current induced in a wire moving
Ans. (a) [ML2T–3A-1]
in a magnetic field is found using
(a) Fleming’s left hand rule [W] ML2T -2
(b) Fleming’s right hand rule ε = = = ML2T3A-1
[q] AT
(c) Ampere’s rule 2. Read the para given below and answer the
(d) Right hand clasp rule
Ans. (b) Fleming’s right hand rule questions that follow:
(ii) A conducting road of length l is moving in a Lenz’s law states that direction of induced
transverse magnetic field of strength B with current in a circuit is such that it opposes the
velocity . The resistance of the rod is R. The change which produces it. Thus, if the magnetic
current in the rod is flux linked with a closed circuit increases, the
induced current flows in such a direction that a

s
Blν

a
magnetic flux is created in the opposite direction

iv D
(a) R (b) Bl
of the original magnetic flux. If the magnetic
B 2 ν 2l 2 flux linked with the closed circuit decreases, the

Sh
(c) zero (d)
R induced current flows in such a direction so as
Blv to create a magnetic flux in the direction of the
Ans. (a)
R original flux.
Induced emf, ε = Bl
S N
ε Blν
Current in the rod, I = = ACW
R R
N S
(iii) A 0.1 m long conductor carrying a current of
50A is held perpendicular to a magnetic field 
of 1.25 mT. The mechanical power required to

BASED
(Rest)
move the conductor with a speed of 1 m s-1 is
(Coil face behaves as North pole
(a) 62.5 mW (b) 625 mW to oppose the motion of magnetic.)

(c) 6.25 mW (d) 12.5 mW N S
Ans. (c) 6.25 mW CW

Given. l = 0.1 m,  = 1 m s-1 N S

I = 50 A, B = 1.25 mT = 12.5 × 10-3 T

Induced emf, ε = Bl 

Mechanical power, P = εI = BlI

= 1.25 × 10-3 × 0.1 × 1 × 50 (Rest)
(Coil face behaves as South pole to
= 6.25 × 10-3 W = 6.25 mW oppose the motion of magnetic.)
(iv) A bicycle generator creates 1.5 V at 15 km/hr.
The emf generated at 10 km/hr is (i) Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) 1.5 volts (b) 2 volts (a) The induced emf is not in the direction
(c) 0.5 volts (d) 1 volt opposing the change in magnetic flux so as
Ans. (d) 1 volt
to oppose the cause which produces it.
5 (b) The relative motion between the coil and
Given. ε1 = 1.5 V, 1 = 15 km/hr = 15 × 18 ms-1
5
magnet produces change in magnetic flux.

2 = 10 km/hr = 10 × 18 ms-1, ε2 = ? (c) Emf is induced only if the magnet is moved
Emf induced, ε = Bl towards coil.
 C–40 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(d) Emf is induced only if the coil is moved times if the coils are wound over an iron core of
towards magnet. relative permeability µr.
Ans. (b) The relative motion between the coil and

magnet produces change in magnetic flux.

The relative motion between the coil and the magnet produces
change in the magnetic flux in the coil. The induced emf is
G
always in such a direction that it opposes the change in the
flux.
(ii) The polarity of induced emf is given by
(a) Ampere’s circuital law
(b) Biot-Savart law (i) A short solenoid of radius a, number of turns
(c) Lenz’s law per unit length n1, and length L is kept coaxially
(d) Fleming’s right hand rule inside a very long solenoid of radius b, number
Ans. (c) Lenz’s law
of turns per unit length n2. What is the mutual
Electromagnetic Induction

(iii) Lenz’s law is a consequence of the law of inductance of the system?

conservation of (a) µ0πb2n1n2L (b) µ0πa2n1n2L2
(a) charge (b) mass (c) µ0πa2n1n2L (d) µ0πb2n1n2L2
(c) momentum (d) energy Ans. (c) µ πa2n n L
Ans. (d) energy 0 1 2
(ii) If a change in current of 0.01 A in one coil
(iv) Near a circular loop of
produces a change in magnetic flux of 2 ×
conducting wire as shown in
10-2 weber in another coil, then the mutual
the figure, an electron moves
inductance between coils is
along a straight line. The
(a) 0 (b) 0.5 H (c) 2 H (d) 3H
direction of the induced

s
Ans. (c) 2 H

a
current if any in the loop is e

iv D
Given: φB = 2 × 10-2 Wb, I = 0.01 A
(a) variable (b) clockwise As φB = MI

Sh
φB
(c) anticlockwise (d) zero ∴ Mutual inductance between two coils, M = I
Ans. (b) clockwise
2×10 -2 Wb
As e is moving from right to left so = =2H
0.01 A
current will be left to right in wire so
(iii) Mutual inductance of two coils can be increased
induced current in the loop is clockwise.
e by
(v) Two identical coils A and B are kept in a (a) decreasing the number of turns in the coils
horizontal tube side without touching each (b) increasing the number of turns in the coils
other. If the current in the coil A increases with (c) winding the coils on wooden cores
time, in response, the coil B (d) none of these.
Ans. (b) increasing the number of turns in the coils
(a) is attracted by A (b) remains stationary
m o m r N 1N 2 A
(c) is repelled (d) rotates
Mutual inductance of coils, M =
Ans. (c) is repelled
l
It is clear that mutual inductance of coils can be increased
When current in coil A increase with time, there will be a
by increasing the number of turns in the coils.
change of flux in coil B which will induce a current in coil
B. Now according to Lenz’s law, the direction of induced (iv) When a sheet of iron is placed in between
current in B will be opposite to the direction of current in A. the two co-axial, then the mutual inductance
Thus, if two loops carry current in opposite direction they between the coils will
will repel each other. (a) increase (b) decrease
3. Read the para given below and answer the (c) remains same (d) cannot be predicted
Ans. (a) increase
questions that follow:
We know that the mutual inductance depends (directly
Mutual inductance. Mutual inductance is the proportional) on the permeability of the medium surrounding
phenomenon of inducing emf in a coil, due to the coils. When the permeability of the medium is increased
a change of current in the neighbouring coil. by inserting a sheet of iron, then the mutual inductance
The amount of mutual inductance that links between the coils also increase.
one coil to another depends very much on the (v) The SI unit of mutual inductance is
relative positioning of two coils, their geometry (a) ohm (b) mho
and relative separation between them. Mutual (c) henry (d) none of these
inductance between the two coils increase µr Ans. (c) henry
 Competency Based Questions n C–41

4. Read the para given below and answer the Any charge in current
questions that follow: sets up an induced emf
Eddy Current and their effects. Currents can be in the coil. Thus, self
induced not only in conducting coils, but also in inductance of a coil is the
conducting sheets or blocks. Current is induced induced emf set up in it
in solid metallic masses when the magnetic flux when the current passing
threading through them changes. Such current through it changes at the G
flow in the form of irregularly shaped loops unit rate. It is a measure
throughout the body of the metal. These current of the opposition to the growth or the decay of
look like eddies or whirlpools in water so they current flowing through the coil. Also, value of
are known as eddy current. Eddy current have self inductance depends on the number of turns

COMPETENCY
both undesirable effects and practically useful in the solenoid, its area of cross-section and the
application. For example it causes unnecessary permeability of its core material.
heating and wastage of power in electric motors, (i) The inductance in a coil plays the same role as
dynamos and in the cores of transformers. (a) inertia in mechanics (b) energy in mechanics
(i) The working of speedometers of trains is based on
(c) momentum in mechanics
(a) wattless currents (b) eddy currents
(c) alternating currents (d) pulsating currents (d) force in mechanics
Ans. (b) eddy currents Ans. (a) inertia in mechanics

(ii) Identify the wrong statement. (ii) A current of 2.5 A flows through a coil of
(a) Eddy current are produced in a steady inductance 5 H. The magnetic flux linked with
magnetic field. the coil is
(b) Induction furnace uses eddy currents to (a) 0.5 Wb (b) 12.5 Wb
produce heat. (c) zero (d) 2 Wb

s
(c) Eddy currents can be used to produce braking

a
Ans. (b) 12.5 Wb
force in moving trains.

iv D
(d) Power meters work on the principle of eddy Given. I = 2.5 A, L = 5 H
Magnetic flux linked with coil, φB = LI = (5 H)(2.5A) =

Sh
currents.
Ans. (a) Eddy current are produced in a steady 12.5 Wb
(iii) The inductance L of a solenoid depends upon
magnetic field.
its radius R as
(iii) Which of the following is the best method to
reduce eddy currents? (a) L ∝ R (b) L ∝ 1/R
(a) Laminating core (b) Using thick wires (c) L ∝ R2 (d) L ∝ R3
Ans. (c) L ∝ R2
(c) By reducing hysteresis loss
(d) None of these The inductance of a solenoid, L = µ0n2 Al
Ans. (a) Laminating core ...[where A = Area of cross-section of the solenoid
l = length, n = number of turns per unit length

BASED
To reduce the eddy currents in the metal armature of motors,
wire is wrapped around a number of thin metal sheet called As A = πR2, ...[where R = radius of the solenoid
lamination.  L = µ0n2πR2 l ∴ L  R2
(iv) The direction of eddy currents is given by (iv) The unit of self-inductance is
(a) Fleming’s left hand rule (a) Weber ampere (b) Weber-1 ampere
(b) Biot-Savart law (c) Lenz’s law (c) Ohm second (d) Farad
(d) Ampere-circuital law Ans. (c) Ohm second
Ans. (c) Lenz’s law dI ε dt
The magnitude of induced emf, ε = L ⇒ L = dI
dt
Eddy currents also oppose the change in magnetic flux, so volt × second
their direction is given by Lenz’s law. or, L = ampere = ohm second
(v) Eddy current can be used to heat localised
(v) The induced emf in a coil of 10 henry inductance
tissues of the human body. This branch of
in which current varies from 9 A to 4 A in 0.2
medical therapy is called
second is
(a) Hyperthermia (b) Diathermy
(a) 200 V (b) 250 V
(c) Inductothermy (d) None of these
Ans. (b) Diathermy (c) 300 V (d) 350 V
Ans. (b) 250 V
5. Read the para given below and answer the
Given. L = 10 henry, I1 = 9 A, I2 = 4 A and ∆t = 0.2 second
questions that follow:
dI
Self Induction. When a current I flows through Then induced emf, ε1 = -L dt =
a coil, flux linked with it is φ = LI, where L is
= -L (I 2 - I1 ) = − 10 ×(4 - 9) = 50 = 250 V
a constant known as self inductance of the coil. ∆t 0.2 0.2
 Chapter: Seven

Alternating Current
Alternating Current

Competency Based Questions

a s
V,I
(b)
 Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs)

iv D
V
1. Alternating voltage (V) is represented by the Vm

Sh
I
equation Im
(a) V(t) = Vm e wt (b) V(t) = Vm sin wt
(c) V(t) = Vm cot wt (d) V(t) = Vm tan wt 0
p
wt
2p
[Ans. (b)
2. The rms value of potential difference V shown
in the figure is
(c) V, I
V
V
Vm
I
V0 Im

0 wt
O t p 2p
T/2 T
V0 V0

(a) (b) V0 (c) (d) V0
3 2 2
 [Ans. (c) (d) V,I
3. The phase relationship between current and V
voltage in a pure resistive circuit is best Vm V
I
represented by Im
V,I
(a) V 0

p wt [Ans. (b)
I 2p
Vm
Im

0 p wt
2p 4. In the case of an inductor
p
(a) voltage lags the current by
2

C–42 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Competency Based Questions n C–43

p (c) Resistor and capacitor

(b) voltage leads the current by 2
(d) Only inductor [Ans. (c)
p 9. In which of the following circuits the maximum
(c) voltage leads the current by power dissipation is observed?
3
p (a) Pure capacitive circuit
(d) voltage leads the current by 4 [Ans. (b) (b) Pure inductive circuit
5. Which of the following graphs represents the (c) Pure resistive circuit
correct variation of inductive reactance XL with (d) None of these [Ans. (c)
frequency u? 10. In series LCR circuit, the phase angle between
supply voltage and current is

COMPETENCY
XL XL
R
(a) tan f = X L - X C (b) tan f =
R XL - XC
(a) (b)
R
(c) tan f = (d) tan f = X L + X C
u u XL + XC R
[Ans. (a)
XL XL 11. In a series LCR circuit the voltage across an
inductor, capacitor and resistor are 20 V, 20 V
(c) (d) and 40 V respectively. The phase difference
between the applied voltage and the current in
u u
the circuit is
[Ans. (b) (a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 0° [Ans. (d)

s
6. In a pure capacitive circuit if the frequency of ac 12. At resonance frequency the impedance in series

a
source is doubled, then its capacitive reactance

iv D
LCR circuit is
will be (a) maximum (b) minimum

Sh
(a) remains same (b) doubled
(c) zero (d) infinity [Ans. (b)
(c) halved (d) zero [Ans. (c)
13. At resonant frequency the current amplitude in
7. Which of the following graphs represents the series LCR circuit is
correct variation of capacitive reactance XC with
(a) maximum (b) minimum
frequency u?
(c) zero (d) infinity [Ans. (a)
XC XC
14. Quality factor and power factor both have the
dimensions of
(a) time (b) frequency

BASED
(a) (b)
(c) work (d) angle [Ans. (d)

15. The natural frequency (w0) of oscillations in LC
circuit is given by
u u
XC XC (a) 1 1
(b) 1 1
2p LC p 2LC
1
(c) (d) (c) (d) LC [Ans. (c)
LC
16. A transformer works on the principle of
(a) self induction
u u (b) electrical inertia
[Ans. (c)
(c) mutual induction
8. In an alternating current circuit consisting of
(d) magnetic effect of the electrical current
elements in series, the current increases on
[Ans. (c)
increasing the frequency of supply. Which of
17. For an ideal-step-down transformer, the quantity
the following elements are likely to constitute
which is constant for both the coils is
the circuit?
(a) current in the coils
(a) Only resistor
(b) voltage across the coils
(b) Resistor and inductor
 C–44 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(c) resistance of coils corresponding dissipation of energy is reduced (as H  I2R).

(d) power in the coils [Ans. (d) If transmission is done at low voltage then we have to use
thick wire in order to reduce the dissipation of energy. This
 Assertion-Reason Questions increase the cost of transmission lines wires. In order to
reduce both energy dissipation and cost of transmission
DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A) wire, transmission is done at high voltage by using step-up
and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option transformers.
out of the options given below: 4. Assertion: A transformer cannot work on D.C.
(a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements supply.
and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion. Reason: D.C. changes neither in magnitude nor
(b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements in direction.
but Reason is not correct explanation for Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct
Assertion. statements and Reason is correct explanation
(c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is for Assertion.
wrong statement.
Transformer works on the principle of mutual induction

(d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is i.e., if two coils are inductively coupled and when current
correct statement. or magnetic flux is changed through one of the two coils,
1. Assertion: The alternating current lags behind
Alternating Current

then induced emf is produced in the other coil. So whenever

the emf by a phase angle of π/2, when A.C. there is change in current or magnetic flux, only then emf is
flows through an inductor. induced. But in case of D.C. current or voltage, emf is not
Reason: The inductive reactance increases as the induced because it remain constant throughout and never
changes its direction and magnitude. Therefore transformer
frequency of A.C. source decreases.
cannot work when D.C. is applied.
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is
wrong statement. 5. Assertion: Soft iron is used as a core of

s
transformer.

a
When pure inductor is connected to source of an alternating

iv D
emf, then instantaneous value of alternating emf is given by Reason: Area of hysteresis loop for soft iron is
E = E0 sin ωt, and corresponding alternating current is small.

Sh
given by I = I0 sin(ωt - p/2). From these two equations, it Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct
follows that alternating current lags behind emf by a phase statements and Reason is correct explanation
angle of p/2. The inductive reactance,
for Assertion.
XL = ωL = 2pfL, so when frequency increases correspondingly
The alternating current flowing through the coils,

inductive reactance also increases.
magnetises and demagnetises the iron core again and again
2. Assertion: When capacitive reactance is smaller over complete cycles. During each cycle of magnetisation,
than the inductive reactance in LCR series circuit, some energy is lost due to hysteresis, the energy lost during
emf leads the current. a cycle of magnetisation being equal to area of hysteresis
Reason: The phase angle is the angle between loop (in magnitude). Energy loss can be reduced by selecting
the alternating emf and alternating current of the the material core, which has narrow hysteresis loop, that is
circuit. why soft iron core is used.
Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct 6. Assertion: We use thick wire in the secondary
statements but Reason is not correct explanation coil of a step down transformer to reduce the
for Assertion. production of heat.
The phase angle for LCR series circuit is give by
Reason: When the plane of the armature is
XL - XC ω L - 1 / ωC parallel to the line of force of magnetic field, the
tan q = =
R R magnitude of induced emf is maximum.
Where XL, XC are inductive reactance and capacitive
reactance respectively. When XL > XC tan q is positive Ans. (b) Assertion and Reason both are correct
i.e., q is positive (between 0 and π/2). Hence emf leads the statements but Reason is not correct explanation
current. for Assertion.
A step-down transformer converts electrical energy from

3. Assertion: Long distance transmission of A.C. is
a high voltage to one at a low voltage. Accordingly the
carried out at extremely high voltage. current in the secondary will be larger than that in the
Reason: For large distance, voltage has to be primary. In order to produce less heat in secondary, we use
large. a wire of lesser resistance i.e. think wire. We also know that
Ans. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is when the plane of the armature is parallel to the lines of
wrong statement. force of magnetic field, the rate of change of magnetic flux
The transmission is done at high voltage due to which
linked with it is maximum. Therefore the emf induced in the
current through the wire is reduced. By reduction in current armature in this orientation is maximum.
 Competency Based Questions n C–45

7. Assertion: An alternating current shows magnetic  Case Based Questions

effect. 1. Read the para given below and answer the
Reason: Magnitude of alternating current varies questions that follow:
with time.
LCR Circuit. When a pure resistance R, pure
Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
inductor L and an ideal capacitor of capacitance
statements but reason is not correct explanation
C is connected in series to a source of alternating
for assertion. emf then current at any instant through the
Like direct current, an alternating current also produces

three elements has the same amplitude and is
magnetic field. But the magnitude and direction of the field
represented as I = I0sinwt. However, voltage
goes on changing continuously with time.

COMPETENCY
across each element has a different phase
8. Assertion: A bulb connected in series with a relationship with the current as shown in graph.
solenoid is connected to A.C. source. If a soft iron The effective resistance of RLC circuit is called
core is introduced in the solenoid, the bulb will impedance (Z) of the circuit and the voltage
glow brighter. leads the current by a phase angle f.
Reason: On introducing soft iron core in the Y
solenoid, the inductance decreases.
Ans. (d) Assertion is false statement but reason is B K
correct statement. E0
VL
On introducing soft iron core, the bulb will glow dimmer.
90º
This is because on introducing soft iron core in the solenoid, φ
O X
its inductance L increases, the inductive reactance, XL =wL 90º A I0
increases and hence the current through the bulb deceases.

s
VR
C

a
9. Assertion: Capacitor serves as a block for D.C. VC

iv D
and offers an easy path to A.C.
Reason: Capacitive reactance is inversely

Sh
proportional to frequency. Z’

Ans. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct A resistor of 12 Ω, a capacitor of reactance 14 Ω
statements and Reason is correct explanation and a pure inductor of inductance 0.1 H are
joined in series and placed across 200 V, 50 Hz
for Assertion.
The capacitive reactance of capacitor is given by
a.c. supply.
1 1 (i) The value of inductive reactance is
XC = ωC = 2πfC (a) 15 Ω (b) 31.4 Ω
So this is infinite for D.C. (f = 0) and has a finite value for (c) 20 Ω (d) 30 Ω

BASED
A.C. Therefore a capacitor blocks D.C. and offers an easy Ans. (b) 31.4 Ω
path for A.C. Given. R = 12 Ω, XC = 14 Ω, L = 0.1 H,  = 50 Hz
10. Assertion: At resonance, LCR series circuit have  XL = wL = 2pu L = 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 0.1 = 31.4 Ω
a maximum current. (ii) The value of impedance is
Reason: At resonance, in LCR series circuit, the (a) 20 Ω (b) 15 Ω
current and emf are in phase with each other. (c) 30 Ω (d) 21.13 Ω
Ans. (d) 21.13 Ω
Ans. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct
statements but reason is not correct explanation As we know, Impedance, Z = R 2 + (XL - XC )2
for assertion. = (12)2 + (31.4 - 14)2 = 21.13 Ω
1 (iii) What is the value of current in the circuit?
At resonance of XL = XC or wL = wC . Because of this
(a) 5 A (b) 15 A
impedance of LCR series circuit become equal to resistance (c) 10 A (d) 9.46 A
( 2 2
)
of circuit Z = R + (XL - XC ) . Ans. (d) 9.46 A

E E Ev 200 V
Therefore, I = Z = R , at resonance, current in LCR series Using point (ii), Iv = =
Z 21.13
= 9.46 A
circuit is maximum. Correspondingly phase angle is also ...[Given Ev = 200
equal to zero. Therefore emf and current are in phase in LCR
series circuit.
 C–46 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(iv) What is the value of the phase angle between (iv) In a capacitive circuit, by what value of phase
current and voltage? angle does alternating current leads the emf?
(a) 53º9’ (b) 63º9’ (a) 45º (b) 90º
(c) 55º4’ (d) 50º (c) 75º (d) 60º
Ans. (c) 55º4’ Ans. (b) 90º
XL - XC 31.4 - 14 (v) One microfarad capacitor is joined to a 200 V,
As we know, tan f = R
=
12
= 1.45
50 Hz alternator. The rms current through
 f = tan-1 (1.45) = 55º4’ capacitor is
(v) From graph, which one is true from following? (a) 6.28 × 10-2 A (b) 7.5 × 10-4 A
(c) 10.52 × 10-2 A (d) 15.25 × 10-2 A
(a) VL ≥ VC (b) VL < VC Ans. (a) 6.28 × 10-2 A
(c) VL > VC (d) VL = VC Ev Ev
As we know, Current, Iv =
=
XC 1 / 2πυC = (2puC)EV
Ans. (c) V > V
L C
2. Read the para given below and answer the  Iv = 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 10-6 × 200 = 6.28 × 10-2A
questions that follow:
3. Read the para given below and answer the
AC Voltage Applied to a Capacitor. Let a source questions that follow:
Alternating Current

of alternating emf E = E0sinwt be connected to a

Average power associated with an inductor
capacitor of capacitance C. If ‘I’is the instantaneous
and capacitor. The power averaged over one full
value of current in the circuit at instant t, then I =
cycle of a.c. is known as average power. IT is also
E0  π VI
sin  ωt +  .
1 / ωC  2 known as true power. Pav = VrmsIrms cos φ = 02 0
The capacitive reactance limits the amplitude of cos φ.

s
current in a purely in a capacitive circuit and it is Root mean square or simply rms watts refer

a
1 to continuous power. A circuit containing a 80

iv D
given by XC = . mH inductor and a 60 F capacitor in series is
wC

Sh
C
connected to a 230 V, 50 Hz supply. The resistance
of the circuit is negligible.

80 mH 60 mF

∼
(i) What is the unit of capacitive reactance? ∼
(a) farad (b) ampere 230 V, 50 Hz
(c) ohm (d) ohm-1 (i) The value of current amplitude is
Ans. (c) ohm
(a) 15 A (b) 11.63 A
Ohm is the unit of capacitive reactance. (c) 17.65 A (d) 6.33 A
(ii) The capacitive reactance of a 5 mF capacitor for Ans. (b) 11.63 A
a frequency of 106 Hz is Inductance, L = 80 mH = 80 × 10-3 H
(a) 0.032 Ω (b) 2.52 Ω Capacitance, C = 60 mF = 60 × 10-6 F, V = 230 V
(c) 1.25 Ω (d) 4.51 Ω Frequency, u = 50 Hz
Ans. (a) 0.032 Ω Here, w = 2pu = 100p rad s-1
1 1 Peak voltage, V0 = V 2 = 230 2 V

Capacitive reactance, XC = ωC = 2πυC
V0
= Maximum current is given by, I0 =  1 
1  ωL − 
= = 0.032 Ω ωC  
2p ×10 6 × 5 ×10 -6
230 2
(iii) In a capacitive circuit, resistance to the flow of I0 =  1 
-3
current is offered by  100 π × 80 ×10 − 
 100 π ×60 ×10 -6 
(a) resistor (b) capacitor
230 2
(c) inductor (d) frequency I0 = = -11.63 A
 1000 
Ans. (b) capacitor  8π − 
 6π 
In capacitive circuit, resistance to the flow of current is
offered by the capacitor. Amplitude of maximum current, I0 = 11.63 A
 Competency Based Questions n C–47

(ii) Find rms value. 120 × 50

(a) 6 A (b) 5.25 A  Es = = 3 V
2000
(c) 8.23 A (d) 7.52 A (ii) The value of current in the bulb is
Ans. (c) 8.23 A (a) 7 A (b) 15 A
rms value of current, (c) 3 A (d) 5 A
I0 -1163 Ans. (d) 5 A
I = = = -8.23 A
2 2 Es 3
1
As we know, Is =
R
⇒ Is = 0.6 = 5 A
Negative sign appears as wL < wC .
(iii) The value of current in primary coil is
(iii) The average power transferred to inductor is (a) 0.125 A (b) 2.25 A

COMPETENCY
(a) zero (b) 7 W (c) 1.51 A (d) 3.52 A
(c) 2.5 W (d) 5 W Ans. (a) 0.125 A
Ans. (a) zero
Ip Es
Average power consumed by the inductor is zero because of As Is
=
Ep
≠
phase difference of 2 between voltage and current through Es 3
 Ip = E × Is = 120 × 5 = 0.125 A
inductor. p

(iv) The average power transferred to the capacitor (iv) Power in primary coil is
is (a) 20 W (b) 5 W
(a) 5 W (b) 0 (c) 10 W (d) 15 W
(c) 11 W (d) 15 W Ans. (d) 15 W
Ans. (b) 0 Power in primary, Pp = Ep × Ip = 120 × 0.125 = 15 W
Average power consumed by the capacitor is zero because of (v) Power is secondary coil is

s
≠

a
phase difference of 2 between voltage and current through (a) 15 W (b) 20 W

iv D
capacitor. (c) 7 W (d) 8 W
(v) What is the total average power absorbed by Ans. (a) 15 W

Sh
the circuit? Power in secondary coil, Ps = Es × Is = 3 × 5 = 15 W
(a) zero (b) 10 W
5. Read the para given below and answer the
(c) 2.5 W (d) 15 W
Ans. (a) zero
questions that follow:
Resonant Series LCR Circuit. When the
4. Read the para given below and answer the frequency of ac supply is such that the inductive
questions that follow: reactance and capacitive reactance become equal,
Transformer. A transformer is essentially an the impedance of the series LCR circuit is equal to
the ohmic resistance in the circuit. Such a series

BASED
a.c. device. It cannot work on d.c. It changes
alternating voltages or currents. It does not LCR circuit is known as resonant series LCR circuit
affect the frequency of a.c. It is based on the and the frequency of the ac supply is known as
phenomenon of mutual induction. A transformer resonant frequency. Resonance phenomenon is
essentially consists of two coils of insulated exhibited by a circuit only if both L and C are
copper wire having different number of turns and present in the circuit. We cannot have resonance
wound on the same soft iron core. The number of in a RL or RC circuit. A series LCR circuit with L
turns in the primary and secondary coils of an = 0.12 H, C = 480 nF, R = 23 Ω is Connect to a 230
ideal transformer are 2000 and 50 respectively. V variable frequency supply.
The primary coil is connected to a main supply
of 120 V and secondary coil is connected to a 0.12 H 480 nF 23 Ω
bulb of resistance 0.6 Ω.
(i) The value of voltage across the secondary coil is
(a) 5 V (b) 2 V ∼
230 V
(c) 3 V (d) 10 V
Ans. (c) 3 V (i) Find the value of source for which current
E n ns
amplitude is maximum.

As s = s ⇒ Es = Ep (a) 222.32 Hz (b) 550.52 Hz
Ep np np
(c) 663.48 Hz (d) 770 Hz
 C–48 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (c) 663.48 Hz (iii) The value of maximum power is

Here, L = 0.12 H, C = 480 nF = 480 × 10-9 F (a) 2200 W (b) 2299.3 W
R = 23 Ω, V = 230 V (c) 5500 W (d) 4700 W
Ans. (b) 2299.3 W
V0 = 2 × 230 = 325.22 V
1
V0
Maximum power, Pmax = 2
2 (I0) R
I0 = 2
 1  1
R 2 +  ωL -  = × (14.14)2 × 23 = 2299.3 W
 ωC  2
1 (iv) What is the Q-factor of the given circuit?
At resonance, wL - wC = 0
(a) 25 A (b) 42.21 A
1 1 (c) 35.42 A (d) 21.74 A
w = LC =
= 4166.67 rad s-1 Ans. (d) 21.74 A
0.12× 480 ×10 9
4166.67 XL ωr L
Now, uR = 2× 3.14 = 663.48 Hz

Quality factor Q = R
=
R

(ii) The value of maximum current is 4166.67 ×0.12

= = 21.74 A
23
(a) 14.14 A (b) 22.52 A
(c) 50.25 A (d) 47.41 A (v) At resonance which of the following physical
Alternating Current

Ans. (a) 14.14 A quantity is maximum?

V0 325.22 (a) Impedance (b) Current

Current, I0 = R
=
23
= 14.14 A (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Ans. (b) Current

----------

a s
Sh iv D
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 9

This value is independent of U. Hence, the electric

field intensity is same for all points near the
charged sheet. This is called uniform electric field
+ T
intensity. +
46. State ‘Gauss law’ in electrostatics. Use this law
to derive an expression for the electric field due
to an infinitely long straight wire of linear
charge density λ cm–1. (Delhi) 48. Use Gauss’s law to derive the expression for the
Ans. *DXVV¶V ODZ LQ HOHFWURVWDWLFV  It states that ´WKH electric field between two uniformly charged
large parallel sheets with surface charge
1
WRWDOHOHFWULFIOX[RYHUWKHVXUIDFH6LQYDFFXPLV densities σ and –σσ respectively. (All India)
ε0 Ans. Refer to Q. 45, Page 8
WLPHV WKH WRWDO FKDUJH Tµ
σ σ
→ → T E= E1 =
Contained in side S ∴ φE = ∫ E .G 6 =
ε0 In region I
2ε 0
I
+σ
2ε 0 – σ
E1
S E1
→ → → → E1 II III
E E G S 1
σ
E E1 = – , I E2
2ε 0
→ →
E2
G62 G63 σ E2 =
σ
S3 E2 = 2ε 0
S2 2ε 0
Total field EI
(OHFWULF ILHOG GXH WR DQ LQILQLWHO\ ORQJ VWUDLJKW = E1 + E2
ZLUH  Consider an infinitely long straight line −σ σ
charge having linear charge density λ to = + =0
2ε 0 2ε 0
determine its electric field at distance U. Consider
a cylindrical Gaussian surface of radius U and
length Ocoaxial with the charge. By symmetry, the
D a sIn region II
EII =
σ
+
σ
=
σ
electric field E has same magnitude at each point
of the curved surface S1 and is directed radially
outward.
Total flux through the cylindrical surface, S h i v In region III
E1 =
2ε 0 2ε 0

σ
2ε 0
, E2 = –
ε0

σ
2ε 0
→ → → → → → → → σ ⎛ σ ⎞
∫ E . G 6 = ∫ E . G61 + ∫ E . G62 + ∫ E . G63 ∴ E = E1 + E2 = + −
2ε 0 ⎜⎝ 2ε 0 ⎟⎠
=0
V1 V2 V3

=
∫ EG6 cos 0° + ∫ EG6
V1
1
V2
2 cos 90° + ∫ EG6
V3
3 cos 90°
49. State Gauss’s law.

A thin straight infinitely long conducting wire
 ∫
= E GS1 = E × 2 πUO
of linear charge density ‘λ λ’ is enclosed by a cy-
As λ is the charge per unit length and O is the lindrical surface of radius ‘U’ and length ‘O’—its
length of the wire, so charge enclosed is, axis coinciding with the length of the wire.
T = λO Obtain the expression for the electric field, indi-
By Gauss’s theorem : cating its direction, at a point on the surface of
→ → λO
∫
T the cylinder. (Comptt. Delhi)
E . G61 = ⇒ E × 2 πUO =
 ε0 ε
 0 Ans. *DXVV·VODZ Gauss law states that ´7RWDOIOX[HOHF
λ WULF IOX[ RYHU WKH FORVHG VXUIDFHV LQ YDFXXP LV ε
∴ E=
WLPHV WKH WRWDO FKDUJH 4 FRQWDLQHG LQVLGH 6µ
 ε 0 U
2 π
→ → Q
47. A positive point charge (+ T) is kept in the
vicinity of an uncharged conducting plate. ∫
LH φε = E . G V =
ε0
V
Sketch electric field lines originating from the Refer to Q. 34, Page 6
point on to the surface of the plate.
Derive the expression for the electric field at the
surface of a charged conductor. (All India) 50. (D) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. units.
Ans. 5HSUHVHQWDWLRQRIHOHFWULFILHOG (due to a positive (E) Consider a uniform electric field
charge) →
E = 3 × 10 L̂ N/C. Calculate the flux of this
3
 10 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

field through a square surface of area Ans. (L) Magnitude, EAB

10 cm2 when A Enet
α
(L) its plane is parallel to the \ – ] plane, → 1 T
|E AB |= =E
and 4 π ∈0 D2 EAC

(LL) the normal to its plane makes a 60° → 1 2T
|E AC |= = 2E
angle with the [-axis. (Comptt. Delhi) 4 π ∈0 D2
 +T –2T
Ans. (D) (OHFWULF IOX[ Refer to Q. 31, Page 5 B
+ 2 × 2E × E × ⎛⎜ − ⎞⎟
1 C
Enet = ( 2 E) 2 + E2
⎝ 2⎠
→
(E) Given : E = 3 × 10 3 L̂ 1
[ Q cos 120° = –
2
10
S = 10 cm2 = m2 = 10–3 m2 = 4E 2 + E 2 − 2E 2
10 −2 × 10 −2
(L) Flux (φ) = E × S = 3 × 103 × 10–3 1 T 3
= 3E 2 = E 3 =
4 π ∈0 D 2
= 3 Nm2C–1 
(LL) Direction of resultant electric field at vertex A,
1 E AB sin 120°
(LL) (3 × 103) × (10–3) cos (60°) = 3 × tan α =
2 E AC + E AB cos 120°
= 1.5 Nm2C–1 3 E× 3
E×
= 2 = 2 = 3
⎛ −1⎞ 3E 3
2E + E × ⎜ ⎟
51. Two charged spherical conductors of radii R1 ⎝ 2⎠ 2
and R2 when connected by a conducting wire 1
= = tan 30°
acquire charges T1 and T2 respectively. Find the 3
ratio of their surface charge densities in terms ∴ α = 30° (with side AC)
of their radii. (Delhi) 53. Two point charges
+ 3T and – 4T are placed A

s
Ans. Two charged spherical conductors of radii R1 and
R2 when connected by a conducting wire acquire
charges T1 and T2 respectively. Thus these two

iv D a at the vertices 'B' and 'C'

of an equilateral triangle
ABC of side 'D' as given

Sh
conductors have a common potential V. D D
in the figure. Obtain the
1 T1 1 T2
V= . V= . expression for (L) the
4 πε
 0 R 1 4 πε
 0 R 2 magnitude and (LL) the +3T –4T
T T T1 R 1 direction of the resultant B D C
Q 1 = 2 =
R
 1 R 2 T
 2 R 2 electric field at the vertex A due to these two
T1 T2
charges. (Comptt. All India)
σ1 = 2
σ2 = 2 Ans. (L) Magnitude,
4πR 1 4πR
 2
 → 1 3T ⎡ 1 T⎤
|E AB |= = 3E, where ⎢E =
T1 4 π ∈0 D2 ⎣ 4 π ∈0 D 2 ⎥⎦
 
σ1 4 πR 1 T R
2
R R
2 2 → 1 4T
∴ = = 1 × 22 = 1 × 22 |E AC |= = 4E
σ2 T2 T2 R R2 R 4 π ∈0 D2
1 1 
2
4 πR 2
(3E)2 + ( 4E)2 + 2(3E) × ( 4E) × ⎛⎜ − ⎞⎟
 1
Enet =
⎝ 2⎠
σ1 R2
∴ = ⎧Q θ = 120° ⎫
σ2 R1 ⎪ ⎪
⎨ 1⎬
52. Two point charges + T ⎪⎩ cos θ = − 2 ⎪⎭
A EAB
and – 2T are placed at
the vertices 'B' and 'C'
of an equilateral D
D
A θ Enet
triangle ABC of side
α
'D' as given in the
figure. Obtain the +T –2T
expression for (L) the B D D EAC
C
magnitude and (LL) the D
direction of the resultant electric field at the
vertex A due to these two charges. +3T –4T
(Comptt. All India) B D C
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 11

= 9E2 + 16E2 − 12E2 intensity E at a point on the axis of the ring.

Hence show that for points at large distances
1 T 13
= 13E2 = E 13 = from the ring, it behaves like a point charge.
4 π ∈0 D 2
 (Delhi)
(LL) Direction,
Ans. Electric Intensity on the axis of a ring:
3
|E AB |sin 120° 3E × dq
tan α= = 2
|E AC |+|E AB |cos 120° ⎛ 1⎞ dE sin θ
4E + 3E × −⎜ ⎟ a r dE
⎝ 2⎠
3E 3 × 2 3 3 ⎛ 3 3⎞ θ
dE cos θ
tan α =
2 × 5E
=
5
∴ α = tan–1 ⎜ ⎟ x ⎯P→ θ
←⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ + dE cos θ
⎝ 5 ⎠
dE
dE sin θ
dq
→ 2 πD
54. An electric dipole of dipole moment S is
→
placed in a uniform electric field E . Obtain the
Net electric field at point P = ∫ GE cos θ
 0
expression for the torque →
GE = Electric field due to a small element
τ experienced by the
having charge GT
dipole. Identify two pairs of perpendicular 1 GT
vectors in the expression. (Comptt. Delhi) =
πε
 0 U
4 2
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 69, Page 16 GT
(LL) Two pairs of perpendicular vectors are, Let λ = Linear charge density =
GO
→ GT = λGO
(D) →τ is perpendicular to S 2 πD
1 λGO [ [
(E) →τ is perpendicular to E
→ Hence, E = ∫ , 2 × , where cos θ =
4 πε 0 U U U
55. (D) Two spherical conductors of radii R1 and R2
(R2 > R1) are charged. If they are connected
D a s =
λ[
 0
(2πD)

v
πε
 0 U
4 3
by a conducting wire, find out the ratio of
the surface charge densities on them.
(E) A steady current flows in a metallic
conductor of non-uniform cross-section.S h i =
1
4 πε 0

= λ × 2πD
2
Q[
2
3
([ + D ) 2
, where total charge Q

Which of these quantities is constant along At large distance LH [ >> D

the conductor : current, current density, 1 Q
 E  . 2
electric field, drift speed? (Comptt. Delhi) 4
 πε 0 [
Ans. (D) When two charged spherical conductors of This is the Electric Field due to a point charge at
Radii R1 and R2 respectively (R2 > R1) are distance [
connected by a conducting wire, we know 57. Two thin concentric and coplanar spherical
that the common potential (V) is given by, shells, of radii D and E (E > D) carry charges, T
T1 T2 and Q, respectively. Find the magnitude of the
V= =
F F2 electric field, at a point distant [, from their
 1
Q C for a spherical conductor, C = 4π∈0R, common centre for
T1 T2 T T (L) 0 < [ < D (LL) D ≤ [ < E
We have, = ⇒ 1 = 2
4 πε 0 R 1 4 πε 0 R 1 R1 R 2 (LLL) E ≤ [ < ∞ (Comptt. Delhi)
 
T R
⇒ 1 = 1 Ans. Magnitude of Electric field : Two thin concentric
T R2
 2 and coplanar spherical shells of radii ‘D’ and ‘E’ (E
2
σ1 T1 4 πε 0R 2 T > D) carry charges ‘T’ and ‘Q’ respectively.
= × Qσ=
σ2 4 πε 0R 1
2 T2 4 πε 0 R 2 (L) For 0 < [ < D

T R
2
R R
2
R Point lies inside both the spherical shells.
= 1 × 22 = 1 × 22 = 2 Hence, E([) = 0
T2 R R2 R R1
 1 1
σ1 R2
∴ = T
σ2 R1
Q
(E) Current
E
D

56. A charge is distributed uniformly over a ring of

radius ‘D’. Obtain an expression for the electric
 12 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(LL) For D ≤ [ < E

Point is outside the spherical shell of radius ‘D’
but inside the spherical shell of radius ‘E’. o o
p +q
–q E
1 T
∴ E([) = . 2
4 πε
 0 [
(LLL) For E ≤
[ < ∞ (E) For unstable equilibrium, the angle
Point is outside of both the spherical shells. between S and E is 180°,
Total effective charge at the centre equals
(Q + T).
1 (T + Q) o
p o
∴ E([) = . +q –q E
4 πε 0 [2
58. A charge +Q, is uniformly distributed within a
sphere of radius R. Find the electric field, due to
this charge distribution, at a point distant U from 60. (L) Obtain the expression for the torque → τ
the centre of the sphere where :
experienced by an electric dipole of dipole
(L) 0 < U < R and (LL) U > R → →
(Comptt. Outside Delhi) moment S in a uniform electric E .
Ans. We have (LL) What will happen if the field were not
1 T uniform? (Delhi)
E= , for a point charge Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 69 (D), Page 16
4
 πε 0 U
2
(LL) If the electric field is non uniform, the dipole
Now (volume) charge density experiences a translatory force as well as a
torque.

s
Q
ρ=

a
61. State Gauss’s law in electrostatics. Derive an
⎛ 4π 3 ⎞

iv D
⎜ R ⎟ expression for the electric field due to an
⎝ 3 ⎠
infinitely long straight uniformly charged wire.

Sh
(L) ∴ Charge contained within a sphere of (Comptt. Delhi)
radius U (0 < U < R) Ans. Gauss Theorem : The surface integral of electric
4π 3 Q 4π 3 U3 1
Q′ = ρ. .U = × .U = Q 3 field over a closed surface is equal to times the
3 ⎛ 4π 3 ⎞ 3 R ε0
⎜ R ⎟
⎝ 3 ⎠ charge enclosed by the surface.
∴ Electric Field → → T
1 Q′ ⎛ 1 ⎞ 3
U ⎛ 1 Q ⎞
$OWHUQDWLYHO\ ∫ E . G V = ε0

E= = × (Q) 3 = ⎜ . .U⎟ ([SUHVVLRQIRUHOHFWULFILHOG
4 πε 0 U 2 ⎜⎝ 4 πε 0 U 2 ⎟⎠ R ⎝ 4 πε 0 R 3 ⎠ +
 Flux through the Gaussian +
+
1 QU surface +
= +
= Flux through the curved +
4 πε
 0 R
3 +
cylindrical part of the +
(LL) For U > R P r +
surface + l
Electric field due to a point charge (assumed +
= E × 2πUO E +
+
to be kept at centre) at distance ‘U’ : Charge enclosed by the +
+
1 Q surface = λO + r
E= +
λO +
4 πε 0 U
2
⇒ E × 2πUO= +
+
ε
 0
λ
or E=
59. (L) Derive the expression for electric field at a 2 πε
 0 U
point on the equatorial line of an electric
dipole.
(LL) Depict the orientation of the dipole in
Long Answer Type Questions (LA)
(D) stable, (E) unstable equilibrium in a (5 Marks)
uniform electric field. (Delhi)
Ans. (L) Refer to Q.66, Page 14 62. (D) Using Gauss’ law, derive an expression for
(LL) (D) For stable equilibrium, the angle between the electric field intensity at any point
S and E is 0°, outside a uniformly charged thin spherical
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 13

shell of radius R and charge density σ C/m2. (LL) Flux passing through the sphere
Draw the field lines when the charge Q 19.6 × 10 −4
density of the sphere is (L) positive, φ= or φ =
ε0 8.85 × 10 −12
(LL) negative. ∴ φ = 2.2 × 108 Nm2/C
(E) A uniformly charged conducting sphere of 63. (D) Define electric flux. Write its SI units.
2.5 m in diameter has a surface charge (E) The electric field components due to a
density of 100 μC/m2. Calculate the charge inside the cube of side 0.1 m are as
(L) charge on the sphere shown :
(LL) total electric flux passing through the E[ = α[, where α = 500 N/C-m
sphere (Delhi) E\ = 0, E] = 0.
Ans. (D) (L) To find out electric field at a point \
outside a spherical charged shell we
imagine a symmetrical Gaussian surface
in such a way that the point lies on it.
→ → T
From Gauss’s theorem, φ = ∫ E .G S = εP0 0
0.1 m
[
S
Flux φ through S’ ]
0.1 m
→ →
φ= ∫ E . G S = ∫ EGS = E.4πU Calculate
2

S ′ S′
(L) the flux through the cube, and
(LL) the charge inside the cube. (All India)
T
⇒ E.4πU2 = P Ans. (D) Electric flux through a surface represents the
ε 0 total number of electric lines of force crossing

s
1 T the surface.
⇒ E= . P2
4 πε
 0 U

iv D a ∴ S.I. unit is Nm2 C–1.

(E) (L) Flux through R.H.S. of the cube is

Sh
→ φ1 = E[1.A
P E
→ ⎡Q θ = 0°
= (α[) . (O)2 ⎢ α = 500 N/C–m
U →
G V = (500 × 0.2) (0.1)2 ⎢ [ = 0.2 m
→ ⎢ O = 0.1 m
R = 1Nm2 C–1 ⎣
⎯⎯→ Surface
Charge (LL) Flux through L.H.S. of the cube is
Density φ2 = E[2 . A
= – (α[) . O2 ⎡Q θ = 180°
⎢ [ = 0.1 m
(LL) = – (500 × 0.1) (0.1) ⎢ O = 0.1 m
2

= – 0.5 Nm2/C ⎢ α = 500N/C–m

⎣
Net flux φ = φ1 + φ2
= 1 – 0.5 = 0.5 Nm2/C
T
+ – (LLL) As φ = ∴ T = ε0 φ
ε
 0
⇒ T = 8.854 × 10–12 × 0.5 = 4.4 × 10–12 C

for T > 0 for T < 0 64. (D) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. units.
(E) Using Gauss’s law, prove that the electric
2.5
(E) (L) Given : U = m, σ = 100 μC/m2 field at a point due to a uniformly charged
2
infinite plane sheet is independent of the
Charge on the sphere, Q = σ.4πU2
distance from it.
2 (F) How is the field directed if (L) the sheet is
⎛ 2.5 ⎞
or Q = 100 × 10–6 × 4 × 3.14 × ⎜ ⎟ positively charged, (LL) negatively charged?
⎝ 2 ⎠
(Delhi)
= 19.6 × 10–4 C = 1.96 × 10–3C
Ans. (D) (OHFWULFIOX[The electric flux through a given
area held inside an electric field is the measure
14 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

of the total number of electric lines of force the expressions for the electric field at points
passing normally through that area. P1 and P2.
S.I. units of electric flux = NC–1m2 = Nm2C–1 or Vm (F) Draw the pattern of electric field lines in
→
→ this arrangement. (Comptt. All India)
Mathematically, φE = ∫EΔ V Ans. (D) (OHFWULF IOX[  Refer to Q. 64 (D), Page 13-14
V (E) &DOFXODWLRQ RI HOHFWULF ILHOG DW SRLQW 3
(E) Consider a thin, infinite plane sheet of charge
Net charge enclosed by the *DXVVLDQVXUIDFHis
with uniform surface charge density σ. We
+Q
wish to calculate its electric field at a point P
at distance U from it. → → Q
Plane sheet,
∴ φ= ∫ E. G V

=
ε0
charge density σ
→ →
E P′ P E
A r
<

Gaussian surface passing

+Q through point P1
Cross-sectional U
area A Cavity
By symmetry, electric field E points P1
outwards normal to the sheet. Also, it must
As electric field of positive charge is radially
have same magnitude and opposite direction
outwards, it is parallel to the area vector on
at two points P anel P’ equidistant from the
sheet and on opposite sides. We choose the surface chosen.
→ Q
cylindrical Gaussian surface of cross- →
sectional area A and length 2U with its axis
∴ ∫ E. G V = ∫ E. GV cos 0° = ε 0

perpendicular to the sheet. Q
E ∫ GV = Q
As the lines of force are parallel to the curved
ε0 ⇒ E × 4πU2 =
ε0

s
surface of the cylinder, the flux through the 
curved surface is zero. The flux through the
plane-end faces of the cylinder is :
φE = EA + EA = 2EA
i v D a ∴ E=
4 πε 0 U

Q
2

T = σA
According to *DXVV·V WKHRUHP
T σA σ
S
Charge enclosed by the *DXVVLDQ VXUIDFH
h (F)
As point P2 lies inside the metal, therefore
electric field at point P2 is zero.

φE = ∴ 2EA = or E =
ε 0 ε0 2ε 0
Clearly, E is independent of U, the distance
from the plane sheet. +Q
(F)
+++ ––– Free
+++ ++ –––––– space
+
++++++ –– – P2
+ → ––– Metal
++
+++ E ––––––
+++ ++ ––– ––
+ –
++++++ ––– –– (OHFWULF ILHOG OLQHV
–
+ + + ––– →
E
(L) (LL) 66. Define electric dipole moment. Is it a scalar or
(L) For positively charged sheet → away a vector? Derive the expression for the electric
from the sheet field of a dipole at a point on the equatorial
(LL) For negatively charged sheet → towards plane of the dipole. (All India)
the sheet Ans. (OHFWULF GLSROH PRPHQW  It is the product of the
65. (D) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit. magnitude of either charge and distance between
(E) A small metal sphere them.
→
carrying charge +Q is
T = T × 2O
Metal
located at the centre of
a spherical cavity in-
+Q
side a large uncharged
ce
spraee

metallic spherical shell P1

F

as shown in the figure. It is a vector quantity whose direction is from

Use Gauss’s law to find P2
negative to positive charge.
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 15

S
E= 2 2 3/2
along (–)[-axis
4 πε 0 (U + O )
If O << U LH dipole is short, then O2 can be
neglected as compared to U2
S
Hence E = along (–)[-axis
4 πε 0 U 3

67. Using Gauss’ law deduce the expression for the
electric field due to a uniformly charged
spherical conducting shell of radius R at a point
(L) outside and (LL) inside the shell.
Plot a graph showing variation of electric field
([SUHVVLRQ  as a function of U > R and U < R (U being the
Electric field intensity at P due to +T charge is distance from the centre of the shell) (All India)
Ans. (L) )LHOG 2XWVLGH 6KHOO :
along PD Consider a thin
spherical shell of radius
R with centre O. Let
= along PD …(L) charge +T be distributed
uniformly over the
Electric field intensity at P due to –T charge is, surface of shell. To
calculate electric field
= along PC intensity at P where OP = U, imagine a sphere
S, with centre at O and radius U. The surface
of sphere is *DXVVLDQ VXUIDFH over at every
= along PC …(LL)

a s point. Electric field is same and directed

iv D
radially outwards.
Applying Gauss’ theorem

Sh
From (L) and (LL), → → T
∫ E. GS = ε0 ⇒ E=
…(LLL) S
Net electric field intensity due to the electric
⇒ E= [S = 4πU2
dipole at point P

∴ E= →
[U is distance of point P from centre where
E is calculated]
⇒ E= ( Q E – = E +)
(LL) ,QVLGH 6KHOO  As we know charge is located
on its surface,
⇒ E=
∴ E.GS = (T = 0) Hence, =0
⇒ E=

⇒ E= ( Q 1 + cos 2θ = 2 cos2 θ)
(LLL) at U < R, is zero and
∴ E = 2E+ cos θ = 2 × cos θ at U = R, E is maximum
at U > R, E is decreasing
[Using equation (LLL)]

Now from ΔOAP, cos θ =

O at E ∝
2 2
 U + O
1 T O
E = 2× × 2 2 1/2 68. Using Gauss’s law, derive the expression for the
 4 πε 0 ( U 2
+ O 2
) ( U + O )
electric field at a point (L) outside and (LL) inside
T × 2O
⇒ E= 2 2 3/2 a uniformly charged thin spherical shell. Draw a
4 πε 0 (U + O ) graph showing electric field E as a function of
Since T × 2O = S …(S is dipole moment) distance from the centre. (Comptt. All India)
 16 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (OHFWULFILHOGGXHWRDXQLIRUPO\FKDUJHGVSKHULFDO opposite point charges separated by a small

VKHOO  distance 2D having dipole moment
Suppose a thin spherical shell of radius R and → →
centre O | p | = T (2 a )
Let the charge +T be distributed over the surface →
→ +q A qE
of sphere E
→ θ
Electric field intensity E is same at every point
O
on the surface of sphere directed directly out-
→ –q
wards +q E B C
Let a point P be outside the shell with radius vector Dipole in a uniform electric field
→ → Let the dipole held in a uniform external
r and small area element d S = n̂ G S
→ →
According to the *DXVV·V ODZ P E n̂ electric field E at an angle θ
→
→ → T r dS ∴ Force on charge (+T) = T E along the
∫

E. GS =
ε0 →
O R direction of E
q
⇒
∫ E dS ε 0
+q Force on charge (–T) = – T E along the
→

→ →
Since E and n̂ are in the same direction opposite direction of E
q 1 q ∴ Net translatory force on the dipole
∴ E 4πU2 = ⇒ E= → →
ε0 4 π ε0 r 2 = TE – TE = 0
→

s
1 q So net force on the dipole is zero
where [Vectorially, E = rˆ

a
4π ε0 r 2 →

iv D
Since E is uniform, hence the dipole does
(L) If σ is the surface charge density on the shell,
then T = 4πR2 not undergo any translatory motion.

Sh
1 4 πR 2 σ σ These forces being equal, unlike and
∴E= = parallel, form a couple, which rotates the
4π ε0 R 2 ε0
(LL) If the point P lies LQVLGH the spherical shell, dipole in clock-wise direction
then the *DXVVLDQ VXUIDFH encloses no charge ∴ Magnitude of torque = Force × arm of
∴ T=0 Hence E = 0. couple
τ = F. AC = TE . AB sin θ = (TE) 2D sin θ
or τ = T(2D) E sin θ
69. (D) Deduce the expression for the torque acting →
→ or τ = S E Sin θ [ Q S = T( 2a )]
on a dipole of dipole moment S in the →
→ → →
presence of a uniform electric field E . ∴ τ = p ×E
(E) Consider two hollow →
[The direction of τ is given by right hand screw rule and
concentric spheres, S1 4Q
→ →
and S2, enclosing is normal to p and E.
charges 2Q and 4Q 2Q S2 Special cases
respectively as shown (L) When θ = 0 then τ = PE sin θ = 0
in the figure. ∴ Torque is zero and the dipole is in stable
S1
(L) Find out the ratio equilibrium.
of the electric flux (LL) When θ = 90° then τ = PE sin 90º = PE
through them. ∴ The torque is maximum
(LL) How will the electric flux through the (E) (L) 5DWLR RI IOX[
sphere S1 change if a medium of Q
dielectric constant ‘εU’ is introduced in We know electric flux (φ) =
ε0
the space inside S1 in place of air?
Deduce the necessary expression. 2Q
Thus, φ1 due to S1 = ,
(All India) ε0
Ans. (D) 7RUTXH RQ HOHFWULF GLSROH Consider an 2Q + 4Q 6Q
electric dipole consisting of two equal and φ2 due to S2 = =
ε0 ε0
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 17

φ 2 6Q / ε 0 3 (E) Only the faces perpendicular to the direction

= = ∴ Ratio = 3 : 1 of [–axis, contribute to the Electric flux. The
φ1 2 Q / ε 0 1
remaining faces of the cube give zero
2Q 1
(LL) φm = × Y
ε 0 ε U
∴ (OHFWULF IOX[ WKURXJK WKH VSKHUH 6
GHFUHDVHV ZLWK WKH LQWURGXFWLRQ RI
GLHOHFWULF LQVLGH LW
I II
X
70. (D) An electric dipole of dipole moment O
→
 S consists of point charges +T and – T
separated by a distance 2D apart. Deduce Z
→ Total flux φ = φI + φII
the expression for the electric field E due to
the dipole at a distance [ from the centre of → → → →
the dipole on its axial line in terms of the
= ∫ E . GV + ∫ E . GV = 0 + 2(D) . D2
I
dipole moment →
II
S . Hence show that in the ∴ φ = 2D3
→
limit [ >> D, E ⎯⎯→ 2 →
S / ( 4 πε 0 [ 3 ) . ⎡ T
 Charge enclosed (T) = φ∈0 = 2D3∈0 ⎢Q φ = ∈
⎣ 0
(E) Given the electric 71. (D) Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit.
\
field in the region “Gauss’s law in electrostatics is true for any
→ closed surface, no matter what its shape or
E = 2[L̂ , find the size is”. Justify this statement with the help
net electric flux
through the cube
a s of a suitable example.

iv D
[ (E) Use Gauss’s law to prove that the electric
and the charge field inside a uniformly charged spherical

Sh
enclosed by it. ] D shell is zero. (All India)
(Delhi) Ans. (D) (OHFWULF IOX[ The electric lines of force pass-
Ans. (D) Expression for magnetic field due to dipole ing through that area, when held normally to
on its axial lane : → → the lines of force.
²T O T E −T E +T → →
2D P
0DWKHPDWLFDOO\, φE = ∫ E .Δ S
S
[ S.I. units : Vm, Nm2C–1
Electric field intensity at point P due to Gauss’s Law states that the electric flux
charge – T, through a closed surface is given by
→ T
1 T φ=
E− T = . ( [ˆ ) ∈0
4 πε 0 ( [ + D)2 

Due to charge +T, The law implies that the total electric flux
→ through a closed surface depends on the quan-
1 T
E+ T = . ( [ˆ ) tity of total charge enclosed by the surface, and
4 πε 0 ( [ − D)2
 does not depend on its shape and size.
→ → → )RU H[DPSOH net charge enclosed by the elec-
Net Electric field at point P, E = E − T + E + T
 tric dipole (T, – T) is zero, hence the total elec-
T ⎡ 1 1 ⎤ tric flux enclosed by a surface containing
= ×⎢ – ( [ˆ )

4 πε 0 ⎣ ( [ − D) 2 ( [ + D)2 ⎥⎦ electric dipole is zero.
⎡ 4 DT[ ⎤
(E) Electrical field inside a uniformly charged
1 1 ( T × 2 D)2 [
= ⎢ 2 2 2⎥
( [ˆ ) = ( [ˆ ) spherical shell. Let us consider a point ‘P’
4 πε ⎣ ([ − D ) ⎦ 4 πε 0 ( [ 2 − D2 )2
 0  inside the shell. The Gaussian surface is a
→ 1 2 S[ sphere through P centred at O.
E = . [ˆ Q S = (T × 2D)
4 πε 0 ( [ 2 − D2 )2
 The flux through the Gaussian surface is E ×
For [ >> D 4πU2.
→ 1 2S However, in this case, the Gaussian surface
([2 – D2)2 [4 E = . [ˆ encloses no charge. Gauss’s law then gives
4 πε 0 [ 3
 E × 4πU2 = 0
 18 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

or E = 0 Q
1 ⎡ T2 ⎤ 1 ⎛ Q2 0⎞ Q2
(U < R) = ⎢ ⎥ = ⎜ − ⎟ =
C 2 C⎝ 2 2⎠ 2C
that is, the field due to a uniformly charged  ⎣ ⎦ 0
thin shell is zero at all points inside the shell. If V is the final potential difference
between capacitor plates, then Q = CV
Surface charge Gaussian (CV )2 1 1
density surface ∴ W= = CV 2 = QV
2C 2 2
This work is stored as electrostatic
R potential energy of capacitor LH,
O Electriostatic potential energy,
U Q2 1 1
U= = CV 2 = QV
2C 2 2
P
(LL) Expression for Energy Density.
Consider a parallel plate capacitor
72. (D) Derive the expression for the energy stored consisting of plates, each of area A,
in a parallel plate capacitor. Hence obtain separated by a distance G. If space
the expression for the energy density of the between the plates is filled with a
electric field. medium of dielectric constant K, then
(E) A fully charged parallel plate capacitor is Kε 0 A
connected across an uncharged identical Capacitance of capacitor, C =
 G
capacitor. Show that the energy stored in If σ is the surface charge density of
the combination is less than that stored plates, then electric field strength
initially in the single capacitor. (All India)
between the plates
Ans. (D) (L) Energy of a parallel plate capacitor.
Consider a capacitor of capacitance C. Initial σ
E= ⇒ σ = Kε0 E
charge on plates is zero. Initial potential Kε 0
difference between the capacitor plates is

a s Charge on each plate of capacitor

iv D
]HUR. Let a charge Q be given to it in small Q = σA = Kε0 EA
steps. When charge is given to capacitor, the ∴ Energy stored by capacitor,

Sh
potential difference between its plates Q2 (Kε 0 EA)2 1
increases. Let at any instant when charge on U= = = Kε0 E2AG
2C 2(Kε 0 A / G) 2
capacitor be T, the potential difference 
between its plates be, But AG = τ, volume of space between
capacitor plates
T
V= ∴ Energy stored,
C
Now work done in giving an additional 1
U= Kε0 E2 τ
infinitesimal charge GT to capacitor 2
T Electrostatic Energy stored per unit
GW = V GT = GT
C U 1
A B volume, UH = = Kεε0 E2
τ 2
+Q –Q This is the expression for electrostatic energy
density in medium of dielectric constant K.
VA • •V
B
In air or free space (K = 1), therefore
1
energy density, UH = ε E2
2 0
(E) The energy of the capacitor when fully
charged is
←⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
VAB = V ⎯→
1 T2
EL = …(L)
The total work done in giving charge 2
 C
from 0 to Q will be equal to the sum of When this charged capacitor is connected to
all such infinitesimal works, which may an identical capacitor C, then the charge will
T
be obtained by integration. Therefore be distributed equally, on each of the
2
total work capacitors, then
Q Q 2
T ⎛ T⎞
∫
W = V GT = ∫ C
GT
E1 =
⎜ ⎟
1 ⎝ 2⎠
…(LL)
0 0 2 C
 Chapter 1 : ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 19

2
⎛ T⎞
⎜ ⎟
1 ⎝ 2⎠ 74. (D) Derive an expression for the electric field
Similarly, E2 = …(LLL)
2 C E due to a dipole of length ‘2D’ at a point
The energy stored of the combination,
Adding (LL) and (LLL), we have distant U from the centre of the dipole on
1 T2 1 T2 1 T2 the axial line.
EI = E1 + E2 = + = …(LY)
2 4C 2 4C 2 2C (E) Draw a graph of E versus U for U >> D.
On comparing (L) and (LY), we have
(F) If this dipole were kept in a uniform
1 T2
EI 1 external electric field E0, diagrammatically
= 2 2C =
EL 1 T2 2 represent the position of the dipole in
 2 C stable and unstable equilibrium and write
Hence, the total energy stored is half of that
stored initially in one capacitor which means the expressions for the torque acting on the
the energy stored in combination is less than dipole in both the cases. (Outside Delhi)
that stored initially in the single capacitor. Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 70 (D), Page 17
(E) Graph
73. (L) Use Gauss’s law to find the electric field between E
E
due to a uniformly charged infinite plane Vs U
sheet. What is the direction of field for
positive and negative charge densities?
(LL) Find the ratio of the potential differences
r
that must be applied across the parallel and
series combination of two capacitors C1 and
C2 with their capacitances in the ratio

a s (F) (L) Diagrammatic representation

iv D
1 : 2 so that the energy stored in the two (LL) Torque acting on these cases
cases becomes the same. (All India) (L) In stable equilibrium, torque is zero

Sh
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 64 (E) and (F), Page 13 (θ = 0)
(LL) When two capacitors are connected in series
1 1 1 C1C 2 o
= + ⇒ CV = …(L)
E
C V C1 C 2 C1 + C 2
o
When connected in parallel, CS = C1 + C2 p
–q +q
…(LL) o
Given : C1 : C2 :: 1 : 2 or C2 = 2C1 E
Stable equilibrium
1 1
UV = C V VV2 US = C S VS2 (LL) In unstable equilibrium also, torque is
2 2
Q UV = US zero (θ = 180˚)
→ → →
CS C1 + C 2
[Q τ = S × E = SE sin θ]
VVHULHV
⇒  =
VSDUDOOHO CV C 1C 2

C1 + C 2 o o
 E
p
(C1 + C 2 )(C1 + C 2 )
= +q –q o
C1C 2
E
Unstable equilibrium

(C1 + C 2 )2 (C1 + 2C1 )2

= =
C1C 2 C1 × 2C1

( 3C1 )2 3
= =


2
2C1 2
20 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

2. Electrostatic Potential
and Capacitance

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Electrostatic potential. The Electrostatic potential at a point is defined as amount of work done per unit positive test charge
in moving the test charge from infinity to that point against the electrostatic force due to the electric field,
Work done(W) 1 q
∴ Electrostatic potential(V) = or V = .
Charge 4π ε0 r
2. Electric potential difference. It is defined as the amount of work done per unit positive test charge in bringing a small positive
charge from the point of lower potential (A) to the point of higher potential (B) along any path
W AB T ⎡1 1 ⎤
∴ VB – VA = = ⎢ − ⎥ where [rA and rB are position vectors of points A and B respectively.
q 4 π ε 0 ⎣ UB UA ⎦

1 Q
3. Potential due to a point charge. Electric potential due to a single charge Q is given by, V = .
4π ε0 r

1 p cos θ
4. Potential due to an electric dipole. Potential at a point due to electric dipole is given by V = .
4π ε0 r2
1 p
(i) Potential on the axial line (θ = 0, π) ∴ V=± .
4π ε0 r 2

⎛ π⎞

a s 1 p cos θ

iv D
(ii) Potential in the equatorial equation plane ⎜ θ = ⎟ ∴ V= . =0
⎝ 2⎠ 4π ε0 r2

Sh
5. Equipotential surface. The surface at every point of which the electric potential is same, is called equipotential surface.
Properties: (i) Two equipotential surfaces can never intersect each other.
(ii) Work done in moving a charge over an equipotential surface is zero.
6. Potential gradient. The rate of change of potential with distance at a point is called potential gradient at that point.
dV
E=–
dr
Its SI unit is volt metre –1 (Vm –1)
7. Potential energy of a system of charges:
1 q q
(i) Potential energy of a system of two charges q1 and q2 is U = . 1 2
4 π ε 0 r12

1 ⎛ q1q 2 q q q q ⎞
(ii) Potential energy of a system of three charges q1, q2 and q3 is U = + 1 3 + 2 3⎟
4 π ε 0 ⎜⎝ r12 r13 r23 ⎠
8. Potential energy of a system of two charges in an external field. The potential energy of a system of two charges q1 and q2
→ → →
located at r1 and r 2 in an external field E is

→ ⎛ →⎞ q1q 2
U = q1V( r1 ) + q2V ⎜ r 2 ⎟ +
⎜ ⎟ 4π ε 0r12
⎝ ⎠
9. Potential energy of a dipole in an external field. Electric potential energy of a dipole in an electrostatic field is given by
→ →
U = – pE cos θ = – p . E where [θ is the angle which dipole makes with the direction of an electric field.]
10. Conductors. Those substances which permit the flow of charged particles through them are called conductors. They may be
classified into two categories:
(i) Metallic conductors (ii) Ionic conductors.
11. Insulators (Dielectrics). Those materials which do not have free electrons are called insulators or dielectrics.
Example: Glass, mica, wax, plastics etc.
12. Behaviour of a charged conductor:
(i) Charges reside only at the surface of the charged conductor.
(ii) The electric potential is constant at the surface and inside the conductor.
(iii) The electric field is zero inside the conductor.

20 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 21

13. Polarisation. The stretching of the atoms of a dielectric slab under the action of an applied electric field is called polarisation.
It is defined as the dipole moment per unit volume.
→ →
It is given by p = χ e E where [ χ e is the electric susceptibility of the dielectric medium.]
14. Capacitor. The capacitor is an arrangement for storing a very large amount of charge. It is also known as condenser.
15. Capacitance. The potential difference V across a conductor is proportional to charge q.
q q
Then the ratio is a constant. ∴ C= .
V V
The constant C is called the capacitance of the conductor. Its SI unit is farad (F).
16. Parallel plate capacitor. A parallel plate capacitor consists of two parallel conducting plates having cross-section area A
separated by a small distance d. Its capacitance is given by
ε0 A
C= … (when air is between the plates)
d
ε kA
C= 0 … (when dielectric is between the plates)
d
17. Capacitance of an isolated spherical conductor. Capacitance of an isolated spherical conductor is given by
C = 4πε0r where [r is the radius of the spherical conductor.]
18. Sphercial capacitor. Capacitance of spherical capacitor is
4 πε 0r1r2
C= where [r1 and r2 are the radii of outer and inner spheres respectively.]
r1 − r2
19. Cylindrical capacitor. Capacitance of cylindrical capacitor is given by
l 2 πε 0 ⎤
C = 2πε0. = where ⎥r1 and r2 are the radii of inner and outer cylindrical shells.
⎛r ⎞ ⎛r ⎞ ⎦l is the length of the either cylindrical shell.
log e ⎜ 2 ⎟ 2.303 log 10 ⎜ 2 ⎟
⎝ r1 ⎠ ⎝ r1 ⎠
20. Capacitors in series. The total capacitance C is given by
1 1 1 1

s
= + + +… where [C1, C2, C3 … are individual capacitances.]

a
C C1 C 2 C3

iv D
21. Capacitors in parallel. The total capacitance C is given by
C = C1 + C2 + C3 + … where [C1, C2, C3 … are individual capacitances.]

Sh
22. Energy stored in a capacitor. The energy U stored in a capacitor of capacitance C with charge q and voltage V is
1 1 1 q2
U= qV = CV 2 =
2 2 2 C
1
23. Electric energy density. The energy per unit volume in a region with electric field is given by energy density = ε E2
2 0
24. Dielectric constant. The ratio of the strength of the applied electric field to the strength of reduced value of electric field on
inserting the dielectric slab between the plates of a capacitor is called the dielectric constant of the slab.
The dielectric constant K of the insulating substance is given by C = KC0
25. Effect of dielectric in a capacitor. When a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K and thickness t < d is placed between the plates
of a parallel plate capacitor, the capacitance of the capacitor is
ε0 A
C=
⎛ 1⎞
d − t ⎜1 − ⎟
⎝ K⎠

UNITS USED

Physical quantity Symbol Unit Dimensions

Potential V Volt or V [ML2T–3A–1]

Potential gradient E Vm–1 [MLT–3A–1]
Potential energy U J [ML2T–2]
Capacitance C Farad, F [M–1L–2T4A2]
Dielectric constant K No unit [Dimensionless]
→
Polarisation p Cm–2 [L–2AT]
 22 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) Ans. The electric field inside the shell is zero. This
implies that potential is constant inside the shell
(1 Mark) (as no work is done in moving a charge inside the
shell) and, therefore, equals its value at the
1. A 500 μC charge is at the centre of a square of surface, which is 10 V.
side 10 cm. Find the work done in moving a 7. A hollow metal sphere of radius 10 cm is
charge of 10 μC between two diagonally charged such that the potential on its surface is
opposite points on the square. (Delhi) 5 V. What is the potential at the centre of the
Ans. The work done in moving a charge of 10 μC sphere? (All India)
between two diagonally opposite points on the Ans. Hollow metal sphere behaves as an equipotential
square will be zero because these two points will surface, so the potential at its centre will be 5 V.
be at equipotential.

8. Why is electrostatic potential constant

2. What is the electrostatic potential due to an throughout the volume of the conductor and has
electric dipole at an equatorial point? (All India) the same value (as inside) on its surface? (Delhi)
Ans. Electric potential at any point in the equatorial Ans. Electric field inside the conductor = 0
plane of dipole is Zero.
GV GV
3. What is the work done in moving a test charge E=– ⇒ =0 ∴ V = constant
T through a distance of 1 cm along the equatorial GU GU
axis of an electric dipole? (All India) 9. Distinguish between a dielectric and a conduc-
Ans. Since potential for equatorial axis tor. (Comptt. Delhi)
V=0 ∴ W = TV = 0

a s
Ans. 'LHOHFWULF &RQGXFWRU

iv D
4. Define the term ‘potential energy’ of charge ‘T’ Dielectrics are the in- Conductors are the sub-
at a distance ‘U’ in an external electric field. sulating materials stances which can be

Sh
(All India) which transmit electric used to carry or conduct
Ans. It is defined as the amount of work done in effects without con- electric charge from one
bringing the charge from infinity to its position in ducting place to the other.
the system in the electric field of another charge 10. Why must the electrostatic potential inside a
without acceleration. hollow charged conductor be the same at every
V = EU. point? (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Inside the hollow charged conductor, electric field
is zero therefore no work is done in moving a
5. A point charge Q Q small test charge within the conductor. Hence
is placed at point O A B electrostatic potential inside a hollow charged
O as shown in the conductor is same at every point.
figure. Is the potential difference VA – VB
positive, negative or zero, if Q is (L) positive
(LL) negative? (Delhi) 11. What is the geometrical shape of equipotential
Ans. Clearly, surfaces due to a single isolated charge? (Delhi)
⎛ 1 T ⎞ ⎛ 1 T ⎞ Ans. Concentric spheres with a gap between them not
VA – V B = ⎜ . ⎟ −⎜ . ⎟
⎝ 4 πε 0 OA ⎠ ⎝ 4 πε 0 OB ⎠ 1
 being uniform as V ∝ .
T ⎡ 1 1 ⎤ U
= ·⎢ − ⎥ 12. Two charges 2 μC and – 2μ
μC are placed at points
4 πε 0 ⎣ OA OB ⎦
As OA < OB, so the quantity within bracket is A and B 5 cm apart. Depict an equipotential sur-
negative. face of the system. (Comptt. Delhi)
(L) If T is positive charge, VA – VB = negative Ans.
(LL) If T is negative charge, VA – VB = positive
– +
6. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged
such that the potential on its surface is 10 V.
What is the potential at the centre of the sphere?
(TXLSRWHQWLDO VXUIDFHV RI WKH V\VWHP
(All India)
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 23

13. What is the amount of work done in moving a Ans. No work is done
point charge around a circular arc of radius U at [W = T VAB = T × 0 = 0, since potential remains
the centre of which another point charge is lo- constant]
cated? (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Being an equipotential surface, work done will be Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I)
zero.
14. Two charges 4 μC and – 4 μC are placed at points (2 Marks)
A and B 3 cm apart. Depict an equipotential
surface of the system. (Comptt. All India) 19. Derive the expression for the electric potential at
Ans. any point along the axial line of an electric
dipole. (Delhi)
– + Ans. Consider an electric dipole consisting of two
points charged – T and + T and separated by
distance 2D. Let P be a point on the axis of the
(TXLSRWHQWLDO VXUIDFHV RI WKH V\VWHP dipole at a distance U from its centre O.
2D

B
15. “For any charge configuration, equipotential A
–T O +T P
surface through a point is normal to the electric D D
field.” Justify. (Delhi)
Ans. Work done in moving a charge over an U
equipotential surface is zero, hence a point on it Electric potential at point P due to the dipole is,
will be normal to the electric field.
V = V1 + V2
W = FS cos θ = 0 ∴ cos θ = 0 or θ = 90°
16. Two equal balls having equal positive charge ‘T’ 1 –T 1 T
or V = + .
coulombs are suspended by two insulating

a s 4 πε 0 AP 4 πε 0 BP

iv D
strings of equal length. What would be the 1 T 1 T
effect on the force when a plastic sheet is or V = − . + .
4 πε 0 U + D 4 πε 0 U – D

Sh
inserted between the two? (All India)
Ans. The force would be reduced by a factor ‘K’ (equal T ⎡ 1 1 ⎤
to the value of dielectric constant of plastic sheet).
or V =
πε ⎢U − D − U + D⎥
4 0 ⎣ ⎦
FAir
FK = T ⎡ ( U + D) − ( U − D) ⎤
K or V = ⎢ ⎥
17. The given graph shows 4 πε 0 ⎣ U 2 − D2 ⎦
variation of charge 'T' A
1 T × 2D
versus potential or V = . 2
4 πε 0 U − D
2
difference ‘V’ for two
T B 1 S
capacitors C1 and C2. or V = . 2
4 πε 0 U − D
2
Both the capacitors have
same plate separation ...where [S is dipole moment [S = T × 2D]
but plate area of C2 is V For ideal dipole : D << U
greater than that of C1. 1 S
So D2 << U2 ∴ V  . 2
Which line (A or B) corresponds to C1 and why?
4 πε 0 U
(Comptt. All India) 20. Derive an expression for the potential energy of
Ans. /LQH % corresponds to C1.
→
⎛ T⎞ an electric dipole of dipole moment p in an
5HDVRQ  Since slope ⎜ ⎟ of 'B' is less than that →
⎝ ⎠
V electric field E . (Delhi)
of 'A'. Ans. Refer to Q. 87 (E), Page 40
21. Two point charges, T1 = 10 × 10–8 C and T2 =
– 2 × 10–8 C are separated by a distance of 60 cm
18. A charge ‘T’ is moved A
in air.
from a point A above a (L) Find at what distance from the 1st charge,
dipole of dipole moment
T1, would the electric potential be zero.
‘S’ to a point B below the
(LL) Also calculate the electrostatic potential
dipole in equatorial plane –T +T
energy of the system. (All India)
without acceleration. Find
the work done in the Ans. (L) Given : T1 = 10 × 10–8 C, T2 = – 2 × 10–8 C
B AB = 60 cm = 0.60 = 0.6 m
process. (All India)
 24 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Let AP = [ then PB = 0.6 – [ and AB = 50 cm = 0.50 m = 0.5 m

Let AP = [ then PB = 0.5 – [
T1 T2
KT1
Potential at P due to charge T1 
A P B AP
KT1 KT2
Potential P due to charge T1 = Potential at P due to charge T2 
AP  PB
KT2 KT1 KT2
Potential P due to charge T2 = Q Potential at P = 0 ⇒ + =0
 BP AP PB
Q Potential at P = 0
KT1 KT2 T T
KT1 KT2 T1 – T2 =− ⇒ 1 =− 2
⇒ + =0 ⇒ = AP PB AP PB
AP BP AP
 PB
20 × 10 −6 ( −4 × 10 −6 )
10 × 10 −8 − ( −2 × 10 −8 ) =−
∴ =  [ 0.5 − [
 [ 0.6 − [
20 4
⇒ 2[ + 10[ = 6 ⇒ 12[ = 6 ⇒ =
1  [ 0.5 − [
∴ [= = 0.5m 5
2 14[ = 5 ⇒ [= m
∴ Distance from first charge = 0.5 m = 50 cm. 14
(LL) Electrostatic energy of the system is KT1T2 9 × 109 ( 20 × 10 −6 )( 4 × 10 −6 )
(LL) U = =
KT1T2 −9 × 10 9 × 10 −7 × 2 × 10 −8  U 50 × 10 −2
EQ = =
 U 60 × 10 −2 = 1.45 J
− 18 × 10 −6
= T
60 × 10 −2 24. Calculate the work done to
−3 dissociate the system of
= × 10–4 = – 3 × 10–5 Joule
three charges placed on the 10 cm

s
10 10 cm
∴ U or EQ = – 3 × 10–5 Joule
22. Two point charges 4Q, Q are separated by 1m in air.
At what point on the line joining the charges is the

iv D a vertices of a triangle as
shown. (Delhi)
–4 T 10 cm +2 T

Sh
electric field intensity zero? Ans. Initial P.E. of the three charges
Also calculate the electrostatic potential energy of
the system of charges, taking the value of charge, 1 ⎡ T1T2 T2 T3 T1T3 ⎤
XL =
πε ⎢ U + U + U ⎥
Q = 2 × 10–7 C. (All India) 4 0 ⎣ ⎦
Ans. (L) Given : U = 1m, T1 = 4Q, T2 = Q
1 ⎡ T( − 4 T ) ( − 4 T ) × 2 T T × 2 T ⎤
= ⎢ + +
4 πε 0 ⎣ U U U ⎥⎦
4Q Q
[ 1–[
A P B 1 10 T 2 −9 × 10 9 × 10 × (1.6 × 10 −10 ) 2 J
= − . =
 4 πε 0 U 0.10
1m
EPA = EPB − 9 × 10 9 × 10 × 2.56 × 10 −20 × 100
=
K( 4 Q ) KQ 4 1 10
= ⇒ =
 [
2 (1 − [ )2 [ 2 ( 1 − [ )2 = – 23.04 × 10–9 = – 2.304 × 10–8 J
2 1 Final P.E, XI = 0
⇒ = ⇒ 2 – 2[ = [
[ 1 − [ ∴ Work required to dissociate the system of
2 three charges,
⇒ 3[ = 2 ∴ [= m
3 W = XI – XL = –2.304 × 10–8 J
(LL) Electrostatic potential energy of the system is
T1T2 9 × 10 9 × 4 Q × Q
U =K = 25. (L) Can two equipotential surfaces intersect
 U 1
= 36 × 109 × (2 × 10–7)2 = 1.44 × 10–3 J each other? Give reasons.
23. Two point charges 20 × 10–6 C and – 4 × 10–6 C (LL) Two charges – T and + T are located at
are separated by a distance of 50 cm in air. points A (0, 0, – D) and B (0, 0, +D)
(L) Find the point on the line joining the respectively. How much work is done in
charges, where the electric potential is zero. moving a test charge from point P (7, 0, 0) to
(LL) Also find the electrostatic potential energy Q (– 3, 0, 0)? (Delhi)
of the system. (All India) Ans. (L) No, if they intersect, there will be two
Ans. (L) Here T1 = 20 × 10–6 C,  T2 = – 4 × 10–6 C different directions of electric field at that
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 25

→
point which is not correct. If they intersect, subjected to electric field ( E ) directed along + X
then at the same point of intersection, there direction, what will be the magnitude and
will be two values of potential. This is not direction of the torque acting on this? (Delhi)
possible and hence two equipotential Ans. Resultant dipole moment of both dipoles is
surfaces cannot intersect.
2 2 2
(LL) Since both the points P and Q are on the = S + S + 2 S cos θ Y
 +T S
equatorial line of the dipole and V = 0 at –T
2 2 S
every point on it, work done will be zero. = 2 S + 2 S cos 120°
Also the force on any charge is perpendicular  120°
30°
to the equatorial line, so work done is zero. ⎛ 1⎞ X′ →X
E
26. Draw 3 equipotential surfaces corresponding to = 2S2 + 2S2 −
⎝ 2⎠
a field that uniformly increases in magnitude  S
but remains constant along Z-direction. How are –T Y′ +T
= S2 = S
these surfaces different from that of a constant 
electric field along Z-direction? (All India) Resultant dipole moment (S) makes an angle of
60° with each dipole and 30° with [-axis as shown
[
Ans. G2 < G1 for increasing in the figure.
field
Now τ = SE sin 30° = SE ⎛ ⎞
1 SE
and G2 = G1 for ⇒ τ=
] ⎝ 2⎠  2
uniform field.
29. Figure shows two
G1 G2 identical capacitors C1 S
\
and C2, each of 2 μF
C1 C2
27. Two uniformly large parallel thin plates having capacitance, connec- 5 V
2 μF 2 μF
charge densities + σ and – σ are kept in the X-Z ted to a battery of 5 V.
plane at a distance ‘G’ apart. Sketch an

a s Initially switch ‘S’ is

iv D
equipotential surface due to electric field closed. After some-
between the plates. If a particle of mass P and time ‘S’ is left open and dielectric slabs of

Sh
charge ‘– T’ remains stationary between the dielectric constant K = 5 are inserted to fill
plates, what is the magnitude and direction of completely the space between the plates of the
this field? (Delhi) two capacitors. How will the (L) charge and
Ans. The equipotential surface is at a distance G/2 from (LL) potential difference between the plates of the
either plate in X-Z plane. For a particle of charge capacitors be affected after the slabs are inserted?
(– T) at rest between the plates, then (Delhi)
\ Ans. (L) When switch S is open and dielectric is
+σ
Equipotential
introduced, charge on each capacitor will be
surface G
T1 = C1’V, T2 = C2’V
V=0 [
T1 = 5CV = 5 × 2 × 5 = 50 μC, T2 = 50 μC
G/2
]
Charge on each capacitor will become 5 times
–σ
(LL) P.d. across C1 is still 5V and across C2,
T = (5C) V
(L) weight mg acts, vertically downward
V 5
(LL) electric force T( acts vertically upward V’ = = = 1V
5 5
so PJ = TE
30. Figure shows two S
PJ identical capacitors
E= , vertically downward,
 T C1 and C2 each of 1.5 C2
C1
LH, along (–) Y-axis. μF capacitance, con- 2 V 1.5 μF
1.5 μF
28. Two small identical nected to a battery
Y
of 2 V. Initially
electrical dipoles AB and +T A
D switch ‘S’ is closed. After sometime ‘S’ is left
CD, each of dipole moment
–T open and dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K
‘S’ are kept at an angle of 120° 120° = 2 are inserted to fill completely the space
as shown in the figure. What X′ X
between the plates of the two capacitors. How
is the resultant dipole will the (L) charge and (LL) potential difference
moment of this combi- –T B
+T C between the plates of the capacitors be affected
nation? If this system is after the slabs are inserted? (Delhi)
Y′
 26 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (L) When switch S is open and dielectric is

introduced, charge on each capacitor, will be 33. Draw a plot showing the variation of (L) electric
T1 = C1’V, T2 = C2’V field (E) and (LL) electric potential (V) with
T1 = 2CV = 2 × 1.5 × 2 = 6 μC, T2 = 6 μC distance U due to a point charge Q. (Delhi)
Charge on each capacitor will become twice. Ans.
(LL) P.d. across C1 is still 2V and across C2, ↑ ←⎯⎯ E =
1 T
E1 4 =ε 0 U 2

T = (2C) V’ or 1 T
←⎯⎯ V=
4 =ε 0 U
V 2 V 
∴ V’ = = = 1V
2 2
31. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors in U→
series is 1 μF. What will be their net capacitance 34. A test charge ‘T’ is
if connected in parallel? moved without accel- (2, 3)
Find the ratio of energy stored in the two E
eration from A to C B
configurations if they are both connected to the along the path from A
same source. (All India) to B and then from B to (2, 0)
(6, 0)
Ans. Let C be the capacitance of a capacitor C in electric field E as C A
Given : C1 = C2 = C3 = C shown in the figure.
:KHQ FRQQHFWHG LQ VHULHV (L) Calculate the potential difference between
C A and C.
CS = = 1 μF ∴ C = 3 μF (LL) At which point (of the two) is the electric
3
potential more and why? (All India)
:KHQ FRQQHFWHG LQ SDUDOOHO
Ans. (L) P.D does not depend upon the path along
CS = C + C + C = 3 + 3 + 3 = 9 μF which the test charge T moves
Energy stored in capacitor
− GV ⎛ V − VA ⎞ VA − VC
E=
1
CV2 ∴ E= = −⎜ C ⎟ =
2

a s  GU ⎝ G ⎠ G

iv D
1 2 Q  GAC = 4 So VA – VC = E × 4 = 4E
EV CVV C 1
∴ = 2 = V = =1:9 (LL) At point C, electric potential will be more as

Sh
ES 1 2 C S 9 potential decreases in the direction of electric
CSV
 2 field.
32. Net capacitance of three identical capacitors in
35. An electric dipole is held in a uniform electric field.
series is 3 μF. What will be their net capacitance
(L) Show that the net force acting on it is zero.
if connected in parallel? (LL) The dipole is alligned parallel to the field.
Find the ratio of energy stored in the two Find the work done in rotating it through
configurations if they are both connected to the the angle of 180°. (All India)
same source. (All India) Ans. (L) Force acting on →
Ans. Let C1, C2 and C3 be the capacitances of three point A due to E
capacitors. But these three capacitors are of same +T B +TE
charge – T is – TE
capacitance, so C is the capacitance of each Force acting on
capacitor. point B due to 2D
C1 = C2 = C3 = C charge + T is + TE –T
–TE A
When C1, C2 and C3 are connected in series : Net force acting on
1 1 1 1 the dipole
= + + = – TE + TE = 0 (Zero)
CS C1 C 2 C3
Hence, the net force acting on electric dipole
1 1 1 1 3 held in a uniform electric field is zero.
⇒ = + + =
CS C C C C (LL) W = – SE(cos 0 2 – cos θ2)
C W = – SE(cos 180° – cos 0°)
∴ CS = = 3 μF …[ Q CS = 3 μF ⇒ W = – SE(– 1 – (1)) = + 2SE
3
∴ C = 9 μF 36. Determine the po- C1
–q +q
When C1, C2 and C3 are connected in parallel tential difference
CS = 3C = 3 × 9 μF = 27 μF across the plates of
the capacitor ‘C1’ of
1 E1 E2
Energy stored in capacitor is, E = CV2 the network shown
2
in the figure.
EV C 3 1 [Assume E2 > E1]
∴ = V = = ∴ Ratio = 1 : 9
ES CS 27 9 (Comptt. Delhi) +q –q
 C2
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 27

Ans. Net E = E2 – E1 ∴ Energy stored in capacitor C4

Both capacitors are in series = 1/2 × (30 × 10–6 × 3600) J
1 1 1 C × C2 = 54000 × 10–6 = 5.4 × 10–2 J
∴ = + ⇒ C= 1
C C1 C 2 C1 + C 2
∴ V1 (Potential difference across the plates of the
39. An electric dipole of length 4 cm, when placed
T
capacitor C1) = C with its axis making an angle of 60° with a
 1 uniform electric field, experiences a torque of
37. A network of four
4 3 Nm. Calculate the potential energy of the
capacitors, each of
capacitance 15 μF, is
C2 dipole, if it has charge ± 8 nC. (Delhi)
connected across a Ans. 1st method Given : 2D = 4 cm = 4 × 10–2 m, θ = 60°
C1 C3
battery of 100 V, as τ = 4 × 3 Nm, T = ±8 nC = ±8 × 10–9 C
shown in the figure. P.E. = |S| |E| cos θ, τ = |S| |E| sin θ
Find the net capaci- P.E. |S||E|cos θ
tance and the charge C4 = = cot θ = cot 60°
 τ |S||E|sin θ
on the capacitor C4. ...
(Comptt. Delhi & All 1
P.E. = τ cot θ = 4 × 3 ×
100 V 3
India)
∴ P.E. = – 4 Joules
Ans. C1, C2 and C3 are in series as shown in the figure, 2nd method
we have Q τ = SE sin θ
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 τ
= + + = + + = = ∴ S = T × 2D
C′ C1 C 2 C 3 15 15 15 15 5 E=
S sin θ

∴ C′ = 5 μF
Now C′ is in parallel with C4

a s ∴ E=
4× 3
=
1
× 1011

iv D
∴ Cnet = C′ + C4 = (5 + 15) μF = 20 μF 8 × 10 −9 × 4 × 10 −2 ×
3 4
Hence, Change on C4, Q = C4V = 15 × 10–6 × 100 2

Sh
= 15 × 10–4C Now P.E. = |S| |E| cos θ
38. A network of four = (T × 2D) (E) cos θ
capacitors, each of
= (8 × 10–9 × 4 × 10–2) × ⎛⎜ × 1011⎞⎟ ×
1 1
capacitance 30 μF, is C2
⎝4 ⎠ 2
connected across a 1
battery of 60 V as C1 C3 = – 4 Joules [ Qcos 60° =
2
shown in the figure. (Note: However, the first method is preferred because it
Find the net saves a lot of time for unnecessary calculations)
capacitance and the C4 40. An electric dipole of length 2 cm, when placed
energy stored in each with its axis making an angle of 60° with a
capacitor. ...
uniform electric field, experiences a torque of
(Comptt. All India) 60 V
8 3 Nm. Calculate the potential energy of the
1 1 1 1 dipole, if it has a charge of ± 4 nC. (Delhi)
Ans. = + +
C′ C1 C 2 C 3 Ans. Similar to Q. 39.
Q C1, C2 and C3 are in series
…[Q Ans. 8 Joules
41. An electric dipole of length 1 cm, which placed
1 1 1 1 3 1 with its axis making an angle of 60° with
or = + + = =
C′ 30 30 30 30 10 uniform electric field, experiences a torque of
∴ C′ = 10 μF
6 3 Nm. Calculate the potential energy of the
C4 and C′ are in parallel
dipole, if it has a charge of ± 2 nC. (Delhi)
∴ Cnet = C′ + C4 = 10 + 30 = 40 μF
Ans. Similar to Q. 39.
1 Ans. 6 Joules
Energy stored in C1, C2 and C3 = C′V2
2 42. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is
1 charged to a potential V. It is then connected to
= × 10 × 10–6 × 3600 J = 18 × 10–3 J another uncharged capacitor having the same
2
Energy stored in each of the capacitor C1, C2 capacitance. Find out the ratio of the energy
and C3 = 6 × 10–3 J stored in the combined system to that stored
initially in the single capacitor. (All India)
 28 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. Let us say that capacitor has an initial energy Deduce the relation between the electric field and
1 V the potential gradient between them. Write the WZR
UL = CV 2
2 important conclusions concerning the relation
When the first capacitor is C between the electric field and electric potentials.
connected across the (Comptt. Delhi)
+ –
second capacitor, let the Ans. Work done in moving a unit positive charge along
common potential be V′ (L)
distance δ l
Then charge on each
|EO| δ l = VA – VB = V – (V + δ9) = – δV
capacitor T′ = CV′ C δV
By charge conservation ∴ E=–
T δl
T′ = Two important conclusions :
2
 (L) Electric field is in the direction in which the
Hence total energy stored
potential decreases steepest.
in the capacitors, C
2 (LL) (LL) Magnitude of electric field is given by the
⎛ T′ ⎞ T′
UI = 2 × ⎛⎜ T′ V′⎞⎟ = T′ × ⎜ ⎟ =
1
change in the magnitude of potential per unit
 ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ C⎠ C displacement, normal to the equipotential
2
⎛ T⎞ surface at the point.
⎜ ⎟
⎝ 2⎠ T2
= × ⎛⎜ CV 2 ⎞⎟ Q T = CV
1 1
= =
 C 4 C 2 ⎝ 2 ⎠
1⎛ 1 2 ⎞ 46. Why does current in a steady state not flow in a
2 ⎜⎝ 2
CV ⎟
UI ⎠ 1 capacitor connected across a battery? However
∴ = =
1 2 momentary current does flow during charging
U L CV 2
2 or discharging of the capacitor. Explain.
→
43. Two point charges T1 and T2 are located at U1 and (All India)

→ → Ans. In the steady state, the displacement current
U respectively in an external electric field E.

s
 2 and hence the conduction current, is zero as
Obtain the expression for the total work done in
assembling this configuration. (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. Work done in bringing the charge T1 from infinity
iv D a →
| E | between the plates, is constant.
During charging and discharging, the
to position U1
W1 = T1V(U1)
Work done in bringing charge T2 to the position U2
W2 = T2V(U2) +
T1T2
Sh displacement current and hence the conduction
→
current is non zero as | E | between the plates,
is changing with time.
4πε 0 U12

Hence, total work done in assembling the two
charges
Short Answer Type Questions-II (SA-II)
W = W 1 + W2 (3 Marks)
T1T2
= T1V(U1) + T2V(U2) +
4ππε 0 U12 47. Three identical capacitors C1, C2 and C3 of

44. Two point charges Tand –2T are kept 'G' distance capacitance 6 μF each are connected to a 12 V
apart. Find the location of the point relative to battery as shown.
charge 'T' at which potential due to this system C1
of charges is zero. (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans.
P T – 2T
[ G +
12 V C3
(G + [) –
1 T 1 2T
=
4 πε 0 [ 4 πε 0 ( G + [ )

2[ = [ + G or [ = G C2
At distance 'G' towards left of charge ‘T’ Find
45. Two closely spaced (L) charge on each capacitor
equipotential surfaces B V+δV
(LL) equivalent capacitance of the network
A and B with poten- V (LLL) energy stored in the network of capacitors.
tials V and V + δV, δO (Delhi)
(where δV is the Ans. C1 and C2 in series, make C4 = 3 μF
change in V), are kept
1 1 1
δ l distance apart as A using = + .
C4 C1 C 2
shown in the figure.
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 29

(L) 12V of potential is available in C4 and C3. 4C

Charge in C3 = Q3 = C3V ⇒ 4= or C = 5 μF
5
= 6 × 10–6 × 12 = 72 μC 7KHWZRFDSDFLWRUVDUHWKHUHIRUHμ)DQGμ)
Charge in C4 = Q4 = C4V (LL) Since the capacitance of capacitors are in the
= 3 × 10–6 × 12 = 36 μC ratio 1 : 4,
∴ Charge on C1 and C2 will also be 36 μC the potential drop across them should be in
(LL) C4 and C3 are in parallel to the source
the ratio of 4 : 1 making them ⎛⎜ 4 × ⎞⎟
12 12
∴ Ceq = 3 + 6 = 9 μF
⎝ 5⎠ 5
1
(LLL) Energy stored = Ceq V2 ∴ V[ = 9.6 V and V\ = 2.4 volt
2
1 (LLL) Since they carry same charge, the ratio of the
= × (9 × 10–6 ) × 122 electrostatic energy is,
2
= 648 × 10–6 = 6.48 × 10–4 joule Q2 Q2
: , LH C\ : C[ = 4 : 1
48. The equivalent capacitance of the combination 2C 2C \
between A and B in the given figure is 4 μF.  [
50. A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery.
After some time the battery is disconnected and
A 20μF C B
a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is
(L) Calculate capacitance of the capacitor C. inserted between the plates. How would (L) the
(LL) Calculate charge on each capacitor if a 12 V capacitance, (LL) the electric field between the
battery is connected across terminals A and B. plates and (LLL) the energy stored in the
(LLL) What will be the potential drop across each capacitor, be affected? Justify your answer.
capacitor? (Delhi) (All India)
Ans. CHT = 4 μF Ans. Let C be the capacitance and V be the potential
(L) Since 20 μF and C are in series, we have difference.
The charge on the capacitor plates will then be

s
11 1
=
+

⇒
1
4
20 C
1
−=
1
=
5−1
=
4

iv D a Q = CV.
The electric field between the plates, E =
V
and

Sh
C
4 20 20 20 G
20 Q2 1
⇒ C= = 5 μF the energy stored, EQ = or CV2
4 2C 2
(LL) Charge drawn from 12 V battery is Q As the dielectric (K) is introduced after
= CHT.V = 4 × 12 = 48 μC disconnecting the battery
So charge on each capacitor = 48 μC We have the new values of charge, Q′ = Q
(LLL) Potential drop across Capacitance C′ = KC
Q 48 μC
20 μF, V20 = = = 2.4 volt Q V
C 20 μF Potential V′ = =
KC K
48 μC
and 5 μF, V5 = = 9.6 volt (L) New capacitance is K times its original.
5 μF
V′ V E 1
49. Two parallel plate X Y (LL) New electric field E = = = LH
capacitors, X and Y, have  G K G K K
times the original field.
the same area of plates
and same separation Q2 Q2 1 1
+ – (LLL) New energy = = = (EQ) LH
between them. X has air 12 V 2C′ 2 KC K K
between the plates while Y contains a dielectric times the original energy.
medium of εU = 4. 51. (D) A charge +Q is placed on a large spherical
(L) Calculate capacitance of each capacitor if conducting shell of radius R. Another small
equivalent capacitance of the combination conducting sphere of radius U carrying
is 4 μF. charge ‘T’ is introduced inside the large
(LL) Calculate the potential difference between shell and is placed at its centre. Find the
the plates of X and Y. potential difference between two points,
(LLL) What is the ratio of electrostatic energy one lying on the sphere and the other on the
stored in X and Y? (Delhi) shell.
Ans. Since area A and separation G are same, (E) How would the charge between the two
if C[ = C then C\ = 4C flow if they are connected by a conducting
1 1 1 wire? Name the device which works on this
(L) Since they are in series, = +
4 C 4C fact. (All India)
 30 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (D) Potential inside conducting spherical shell of Ans. Refer to Q. 50, Page 29
radius R carrying charge, 53. (D) Depict the equipotential surfaces for a
1 Q system of two identical positive point
T = constant = charges placed a distance ‘G’ apart.
4 πε 0 R
(E) Deduce the expression for the potential
Let us suppose that in some way we
energy of a system of two point charges T1
introduce a small sphere of radius U, carrying
and T2 brought from infinity to the points
charge T, into the large one, and place it at → →
the centre. U1 and U2 respectively in the presence of
→
+ ⎯ Total charge Q external electric field E . (Delhi)
+ + ←⎯
+ + Ans. (D)
+ +
R ⎯ +T T+
+
←⎯ + Conducting
+ + wire
←

+ +
+ + G
⎯

(TXLSRWHQWLDOVXUIDFHVRIWZRLGHQWLFDOSRLQWFKDUJHV
⎯

Charge T
→
The potential due to this new charge clearly (E) Let E be the external field
has the following values at the radii ∴ Work done on T2 against the external
indicated : →
Potential due to small sphere of radius U field = T2.V(U2 )
carrying charge T Work done on T2 against the field due to
1 TT T1T2
=
1 T
at the surface of small sphere T1 = . 1 2 =
πε 4 πε U 4 πε 0 U12
0 U
4 0 12

…where [U12 is the distance between T1 and T2

s
1 T By the superposition principle for fields, we
= at the surface of the large shell
4
of radius R
πε 0 U

iv D a add up the work done on T2 against the two

→
fields ( E and that due to T1).

Sh
Taking both charges T and Q into account, →
we have for the two potentials : ∴ Work done in bringing T2 to U2
1 ⎛Q T⎞ → T1T2
V(R) = ⎜ + ⎟ = T2 .V(U2 ) +
4 πε ⎝ R R ⎠
 0 4πε 0 U12
1 ⎛ Q T⎞ Thus,potential energy of the system
and V(U) = ⎜ + ⎟
πε 0 ⎝ R U⎠
4 = Total work done in assembling the

Hence the potential difference is configuration
V(U) – V(R) → → T1 T 2
= T1.V(U1 ) + T2 .V(U2 ) +
=
1 ⎛ Q T⎞
⎜ + ⎟−
1 ⎛Q
⎜
T⎞
+ ⎟  πε 0 U12
4π
4 πε 0 ⎝ R U ⎠ 4 πε 0 ⎝ R R ⎠ 54. A parallel plate capacitor, each with plate area A
and separation G, is charged to a potential
1 ⎛T T⎞ T ⎛1 1⎞
= ⎜ − ⎟= ⎜ − ⎟
⎝ ⎠
difference V. The battery used to charge it
4 πε 0 ⎝ U R ⎠ πε
 0 U R
4
remains connected. A dielectric slab of thickness
(E) If we connect the smaller and larger sphere
G and dielectric constant N is now placed
by a wire, the charge will flow from the
between the plates. What change, if any, will
conducting sphere of radius U to the large
take place in :
spherical shell of radius R. Van de Graaff
(L) charge on plates?
generator works on this fact.
(LL) electric field intensity between the plates?
(LLL) capacitance of the capacitor?
52. A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery. Justify your answer in each case. (Delhi)
After sometime the battery is disconnected and Ans. Given : Plate area of either plate of parallel plate
a dielectric slab with its thickness equal to the capacitor = A
plate separation is inserted between the plates. Distance between the plates = G and
How will (L) the capacitance of the capacitor, (LL) potential difference between the plates = V
electric field between the plates and (LLL) the ε A
∴ Initially capacitance, C = 0 ,
energy stored in the capacitor be affected?  G
Justify your answer in each case. (Delhi) Charge on plate, Q = CV
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 31

As the battery remains connected throughout, the ∴ Charge on capacitor, C2

potential difference between the plates remains C4 = 6 × 10–3 C
unchanged (V′ = V) on placing, a dielectric slab of (LL) Q2 = C123 V
C3
thickness ¶G· and dielectric constant ¶N· between = (4 × 10–6) × 500 C1
the plates. Q2
= 2 × 10 C
–3
D E
(L) New charge on plates, Q′ = C′ V′ = NCV = NQ ∴ Charge on each of Q1 C4
500 V
Thus, charge changes to N times of its the capacitors
original value. C1, C2 and C3
(LL) Electric field intensity between the plates, E′
= 2 × 10–3 C
V′ V 57. A network of four C2
= = =E
 G G capacitors each of 15 μF
Thus, electric field intensity between the C3
capacitance is connected C1
plates of capacitor remains unchanged.
to a 500 V supply as
(LLL) New capacitance of the capacitor, C4
shown in the figure. 500 V
Nε 0 A Determine (D) equivalent capacitance of the network
C′ = = NC
 G and (E) charge on each capacitor. (All India)
55. A parallel plate capacitor is charged to a Ans. (D) The capacitor C1, C2 and C3 are in series
potential difference V by a d.c. source. The
1 1 1 1
capacitor is then disconnected from the source. ∴ = + +
CS C1 C 2 C 3
If the distance between the plates is doubled,
state with reason how the following will change; 1 1 1 1 3 1
⇒ = + + = =
(L) electric field between the plates, CS 15 15 15 15 5
(LL) capacitance, and
Hence CS = 5 μF
(LLL) energy stored in the capacitor. (Delhi)
Now CS and C4 are in parallel

s
ε0A σ T T2
= ∴ Equivalent capacitance of the network,

a
Ans. C0 = , E0 = , X0 =
ε 0 ε0A

iv D
 G 2C 0 C = CS + C4 = 15 + 5 = 20 μF
On disconnecting the battery, the charge T on the (E) Charge on capacitor, C4 is

Sh
capacitor plates remains unchanged. T = C4V = (15 × 10–6) × 500 = 7500 μC
If the distance G is doubled, then …[V = 500
T Charge on each capacitor C1, C2 and C3 will
(L) E = = C0
ε 0 A be, T = CSV = (5 × 10–6) × 500 = 2500 μC
LH, WKH HOHFWULF ILHOG UHPDLQV XQFKDQJHG.
ε0A 1
(LL) C = = C0
 2 G 2 58. Deduce the expression for the electrostatic
LH, WKH FDSDFLWDQFH LV KDOYHG. energy stored in a capacitor of capacitance ‘C’
T2 T2 and having charge ‘Q’.
(LLL) X = = = 2X0
2C C0 How will the (L) energy stored and (LL) the
LH, WKH VWRUHG HQHUJ\ LV GRXEOHG. electric field inside the capacitor be affected
56. A network of four when it is completely filled with a dielectric
C2
capacitors each of 12 μF material of dielectric constant ‘K’? (All India)
capacitance is connected T
to a 500 V supply as C1 Ans. Potential of capacitor =
C3 &

shown in the figure. Small amount of work done in giving an
C4
Determine (D) equivalent additional charge GT to the capacitor,
capacitance of the 500 V T
network and (E) charge GW =  × GT
on each capacitor. (All India) &
Total work done in giving a charge Q to the
Ans. (D) Equivalent capacitance of the network,
capacitor
12 μF
C123 = = 4 μF(Q being in series)…(L) T=Q T=Q
3 T 1 ⎡ T2 ⎤ 1 Q2
Ceq = C123 + C4 = (4 + 12) μF = 16 μF
W=
∫ &
= ⎢ ⎥
2 ⎣⎢ & ⎥⎦
T=0
∴ W=
& 2
…[From (L) T = 0
As electrostatic force is conservative, thus work is
(E) (L) Q = CV, Q1 = C4V
stored in the form of potential energy (U) of the
∴ Q1 = 500 × 12 × 10–6
capacitor.
= 6000 × 10–6 = 6 × 10–3 C
 32 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

+T –Q (LL) Charge stored when voltage is increased by

1 Q2
U=W= + –
2 C 120 V
Put Q = CV + –
Q′ = 2μF × (180 + 120) V = 600μ C
1 + → –
∴ U= CV2 +
E
–
60. A slab of material of dielectric constant K has
2 the same area as that of the plates of a parallel
(L) C = C0K + –
plate capacitor but has the thickness G/2, where
1 + –
where [E0 =
C0V] G is the separation between the plates. Find out
2 1 2
the expression for its capacitance when the slab
1 1
Energy stored= CV = KC0V2
2
is inserted between the plates of the capacitor.
2 2
E = KE0 (All India)
↓ Ans. Total potential difference between the plates
energy stored V = E0(G – W) + EW
Energy stored will become K times the initial V = E0 ⎛⎜ G − G ⎞⎟ + E G
energy ⎝ 2⎠ 2
. = E0 ⎛⎜ 1 + ⎞⎟
G E0 G G 1
(LL) T = CV ⇒ V 
T
ε0 =
T = E0 +
2 K 2 2 ⎝ K ⎠
C
  0 G
C
T G⎛ 1⎞
T V T = E0 ⎜1 + ⎟
ε = ⎝ K⎠
Aε 0 2
V= =
KC
 0 G  0 G
KC
ε0
ε =
K
↓
electric field

∴ Electric field will become

1

a
times its initial value.
s
iv D
K

Sh
59. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is connected
across a battery of V volts. The charge stored in it
is 360 μC. When potential across the capacitor is
reduced by 120 V, the charge stored in it becomes As C =
T
V
=
T G⎛
T
1⎞
⎜1 + ⎟
=
⎛
2 Aε 0
1⎞
G⎜ 1 + ⎟
120 μC.
 $ε 0 2 ⎝ K⎠ ⎝ K⎠
Calculate :
(L) The potential V and the unknown capacitance 2KAε 0
C. C=
 K + 1)
G(
(LL) What will be the charge stored in the 61. Calculate the amount of work done to dissociate
capacitor, if the voltage applied had increased a system of three charges 1 μC, 1 μC and – 4 μC
by 120 V? (Delhi) placed on the vertices of an equilateral triangle
Ans. (L) Let the capacitance be C of side 10 cm. (Comptt. All India)
10
∴ Charge on Q1 = CV or 360 μC = CV …(L) Ans. U = 10 cm = = 10–1 m, and 1μC = 10–6 C
10 2
In second case, C
T3 = – 4 μC
Q2 = C(V – 120)
⇒ 120 μC = C(V – 120) …(LL)
From equation (L) and (LL)
V
3=
( V − 120) A B
T1 = 1 μC T2 = 1 μC
3V – 360 = V ⇒ 2V = 360
Potential energy
V = 180 volt
1 ( T1T2 + T1T3 + T2 T3 )
By putting this value of V in (LL) =
4 πε
 0 U
120 × 10–6 = C(180 – 120)
1 [(1 × 1 + (1 × − 4) + (1 × − 4)] × 10 −6 × 10 −6
120 × 10 −6 =
C= = 2μF 4 πε 0 10 − 1
60
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 33

(1 − 4 − 4) × 10 −6 × 10 −6 (E) The electric field inside a + + + + + + +

= 9 × 109
10 − 1 parallel plate capacitor is E. Find a b
= – 63 × 10–2 Joules the amount of work done in
Hence, 0.63 Joules of energy is required to disso- moving a charge T over a closed d c
ciate the system. rectangular loop a b c d a.(Delhi)
62. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is Ans. (D) Energy of a parallel plate capacitor. Refer to
connected across a battery of V volts. The charge Q. 58, Page 31
stored in it is 300 μC. When potential across the
⎡ 1
capacitor is reduced by 100 V, the charge stored ⎢ Read answer only upto U = 2 CV
2

in it becomes 100 μC. Calculate the potential V ⎣

and the unknown capacitance. What will be the (E) The amount of work done in moving a charge
charge stored in the capacitor if the voltage ‘T’ over a closed rectangular loop abcda is zero,
applied had increased by 100 V? (Delhi) because net displacement is zero.
Ans. (L) Charge stored, Q = CV →→
300 μC = C × V W = T E . G
When potential is reduced by 100 V 66. Derive the expression for the capacitance of a
100 μC = C(V – 100) = CV – 100 C parallel plate capacitor having plate area A and
100 μC = 300 μC – 100 C plate separation G. (Delhi)
⇒ 100 C = 300 μC – 100 μC Ans. Capacity of a parallel plate capacitor. A parallel
⇒ 100 C = 200 μC plate capacitor consists of two large plane parallel
Therefore, capacitance C = 2μF conducting plates separated by a small distance. We
300 μC first take the intervening medium between the plates
Potential, V = = 150 V
2 μF to be vaccum. Let A be the area of each plate and G
(LL) Charge stored when voltage applied is the separation between them. The two plates have
increased by 100 V charges Q and – Q. SinceG is much smaller than the
Q′ = 2μF × (150 + 100) = 500μC linear dimension of the plates (G2 << A), we can use
63. Draw the equipotential surfaces due to an
a s the result on electric field by an infinite plane sheet

iv D
electric dipole. Locate the points where the of uniform surface charge density. Plate 1 has surface
charge density σ = Q/A and Plate 2 has a surface

Sh
potential due to the dipole is zero. (All India)
charge density –σ, the electric field in different region
Ans. Potential at all points in equatorial plane is zero
is :
everywhere Equipotential Area A
surface I
Vnet = VA + VB Surface charge
density σ
2a + + + + + + + + + +
− KT KT
= 2 2
+ –q +q
E
(U + D ) (U 2 + D 2 ) d

=0
Surface charge II
64. Two thin concentric shells of radii U1 and U2 density – σ
(U2 > U1) have charges T1 and T2. Write the expres-
Outer region I (region above the plate 1),
sion for the potential at the surface of inner and
σ σ
outer shells. (Comptt. All India) E= − =0
2ε 0 2ε 0
Ans. (L) Potential at the surface of inner shell,
1 T1 Outer region II (region below the plate 2),
V1 = T1
σ σ
4 πε
 0 U1
T2 E= − =0
(LL) Potential at the surface of 2ε 0 2ε 0
O U1
outer shell, In the inner region between the plates 1 and 2, the
1 ( T1 + T2 ) electric fields due to the two charged plates add
V2 = U2
up, giving
4 πε
 0 U2
σ σ σ Q 1 QG
(Since the charge on inner shell will also con- E= + = = or V = EG =
2ε 0 2ε 0 ε 0 ε 0 A ε A
tribute)  0
The capacitance C of the parallel plate capacitor is
Q ε A
then C = = 0
65. (D) Obtain the expression for the energy stored V  G
per unit volume in a charged parallel plate 67. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitances C1
capacitor. and C2 such that C1 = 3C2 are connected across a
 34 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

battery of V volts as shown in the figure. Initially after the introduction of the dielectric slab.
the key (k) is kept closed to fully charge the (Comptt. Delhi)
capacitors. The key is now thrown open and a Ans. (L) Net capacitance before filling the gap with
dielectric slab of dielectric constant ‘K’ is dielectric slab
inserted in the two capacitors to completely fill Cinitial = C1 + C2 = 2C2 + C2 = 3C2
the gap between the plates. Net capacitance after filling the gap with
k dielectric slab of dielectric constant ‘K’
• Cfinal = KC1 + KC2 = 2KC2 + KC2
= 3KC2
V C1 C2 Cinitial 3C 2 1
∴ Ratio of net capacitance, = =
Cfinal 3KC 2 K
(LL) Energy stored in the combination before
introduction of dielectric slab
Find the ratio of (L) the net capacitance and (LL) the
energies stored in the combination, before and Q2
Uinitial =
after the introduction of the dielectric slab. 3C 2
(Comptt. Delhi) Energy stored in the combination after
Ans. (L) Net capacitance before filling the gap with introduction of dielectric slab
dielectric slab
Q2
Cinitial = C1 + C2 = 3C2 + C2 = 4C2 Ufinal =
3KC 2
Net capacitance after filling the gap with
dielectric slab of dielectric constant ‘K’ ∴ Ratio of energy stored
Cfinal = KC1 + KC2 = 3KC2 + KC2 = 4KC2 U initial Q 2 Q2 K
= = =K
∴ Ratio of net capacitance, U final 3C 2 3KC 2 1

s
Cinitial 4C 2 1 69. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitances C1
= =
Cfinal 4KC 2 K
(LL) Energy stored in the combination before

iv D a and C2 such that C1 = (C2)/2 are connected across

a battery of V volts as shown in the figure.

Sh
introduction of dielectric slab, Initially the key (k) is kept closed to fully charge
the capacitors. The key is now thrown open and
Q2 a dielectric slab of dielectric constant 'K' is
Uinitial =
3C 2 inserted in the two capacitors to completely fill
Energy stored in the combination after the gap between the plates.
introduction of dielectric slab, k
•
Q2
Ufinal =
3KC 2
V
∴ Ratio of energy stored C1 C2

U initial Q 2 Q2 K
= = =K
U final 3C 2 3KC 2 1
Find the ratio of (L) the net capacitance and (LL)
68. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitances C1
the energies stored in the combination, before
and C2 such that C1 = 2C2 are connected across a
and after the introduction of the dielectric slab.
battery of V volts as shown in the figure. Initially
(Comptt. Delhi)
the key (k) is kept closed to fully charge the
Ans. (L) Net capacitance before filling the gap with
capacitors. The key is now thrown open and a
dielectric slab
dielectric slab of dielectric constant 'K' is inserted
Cinitial = C1 + C2 = (C2)/2 + C2
in the two capacitors to completely fill the gap
= 3C2/2 = 1.5 C2
between the plates.
Net capacitance after filling the gap with
k
dielectric slab of dielectric constant ‘K’
•
Cfinal = KC1 + KC2 = KC2/2 + KC2
= 1.5KC2
V C1 C2 ∴ Ratio of net capacitance,
Cinitial 1.5C 2 1
= =
Cfinal 1.5KC 2 K
(LL) Energy stored in the combination before
Find the ratio of (L) the net capacitance and (LL) the
introduction of dielectric slab
energies stored in the combination, before and
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 35

Q2 20
Uinitial = C= μ
μF
1.5C 2 3
Energy stored in the combination after Charge on each capacitor, T = CV
introduction of dielectric slab ⎛ 20 ⎞
⇒ ⎜ 3 ⎟ × 90 = 600 μC
Q2 ⎝ ⎠
Ufinal =
1.5KC 2 Potential difference across the capacitor C2
∴ Ratio of energy stored T 600 μC
V2 = = = 20V
U initial Q2 Q2 K C2 30 μF
= = =K 
U final 1.5C 2 1.5KC 2 1 Energy stored in capacitor across C2
1 1
E2 = C V 2 = × 30 × (20)2 = 6000 J
2 2 2 2
70. Two capacitors of unknown capacitances C1 and
C2 are connected first in series and then in
parallel across a battery of 100 V. If the energy 72. Two parallel plate X Y
stored in the two combinations is capacitors X and Y have
0.045 J and 0.25 J respectively, determine the the same area of plates
value of C1 and C2. Also calculate the charge on and same separation
each capacitor in parallel combination. (Delhi) between them. X has air
+ –
Ans. Energy stored in a capacitor is given by, between the plates while
15 V
1 Y contains a dielectric
E= CV2 medium of εU = 4.
2
1 C1C 2 (L) Calculate capacitance of each capacitor if
(D) In series combination, 0.045 = (100)2 equivalent capacitance of the combination
2 C1 + C 2
C1C 2
is 4 μF.
⇒
C1 + C 2
= 0.09 × 10–4 …(L)

a s (LL) Calculate the potential difference between

iv D
the plates of X and Y.
(E) In parallel combination, 0.25
(LLL) Estimate the ratio of electrostatic energy

Sh
1 stored in X and Y. (Delhi)
= (C1 + C2) (100)2
2 Ans. (L) Let C[ = C
⇒ C1 + C2 = 0.5 × 10–4 …(LL) C\ = 4C (as it has a dielectric medium of
On simplifying (L) and (LL), C1C2 = 0.045 × 10–8 εU = 4
(C1 – C2)2 = (C1 + C2)2 – 4C1C2 For series combination of two capacitors
= (0.5 × 10–4)2 – 4(0.045 × 10–8) 1 1 1 1 1 1
= + ⇒ = +
= (0.25 × 10–8) – (0.180 × 10–8) C C[ C\ 4μF C 4C

(C1 – C2)2 = 0.07 × 10–8 1 5
= ⇒ C = 5μF
(C1 – C2) = 0.26 × 10–4 …(LLL) 4μF 4C
From (LL) and (LLL), we get μF, C\ = 20 μF
Hence, C[ = 5μ
⇒ C1 = 0.38 × 10–4 F and C2 = 0.12 × 10–4 F (LL) Total charge Q = CV = 4μF × 15 V = 60 μC
Charges on capacitor C1 and C2 in parallel Q 60μC
combination V[ = = = 12V
C
 [ 5μF
Q1 = C1V = (0.38 × 10–4 × 100) = 0.38 × 10–2 C
Q 60μC
Q2 = C2V = (0.12 × 10–4 × 100) = 0.12 × 10–2 C V\ = = = 3V
71. Calculate the potential C\ 20μF

difference and the Q2 Q2
(LLL) E[ = , E\ =
energy stored in the A C1 C2 C3
2C [ 2C
 \
capacitor C2 in the
circuit shown in the figure. Given potential at A Q2
E[ 2C C\ 20
is 90 V, C1 = 20 μF, C2 = 30 μF and C3 = 15 μF. = 2[ = = =4
(All India) E\ Q C[ 5
Ans. Given VA = 90 V, C1 = 20 μF, C2 = 30 μF and 
2C \
C3 = 15 μF ∴ E[ : E\ :: 4 : 1
Since these capacitors are connected in series, net 73. Define an equipotential surface. Draw
capacitance (C) will be, equipotential surfaces :
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 3 (L) in the case of a single point charge and
= + + = + + = = (LL) in a constant electric field in Z-direction.
C C1 C 2 &3 20 30 15 60 20

 36 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Why the equipotential surfaces about a

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
single charge are not equidistant?
A B
(LLL) Can electric field exist tangential to an P R S T
equipotential surface? Give reason. (All India)
Ans. A surface with a constant value of potential at all (LL) If a dc source of 7 V is connected across
points of the surface is defined as ‘equipotential AB, how much charge is drawn from the
surface’ source and what is the energy stored in
the network? (Delhi)
(L) Equipotential surface for a T
Ans. Given : C1 = C2 = C3 = C4 = C5 = 2μF
single point charge. = 2 x 10–6 F
(L) Capacitors C2, C3 and C4 are in parallel
∴ C234 = C2 + C3 + C4 = 2 + 2 + 2
E ∴ C234 = 6μF
Capacitors C1, C234 and C5 are in series
(LL) Equipotential surface in a
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
constant electric field as ∴ = + + = + + = μF
shown in the adjoining C HT C1 C 234 C 5 2 6 2 6

diagram.
6 6
Equipotential surface are not Cequivalent = μF = 10–6 F
7 7
1
equidistant, because V ∝ (LL) Charge drawn from the source
U 6
(LLL) No, If the field lines are tangential, work will Q = CHT V = × 7 μC = 6 μC
7
be done in moving a charge on the surface
which goes against the definition of Energy stored,
(6 × 10 −6 ) ⎛

s Q2
equipotential surface. 7 ⎞

a
μF, is U = = ×⎜ ⎟
74. A parallel plate capacitor, of capacitance 20μ ⎝ 6 × 10 −6 ⎠

iv D
2C 2
conneted to a 100 V supply. After sometime the
(6 × 6 × 10 −12 ) × 7

Sh
battery is disconnected, and the space, between
= J = 21 μJ
the plates of the capacitor is filled with a 2 × (6 × 10 −6 )
dielectric, of dielectric constant 5. Calculate the 76. A 12 pF capacitor is connected to a 50 V battery.
energy strored in the capacitor (L) before (LL) after How much electrostatic energy is stored in the
the dielectric has been put in between its plates. capacitor? If another capacitor of 6 pF is
(Comptt. Outside Delhi) connected in series with it with the same
Ans. Given : C = 20 μF = 20 × 10–6 F, V = 100 V battery connected across the combination, find
K=5 E1 = ? E2 = ? the charge stored and potential difference
Charge stored, Q = CV = (20 × 10–6) × (100) across each capacitor. (Delhi)
= 2000 μC
Ans. Energy stored, in the capacitor of capacitance
New value of capacitance (C′) = 5 × 20 μF = 100 μF
12 pF,
1 Q2
Energy stored in a capacitor, (E) = 1
2 C (L) U = CV2
(L) ∴ Energy stored EHIRUH dielectric is 2
introduced 1
= × (12 × 10–12) × 50 × 50 J
2
1 ( 2000 × 10 −6 ) × ( 2000 × 10 −6 )
E1 = × = 0.1 J …[Given V = 50]
2 ( 20 × 10 −6 ) = 1.5 x 10–8 J …(L)
(LL) Energy stored DIWHU the dielectric is (LL) C = Equivalent capacitance of 12 pF and
introduced 6 pF, in series, is given by
(∴ there is no change in the value of Q ) 1 1 1 1+ 2
= + =
1 ( 2000 × 10 −6 ) × ( 2000 × 10 −6 ) C 12 6 12
E2 = × = 0.02 J ∴ C = 4 pF
2 (100 × 10 −6 )
∴ Charge stored across each capacitor
T = CV = (4 x 10–12) x 50 C = 2 x 10–10 C
Charge on each capacitor 12 pF as well as
75. (L) Find equivalent capacitance between A
on 6 pF is 2 × 10–10 C
and B in the combination given below.
∴ Potential difference across capacitor C1
Each capacitor is of 2 μF capacitance.
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 37

T ( 2 × 10 −10 ) 50 where Û is the unit vector along the

V1 = = −12
volt = V position vector OP.
C
 1 12 × 10 3
The electric potential of a dipole is then
Potential difference across capacitor C2 given by
T ( 2 × 10 −10 ) 100 1 S.Uˆ
V2 = = −12
volt = V V= = 2 (U >> D) …(LY)
C 2 (6 × 10 ) 3 4 πε U
 0
77. (L) Derive the expression for the electric From the above equation (LY), potential on
potential due to an electric dipole at a the dipole axis (θ = 0, π) is given by
point on its axial line. 1 S
(LL) Depict the equipotential surfaces due to V=
4 πε 0 U
2
an electric dipole. (Delhi)
(LL) Equipotential surface for an electric dipole
Ans. (L) The potential due to the dipole is the sum
of potentials due to the charges T and – T
1 ⎛T T⎞
V=
4 πε 0 ⎜U − U ⎟ …(L)
 ⎝ 1 2⎠
– +

where U1 and U2 are the distances of the

point P from T and – T, respectively.
Now, by geometry, 78. Two identical capacitors of 12 pF each are
U12 = U2 + D2 – 2DU cos θ, connected in series across a battery of 50 V.
U22 = U2 + D2 + 2DU cos θ How much electrostatic energy is stored in the
If U is much greater than D (U >> D) then, combination? If these were connected in
parallel across the same battery, how much
⎛ 2 D cos θ D 2 ⎞ 2 D cos θ ⎞
+ 2 ⎟ ≅ U2 ⎛⎜ 1 −
U 12 = U 2 ⎜ 1 −

s
⎟ energy will be stored in the combination now?

a
⎝ ⎠
⎝
U U ⎠  U
Also find the charge drawn from the battery in

iv D
Similarly, each case. (Delhi)

Sh
Ans. Given : C1 = C2 = 12 pF, V = 50 V
2 D cos θ ⎞
U22 ≅ U2 ⎛⎜ 1 − ⎟
⎝ U ⎠
(L) In series combination :
1 ⎛ 1
=⎜
1⎞
+ ⎟
C s ⎝ 12 12 ⎠
r1 P
q ∴ CV = 6 x 10–12 pF
r 1
UV = CV2
a 2
1
T UV = × (6 × 10–12) × (50 × 50) J
r2 2
2a O
p ∴ UV = 75 × 10–10 J
a T V = C VV
TV = CVV = 6 × 50 = 300 × 10–12 C
–q = 3 × 10–10 C

Using the Binomial theorem and retaining 12pF 12pF

terms upto the first order in D/U; we obtain,
−1/ 2
1 1⎛ 2 D cos θ ⎞ 1⎛ D ⎞
≅ ⎜1 − ⎟ ≅ ⎜ 1 + cos θ⎟ …(L)
U 1 U ⎝ U ⎠ U⎝ U ⎠

−1/ 2
1 1⎛ 2 D cos θ ⎞ 1⎛ D ⎞
≅ ⎜1 + ⎟ ≅ ⎜ 1 − cos θ⎟ …(LLL)
U U ⎝ U ⎠ U⎝ U ⎠ 50 V
 2
Using Equations (L), (LL) and (LLL) and S = 2TD, (LL) Parallel combination :
we get CS = (12 + 12) pF
T 2 D cos θ S cos θ ∴ CS = 24 × 10–12 F
V= =
4 πε U 2
4 πε 0 U 2 1
 0 UV = × (24 × 10–12) × (50 × 50)
2
Now, S cos θ = S.Û
= 3 × 10–8 J
 38 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

T S = C SV ⎛ K 2 + 1⎞
1
TS = 24 × 10–12 × 50 = 1.2 × 10–9 C = CV2 ⎜ ⎟ …(Y)
2 ⎝ K ⎠
12pF From equations (Y) and (LL), we get
E1 CV 2 .2K 2K
Required ratio = = 2 2
=
12pF
E2 CV (K + 1) (K 2 + 1)
80. (D) Write WZR properties by which electric
potential is related to the electric field.
(E) Two point charges T1 and T2, separated by
a distance of U12 are kept in an external
50 V electric field. Derive an expression for the
79. Two identical parallel plate capacitors A and B potential energy of the system of two
are connected to a battery of V volts with the charges in the field. (Comptt. Delhi)
switch S closed. The switch is now opened Ans. (D) Two properties which relate electric
and the free space between the plates of the potential to electric field—
capacitors is filled with a dielectric of (L) Electric field is in the direction in
dielectric constant K. Find the ratio of the total which potential decreases at the
electrostatic energy stored in both capacitors maximum rate.
before and after the introduction of the (LL) Magnitude of electric field is given by
dielectric. (All India) change in the magnitude of potential
per unit displacement normal to a
S GV
charged conducting surface, or E =
GU
E A B

a s (E) Work done in bringing the charge T1 to a

iv D
point against external electric field,
→

Sh
W1 = T1V(U1 )
Ans. Given : CA = CB = C, Emf = V volts Work done in bringing the charge T2 against
E1 the external electric field and the electric
Dielectric constant = K =?
E2 field produced due to charge T1
We know that : → 1 TT
W2 = T2V(U2 ) + . 1 2
⎛ 1Q 2⎞ 4
 πε 0 U12
1
Energy stored = CV2 ⎜ = ⎟ …(L) Therefore, Total work done = Electrostatic
2 ⎝ 2 C ⎠
potential energy
Net capacitance with switch S closed = C + C =
→ → 1 T T
2C ( Q being in parallel) U = T1 V(U1 ) + T2 V(U2 ) . 1 2
 4 πε 0 U12
1
∴ E1 = Energy stored = × (2C) × (V2) = CV2 81. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is
2
…(LL) connected across a battery of V volt. A charge
After the switch S is opened, capacitance of of 360 μC is stored in it. When the potential
each capacitor = KC across the capacitor is reduced by 120 V, the
1
charge stored in the capacitor becomes 120 μC.
∴ Energy stored in capacitor A = KCV2 Calculate V and the unknown capacitance.
2
…(LLL) What would have been the charge on the
capacitor if the voltage were increased by
For capacitor B,
120 V? (Comptt. Delhi)
1 Q2 1 C2V 2 1 CV 2 Ans. Given : T1 = 360 μC = 360 x 10 μC, T2 = 120 μC
–6
Energy stored = = = …(LY)
2 KC 2 KC 2 K = 120 x 10–6 C
From equations (LLL) and (LY), we get T1 T T
∴ E2 = Total Energy stored C= . Also C = 2 and C = 3
V1 V2 V3
1 CV 2
= CV 2 ⎛⎜ K + ⎞⎟ [Q Capacitor is the same
1 1 1
= KCV2 +
2 2 K 2 ⎝ K⎠ T1 T2
Q =
V
 1 V2
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 39

( 360 × 10 −6 ) (120 × 10 −6 ) ∈0 A
⇒ = C=
V ( V − 120)  G
On solving, V = 180 V Let the new capacity be C′
K ∈0 A 10 × (∈0 A)
360 × 10 −6 C′ = =
C =  G ′ 3G
180 [ Q K = 10, G′ = 3G]
μF is the unknown capacitance.
= 2μ ⎛ 10 ⎞ ⎛ ∈0 A ⎞ 10
Now the voltage has been increased by 120 V, ⇒ ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ = C
⎝ 3 ⎠ ⎝ G ⎠ 3
then V = 180 + 120 = 300 V 10
⇒ C′′ = C
T 3
C = 3 = 2μF
300 (LL) Since V remains the same as the battery is
T3 = 300 × μC not disconnected,
Q′ = C′V
T3 = 600 μC would be the charge on the capacitor
if voltage were increased by 120 V. ⎛ 10 ⎞ 10 10
Q′ = ⎜ C⎟ V = CV = Q
82. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is ⎝ 3 ⎠ 3 3
connected across a battery of V volt. A charge 10
⇒ Q′′ = Q
of 240 μC is stored in it. When the potential 3
across the capacitor is reduced by 80 V, the 1
charge stored in the capacitor becomes 80 μC. (LLL) We know energy density (UG) = ∈ E2
2 0
Calculate V and the unknown capacitance. …(L)
What would have been the charge in the 1
capacitor if the voltage were increased by UG′ = K ∈0E22
2
80 V? (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. Similar to Q. 81.

a s =
1
K ∈0 ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟
V
2
⎡ V⎤
⎢⎣Q E = G ⎥⎦

iv D
[Ans : V = 120 V, F = 2 μF, Q = 400 μC]
2  ⎠
⎝ G′ 

Sh
83. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is 2
= ⎛⎜ 10 ⎞⎟ ∈ V
connected across a battery of V volt. A charge ⎝ ⎠ 0 2
 2 (3G)
of 120 μC is stored in it. When the potential
1 ⎛ V2 ⎞
= ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ ∈0 × ⎜
across the capacitor is reduced by 40 V, the 10
charge stored in the capacitor becomes 40 μC. ⎝ 2⎠ 9 ⎝ G ⎟⎠

Calculate V and the unknown capacitance.
= ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ ⎛⎜ ∈0 E 2 ⎞⎟
10 1
What would have been the charge in the
⎝ 9 ⎠ ⎝2 ⎠
capacitor if the voltage were increased by 40 V?
(Comptt. Delhi) 10
= U ( Q as per equation (L))
Ans. Similar to Q. 81. 9 G
[Ans : V = 60 V, F = 2 μF, Q3 = 200 μC]. ∴ UG ′ =
10
U
84. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is 9 G
charged to a potential V by a battery. Without 85. Derive the expression for the electric potential
disconnecting the battery, the distance between at any point P, at distance U from the centre of
the plates is tripled and a dielectric medium of an electric dipole, making angle α, with its
N = 10 is introduced between the plates is axes. (Comptt. All India)
tripled and a dielectric medium of N = 10 is Ans. The potential due to the dipole is the sum of
introduced between the plates of the capacitor. potentials due to the charges T and – T
Explain giving reasons, how will the following
be affected: 1 ⎛T T⎞
V= − …(L)
(L) capacitance of the capacitor 4 πε 0 ⎜⎝ U1 U2 ⎟⎠

(LL) charge on the capacitor, and where U1 and U2 are the distances of the point P
(LLL) energy density of the capacitor. from T and – T, respectively.
Now, by geometry,
(Comptt. Outside Delhi)
Ans. Given : G′ = 3G, K = 10, C′ = ?, Q′ = ?, UG′ = ? U12 = U2 + D2 – 2DU cos θ,
(L) For parallel plate capacitor
U22 = U2 + D2 + 2DU cos θ
 40 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

If U is much greater than D (U >> D) then, (LL) electric field and (LLL) energy density of the
capacitor change. (All India)
⎛ 2 D cos θ D 2⎞
2 D cos θ ⎞
U 12 = U 2 ⎜ 1 − + 2 ⎟ ≅ U2 ⎛⎜ 1 − ⎟ Ans. (D) Consider a parallel plate capacitor with plate
⎝ ⎠
⎝
U U ⎠  U area ‘A’ and separation between the plates
Similarly, equal to ‘G’. Suppose at any instant of time
charge on the capacitor plate is ‘T’ and
2 D cos θ ⎞
U22 ≅ U2 ⎛⎜ 1 − ⎟ potential difference due to this charge is ‘Y’.
⎝ U ⎠ To supply a charge ‘GT’ further to the
r1 P capacitor amount of work required is
q T
GW = VGT or GW = GT [ Q T = CY)
r C

a In order to supply a charge ‘Q’
4
T 1
2a
p
O
r2 Work required, W =
C ∫ T GT
 0
a
1Q 2
⇒ W=
2C
–q
1Q 2
Thus energy stored by capacitor is, U =
Using the Binomial theorem and retaining terms 2C
upto the first order in D/U; we obtain,
Kε 0 A Kε 0 A
−1/ 2 (E) (L) CI = = ( Q G′′ = G/2)
1 1⎛
≅ ⎜1 −
2 D cos θ ⎞
⎟
1⎛ D ⎞
≅ ⎜ 1 + cos θ⎟ …(L)  G ′ G/2
U U ⎝ U ⎠ U⎝ U ⎠
 1 20ε 0 A εRA
CI = = 20 CL ( Q CL = )

U
1 1⎛
≅ ⎜1 +
U ⎝
2 D cos θ ⎞
U
⎟
⎠
−1/ 2
1⎛ D ⎞
≅ ⎜ 1 − cos θ⎟
U⎝ U ⎠
…(LLL)

D a s  G
∴ &DSDFLWDQFH EHFRPHV  WLPHV
 G

v
 2
Using Equations (L), (LL) and (LLL) and S = 2TD, we
get

V=
T 2 D cos θ
=
S cos θ
S h i (LL) EI =


EI = 2
V
G ′
V
=
G
V
/2

= 2EL
( Q G′′ = G/2)

( Q EL =
V
)
4 πε 0 U 2
4 πε 0 U 2 G G

∴ (OHFWULF ILHOG LV GRXEOHG
Now, S cos θ = S.Û
(LLL) Energy density,
where Û is the unit vector along the position 2
1 σ2 1 ⎛ σ ⎞ 1
vector OP. U °I = = ε0 ⎜ ⎟ = ε (E )2
The electric potential of a dipole is then given by  2 ε0 2 ⎝ ε0 ⎠ 2 0 L
σ
1 S.Uˆ ( Q EL = )
V= = 2 (U >> D) …(LY) ε0
4 πε 0 U 1 10
UI = ε ε E  or UI = ε (2EL)2
From the above equation (LY), potential on the 2 U 0 I 2 0
dipole axis (θ = 0, π) is given by 1
∴ UI = 40 ( ε E 2) = 40 Ui
1 S 2 0 L
V= 6R HQHUJ\ GHQVLW\ LV  WLPHV
 ε 0 U
π
4 2

Long Answer Type Questions (LA) 87. (D) Write WZR properties of equipotential sur-
(5 Marks) faces. Depict equipotential surfaces due to
an isolated point charge. Why do the equi-
potential surfaces get closer as the distance
86. Derive DQ expression for the energy stored in a
between the equipotential surface and the
parallel plate capacitor.
source charge decreases?
On charging a parallel plate capacitor to a
potential V, the spacing between the plates is (E) An electric dipole of dipole moment →
S , is
halved, and a dieletric medium of ∈U = 10 is →
placed in a uniform electric field E . De-
introduced between the plates, without →
disconnecting the d.c. source. Explain, using duce the expression for the torque τ acting
suitable expressions, how the (L) capacitance, on it. (Comptt. All India)
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 41

Ans. (D) 3URSHUWLHV RI HTXLSRWHQWLDO VXUIDFHV

W = SE [ − cos θ ]θ 2
θ
or
(L) No work is done in moving a test charge 1
over an equipotential surface. ∴ W = – SE [cos θ2 – cos θ1]
(LL) No two equipotential surfaces can inter-
sect each other.
(LLL) Equipotential surface due to an isolated 88. (D) Obtain the expression for the potential due
point charge is spherical. to an electric dipole of dipole moment S at
(LY) The electric field at every point is a point ‘[’ on the axial line.
normal to the equipotential surface (E) Two identical capacitors of plate dimen-
passing through that point. DQ\ WZR sions O × E and plate separation G have di-
− GV − GV electric slabs filled in between the space of
As E = or GU = the plates as shown in the figure.
 GU  E
For the same charge in the value, V, O
O E
LH when GV = constant, E
1
we have GU ∝
E G
G K1 K2
Hence, equipotential surface gets closer as K
the distance between the equipotential ←⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
O/2 X O/2 →
surface and the source charge decreases.
Obtain the relation between the dielectric
Equipotential
constants K, K1 and K2.(Comptt. All India)
Ans. (D) 3RWHQWLDODWDSRLQWGXHWRDQHOHFWULFGLSROH
+Q Let us consider an electric dipole consisting
of two equal and opposite charges – T at A

a s and + T at B, separated by a distance 2 Owith

iv D
centre at O. We have to calculate potential at
(TXLSRWHQWLDO VXUIDFH GXH WR DQ LVRODWHG FKDUJH
a point P, whose polar co-ordinates are (U, θ);

Sh
(E) Consider a dipole with charges + T and – T LH OP = U and ∠BOP = θ, as shown in the
→
placed in a uniform electric field E such that figure.
Here AP = U1 and BP = U2, we can easily cal-
AB = 2D as shown in the figure. culate potential as P due to point charges at
B
+T → 1 T
T
 E
A and B using V =
πε
 0 U
4
1 ( − T) 1 T
V1 = × and V2 = ×
→ 4 πε
 0 U1 4 πε
 0 U2
E
2D 2D sin θ Total potential at P due to both the charges of
→
 S

the dipole is given by

V = V1 + V2
–T θ
→ T ⎡1 1⎤
⎢ − ⎥
–T E That is, V = …(L)
A 4 πε 0 U U
 ⎣ 2 1⎦

To put this result in a more convenient form,

we draw normals from A and B on the line
Since the dipole experiences no net force in a
joining O and P. From ΔBOD, we note that
uniform electric field but experiences a torque (τ)
OD = O cos θ and from ΔOAC we note that
is given by
OC = O cos θ. For a small dipole (AB << OP),
→ → →
∴ τ = SE sin θ from the figure, we can take PB = PD and
τ = S × E
PA = PC.
It tends to rotate the dipole in clockwise direction.
Hence U1 = U + O cos θ, U2 = U – O cos θ
To rotate the dipole anti-clockwise work has to be
Using these results in equation (L), we get
done on the dipole.
T ⎡ 1 1 ⎤
θ2 V = ⎢ − ⎥
4 πε 0 ⎣ (U − O cos θ) (U + O cos θ) ⎦
θ2
W = ∫ τdθ
θ1
or W = ∫ SE sin θ Gθ T ⎡ ( 2O cos θ) ⎤ T × 2O cos θ
θ1 = ⎢ ⎥ =
4 πε 0 ⎣ (U − O cos θ) ⎦  4 πε 0 U
2 2 2 2
42 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

P
⎛O ⎞ ⎛O ⎞
ε 0 K 1 ⎜ × E⎟ ε 0 K 2 ⎜ × E⎟
⎝2 ⎠ ⎝2 ⎠
= +
 G G
(O × E )
U ⇒ C2 = 2 ε 0 (K1 + K2) …(LL)
U1 U2  G
Since these are identical capacitors, compar-
ing (L) and (LL),
We have C1 = C2
D ε 0 K (O × E ) (O × E) ⎛ K 1 + K 2 ⎞
θ = ε0 ⎜ ⎟
TB  G G ⎝ 2 ⎠
A O
–T
K1 + K2
C ∴ K=
2
where we have neglected the term containing
second power of O since O << U
In terms of dipole (S = T × 2O), we can express 89. (D) Explain, using suitable diagrams, the
S cos θ difference in the behaviour of a (L)
this result as V = …(LL)
 πε 0 U
4 2 conductor and (LL) dielectric in the presence
of external electric field. Define the terms
This result shows that unlike the potential
polarization of a dielectric and write its
due to a point charge, the potential due to a
relation with susceptibility.
dipole is inversely proportional to the square
(E) A thin metallic
of the distance.
spherical shell of • A
Let us now consider its special cases.

s
radius R carries a Q 2Q

a
6SHFLDO &DVHV charge Q on its surface.

iv D
Case I : When point P lies on the axial line Q C
A point charge is Q
of the dipole on the side of positive 2

Sh
2
charge, placed at its centre C
θ = 0 and cos θ = 1 and another charge
Then equation (LL) reduces to +2Q is placed outside the shell at a distance
[ from the centre as shown in the figure.
S
VAXIS = …(LLL) Find (L) the force on the charge at the centre
πε
 0 U
4 2
of shell and at the point A, (LL) the electric
Case II : When point P lies on the axial line flux through the shell. (Delhi)
of the dipole but on the side of Ans. (D) (L) Behaviour of conductor in an external
negative charge, electric field :
θ = 180° and cos θ = 1
E0
S σfree σfree
Then VAXIS = – …(LY) E0 Ein E0
πε
 0 U
4 2
E0 + Ein = 0
Case III :When point P lies on the equatorial
line of the dipole (perpendicular bisector of &RQGXFWRU
AB), θ = 90° and cos θ = 0 (LL) Behaviour of a dielectric in an external
Then Vequatorial = 0 …(Y) electrical field :
Thus, electric potential due to a dipole is E0
zero at every point on the equatorial
E0 σ Ein σp
line of the dipole. E0

ε 0 K × (O × E ) E0 + Ein ≠ 0
(E) In first case, C1 = …(L)
 G
'LHOHFWULF
In second case, these two apartments are in
([SODQDWLRQ In the presence of electric field,
parallel, their net capacity would be the sum
the free charge carriers in a conductor move
of two individual capacitances the charge distribution and the conductor
C2 = C′2 + C′′2 readjusts itself so that the net Electric field
within the conductor becomes zero.
 Chapter 2 : ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 43

In a dielectric, the external electric field surface charge density σ. If they are
induces a net dipole moment, by stretching/ connected to each other with a conducting
reorienting the molecules. The electric field, wire, in which direction will the charge
due to this induced dipole moment, flow and why? (All India)
opposes, but does not exactly cancel the Ans. (L) Given :
+σ –σ
external electric field.
Polarisation : Induced Dipole moment, per Inside
→
unit volume, is called the polarisation. For E1 E2 E2
Linear isotropic dielectrics having a →
susceptibility [F, we have polarisation (S) as: Outside E1
S = XFE
Q Plate 1 Plate 2
(E) (L) Net Force on the charge , placed at the
2
centre of the shell, is zero. → → → σ+σ σ
(D) Inside E = E1 + E 2 = =
Force on charge ‘2Q’ kept at point A, 2ε 0 ε0
⎛ 3Q ⎞ → → → σ−σ
1⎜ ⎟ 2Q Outside E = E 2 − E1 = =0
⎝ 2 ⎠ (K )3Q2 2ε 0
F = E × 2Q = =
4 πε 0 [ 2  [ 2 (E) Potential difference between plates,

⎡ 1
… ⎢K = 1QG
⎣ 4 πε 0 V = EG =
ε 0 A
Q ε0A
(LL) Electric flux through the shell, (F) Capacitance, C = =
V G
1
φ= × magnitude of the charge (LL) As potential on and inside a charged sphere
ε0 is given
enclosed by the shell
1 Q

a s 1 Q 1 4 πU 2σ

iv D
φ= × V= = .
ε0 2 4 πε 0 U 4 πε 0 U

Sh
…[U = radius of sphere)
Q
∴ φ= . Now, potential of metallic sphere of radius R
2ε 0
is given by,
Q δ( 4 πR 2 ) δR
90. (L) If two similar large plates, each of area A VR = = = …(L)
4 πε 0 R 4 πε 0 R ε0
having surface charge densities +σ σ and –σ σ
are separated by a distance G in air, find the Similarly, potential of metallic sphere of
expressions for radius 2R is given by,
(D) field at points between the two plates Q δ( 4 π( 2R)2 ) δ 2R
and on outer side of the plates. Specify V2R = = =
4 πε 0 (2R) 4 πε 0 (2R) ε0
the direction of the field in each case.
(E) the potential difference between the plates. …(LL)
(F) the capacitance of the capacitor so From (L) and (LL), we know that V2R > VR
formed. Hence, the bigger sphere will be at a higher
(LL) Two metallic spheres of radii R and 2R are potential, so charge will flow from bigger
charged so that both of these have same sphere to smaller sphere.


44 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

nit 2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
3. Current Electricity

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Electric current. The rate of flow of electric charge through a conductor is called electric current.
dq
∴ I=
dt
The SI unit of electric current is ampere ‘A’.
2. Ohm’s law. It states that “physical conditions remaining unchanged, the current flowing through a conductor is always directly

a
proportional to the potential difference across its two ends.”

s
iv D
Let V be potential difference and I be current
then V ∝ I

Sh
⇒ V = RI where [R is the resistance of the conductor. The SI unit of resistance is ohm Ω.]
3. Resistance of a conductor. The resistance of a conductor of length l and cross-section area A is given by
l
R=ρ where [ρ is the resistivity of the material of the conductor.]
A
4. Resistivity. It is defined as the resistance offered by a wire of this material of unit length and unit cross-section area. It is also
known as specific resistance of this material of the conductor. The SI unit of resistivity is Ohm metre ‘Ω m’.
5. Conductance. The reciprocal of the resistance of a conductor is called its conductance ‘G’.
1
∴ G=
R
The SI unit of conductance is Ohm–1, Ω–1 or simen ‘S’.
6. Conductivity. The reciprocal of the resistivity of the material of a conductor is called its conductivity ‘σ’
1
∴ σ= ρ
The SI unit of conductivity is Ohm–1 metre–1 ‘Ω–1m–1’.
7. Drift velocity. It is the velocity with which a free electron in the conductor gets drifted under the influence of the applied
external electric field
→ ⎡τ is average relaxation time,
→ eτE I ⎢
∴ Vd = = where ⎢n is number of free electrons per
→
unit volume in the conductor,
m ne A ⎢m is mass of an electron and E is electric field.
⎣ →
8. Current density. It gives the amount of charge flowing per second per unit area normal to the flow. The current density J is
given by
→ → ⎡ n is the number density of charge carriers each of charge q
J = nq v d where ⎢
⎢⎣ vd is the drift velocity.
9. Mobility. Mobility of electron μ is defined as the magnitude of the drift velocity per unit electric field E
νd νG Hτ
∴ μ= ⇒μ= = where [τ is the average collison time for electrons.
E  E P
HEτ
Drift speed, νd =
 P
10. Temperature coefficient of resistivity. It is defined as the fractional increase in resistivity per unit resistance per degree rise
in temperature

44 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 45

Rt − R 0
∴ Temperature coefficient α =
R0 t
The SI unit of temperature coeffient is ° C–1.
11. Electric power. The rate of dissipation of electrical energy in an electric circuit is called electric power.
V2
∴ P = VI = = I2R
R
The SI unit of electric power is watt ‘W’.
12. Electric energy. The total work done by the source of emf in maintaining the electric current in the circuit for a given time is
called electric energy consumed in the circuit.
∴ Electric energy, W = Pt = VIt = I2Rt
The potential unit of electic energy is kilowatt hour (kWh).
13. Combination of resistors:
(i) In series. Equivalent resistance R of n resistors connected in series is given by
R = R1 + R2 + … + Rn
(ii) In parallel. Equivalent resistance R of n resistors connected in parallel is given by
1 1 1 1
= + +…+
R R1 R2 Rn
14. emf. The work done per unit charge by the source in taking the charge from its one terminal to the other is called the
electromotive force or emf of the source.
The e.m.f. is equal to the potential difference, when no current is drawn from the source.
15. Internal resistance. The resistance offered by the elctrolyte of the cell, when the electric current flows through it, is called the
internal resistance ‘r’ of the cell.
When a source of emf ‘ε’ is connected to an external resistance ‘R’, the voltage Vext across R is given by
ε
Vext = IR = .R [ Q ε = E and Vext = V]
R +r
⎛ E ⎞
or r= ⎜ − 1⎟ R where [r is the internal resistance of the source.]
⎝V ⎠
16. Grouping of cells:
(i) In series. When two cells of emf ε1, ε2 and internal resistance r1 and r2 respectively are connected in series,
ε = ε1 + ε 2

a s
iv D
and r = r1 + r2 where [ε and r are effective emf and internal resistance respectively.]
(ii) In parallel. When two cells of emf ε1, ε2 and internal resistance r1 and r2 respectively are connected in parallel, then

Sh
ε r + ε 2r1
ε= 12
r1 + r2
r1r2
and r= where [ε and r are effective e.m.f. and internal resistance respectively.]
r1 + r2
NOTE : The emf ε is also represented by E.
17. Kirchhoff’s rule/law:
(i) Junction rule. At any junction of circuit elements, the sum of currents entering the junction must be equal the sum of
currents leaving it. i.e. ∑I = 0.
(ii) Loop rule. The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any closed loop involving resistors and cells in the loop
must be zero.
∴ ∑IR + ∑E = 0 B
I4
R
>

18. Wheatstone bridge. The wheatstone bridge is an arrangement of four resistors R1, R2, R3, R4 as 3
I2 R2
shown in Figure
>

A G C
In balanced condition,
>

R1
R1 R R I1 R4
= 3 ⇒ R4 = 2 . R3
R2 R4 R1 I3
>

Knowing the values of three resistors, the value of resistor R4 can be determined. D
E
19. Meter bridge. A meter bridge is a practical form of wheatstone bridge. It is used to find the value of unknown resistance R by
using the standard known resistance S
l
∴ R = S.
100 − l
20. Potentiometer. It is a device to compare potential differences. It is also used to measure potential difference, internal resistance
of a cell and compare emfs of two sources.
E
(i) Determination of potential difference, V = .R
r +R
E1 l
(ii) Comparison of emf of two cells, = 1
E2 l2
⎛ l −l ⎞
(iii) Determination of internal resistance r of a cell, r = R ⎜ 1 2 ⎟
⎝ l2 ⎠
 46 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

UNITS USED

Physical quantity Symbol Unit Dimensions

Electric current I A [A]

Potential difference V V(Volt) [ML2T–3A–1]
Electromotive force (emf) ε, E V [ML2T–3A–1]
Resistance R, r Ω (ohm) [ML2T–3A–2]
Resistivity ρ Ωm [ML3T–3A–2]
Electrical Conductivity σ s (Simen) [M–1L–3T3A2]
→
Electric field E Vm–1 [MLT–3A–1]
→
Drift velocity vd ms–1 [LT–1]
→
Current density J Am–2 [L–2A]
Relaxation time τ s [T]
Mobility μ m2V–1s–1 [ML3T–4A–1]

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

electrons in X is twice that in Y, find the ratio of
Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) drift velocity of electrons in the two wires.
(1 Mark) (All India)

1. The plot of the variation

a s Ans. I = QHA YG ∴
YG
[
=
Q\

iv D
YG Q[
of potential difference 6V  \

Sh
across a combination of
YG 1
three identical cells in As Q[ = 2Q\ ∴ [
=
YG 2
series, versus current is as  \

shown in the figure. What

0 L
is the emf of each cell? 1A
(Delhi) 4. A resistance R is connected across a cell of emf
Ans. Total emf of three cells in series ε and internal resistance U. A potentiometer now
= P.D corresponding to zero current = 6V measures the potential difference between the
6 terminals of the cell as V. Write the expression
∴ The emf of each cell = = 2V for ‘U’ in terms of ε, V and R. (Delhi)
3
⎛ ε ⎞
Ans. ([SUHVVLRQ  U = ⎝ − 1⎠ R
2. A wire of resistance V
8R is bent in the form
4Ω
of a circle. What is the
5. When electrons drift in a metal from lower to
effective resistance
higher potential, does it mean that all the free
between the ends of a A B
electrons of the metal are moving in the same
diameter 2AB? (Delhi)
direction? (Delhi)
Ans. The effective resistance Ans. No, only the drift velocities
4Ω
between A and B0 of the electrons are
E
4R × 4R 16 R 2 superposed over their ←⎯
Reff = = = 2R random (haphazard)
4R + 4R 8R
thermal velocities. The solid B
…[Since two resistors are in parallel B′
line shows the random path
3. Two conducting wires X and Y of same diameter
followed by a free electron in
but different materials are joined in series
the absence of an external
across a battery. If the number density of
field.
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 47

The electron proceeds from A to B, making six 12. Two identical cells, each of emf E, having
collisions on its path. The dotted curve shows
negligible internal resistance, are connected in
how the random motion of the same electron gets
modified when an electric field is applied. parallel with each other across DQ external
6. Show on a graph the variation of resistivity with resistance R. What is the current through this
temperature for a typical semiconductor. (Delhi) resistance? (All India)
E
Ans. Resistivity of a semi- Ans. ∴ I=
R
conductor decreases ↑ [When cells are connected in parallel, emf remains
rapidly with temperature. ρ unchanged]
13. Why is the terminal voltage of a cell less than its
emf? (Comptt. All India)
T → Ans. Terminal voltage of a cell is less than emf because
7. Two wires of equal length, one of copper and some curent, however small, may be is drawn to
the other of manganin have the same resistance. measure terminal voltage due to internal resis-
Which wire is thicker? (All India) tance of the cell.
ρO ρO 14. Two students A and B were asked to pick a re-
Ans. As R = ∴ A= Ω from a collection of carbon resis-
sistor of 15 kΩ
A R
For both wires R and O are same and ρ copper < tors. A picked a resistor with bands of colours :
ρ manganin brown, green, orange while B chose a resistor
∴ A copper < A manganin with bands of black, green, red. Who picked the
LH Manganin wire is thicker than copper wire. correct resistor? (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Student ‘A’ picked up the correct resistor of 15 kΩ.
8. A 10 V battery of

a s
iv D
negligible internal 15. Define the term ‘Mobility’ of charge carriers in a
resistance is conne- conductor. Write its S.I. unit. (Delhi)

Sh
cted across a 200 V Ans. Mobility of charge carriers is defined as the
battery and a magnitude of the drift velocity per unit electric
resistance of 38 Ω as field E.
shown in the figure. Find the value of the current
VG Hτ
in circuit. (Delhi) ∴ μ= =
E m
Ans. Applying.LUFKKRI·VUXOH we get 200 – 10 = 190 V 
V 190 SI unit : mS–1N–1C
and I = = =5A 16. Show variation of resistivity of copper as a
R 38
9. A 5 V battery of function of temperature in a graph. (Delhi)
negligible internal Ans.
Resistivity ρ (10–8 Ω m) →

resistance is connected
across a 200 V battery 0.4
and a resistance of 39
Ω as shown in the 0.2
figure. Find the value of the current (Delhi)
200 − 5
Ans. Value of current, L = = 5A
39 0 50 100 150
10. The emf of a cell is always greater than its Temp T(K) →
terminal voltage. Why? Give reason. (Delhi)
17. Define the term ‘electrical conductivity’ of a
Ans. Emf is the p.d. when no current is drawn. When metallic wire. Write its S.I. unit. (Delhi)
current is drawn, there will be potential drop Ans. Conductivity. The reciprocal of the resistivity of
across the internal resistance of the cell. So, terminal the material of a conductor is called its
voltage will be less than the emf. conductivity ‘σ’
11. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘U’ draws
1
a current ‘I’. Write the relation between terminal ∴ σ= ρ
voltage ‘V’ in terms of E, I and U. (Delhi)
Ans. V = E – IU The SI unit of conductivity is Ohm–1 metre–1
(‘Ω–1m–1’).
 48 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

18. Define the term ‘drift velocity’ of charge carriers Ans. DE : Negative resistance region.
in a conductor and write its relationship with AB : Where Ohm’s law is obeyed.
the current flowing through it. (Delhi) 24. I – V graph for a metallic
Ans. 'ULIWYHORFLW\ It is the velocity with which a free wire at two different T1
electron in the conductor gets drifted under the temperatures, T1 and T2 is
influence of the applied external electric field as shown in the figure. T2
→ I
→ Hτ E I Which of the two
∴ VG = = temperatures is lower and

P QH A
why? (All India) V
⎡ τ is average relaxation time.
⎢ Q is number of free electrons per unit volume in Ans. The temperature T1 is lower. Larger the slope of
…where
⎢ the conductor. V-I graph, smaller the resistance. As the resistance
⎢⎣ P is mass of an electron and →E is electric field. of a metal increases with the increase of
19. How does the random motion of free electrons temperature, resistance at temperature T1 is lower.
in a conductor get affected when a potential
difference is applied across its ends?
(Comptt. Delhi) 25. The plot of the variation
Ans. Random motion of free electrons gets directed of potential difference
towards the point at a higher potential. across a combination of
6V
20. State the underlying principle of a three identical cells in

⎯⎯→
potentiometer. (Comptt. Delhi) series, versus current is
Ans. When a constant current flows through a wire of shown along the
uniform cross-section and of uniform question. What is the V
composition, the potential difference across any emf and internal
length of wire is directly proportional to its resistance of each cell? 0 1A I ⎯⎯→
length, LH,

a s (All India)

iv D
VO ∝ O Ans. (L) Since 3 identical cells are connected in series
21. Write the expression for the drift velocity of E′ = E1 + E2 + E3 = 3E = 6V when I is zero

Sh
charge carriers in a conductor of length 'O' across Hence E = 2V
which a potential difference 'V' is applied. (LL) E = IU + V
(Comptt. All India) E−V 2−0
or IU = E – V or U = = Ω
= 2Ω
I 1
eV
Ans. YG = τ (From the graph, current is 1A corresponding
PO to V = 0)
22. How does one explain increase in resistivity of a
26. Why is a potentiometer preferred over a
metal with increase of temperature?
voltmeter for determining the emf of a cell?
(Comptt. All India)
(Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. With increase in temperature, the relaxation time
Ans. Potentiometer does not draw any (net) current
(average time between successive collisions)
from the cell; while Voltmeter draws some current
decreases and hence resistivity increases. Also,
from cell, when connected across it, hence it
P
ρ= 2τ
measures terminal voltage. It is why a
PH
 potentiometer is preferred over a voltmeter to
resistivity increases, as τ decreases with increase measure emf.
in temperature.

27. Nichrome and copper wires of same length

23. Graph showing and same radius are connected in series.
the variation of Current I is passed through them. Which wire
current versus gets heated up more? Justify your answer.
Current I

C D
voltage for a (Outside Delhi)
material GaAs is E Ans. Nichrome :
shown in the B Nichrome wire gets heated up more because of
figure. Identify higher resistivity of nichrome.
the region of A Voltage V → ResistivityNI > ResistivityCu
(L) negative resistance 28. Define the conductivity of a conductor. Write
(LL) where Ohm’s law is obeyed. (Delhi) its SI unit. (Comptt. Outside Delhi)
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 49

Ans. Conductivity is defined as the reciprocal of P

ρ = which is the required relationship
1
resistivity, LH, σ =  2τ
QH
ρ between resistivity and relaxation time of electrons.
Its SI unit is S(siemen). 31. Using the mathematical expression for the
conductivity of a material, explain how it varies
Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I) with temperature for (L) semiconductors, (LL)
good conductors. (All India)
(2 Marks) QH 2 τ
Ans. Conductivity σ =
 P
29. Two metallic wires of the same material have (L) 6HPLFRQGXFWRUV With increase in temperature,
the same length but cross-sectional area is in the conductivity of semiconductor increases. It is
ratio 1 : 2. They are connected (L) in series and due to increase in ‘Q’. It dominates the effect
(LL) in parallel. Compare the drift velocities of caused by decrease in ‘τ’.
electrons in the two wires in both the cases (LL) *RRG FRQGXFWRUV  With increase in
(L) and (LL). (All India) temperature, conductivity of good conductors
Ans. Given : O1 = O2 = O decreases. It is due to decrease in the value of
1A 1 relaxation time. The effect of increased value
A1 : A2 = 1 : 2 or A = 2
2 of ‘Q’ is negligible.
O
As R = ρ , as ρ1 = ρ2
A
R1 2
We have R = 1 32. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘U’ is
2 connected across a variable resistor ‘R’. Plot a
(L) In series current is same so from graph showing the variation of terminal
I A 1 potential ‘V’ with resistance R.
So, I1 = I2, A = 2
1
YG =
QHA 2

a s Predict from the graph the condition under

iv D
YG1 2 which ‘V’ becomes equal to ‘E’. (Delhi)
We get = ∴ Y : YG2 = 2 : 1
Y 1  G1 Ans. (L) V = ε – IU gives the terminal voltage
 G2

Sh
(LL) In parallel current gets divided in inverse and can be plotted as shown in Figure 1.
ratio of resistances (LL) The graph between V and R, is shown in
I1 R 1 Figure 2.
∴ = 2 =
I2 R1 2 V V
I1 I2 E
As Y = HQA , YG2 = HQA
 G1  1   2
YG1 I1 A 2 1 2 1 I = constant
We have = × = × =
Y I2 A1 2 1 1
 G2
∴ Y : YG2 = 1 : 1 I R
 G1
30. DeriveDQ expression for the resistivity of a good )LJXUH  )LJXUH 
conductor, in terms of the relaxation time of V becomes E when no current is down.
electrons. (All India) 33. Derive an expression for drift velocity of free
Ans. Drift speed gained by an electron under the effect electrons in a conductor in terms of relaxation
→ time. (Delhi)
of electric field E in a conductor is Ans. In the absence of electric field the electrons
HE motion is random and the net velocity is zero. In
YG = τ
P the presence of electric field, they tend to flow
HV opposite to that of the electric field in the
YG = τ … ⎛⎜Q E = V⎞
⎟ conduction. If an electric field ‘E’ is applied across
PO ⎝ W⎠

We have relation, I = QHAYG a length O of the conductor, the electrons will
HE
⎛ HV ⎞ V PO O experience an acceleration, D = – .
I = QHA ⎜⎝ PO τ ⎟⎠ , R = = 2 τA ⇒ R = ρ P
  I QH A
 If the average time for the acceleration is τ, the
PO O velocity required is
=ρ →
QH τA
2 A
→ → → → HE →
ν G = X + D τ = D τ ∴ νG = – τ, νG = HE τ
 P  P
 50 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

34. Calculate the current drawn from the battery in The two cut parts will have a resistance of 30 Ω
the given network. (All India) each as they are connected in parallel, the
R5 = 2 Ω 30
Req = = 15 Ω
2
R1 = 1 Ω R2 = 5 Ω R3 = 4 Ω V
Current drawn from the supply = I =
R eq
3 1
LH I = = = 0.2 A
R4 = 2 Ω 15 5
+ – 37. A wire of 20 Ω resistance is gradually stretched
4V to double its original length. It is then cut into
R5 R two equal parts. These parts are then connected
Ans. Since = 3 , the current through R2 = 5 Ω is in parallel across a 4.0 volt battery. Find the
R1 R4
current drawn from the battery. (All India)
zero and so is electrically absent. Ans. On stretching, the resistance of the wire will get to
(R1, R5) and (R3, R4) are in series to give 3 Ω and four times, LH, 80 Ω as volume is constant and
6 Ω respectively. They are themselves in parallel R ∝ O2.
to form So the two equal parts will have a resistance of 40
3 × 6 18 Ω each.
Req = = =2Ω
3+6 9 When connected in parallel, the equivalent
resistance will be 20 Ω
∴ Current drawn from the battery,
V 4 1
V 4 ∴ Current drawn = = = = 0.2 A
I= = =2A R HT 20 5
R 2 
 HT
35. Define current sensitivity and voltage
sensitivity of a galvanometer. Increasing the 38. In the given circuit, 1A D 2A 2V B
current sensitivity may not necessarily increase

a s assuming point A to be

iv D
the voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer. at zero potential, use R 2Ω R1
Justify. (All India) Kirchhoff’s rules to

Sh
Ans. Current sensitivity is defined as the deflection determine the potential A C 2A
1V
produced in the galvanometer when unit current at point B. (All India)
is passed through its coil. Ans. Applying .LUFKKRII·V ODZ
θ QBA E 1A D 2A 2V B
Is = = radian/ampere or division A–1 by moving along ACDE, 1A
I N we get
⎡ Q = Number of turns in the galvanometer. VB – V A R 2Ω R1
…where ⎢ N = Restoring couple per unit twist or torsional
⎣ 1A 1A 2A
constant. =1+2×1–2 A C F
1V 1A 2A
Voltage sensitivity is defined as the deflection
= 1 volt
produced in the galvanometer when unit voltage
39. In the meter bridge experiment, balance point
is applied across the coil of the galvanometer.
was observed at J with AJ = O.
θ QBR
Vs = = radian/volt or div. V–1 R X
V NR
…where [R = Resistance of the coil
Is G
Since Vs = , increase in current sensitivity may O
R
not necessarily increase the voltage sensitivity. It A J B
may be affected by the resistance used.
36. A wire of 15 Ω resistance is gradually stretched (L) The values of R and X were doubled and then
to double its original length. It is then cut into interchanged. What would be the new
two equal parts. These parts are then connected position of balance point?
in parallel across a 3.0 volt battery. Find the (LL) If the galvanometer and battery are
current drawn from the battery. (All India) interchanged at the balance position, how will
the balance point get affected? (All India)
Ans. R = 15 Ω
Ans. (L) Balance point will change from O to (100 – O),
On stretching to double its original length, the
resistance becomes R1 = 60 Ω, as on stretching O 2X X 100 − O
Q R = and = =
O
volume is constant and R ∝ O2. X 100 − O

2R
 R
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 51

(LL) From the principle of Wheatstone bridge : (L) the resistance of the resistor;
R O ⎛ 100 − O ⎞ (LL) the terminal voltage of the battery.
= ⇒ X=R ⎜ ⎟
X 100 − O ⎝ O ⎠ (Comptt. Delhi)
R X Ans. (L) Given : Current, I = 0.25 A, emf, ε = 6V,
internal resistance, U = 2 Ω
G ε 6
O As I = ⇒ 0.25 =
←⎯⎯⎯⎯
100 –O ⎯→ U
 + R 2 + R
A B 600
J ⇒ 2+R= = 24
25
Hence, the galvanometer and cell are are ∴ 5HVLVWDQFH R = 24 – 2 = 22 Ω
interchanged, the condition for a balance 25 × 22 22
(LL) As V = IR ∴ V= = = 5.5 V
bridge is still satisfied. Therefore, the 100 4
galvanometer will not show any deflection. ∴ 7HUPLQDO YROWDJH V = 5.5 V
43. The network 200 W
S R
PQRS, shown in
40. A cell of emf E and internal resistance U is the circuit dia-
connected to two external resistances R1 and R2 gram, has the W
5V mA 20 60 W
and a perfect ammeter. The current in the circuit batteries of 4 V
is measured in four different situations: and 5 V and
(L) without any external resistance in the negligible inter- P Q
circuit nal resistance. A 4V
(LL) with resistance R1 only milliammeter of 20 Ω resistance is connected
(LLL) with R1 and R2 in series combination between P and R. Calculate the reading in the
(LY) with R1 and R2 in parallel combination milliammeter. (Comptt. All India)
The currents measured in the four cases are 0.42A, Ans. Applying ORRS UXOH to loop PQRP

s
1.05A, 1.4A and 4.2A, but not necessarily in that – 4 = 60(I – I1) – 20 I1 = 0
order. Identify the currents corresponding to the
four cases mentioned above.
ε
(Delhi)

iv D a or – 4 = 60I – 60I1 – 20I1

or 20I1 – 15 I = 1 …[÷÷ by 4 ...(L)

Sh
Ans. (L) L = ; Hence L = 4.2 A Applying ORRS UXOH to loop PRSP, we get
U –5 + 200 I + 20 I1 = 0
ε
(LL) L = ; Hence L = 1.05 A 4 I1 + 40 I = 1 ÷ by 5 ...(LL)
…[÷
 1 + U
R
ε 200 W
(LLL) L = ; Hence L = 0.42 A S R
U + R 1 + R2
ε
(LY) L = ; Hence L = 1.4 A
R 1R 2 60 W
U+ 5V W
 R 1 + R 2 mA
20
As R2 > R1, these resistances in increasing order I
R 1R 2 I
are: U, U + , U + R1, U + R1 + R2 P Q
R1 + R 2 I — I1
4V
The currents in decreasing order are :
4.2 A, 1.05 A, 0.42 A, 1.4 A. Solving (L) and (LL), we get
41. A battery of emf 10 V and internal resistance 3Ω Ω 11
I1 = A = 0.064 A
is connected to a resistor. If the current in the 172
circuit is 0.5 A, find ∴ 5HDGLQJ RI PLOOLDPPHWHU = 0.064 A
(L) the resistance of the resistor; 44. The network PQRS, 100 W
(LL) the terminal voltage of the battery. shown in the circuit S R
(Comptt. Delhi) diagram, has the
V 10 batteries of 5 V and
Ans. (L) Since I = ∴ = 0.5 50 W
U + R U + R
10V mA
10 V and negligible W
10 100 50
or = 0.5 or =3+R internal resistance.
3+R 5 A milliammeter of P Q
∴ R = 20 – 3 = 17Ω Ω
Ω resistance is
50Ω 5V
5 85
(LL) Since V = IR ∴ V = × 17 = = 8.5V connected between P and R. Calculate the
10 10 reading in the milliammeter. (Comptt. All India)
42. A battery of emf 6 V and internal resistance 2 Ω
Ans. Applying ORRS UXOH to loop PSRP
is connected to a resistor. If the current in the
–10 + 100 I + 50 I1 = 0
circuit is 0.25 A, find
 52 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

or 100 I + 50 I1 = 10 Let Q be the number of free electrons per unit

or 10 I + 5 I1 = 1 ÷ by 10
…[÷ ...(L) volume of the conductor.
Applying ORRS UXOH to loop PRQP Then, total number of free electrons in the
–50 I1 + 50(I – I1) + 5 = 0 conductor
⇒ –50 I1 + 50 I – 50 I1 + 5 = 0 = Q × Volume of the conductor
⇒ 50I – 100 I1 + 5 = 0 Hence, Q = (QAO)H
100 W
Time taken by the charge to cross the conductor
S R length O is given by
1
W= where [νG is drift velocity of electrons
50 W ν
 G
10V
Q QAOH
I mA
W ∴ I= = = QHAνG ∴ I = QHAνG
W O
I1 50
 νG
P Q
5V
I — I1 48. Write the expression for the current in a conduc-
tor of cross-sectional area A in terms of drift
⇒ 10I – 20 I1 = –1 ÷ by 5
…[÷ ...(LL)
Solving (L) and (LL), we get velocity. (Comptt. All India)
Ans. 'ULIWYHORFLW\ Drift velocity is defined as the ve-
2
I1 = A = 0.08A locity of the free electrons with which they get
25
∴ Reading in milliammeter = 0.08A drifted towards the positive terminal under the
45. State the principle of a potentiometer. Describe influence of the external electric field. The drift
briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram, how velocity of electron is of the order of 10–5 m/sec.
this device is used to compare the emf’s of two Expression for current in terms of drift velocity is :
cells. (Comptt. All India) I = AQHνG

s
Ans. Refer to Q. 78, Page 59. ([SUHVVLRQConsider a conductor of length O and

46. An ammeter of resitance 1 Ω can measure

iv D a of uniform cross-section area A
∴ Volume of the conductor = AO
If Q is the number of the conductors, then
current upto 1.0 A (L) What must be the value of
the shunt resistance to enable the ammeter to
measure upto 5.0 (A)? (LL) What is the combined
resistance of the ammeter and the shunt? (Delhi)
Sh total number of free
electrons
conductor = AOQ
in

If H is the charge on

the
A
←⎯⎯ l ⎯⎯→
←νd

each electron, then →E

R ALJ 1×1
Ans. (L) Shunt Resistance, S = = = 0.25 Ω total charge on all
L−L 5−1 the free electrons in the
 J
conductor, T = AOQH + –
1 1 1 V
(LL) Total Resistance, = + =5 The electric field set up across the conductor of
R total 0.25 1 potential difference V is given by,
1 V
∴ Rtotal = Ω = 0.2 Ω E=
5 l
47. Explain the term ‘drift velocity’ of electrons in a Due to this field, the free electrons present in the
conductor. Hence obtain the expression for the conductor will begin to move with a drift velocity
current through a conductor in terms of ‘drift νG towards the positive terminal of the battery
velocity’. (All India) ∴ Time taken by free electrons to cross the
Ans. Definition : Drift velocity is defined as the conductor,
velocity with which free electrons in a conductor O
W=
get drifted in a direction opposite to the direction ν
 G
of the applied field. Its unit is m–1s and
O T AOQH
dimensions [LT–1] Hence, Current I = = ⇒ I = AQHνG
Expression : The ν
 G W O / νG
E
magnitude of electric Since A, Q and H are constants,
field set up across the Hence I ∝ νG
l
conductor is given by Therefore, the current flowing through a
V V conductor is directly proportional to the drift
E= velocity.
 O I
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 53

49. Describe briefly, with the help of a circuit 80 – 20 I2 + 30 I1 = 0

diagram, how a potentiometer is used to ⇒ 2 I2 – 3 I1 = 8 [÷ by 10] …(LL)
determine the internal resistance of a cell. In loop ABFEA, we get
(All India) 80 – 20 I2 + 20 – 20 I3 = 0
Ans. The apparatus is set up ⇒ I2 + I3 = 5 [÷ by 20] …(LLL)

as per circuit diagram Putting the value of I3 into (LLL), we have

drawn here. I2 + (I1 + I2) = 5 ⇒ 2 I2 + I1 = 5 …(LY)
The cell (emf ε), whose Solving equations (LL) and (LY), we get
internal resistance (U) is 3
I1 = – A = – 0.75 A
to be determined, is 4
connected across a So (–) sign of current indicates that the direction
resistance box through a of current is opposite to that as shown in the
key K2, as shown in the figure. With key K2 is open, circuit diagram.
balance is obtained at length O1 (AN1), then 52. Draw a graph showing variation of resistivity
H = φO1 …(L) with temperature for nichrome. Which property
When key K2 is closed, the cell sends a current (I) of nichrome is used to make standard resistance
through the resistance box (R). If V is the terminal
potential difference of the cell and balance is coils? (Comptt. All India)
obtained at lengthO2 (AN) Ans. Temperature coefficient
V = φO2 …(LL) of resistivity (α) is very ρ
small for nichrome.
H O
So, we have = 1 …(LLL)
V
 O2 Temperature →
But H = I(U + R) and V = IR, this gives 53. A battery of emf E and internal resistance U when
U + R⎞ connected across an external resistance of 12 Ω,
= ⎛⎜
s
H
⎟ …(LY) produces a current of 0.5 A. When connected
V
 ⎝ R ⎠
From (LLL) and (LY), we have

iv D a across a resistance of 25 Ω, it produces a current of

0.25 A. Determine (L) the emf and (LL) the internal

Sh
R+U O ⎛ O1 ⎞ resistance of the cell. (Comptt. All India)
= 1 ⇒ U = R⎜ − 1⎟ …(Y)
⎝ 2 ⎠
 R O2 O E E
Ans. I= = 0.5 …(L)
Using equation (Y) we can find internal resistance R + U 12 + U
of the cell. E
and = 0.25 …(LL)
50. Write a relation between current and drift veloc- 25 + U
ity of electrons in a conductor. Use this relation to Comparing (L) and (LL), we get
explain how the resistance of a conductor changes E
12 + U = 0.5 25 + U 0.5
with the rise in temperature. (Comptt. Delhi) ⇒ = =2
E 0.25 12 + U 0.25
Ans. 5HODWLRQ EHWZHHQ FXUUHQW DQG GULIW YHORFLW\  25 + U
Solving we get, U = 1 Ω
I = A QHνG ∴ E = 0.5 (12 + 1) ⇒ E = 0.5 × 13 = 6.5 V
On increasing temperature, the resistance of the 54. Define mobility of a charge carrier. Write the
conductor increases due to increase in frequent relation expressing mobility in terms of relax-
collisions of electrons with each other, resulting ation time. Give its SI unit. (Comptt. All India)
into decrease in the drift velocity. Ans. 0RELOLW\ Mobility of electron μ is defined as the
51. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to I1 magnitude of the drift velocity per unit electric
30 Ω
determine the value of field E
the current I1 flowing in I1
20 Ω 20 V νG Hτ
the circuit shown in the ∴ μ= =
I2 I3  E m
figure. (Comptt. Delhi) and S.I. unit : m2V–1S–1
80 V 20 Ω I2 55. A uniform wire of resistance 12
Ans. Using .LUFKRII·V ILUVW ODZ
at junction E, we get 30 Ω Ω is cut into three pieces so that R1 R2
D C
I3 = I1 + I2 …(L) 20 V the ratio of the resistances R1 : R3
I1 20 Ω
E F R2 : R3 = 1 : 2 : 3 and the three
In loop ABCDA, using I3
I2 pieces are connected to form a
.LUFKRII·V VHFRQG ODZ we
triangle across which a cell of + –
get A B
emf 8V and internal resistance
80 V 20 Ω I2 8V 1 Ω
 54 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

1 Ω is connected as shown. Calculate the current Ans. Given : A = 1.0 × 10–7 m2, I = 1.5 A,
through each part of the circuit. Q = 9 × 1028 m–3, VG = ?
(Comptt. All India) We know, I = QHAVG
I 1.5
Ans. R1 and R2 are in series, R1 2 = 2Ω + 4Ω = 6Ω ∴ VG = = 28 ) × (1.6 × 10 −19 )(1.0 × 10 −7 )
R1 2 and R3 are in parallel
QH
 A ( 9 × 10
⎡ 1
VG = 10.4 × 10–4 m/s
1 1
R1 2 3 = 3Ω ⎢Q = + 59. Estimate the average drift speed of conduction
⎣ R R 1 R 2
electrons in a copper wire of cross-sectional area
R2 = 4 Ω 2.5 × 10–7 m2 carrying a current of 1.8 A. Assume
R1 = 2 Ω
the density of conduction electrons to be 9 × 1028
R3 = 6 Ω m–3. (All India)
Ans. Given : A = 2.5 × 10–7 m2, I = 1.8 A,
+ – P = 9 × 1028 m–3, YG = ?
8V 1 Ω We know I = QHAYG
I 1.8
E 8 8 ∴ YG = =
I= = = = 2A [ Q E=8 Q
 H A ( 9 × 10 28
) × (1. 6 × 10 −19 )(2.5 × 10 −7 )
R
 + U 3 + 1 4 = 0.05 × 10 m = 0.5 × 10 m –2 –3
= 0.5 mm
60. Estimate the average drift speed of conduction
56. State Kirchhoff’s rules. Explain briefly how electrons in a copper wire of cross-sectional area
these rules are justified. (Delhi) 2.5 × 10–7 m2 carrying a current of 2.7 A. Assume
Ans. Kirchhoff’s rules. the density of conduction electrons to be
(L) .LUFKKRII·V MXQFWLRQ UXOH  At any junction, 9 × 1028 m–3. (All India)
the sum of the currents entering the junction Ans. 0.75 × 10–3 ms–1
is equal to the sum of currents leaving the 61. Draw a plot showing the variation of resistivity
junction.

a s of a (L) conductor and (LL) semiconductor, with

iv D
(LL) .LUFKKRII·V ORRS UXOH  The algebraic sum of the increase in temperature.
changes in potential in any closed loop How does one explain this behaviour in terms

Sh
involving resistors and cells is zero. of number density of charge carriers and the
These two laws are justified on the basis of ODZRI relaxation time? (Comptt. Delhi)
FRQVHUYDWLRQRIFKDUJH and the ODZRIFRQVHUYDWLRQRI Ans. (L) For conductor : (LL) For semiconductor :
HQHUJ\ respectively.
57. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘U’ is Current (PA) B
connected across a variable resistor ‘R’. Plot a
Resistivity r(Ωm)

graph showing variation of terminal voltage ‘V’

of the cell versus the current ‘I’. Using the plot, C
show how the emf of the cell and its internal A
resistance can be determined. (All India)
Ans. Graph between ‘V’ and I
E 0 50 100 150 0 Voltage (V)
Temperature T (K)→
U P
(LLL) Behaviour : ρ =
 QH 2 τ
In conductors, average relaxation time
decreases with increase in temperature,
Y resulting in an increase in resistivity.
R In semiconductors, the increase in number
Terminal voltage

E
Intercept of Y-axis density (with increase in temperature) is more
will give the value of than the decrease in relaxation time; the net
‘E’; while the slope of Slope result is, therefore, a decrease in resistivity.
V
the line will give the 62. Distinguish between emf (εε) and terminal
value of internal X voltage (V) of a cell having internal resistance 'U'.
I Current
resistance. Draw a plot showing the variation of terminal
58. Estimate the average drift speed of conduction voltage (V) YV the current (I) drawn from the
electrons in a copper wire of cross-sectional area cell. Using this plot, how does one determine
1.0 × 10 –7 m2 carrying a current of 1.5 A. Assume the internal resistance of the cell?
the density of conduction electrons to be (Comptt. All India)
9 × 1028 m–3. (All India)
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 55

Ans. emf is the potential difference between two 65. Calculate the 2Ω
terminals of the cell, when no current is drawn current drawn from
from the cell I while A 1Ω 5Ω D 4Ω
the battery by the
• terminal voltage is the B C
network of resi-
potential difference stors shown in the 2Ω
E
between two terminals
figure.
when current passes 4V
(Comptt. All India)
through it.
V Ans. Given : Circuit diagram can be rearranged as
• negative slope of the
graph gives internal I shown below :
resistance. It forms a wheatstone’s bridge
P R 1 2 1
= ⇒ = =
Q S 2 4 2 B
P 1 I R
63. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to obtain conditions for It is the condition of = =
Ω 2 Ω
the balance condition in a Wheatstone bridge. null point when no I1 1
(Delhi) current flows through A I 5Ω C
2
Ans. Conditions for the balance condition in a BD arm, LH 5 Ω. 2Ω S
Wheatstone bridge : Resistances P = (1 Ω) = =
Q 4 Ω I
B and R = (2 Ω) are in D I2
I2
series;
U
nk

R1 = 1 + 2 = 3 Ω
no

4V
R2 R4
w

I2
n

G
C Similarly, Resistances Q = (2 Ω) and S = (4 Ω) are
A
I1 in series,
R1 R3 R2 = 2 + 4 = 6 Ω
m rd
ar da
an

Now, R1 and R2 are in parallel,

s
St

I I1

a
1 1 1 1 1 1
D = + = + = ⇒ R=2Ω

iv D
I R R1 R 2 3 6 2
V 4

Sh
ε I= = = 2A
R 2
Applying Kirchhoff’s loop rule to closed loop ∴ Current in the circuit is 2A.
ADBA, 66. Using the concept of drift velocity of charge
– I1R1 + 0 + I2R2 = 0 (IJ = 0) …(L) carriers in a conductor, deduce the relationship
For loop CBDC, between current density and resistivity of the
– I2R4 + 0 + I1R3 = 0 (IJ = 0) …(LL) conductor. (Comptt. Delhi)
From equation, (L) Ans. The drift velocity is given by,
I1 R 2
= HE
I 2 R1 YG = τ …(L)
P
From equation, (LL)
I1 R 4 R2 R4 R1 R3 where ⎡ H = charge of electron
= ∴ = or = ⎢
I2 R 3 R1 R 3 R2 R4 ⎢ E = Intensity of electric field
⎢ P = mass of electron
This is the required balance condition in a ⎢
Wheatstone bridge arrangement. ⎢⎣ τ = relaxation time
64. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the potential The current is given by,
difference between the points A and D when no I = QH A YG …(LL)
current flows in the arm BE of the electric Putting value of YG from equation (L) to equation
network shown in the figure. (All India) (LL) we get,
3Ω E D HE QH 2 A
F I = QH A τ I= τE
1V P  P
R1
R I QH 2 A
2Ω Current density, J = = τE
A PA
3V
⎛ QH 2 ⎞
A B C J= ⎜ τ⎟ E
6V 4V ⎝ P ⎠

Ans. Let us consider the loop ABED. 1 P
Using Kirchhoff’s second law, we have J= E ∴ ρ=
ρ QH 2 τ
VAD = (6V + 3V) + IR1
= 9V + 0 = 9V …[I is zero in BE arm] where ρ is the resistivity of conductor.
 56 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

V
67. Two cells of emfs 1.5 V and 2.0 V having 6V
internal resistance 0.2 Ω and 0.3 Ω respectively
are connected in parallel. Calculate the emf and 4V
internal resistance of the equivalent cell.(Delhi)
Ans. Given : E1 = 1.5 V, E2 = 2.0 V,
U1 = 0.2 Ω,  U2 = 0.3 Ω
E = ?, U = ? (when two cells are connected in i
0 1.0 A 2.0 A
parallel)
Ans. From the graph :
E1U2 + E 2 U1
E = (D) E = V = 6V for when I = 0
 U1 + U2 (no current is drawn)
1.5 × 0.3 + 2 × 0.2 E1 (E) E = V + IU
= V
0.2 + 0.3 U1 [ Q From the graph for I = 1 A, V = 4V]
0.45 × 0.40 6 = 4 + 1(U)
= V = 1.7 V
0.5 or U = 2 Ω
U = 12
UU 70. A cell of emf 4 V and internal resistance 1 Ω is
E 2 U2
 1 + U2
U connected to a d.c. source of 10 V through a
0.2 × 0.3 0.06 resistor of 5 Ω. Calculate the terminal voltage
= Ω= Ω across the cell during charging.
0.2 + 0.3 0.5
E U
= 0.12 Ω (Comptt. Outside Delhi)
68. A battery of emf 12V and internal resistance 2 Ω Ans. E1 – E2 = I(R + U)
is connected to a 4 Ω resistor as shown in the 10 – 4 = I(5 + 1)
figure. 6=Ix6

s
(D) Show that a voltmeter when placed across I = 1A
the cell and across the resistor, in turn, gives
the same reading.

iV

v D a + ––

h
E1 = 10 V

S
(E) To record the voltage I
and the current in the r R
circuit, why is 12 V 2Ω +
1Ω E =4V 5Ω
voltmeter placed in 2

parallel and ammeter Terminal voltage across the cell

in series in the 4Ω = (E1 + IU) = [(4) + (1 x 1)] = (4 + 1) = 5V
circuit? (All India) A
Ans. Given : E = 12 V, U = 2 Ω, R = 4 Ω , Short Answer Type Questions-II (SA-II)
VC = ? VR = ?
(3 Marks)
(D) RH = r + R = 2 + 4 = 6 Ω
E 12 Ω
I= = = 2A 71. Prove that the current density of a metallic
R
 H 6Ω
VR = IR = 2 × 4 = 8 V …(L) conductor is directly proportional to the drift
speed of electrons. (Delhi)
VC = E – IU = 12 – (2 × 2) = 12 – 4 = 8 V …(LL) 2U
We find from the equations (L) and (LL), the Derive an expression for the current density of a
voltmeter gives the same reading, LH 8 V. conductor in terms of the drift speed of
(E) An ammeter is connected in series because electrons. (All India)
same current is flowing in the circuit, while Ans. Suppose a potential difference V is applied across
voltmeter is connected in parallel to measure a conductor of length O and of uniform cross-
potential difference across two points in the section A. The electric field E set up inside the
circuit. conductor is given by
V
E=
69. The figure shows a plot of terminal voltage ‘V’  O
→
versus the current ‘L’ of a given cell. Calculate Under the influence of field E , the free electrons
from the graph (D) emf of the cell and →
(E) internal resistance of the cell. begin to drift in the opposite direction E with an
(Comptt. Outside Delhi) average drift velocity YG.
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 57

Let the number of electrons per unit volume or Net emf

Charging current, I =
electron density = Q Total resistance
Charge on an electron = H ε ′ − Qε
=
Area = A E free electrons R + QU

←
→ (E) P.D. across each cell
→

– – = ε + IU
– – ε ′ − Qε
=ε+ .U
– –
R + QU
εR + εQU + ε ′ U − εQU εR + ε ′ U
= =
I I  R + QU  R + QU
O
conventional electronic
∴ P.D. across the series combination of
current current Q cells, V = Q (εε + IU)
–
73. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m is connected
+
to a driver cell of emf 3 V as shown in the figure.
No. of electrons in length O of the conductor When a cell of 1.5 V emf is used in the
= Q × volume of the conductor = Q × AO secondary circuit, the balance point is found to
Total charge contained in length O of the be 60 cm. On replacing this cell and using a cell
conductor is of unknown emf, the balance point shifts to
T = HQAO ... (L) 80 cm. 3V
All the electrons which enter the conductor at the
right end will pass through the conductor at the
left end in time,
distance O
W= = ... (LL) A B
velocity Y G
Using equations (L) and (LL), we get

a s 1.5 V

iv D
T O QH A
Current I = = = QHAYG R
W O / YG

Sh
(L) Calculate unknown emf of the cell.
Current density ‘J’ is given by (LL) Explain with reason, whether the circuit
I QHAY G works, if the driver cell is replaced with a
J= = = QHYG ∴ J ∝ YG
A $ cell of emf 1 V.
Hence the current density of a metallic conductor (LLL) Does the high resistance R, used in the
is directly proportional to the drift speed of secondary circuit affect the balance point?
electrons. Justify your answer. (Delhi)
72. A number of identical cells Q, each of emf ε, ε2 O O 80
internal resistance U connected in series are Ans. (L) = 2 ∴ ε 2 = 2 × ε1 = × 1.5 = 2.0 V
charged by a d.c. source of emf ε1, using a ε 1 O1 O1 60
(LL) The circuit will not work. If emf of auxiliary
resistor R.
(L) Draw the circuit arrangement. battery is greater than the emf of the driver
(LL) Deduce the expressions for (D) the charging cell of the potentiometer, there will be no
current and (E) the potential difference balance point on the wire AB. The maximum
across the combination of the cells. (Delhi) potential drop across the wire will be of 1 V
Ans. (L) The circuit arrangement for charging Q cells and will not be able to balance 1.5 V emf.
is shown below : (LLL) No, the balance point is not affected by the
high resistance R because no current flows
Q cells
through the cell at the balance point.
74. Define resistivity of a conductor. Plot a graph
ε1U ε1U
showing the variation of resistivity with
I temperature for a metallic conductor. How does
I
one explain such a behaviour, using the
ε1 R mathematical expression of the resistivity of a
material. (Delhi)
Ans. (L) 5HVLVWLYLW\ RI FRQGXFWRU  It is the resistance
(LL) (D) Net emf = ε′ – Qε of a conductor of unit length and unit area of
Total resistance = R + QU cross-section.
 58 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

The S.I. unit of resistivity is Ω m (ohm-metre)

A 76. The figure shows experimental set up of a meter
ρ=R
 O bridge. When the two unknown resistances X
(LL) Variation of resistivity with temperature : and Y are inserted, the null point D is obtained
The resistivity of a material is given by 40 cm from the end A. When a resistance of 10 Ω
P is connected in series with X, the null point
ρ=
 τ shifts by 10 cm.
QH 2

X Y
Resistivity ρ (10–8 Ω m) →

0.4 G

A D C
0.2

Find the position of the null point when the 10

50
Ω resistance is instead connected in series with
100 150
Temp T(K) → resistance ‘Y’. Determine the values of the
resistances X and Y. (Delhi)
On increasing temperature, average speed of X 40 4
drifting electrons increases. As a result Ans. With X and Y, = = ⇒ 6X = 4Y
Y 60 6
collisions are more frequent. Average relaxation
With (X + 10) and Y,
time ‘τ’ decreases, hence ‘ρ’ increases.
C X + 10 5
= ⇒ X + 10 = Y
75. (L) Calculate the equivalent Y 5
resistance of the given
electrical network between
R R R

D a sUsing these two equations, we get

4Y
6
+ 10 = Y
points A and B.

(LL) Also calculate the current through CD and

ACB, if a 10 V d.c. source is connected
D

S h i
R
v R
AB
E

∴ X=
⎛
LH ⎜ 1 −
⎝
4⎞
⎟ Y = 10
6⎠
4
×Y=
4
× 30 = 20 Ω
or Y =
10 × 6
2
= 30 Ω

between A and B, and the value of R is 6 6

assumed as 2 Ω. X O
(All India) If 10 Ω is in series with Y, then =
Ans. (L) Equivalent circuit of Y + 10 100 − O
C 20 O
the given problem is ⇒ = [ Q Y + 10 = 30 + 10 = 40
shown in the given R R 40 100 − O
diagram. The A R B ⇒ 2000 – 20O = 40O ⇒ 60O = 2000
E
simplified circuit is R ⇒ O= 200 = 33.3 cm.
R
equivalent to a 6
D
balanced wheatstone 77. (L) State the principle of working of a meter
bridge. bridge. X
(LL) In a meter bridge R
Hence there will be no current in arm CD,
ICD = 0. balance point is S
VC = VD found at a distance ←⎯O⎯ 1 ⎯← G

2R
O1 with resistances A B
RAB = Ω
= RΩ R and S as shown ))
2 + –
in the figure.
(LL) Being a balanced wheatstone bridge
When an unknown resistance X is
ICD = 0 R C R
connected in parallel with the resistance S,
V = 10 volt A B
the balance point shifts to a distance O2.
R = 2Ω R R
Find the expression for X in terms of O1, O2
VAB = 10 volt D
and S. (All India)
RACB = 4Ω Ans. (L) 0HWHU EULGJH  Meter bridge is an
10 V arrangement of four resistances used for
∴ IACB = = 2.5A
4 measuring one unknown resistance in terms
of other three known resistances.
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 59

P R 3ULQFLSOH  The basic A B

LH = or S= Q × R
Q S P principle of a
S
R potentiometer is that G
when a constant current + –
G Rh
flows through a wire of
P Q uniform cross-sectional area and composition, the
←⎯⎯⎯
O ⎯←←⎯⎯100 – ⎯
O ⎯← potential drop across any length of the wire is
directly proportional to that length.
V∝O V = KO
E K …where [K is called potential gradient
At the balance condition, no current flows Close the key K1. A
through the galvanometer arm. By using the constant current flows + –
K1
balance condition of meter bridge, the value through the Rh
of unknown resistance can be determined, potentiometer wire.
A B
knowing the other three resistances. With key K2 kept J
(LL) With R and S alone, we have open, move the jockey
+ – G
R O1 along AB till it ε
= …(L) ⇒ R (100 – O1) = SO1 balances the emf ε of R.B
S (100 − O1 ) K2
With S and X in parallel and R on the left gap the cell. Let O1 be the
balancing length of the wire. If K is the potential
R O2 gradient, then emf of the cell will be
=
⎛ SX ⎞ (100 − O2 ) ε = KO1 …(L)
⎜ ⎟
⎝ S + X ⎠ With the help of resistance box R.B, introduce a
resistance R and close key K2. Find the balance
R(S + X) O2
⇒ = …(LL) point for the terminal potential difference V of the
 SX 100 − O2

a s cell. If O2 is the balancing length, then

iv D
Dividing (LL) by (L), we have V = KO2 …(LL)
R(S + X) S O2 100 − O1 ε

Sh
. = × KO1 O
SX R 100 − O O1 Dividing (LL) by (L), we have = = 1
 2
V K O 2 O 2
S + X O2 (100 − O1 ) Let U be the internal resistance of the cell
⇒ =
 X O1 (100 − O2 ) ε = I (R + U)and V = IR
ε R+U O
S X O2 (100 − O1 ) = = 1
⇒ + = V R O 2
X X O1 (100 − O2 ) R U O1 U O
+ = ⇒ 1+ = 1
S O (100 − O1 ) R R O2  R O2
⇒ +1= 2 O1 O −O
X O1 (100 − O2 ) ⇒
U
= −1= 1 2
R O 2 O2
S O (100 − O1 )
⇒ = 2 –1 ⎡ O1 − O 2 ⎤
X O 2 (100 − O2 ) ∴ Internal resistance, U = R ⎢ ⎥
O
100O2 − O1O2 − 100O1 + O1O2 ⎢⎣ 2 ⎥⎦
S 79. In a meter bridge, 12 Ω
⇒ =
X O1 (100 − O2 ) the null point is
found at a distance R S
S 100( O2 − O1 ) O (100 − O2 )
⇒ = ⇒ X= 1 .S of 40 cm from A. If A G
X O ( 100 − O )  ( O2 − O1 )
100 B
 1 2 a resistance of 12 Ω
100 O1S − O1O2 S is connected in
∴ X= ))
 100 (O2 − O1 )
parallel with S, the
null point occurs at 50.0 cm from A. Determine
the values of R and S. (Delhi)
78. Write the principle of working of a Ans. Since the wire is of
uniform cross-section, 12 Ω
potentiometer. Describe briefly, with the help of
a circuit diagram, how a potentiometer is used to the resistances of the
R S
determine the internal resistance of a given cell. two segments of the
(Delhi) wire AD and DB are A G
B
in the ratio of the ←⎯⎯⎯
O → ←⎯⎯⎯100 – O →
Ans. 3RWHQWLRPHWHU A potentiometer is a device used
lengths of AD and
to measure potential difference.
DB. ))
 60 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Using the QXOO SRLQW FRQGLWLRQ RI ZKHDWVWRQH EULGJH, Using the value of SHT in equation (LL), we get
R O 40 3 1
We have = = S=5+S ⇒ S=5 ∴ S = 10 Ω
100 − O 100 − 40 2 2
S Now putting the value of S in equation (L), we get
R 40 2 2 3
or = = ∴ R= S …(L) R= × 10 = 15 Ω
S 60 3 3 2 X
When S is shunted by a resistance of 12.0 Ω in 81. In a meter bridge,
parallel the null point is R S

12 S found at a distance G B
Its net resistance changes to SHT =
S + 12
…(LL) of O1 cm from A. If A
now a resistance of
With the new balance condition, we get
X is connected in
R O 50 R 50 parallel with S, the null point occurs at O2 cm.
= = ⇒ = = 1…(LLL)
S HT 100 − O 100 − 50 S HT 50 Obtain a formula for X in terms of O1, O2
 
∴ R = SHT and S. (Delhi)
Using the value of SHT in (LL), we get Ans. Refer to Q. 77 (LL), Page 58
82. Write any WZR factors on + –
12 S V
R= …(LY) which internal resistance
S + 12
of a cell depends. The
Using the value of R from equation (L) in equation
reading on a high
(LY), we have
resistance voltmeter, + –
2 12 S
S= ⇒ 12 + S = 6 × 3 = 18 when a cell is connected
3 12 + S across it, is 2.2 V. When ))
⇒ S = 18 – 12 = 6 Ω and R=5Ω K
the terminals of the cell
2 2 are also connected to a resistance of 5 Ω as
R= S= ×6=4Ω
80. In a meter bridge,
3 3

a s shown in the circuit, the voltmeter reading

iv D
5Ω
drops to 1.8 V. Find the internal resistance of the
the null point is cell. (All India)

Sh
found at a distance R S Ans. (D) Internal resistance of a cell depends upon :
of 60.0 cm from A. (L) nature of electrolyte of the cell
G
If now a resistance A B
(LL) separation between the electrodes.
of 5 Ω is connected (E) Given : emf of cell, ε = 2.2 V, R = 5 Ω, V = 1.8 V
in series with S, the )) ⎛ ε ⎞
null point occurs at U= ⎜ − 1⎟ R
⎝V ⎠
50 cm.
⎛ 2.2 ⎞ ⎛ 2.2 − 1.8 ⎞
Determine the values of R and S. (Delhi) ⇒ U= ⎜ − 1⎟ × 5 = ⎜ ⎟ × 5
Ans. Using the QXOO SRLQW FRQGLWLRQ RI ZKHDWVWRQH EULGJH, ⎝ 1.8 ⎠ ⎝ 1.8 ⎠
we have 0.4 2
∴ U= ×5= = 1.1 Ω
1.8 1.8
R O 60 60 3
= = = = 83. Write any WZR factors on
S 100 − O 100 − 60 40 2 which internal resistance of +
V –
3 a cell depends. The reading
∴ R= S …(L)
2 on a high resistance
voltmeter, when a cell is + –
5Ω
R S
connected across it, is 2.0 V. ))
When the terminals of the R=3Ω K
A
G
B cell are also connected to a resistance of 3 Ω as
←⎯⎯⎯
O → ←⎯⎯⎯
100 – O → shown in the circuit, the voltmeter reading
drops to 1.5 V. Find the internal resistance of the
cell. (All India)
When 5 Ω resistance is connected in series with S, Ans. )DFWRUV DIIHFWLQJ LQWHUQDO UHVLVWDQFH RI D FHOO 
its net resistance changes to Refer to Q. 82 (D), Page 60
SHT = 5 + S …(LL) Let U be the internal resistance of the cell
⎛ ε − V⎞ ⎛ 2 − 1.5 ⎞
With the new balance condition, we get U=R ⎜ ⎟ ⇒ U=3 ⎜ ⎟
⎝ V ⎠ ⎝ 1.5 ⎠
R 50 50
= = = 1 ⇒ R = SHT ⇒ U=3×
0.5
=1 ∴ U=1Ω
S HT 100 − 50 50 1.5

 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 61

84. State Kirchhoff’s rules. I1 E1 = 2 V U1 = 4 Ω By adding (L) and (Y), we get

Use these rules to write 12I3 + 0.5I1 = 6
the expressions for the I3 – 0.5I1 = 4
I2 E2 = 1 V U2 = 3 Ω 10
current I1, I2 and I3 in 13I3 = 10 ∴ I3 =
the circuit diagram 13
shown. (All India) I3 U3 = 2 Ω
Similarly I2 and I1 can be calculated.
E3 = 4 V
86. State Kirchhoff’s 200 Ω
S R
Ans. (D) (L) .LUFKKRII·V MXQFWLRQ UXOH  At any rules. Apply these
junction, the sum of the currents entering rules to the loops 5 V
the junction is equal to the sum of PRSP and PRQP to

60 Ω
write the expressions I2 20 Ω
currents leaving the junction. I3
(milliammetre)
(LL) .LUFKKRII·VORRSUXOH The algebraic sum for the currents I1, I2
and I3 in the given P Q
of changes in potential in any closed loop I1 4V
involving resistors and cells is zero. circuit. (All India)
(E) According to .LUFKKRII·V MXQFWLRQ UXOH, Ans. .LUFKKRII·V UXOHV  Refer to Q. 84 (D), Page 61
I3 = I1 + I2 Applying .LUFKKRII·V UXOH in the loop PRSP, we
…(L)
have
Considering loop FCDEF
20I3 + 200 I2 = 5 …(L)
3I2 – 4I1 = 1 …(LL)
Applying .LUFKKRII·V UXOH in the loop PQRP, we
Considering loop FCBAF have
3I2 + 2I3 = 3 …(LLL) 60I1 + 20I3 = 4 …(LL)
3I2 + 2(I1 + I2) = 3 AlsoI3 = I1 + I2 …(LLL)
5I2 + 2I1 = 3 …(LY) Subtracting (LL) from (L),
200I2 – 60I1 = 1 …(LY)
I 1 ε1 = 2 V U 1 = 4 Ω
E D

a s⇒ 200I2 – 60 (I3 – I2) = 1 ...[From (LLL)

iv D
⇒ 200I2 – 60I3 + 60I2 = 1 ⇒ 260I2 – 60I3 =1…(Y)
I2 ε2 = 1 V U2 = 3 Ω Multiplying (L) by 3, we get 600I2+ 60I3 =15…(L)

Sh
F C
By adding (Y) and (L), we get 860I2 = 16
I3 ε3 = 4 V U3 = 2 Ω
A B 16
∴ I2 = = 0.0186 amp.
860
On solving equations (L), (LL) and (LY), we get
Similarly I1 and I3 can be calculated.
2 7 9
I1 = A; I2 = A; I3 = A
13 13 13
85. State Kirchhoff’s rules. 87. Define the terms (L) drift velocity, (LL) relaxation
E1 = 6 V
Apply Kirchhoff’s rules to P time.
I1 0.5 Ω A conductor of length L is connected to a dc
the loops ACBPA and A B
ACBQA to write the 1Ω source of emf ε. If this conductor is replaced by
I2
I3 Q another conductor of same material and same
expressions for the
E2 = 10 V area of cross-section but of length 3L, how will
currents I1, I2 and I3 in the C
network. (All India) the drift velocity change? (Delhi)
R = 12 Ω Ans. (L) 'ULIW YHORFLW\ : It may be defined as the
Ans. .LUFKKRII·V UXOHV  Refer to Q. 84 (D), Page 61 average velocity gained by the free electrons
1XPHULFDO  Applying .LUFKKRII·V UXOH in loop of a conductor in the opposite direction of
the externally applied field.
ACBPA, we have
(LL) 5HOD[DWLRQ WLPH : The average time that
12I3 + 0.5 I1 = 6 …(L)
elapses between two successive collisions of
In loop ACBQA, by Kirchhoff’s rule, we have
an electron is called relaxation time.
12I3 + 1I2 = 10 …(LL)
Subtracting (L) from (LL), we have HV 1 HV
V′G = V = Q VG =
I2 + 0.5 I1 = 4 …(LLL) 3 G
P 3 L P
 L
As I3 = I1 + I2 …(LY) When length is tripled (3L), drift velocity
Solving equations (LLL) and (LY), we get becomes one-third of the original.
I3 – I1 + 0.5I1 = 4 or I3 – 0.5 I1 = 4 …(Y) For details : Refer to Q. 109, Page 67
 62 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

88. In the circuit shown, A

Hence R1234 = R234 + R1 = 2 + 4 = 6
R1 = 4 Ω, R2 = R3 = 15 E 6
Ω, R4 = 30 Ω and E =
I1 R1 I2 I4 I3 ∴ I= = = 1A
R2 R 6
E R4 Potential at R1, V1 = I1R1 = 1 × 4 = 4 volts
10 V. Calculate the R3
equivalent resistance Potential at R2, R3, R4, V234 = 1 × 2 = 2 volt
of the circuit and the <
2 2 2 1
I1 B ∴ I2 = A, I3 = A, I4 = = A
current in each 5 5 10 5
resistor. (Delhi)
Ans. As clear from the given figure
R3 and R4 are in parallel combination, hence their 90. In the figure a long uniform potentiometer wire
resultant will be AB is having a constant potential gradient along
1 1 1 1 1 2+1 3 1 its length. The null points for the two primary
= + = + = = = cells of emfs ε1 and ε2 connected in the manner
R 34 R3 R4 15 30 30 30 10
shown are obtained at a distance of 120 cm and
LH R34 = 10 Ω
300 cm from the end A.
Now R34 and R2 are again in parallel combination
1 1 1 1 1
∴ = + = +
R 234 R 34 R2 10 15 300 cm
120 cm
15 + 10 25 1 A ε1 ε2 B
= = = ∴ R234 = 6 Ω
150 150 6
ε1 ε2
Finally R234 and R1 are in series combination
R1234 = R234 + R1 = 6 + 4 = 10 Ω Find (L)εε1/εε2 and (LL) position of null point for
the cell ε1.
V 10
∴ I= = = 1A How is the sensitivity of a potentiometer
R 10 increased? (Delhi)
∴ I1 = 1A I1 = I2 + I3 + I4
Potential at R1, V1 = I1R1 = 1 × 4 = 4 volt
s
Ans. In 1st case, ε1 – ε2 = N × 1.20

a
…(L)

iv D
In second case, ε1 + ε2 = N × 3.00 …(LL)
Potential at R2, R3 and R4, V234 = 1 × 6 = 6 volt
ε1 + ε 2 N × 3.00 15

Sh
6 2 6 2 6 1 Dividing (LL) by (L), we have =
∴ I2 = = A I3 = = A , I4 = = A ε − ε2 N × 1.20 6
15 5 15 5 30 5  1
89. In the circuit A 6ε1 + 6ε2 = 15ε1 – 15ε2 = 0
shown, R1 = 4 Ω, I1 R1 I2 I4
I3
⇒ 15ε1 – 6ε1 = 15ε2 + 6ε2 ⇒ 9ε1 = 21ε2
R2 = R3 = 5 Ω, ε1 21 7
R2
R4 (L) = =
R4 = 10 Ω and E R3
ε2 9 3
E = 6V. Work out 3
the equivalent re- (LL) ε1 + ε2 = 300 N ∴ ε1 + ε = 300 N
I1 7 1
sistance of the B
7
circuit and the current in each resistor. (Delhi) ⇒ ε1 = 300 × = 210 N
10
Ans. R3 and R4 are in parallel combination ∴ Balancing length for cell ε1 = 210 cm
A The sensitivity of a potentiometer can be
I1 I2 I4 I3
R1 = 4Ω increased by reducing the potential gradient.
Ω

R2 = 5Ω 91. Using Kirchoff’s rules

10

R3 = 5Ω

E= 6 V F 1Ω E D
=

determine the value of

4
R

unknown resistance R in 1Ω 4Ω R
I1 B the circuit so that no
current flows through 4 Ω I
6V
1 1 1 1 1 3
∴ = + = + = resistance. Also find the
A 9V B
R 34 R3 R4 5 10 10 potential difference 3V C
10
∴ R34 = = 3.3 Ω between A and D. (Delhi)
3 Ans. Applying .LUFKKRII·V 9ROWDJH UXOH for loop ABEFA
Q R34 and R2 are in parallel combination
– 9 + 6 + 4 × 0 + 2I = 0
1 1 1 3 1 3+2 5 1
∴ = + = + = = = 3
R 234 R 34 R 2 10 5 10 10 2 ⇒ 2I – 3 = 0 ⇒ I= A = 1.5 A …(L)
2
∴ R234 = 2 Ω For loop BCDEB
∴ R234 and R1 are in series combination 3 + IR + 4 × 0 – 6 = 0 ∴ IR = 3
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 63

Putting the value of current I from (L), we have RP and 15 Ω are in parallel
3 2 30
×R=3 ∴ R=3× = 2Ω …(LL) × 15
30 × 15 30 × 15 5
2 3 ∴ RP′= 4 = = =5Ω
Potential difference between A and D through 30
+ 15 ( 30 + 60 ) 90 3
path ABCD 4
Total resistance = 5 + 10 + R
+ 9V – 3V – IR = VAD
ε 6−2
⇒ + 9V – 3V –
3
× 2 = VAD = 5 + 10 + R ⇒ = 15 + R
2 0.2 0.2
[Alternatively through path AFD] 40
⇒ = 15 + R ⇒ 2 R = 40 – 30 = 10
∴ VAD = 3V 2
92. Calculate the value of the resistance R in the ∴ R=5Ω ∴ VAB = I × R = 0.2 × (5) = 1V
circuit shown in the figure so that the current in 94. Define relaxation time of the free electrons
the circuit is 0.2 A. What would be the potential drifting in a conductor. How is it related to the
difference between points B and E? (All India) drift velocity of free electrons? Use this relation
to deduce the expression for the electrical
8V 0.2 A B 5Ω resistivity of the material. (All India)
C
15 Ω Ans. 5HOD[DWLRQ WLPH  The average time that elapses
30 Ω 10 Ω 10 Ω between two successive collisions of an electron is
3V called relaxation time.
R 0.2 A E D → →
→ E
VG = D τ = − H τ
Ans. 5 Ω and 10 Ω are in series,  m
∴ RS = 5 Ω + 10 Ω = 15 Ω →
where [VG is called drift velocity of electrons.]
15 Ω LH. RS and 10 Ω are in parallel Suppose a potential difference V is applied across
15 × 10 a conductor of length ‘O’ and of uniform cross-
∴ RP′ = =6Ω

s
25 section A, then

∴
RP′ and 30 Ω are also in parallel

RP′′ =
6 × 30
=5Ω
iv D a Electric field E set up inside the conductor is
given by

Sh
V
36 E=
 O
But RP′′, R and 15 Ω are in series →
∴ RP′ = RP′′ + R + 15 Ω = 5 Ω + R + 15 Ω Under the influence of field E , the free electrons
→
RS′ = 20 Ω + R Current = 0.2 A begin to drift in the opposite direction E with an
ε average drift velocity νG.
= total current
Total resistance O
8−3 Area = A Free electron
∴ = 0.2 A, R=5Ω E
20 + R
Potential difference between points B and E
= I × RBE = 0.2 × 5 = 1.0 V I Conventional Electronic I
93. Calculate the value of the resistance R in the current current
circuit shown in the figure so that the current is Battery
0.2 A. What would be the potential difference Let the number of electrons per unit volume or
between points A and B? (All India) electron density = Q
Charge on an electron = H
6V 0.2 A B 5Ω
C Number of electrons in length O of the
10 Ω conductor = Q × volume of the conductor = QAO
30 Ω 5Ω Total charge contained in length O of the
15 Ω
conductor, T = HQAO
2V 0.2 A According to the electrons which enter the
A D
R conductor at the right end will pass through the
conductor at the left end in time,
Ans. 5 Ω and 5 Ω are in series ∴ RS = 10 Ω W=
distance
=
O
,
RS and 30 Ω are in parallel velocity ν G
30 × 10 T HQAO
∴ RP = =
30
Ω Current, I = = = HQAνG
40 4 W O / νG
HEτ HVτ
I = HQAνG νG = =
 P PO
 64 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

HVτ how will the position of balance point be

I = HQAνG = HQA.
 PO affected? (Comptt. All India)
Y PO PO Ans. The principle on which the working of a meter
= 2 ∴ R=
I QH τA QH τA
2 bridge is based, is :KHDWVWRQH EULGJH.
where [R is electrical resistivity] P R
O AR APO P LH Q = S
R = ρ , or ρ = ∴ ρ= = 2
QH τAO QH τ
2
A  O … where ⎡ P, Q, R and S are the four resistors in the
95. Write the principle ⎢ four arms of the Wheatstone bridge.
⎣
on which the R X R 60 3
working of a meter Given : = =
X 40 2
bridge is based. In G When R and X are doubled and interchanged,
40 cm
an experiment on Let O be the new balancing length, then
B
meter bridge, a A J 2X O X O
= ⇒ =
student obtains the 2R (100 − O) R (100 − O)
balance point at the 2 O
⇒ =
point J such that AJ 3 100 −O
= 40 cm as shown in the figure. The values of ‘R’ ⇒ 3O = 200 – 2O ⇒ 5O = 200∴ O = 40 cm
and ‘X’ are both doubled and then interchanged. If the galvanometer and battery are interchanged,
then there will be no effect on the position of
Find the new position of the balance point. If
balancing point.
the galvanometer and battery are also
interchanged, how will the position of balance
point be affected? (Comptt. All India) 97. Define the current sensitivity of a
Ans. The principle on which the working of a meter galvanometer. Write its S.I. unit.
bridge is based, is :KHDWVWRQH EULGJH.

s
Ω R1 Ω 12 Ω
4 6

a
P R
LH Q = S

iv D
G 3.0 V
60 Ω
9Ω R2

Sh
… where ⎡ P, Q, R and S are the four resistors in the 8Ω
⎢ four arms of the Wheatstone bridge. 6Ω
⎣
R 40 2
Given : = = G
X 60 3 3.0 V 1.20 Ω
When R and X are doubled and interchanged
Let the new balancing length be O Figure shows two circuits each having a
2X O X O galvanometer and a battery of 3 V.
∴ = ⇒ = When the galvanometers in each arrangment do
2R (100 − O) R (100 − O)
not show any deflection, obtain the ratio R1/R2.
3 O
⇒ = ⇒ 300 – 3O = 2O (All India)
2 100 − O
⇒ 3O + 2O = 300 ∴ O = 60 cm Ans. &XUUHQW VHQVLWLYLW\ RI D JDOYDQRPHWHU  Current
If the galvanometer and battery are also inter- sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer is
changed then there will be no effect on the posi- defined as deflection produced in the
tion of the balance point. galvanometer per unit current passed through it.
96. Write the principle R X Its SI unit is UDG $²
on which the (L) For circuit on the left side—
working of a meter G
60 cm
If G has zero deflection, then
bridge is based. In
B
an experiment on A J ⇒ R1 = =6Ω
meter bridge, a
(LL) For circuit on the right side—
student obtains the
If galvanometer and battery are inter-changed,
balance point at the
point J such that AJ = 60 cm as shown in the there is no change in the circuit as such.
figure. The values of ‘R’ and ‘X’ are both So ⇒ R2 = = 4Ω
doubled and then interchanged. Find the new
position of the balance point. If the
galvanometer and battery are also interchanged, ∴ Ratio = =3:2
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 65

98. State the underlying P R 100. A potentiometer wire of length 1.0 m has a
+ – resistance of 15 Ω. It is connected to a 5 V
principle of a
potentiometer. Write battery in series with a resistance of 5 Ω.
X
WZR factors on which A B Determine the emf of the primary cell which
the sensitivity of a Q S gives a balance point at 60 cm. (Delhi)
potentiometer depends. + – G Ans. Similar to Q. 99, Page 65
In the potentiometer circuit shown in the figure, Hint : 2.25 V
the balance point is at X. State, giving reason, 101. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m has a
how the balance point is shifted when resistance of 5 Ω. It is connected to a 8 V battery
(L) resistance R is increased? in series with a resistance of 15 Ω. Determine
the emf of the primary cell which gives a
(LL) resistance S is increased, keeping R
balance point at 60 cm. (Delhi)
constant? (Comptt. Delhi) Ans. Similar to Q. 99, Page 65
Ans. 3RWHQWLRPHWHUA potentiometer is a device used Hint : 1.2 V
to measure potential difference. 102. Answer the following :
A B (D) Why are the connections between the
resistors in a meter bridge made of thick
G copper strips?
+ –
Rh
(E) Why is it generally preferred to obtain the
3ULQFLSOH When a current flows through a wire of balance point in the middle of the meter
uniform thickness, the potential difference be- bridge wire?
tween its two points is directly proportional to the (c) Which material is used for the meter bridge
length of the wire between these two points. wire and why? (All India)
V∝O ⇒ V = KO Ans. (D) The connections between the resistors in a
meter bridge are made of thick copper strip,
… when  [K is called construction potential gradient]
7ZRIDFWRUV (D) Potential gradient (E) Length of
a s so as to have the minimum possible

iv D
potentiometer wire. resistances.
(E) It is generally preferred to obtain the balance

Sh
(L) When R is increased, the balance point will
point in the middle of the meter bridge, so as
shift towards B.
to minimise the error of balance.
(LL) If resistance S increased keeping ‘R’ constant,
(F) The material used for meter bridge is an alloy
the balance points will not change. ‘constantant’ or ‘manganin’ because of (L)
hight resistivity and (LL) low temperature
coefficient of resistivity.
99. A potentiometer wire of length 1 m has a 103. A resistance of R Ω
resistance of 10 Ω. It is connected to a 6 V V
draws current from a
battery in series with a resistance of 5 Ω. potentiometer as R0
A C
Determine the emf of the primary cell which shown in the figure.
gives a balance point at 40 cm. (Delhi) The potentiometer
Ans. Length (O) = 1 m has a total resistance R
Resistance of potentiometer wire = 10Ω R0 Ω. A voltage V is
V supplied to the potentiometer. Derive an
Current (I) in potentiometer wire =
R + R′ expression for the voltage across R when the
6 6
= = = 0.4 A sliding contact is in the middle of the
10 + 5 15
potentiometer. (All India)
E Ans. Since null point is in
V
6V 5Ω the middle of
potentiometer,
0.4 m R0 ←Rop
⎯⎯→
(1 – 0.4) = 0.6 m
PQ = QS = A C
2 P S
G Now the resistance
PQ(R0/2) and R are
e
in parallel R
IRS 0.4 × 10
Potential gradient (N) = = = 4 Vm–1 Their net resistance (R1) will be
 L 1
1 1 1 RR 0
H = NO = 4 × 0.4 = 1.6 V = + or R1 =
R1 R 0 / 2 R (2R + R 0 )
 66 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Now R1 and QS(R0/2) are in series, the net section of the wire and (LLL) use a driving
resistance (R2) is cell whose emf is taken to be greater than
RR 0 R 2RR 0 + R 0 ( 2R + R 0 ) the emfs of the primary cells?
R2 = + 0 =
(2R + R 0 ) 2 2(2R + R 0 ) (E) In a potentiometer experiment, if the area of
4RR 0 + R 0 2 R (4R + R 0 ) the cross-section of the wire increases
= = 0 uniformly from one end to the other, draw a
2(2R + R 0 ) 2(2R + R 0 )
V V V × 2( 2R + R 0 ) graph showing how potential gradient
Current (I) = = = would vary as the length of the wire
R 2 R 0 (4R + R 0 ) R 0 ( 4R + R 0 )
2(2R + R 0 ) increases from one end.(Comptt. All India)
V × 2( 2R + R 0 ) RR 0 Ans. (D) Principle of potentiometer: A potentiometer
Voltage across R = × is a device used to measure potential
R 0 ( 4R + R 0 ) ( 2R + R 0 )
2VR difference.
∴ VR =
( 4R + R 0 ) A B
104. In the electric I1 E1 = 12V U1 = 2Ω
network shown in B C G
the figure, use + –
Rh
Kirchhoff's rules to R = 4Ω
D
calculate the power A I1 + I2 Principle. When a current flows through a
consumed by the wire of uniform thickness, the potential
resistance R = 4 Ω. E difference between its two points is directly
F
I2 E2 = 6V proportional to the length of the wire
(Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. For loop ABCDA between these two points.
–12 + 2I1 + 4(I1 + I2) = 0 V∝O ⇒ V = KO
–12 + 2I1 + 4I1 + 4I2 = 0 … where [K is called construction potential gradient]
⇒ 3I1 + 2I2 = 6 Reasons :

s
6I1 + 4I2 = 12 …(L)
For loop ADFEA
– 4(I1 + I2) + 6 = 0
⇒ 2I1 + 2I2 = 3
iv D a (L) We use a long wire to have a lower
value of potential gradient (LH a lower
‘least count’ or greater sensitivity of the

Sh
– 4I1 – 4I2 = – 6 …(LL)
Solving (L) and (LL), we get potentiometer).
I1 = 3A and I2 = – 1.5A (LL) The area of cross section has to be
∴ Power consumed in 4Ω resistance (R) = I2R uniform to get a ‘uniform wire’ as per
= (I1 + I2)2 × R the principle of the potentiometer to
= (3 – 1.5)2 × 4 W = 9 watt ensure a constant value of resistance
105. In the electric I1 E1 = 12V U1 = 4Ω per unit length of the wire.
network shown in B C (LLL) The emf of the driving cell has to be
the figure use greater than the emf of the primary
Kirchhoff's rules to R = 8Ω
A D cells as otherwise no balance point
calculate the power I1 + I2 would be obtained.
consumed by the
resistance R = 8 Ω. E F (E) Potential gradient K =
V
(Comptt. Delhi) I2 E2 = 8V L
Ans. In loop BCDA, Therefore the required
I1 × 4 + (I1 + I2) × 8 = 12 graph is as shown K
4I1 + 8I1 + 8I2 = 12 here.
12I1 + 8I2 = 12
L
∴ 3I1 + 2I2 = 3 …(Dividing by 4) …(L)
In loop ADFE,
(I1 + I2) × 8 = 8 ⇒ 8I1 + 8I2 = 8
∴ I1 + I2 = 1 …(Dividing by 8) …(LL) 107. A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘U’ is
Solving equations (L) and (LL), we get connected across a variable load resistor R.
I1 = 1A and I2 = 0A Draw the plots of the terminal voltage V versus
∴ Power consumed in 8Ω resistance (R) = I2R (L) R and (LL) the current I.
= (I1 + I2)2 × R It is found that when R = 4 Ω, the current is 1 A
= (1 + 0)2 × 8 = 8 watt and when R is increased to 9 Ω, the current
106. (D) State the underlying principle of a reduces to 0.5 A. Find the values of the emf E
potentiometer. Why is it necessary to (L) use and internal resistance U. (Delhi)
a long wire, (LL) have uniform area of cross-
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 67

Ans. (D) Graph between (E) Graph between is tripled by stretching it, keeping ‘E’ constant,
V and I V and R explain how its drift velocity would be affected.
(All India)
V=ε Ans. (L) 'ULIWYHORFLW\ Drift velocity is defined as the
V=ε
velocity of the free electrons with which they
V
V get drifted towards the positive terminal
under the influence of the external electric
field. The drift velocity of electron is of the
order of 10–5 m/sec.
O R O I 'HULYDWLRQ Let ‘P’ be the mass of an electron
and ‘H’ be the charge on it. When an external
E E electric field ‘E’ is applied, the acceleration
(F) I = I= ⇒ E=4+U …(L)
R + U 4 + U acquired by an electron is given by
E
Also 0.5 = ⇒ E = 4.5 + 0.5U …(LL) F = PD ⇒ D=
F
⇒ D=
eE
9 + U m m
From equations (L) and (LL) Let Y1, Y2, Y3 … YQ be final velocities of
Ω
4 + U = 4.5 + 0.5U ∴ U = 1Ω electrons then average velocity of the
Using this value of U, in equation (L) we get electrons is given by
E = 5V
Y1 + Y2 + Y3 … YQ
108. State the principle of working of a YG = …(L)
 Q
galvanometer.
Y1 + Y2 + Y3 … YQ (X1 + DW1 ) + (X2 + DW2 ) + … (XQ + DWQ )
A galvanometer of resistance G is converted into YG = Q
=
Q

a voltmeter to measure upto V volts by [ Q  Y = X + DW]
connecting a resistance R1 in series with the coil.
(X1 + X2 + … XQ ) D(W1 + W2 + … WQ )
If a resistance R2 is connected in series with it,

a s YG =
 Q
+
Q

iv D
then it can measure upto V/2 volts. Find the YG = 0 + Dτ ⇒ YG = Dτ
resistance, in terms of R1 and R2, required to be

Sh
HE
connected to convert it into a voltmeter that can ∴ YG = τ …[From(L)]
Q
read upto 2V. Also find the resistance G of the
galvanometer in terms of R1 and R2. (Delhi) ⎡ τ = t 1 + t 2 + …t n is the average time
⎢ n
Ans. (D) Working principle of galvanometer : where ⎢ between two successive collisions and
A current carrying coil experiences a torque ⎢⎣ called relaxation time.
when placed in a magnetic field which tends
to rotate the coil and produces an angular H ⎛ (⎞ 1
(LL) We know that YD = ⎜ ⎟ τ ∴ YD ∝
defletion. P
 ⎝ / ⎠ /

V Therefore, when length is WULSOHG the drift
(E) V = I(G + R1) …(L) = I(G + R2)…(LL) velocity becomes RQHWKLUG
2
Dividing (L) by (LL), we have, 110. In the two electric circuits shown in the figure,
G + R1 determine the reading of ideal ammeter (A) and
⇒ 2= ⇒ G = R1 – 2R2 the ideal voltmeter (V). (Comptt. Delhi)
G + R2
Let R3 be the resistance required for – V+ +
V–
conversion into voltmeter of range 2V
∴ 2V = IJ(G + R3) …(LLL) 6V 6V
Also, V = IJ(G + R1) …(LY) 1Ω 1Ω
Dividing (LLL) by (LY), we have A A
G + R3 9V 9V
∴ 2=
G + R1 1Ω 1Ω
∴ R3 = G + 2R1 = (R1 – 2R2) + 2R1 (D) (E)
= 3R1 – 2R2 [From value of G
109. Find the relation between drift velocity and Ans. (L) In circuit (D)
relaxation time of charge carriers in a conductor. Total emf = 15 V, Total Resistance = 2Ω
A conductor of length L is connected to a d.c.
Current, L = ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ A = 7.5 A
15
source of emf ‘E’. If the length of the conductor ⎝ 2⎠
 68 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Potential difference between the terminals of potential difference V is applied across the
6 V battery ends X and Y of the wire. This causes an
V = E – LR = [6 – (7.5 × 1) = – 1.5 V electric field at each point of the wire of
(LL) In circuit (E) strength :
Effective emf = (9 – 6)V = 3V, ⎯ ⎯→
E
Total Resitance = 2Ω X P Q Y

Current, L = ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ A = 1.5 A
3 Current(I)

2⎝ ⎠
YGW I
Potential Difference across 6 V cell, I
V = E – (– I)R = V + IR
V
( QCurrent is in opposite direction to 6 V cell)
= 6 + 1.5 × 1 = 7.5 V + –
111. In the circuit shown 4V 8V 1.0Ω
in the figure, find V
E= …(L)
the current through 0.5Ω O
each resistor. Due to this electric field, the electrons gain a
L L
(Comptt. Delhi) drift velocity VG opposite to direction of
3.0Ω electric field. If T be the charge passing
Ans. Total emf of the through the cross-section of wire in W
4.5Ω
circuit T
seconds, then, current in wire, I =
=8V–4V=4V 6.0Ω W
Since two resistors 3Ω and 6Ω are connected in The distance transversed by each electron in
parallel, their combined resistance is time (W) = drift velocity × time = VG W
If we consider two planes P and Q at a
1 1 1 1 1 3 1
+

s
= = + = = R′ = 2Ω distance VG W in a conductor, then the total

a
R′ R1 R 2 3 6 6 2
charge flowing in time W will be equal to the

iv D
Since all resistors are in series, total charge on the electrons present within
R = 0.5 + 4.5 + 2 + 1 = 8Ω

Sh
the cylinder PQ.
V 4 The volume of this cylinder = cross sectional
Current through circuit, I = = = 0.5 A
R 8 area × length = A VG W
Ω A current will flow in 3 resistors, LH, 0.5Ω
0.5Ω Ω, If Q is the number of free electrons in the wire
Ω and 1Ω
4.5Ω Ω. per unit volume, then the number of free
Current through resistors 3Ω and 6Ω electrons in the cylinder = Q(AVG W)
1 If charge on each electron is – H (H = 1.6 × 10–
V = I1 × 3 = I2 × 6 = (I – I1) × 6 I1 = A 19 C), then the total charge flowing through a
3
[I2 = I – I3] cross-section of the wire,
T = (QA VG W) (– H) = – QHA VG W …(LLL)
I2 = (I – I1) = ⎛⎜ − ⎞⎟ = A
1 1 1
⎝ 2 3⎠ 6 ∴ Current flowing in the wire,
T − QHAVG W
112. (D) Deduce the relation between current I I= =
W W
flowing through a conductor and drift LH Current I = – QHA VG …(LY)
→ This is the relation between electric current
velocity VG of the electrons.
 and drift velocity. Negative sign shows that
(E) Figure shows a I(A)
the direction of current is opposite to the
plot of current ‘I’ 10 drift velocity.
flowing through
(E) Charge = Current × time
the cross-section 5 (L) For 0 to 5 seconds, the current
of a wire versus 0+5
the time ‘W’. Use = = 2.5 A
0 5 10 W(V) 2
the plot to find Hence, T1 = (2.5) × (5) = 12.5 C
the charge flowing in 10s through the wire. (LL) For 5 sec to 10 sec, the current = 5A
(Comptt. All India) Hence, T2 = 5 × (10 – 5) = 5 × 5 = 25 C
Ans. (D) Relation between electric current and drift T = T1 + T2 = 12.5 + 25 = 37.5 C
velocity : Consider a uniform metallic wire 113. Draw a circuit diagram of a potentiometer. State
XY of length O and cross-sectional area A. A its working principle. Derive the necessary
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 69

formula to describe how it is used to compare point, there is no deflection in the galvanometer
the emfs of the two cells. (Comptt. All India) G. In this position the points B and D are at the
Ans. Refer to Q. 126 (D), Page 73 same potential, therefore the bridge is balanced.
114. With the help of the circuit diagram, explain the The point B is called the null point. The length of
working principle of meter bridge. How is it both parts AB and BC of the wire are read on the
scale. The condition of balance of Wheatstone
used to determine the unknown resistance of a
bridge is,
given wire? Write the necessary precautions to
P R
minimize the error in the result. =
Q S
(Comptt. All India)
Unknown resistance, S = ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ R
Q
Ans. Metre Bridge is special case of Wheatstone ∴ …(L)
⎝
P ⎠
Bridge
If U is the resistance per cm length of wire AC and
It is a device based on Wheatstone bridge to
Ocm is the length of wire AB, then length of wire
determine the unknown resistance of a wire.
BC will be (100 – O) cm
3ULQFLSOH Meter bridge is based on the principle
∴ P = resistance of wire AB = OU
of wheatstone bridge,LH when bridge is balanced
Q = resistance of wire BC = (100 – O)U
O R R(100 − O) Substituting these values in equation (L), we get
= or S =
(
 100 − O ) S  O (100 − O)U 100 − O
S= ×R⇒S= R …(LL)
&LUFXLW  To find the unknown resistance S, the  OU  O
circuit is completed as shown in figure. The As the resistance (R) of wire (AB) is known, the
resistance S may be calculated.
unknown resistance wire of resistance S is
A number of observations are taken for different
connected across the gap between points C and D
resistances taken in resistance box and S is
and a resistance box (R) is connected across the calculated each time and the mean value of S is
gap between the points A and D. A cell, a rheostat
and a key (K) is connected between the point A

a s found.
3UHFDXWLRQV

iv D
and C by means of connecting screws. In the (L) In this experiment the resistance of the

Sh
experiment when the sliding jockey touches the copper strips and connecting screws have not
wire AC at any point, then the wire is divided been taken into account. These resistances
into two parts. These two parts AB and BC act as are called end-resistances. Therefore very
the resistances P and Q of the Wheatstone bridge. small resistances cannot be found accurately
In this way the resistances of arms AB, BC, AD by metre bridge. The resistance S should not
and DC form the resistances P, Q, R and S of be very small.
Wheatstone bridge. Thus the circuit of meter (LL) The current should not flow in the metre
bridge wire for a long time, otherwise the
bridge is the same as that of Wheatstone bridge.
wire will become hot and its resistance will
Resistance box Resistance wire be changed.
(R) (S)
D 115. (L) Derive an expression for drift velocity of
free electrons.
G
A (P) B (Q) C (LL) How does drift velocity of electrons in a
O cm (100 – O) cm metallic conductor vary with increase in
temperature? Explain. (All India)
Ans. (L) Expression for drift velocity : When a
(Rh) K potential difference is applied across a
+ –
Rheostat conductor, an electric field is produced and
Cell
free electrons are acted upon by an electric
force (= – EH). Due to this, electrons
0HWKRG  To determine the unknown resistance
accelerate and keep colliding with each
first of all key K is closed and a resistance R is
taken in the resistance box in such a way that on other and acquire a constant (average)
pressing jockey B at end points A and C, the velocity νG
∴ FH = –EH = – ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ e
deflection in galvanometer is on both the sides. V
Now jockey is slided on wire at such a position ⎝ O ⎠
V
that on pressing the jockey on the wire at that Q E=
 O
 70 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

−F − HV resistance equal to the series combination of R1

As D = = and also Y = X + DW and R2, at a temperature of 100°C.
 P P
Q X = 0, W = τ (relaxation time) (Neglect the ring corresponding to the tolerance
νG = – Dτ of the carbon resistor) (Comptt. Delhi)
−HV Ans Given : α1 = 0.0031/°C, α2 = 0.0068/°C
νG = τ R1 = 200 Ω, R2 = 100 Ω
 OP
(LL) The drift velocity of electrons decreases with RW = R0(1 + αΔW)
temperature, because the time of relaxation orange (3)

⎯⎯
decreases.

→
116. The reading of the (ideal) ammeter, in the circuit
shown here, equals :

⎯→
→
(L) I when key K1 is closed but key K2 is open.

⎯
⎯
I yellow (4)
(LL) when both keys K1 and K2 are closed. brown (101)
2 For Resistance R1
Find the expression for the resistance of X in R1′ = R1(1 + αΔW)
terms of the resistances of R and S. = 200(1 + 0.0031 × 100)
(Comptt. Delhi) = 262 Ω …(L)
S
K2 For Resistance R2
R2′ = 100(1 + 0.0068 × 100)
R = 168 Ω …(LL)
Hence, Total Resistance in series combination of
A X
R1 and R2 at 100° C :
R′ = R1′ + R2′= 262 Ω + 168 Ω
= 430 Ω = 43 × 101 Ω
118. A student connects a cell, of emf E2 and internal
+ –

a s resistance U2 with a cell of emf E1 and internal

iv D
ε K1 resistance U1, such that their combination has a
Ans. Finding the expression for the resistance X net internal resistance less than U1. This

Sh
(L) Current I when K2 is open and K1 is closed combination is then connected across a
resistance R.
E
I= …(L) Draw a diagram of the ‘set-up’ and obtain an
R+X
expression for the current flowing through the
(LL) Current I′ when both the keys K1 and K2 are
resistance R. (Comptt. Outside Delhi)
closed
Ans. Since the net internal resistance of two cells is less
E ⎧ E(S + X) ⎫
I′ = =⎨ ⎬ …(LL) than U1,
⎧ ⎛ SX ⎞ ⎫ ⎩ R(S + X) + SX ⎭ it means that the two cells must have been
⎨ + ⎜ ⎟
⎝ S + X ⎠ ⎬⎭
R
⎩ connected in parallel
∴ S and X are in parallel. The diagram of the setup is as shown
Current flowing through X, ε2
+ –
I I′ S ⎧ E(S + X) ⎫ S
= =⎨ ⎬ …(LLL) U2
2 S + X ⎩ R(S + X) + SX ⎭ (S + X)
Putting the value of I, we get on equating
E ES
= + –
2(R + X) R(S + X) + SX
⇒ 2(R + X)S = R(S + X) + SX ε1 U1
2RS + 2XS = RS + RX + SX
RS = RX – SX
RS R
X= U1U2
R−S Equivalent internal resistance U = …(L)
117. The temperature coefficient of resistivity, for  + U2 )
( U1

two materials A and B, are 0.0031/°C and 0.0068/ ⎛ 1 1 1⎞

⎜∴ U = U + U ⎟
°C, respectively. ⎝
 1 2⎠
Two resistors, R1 and R2, made from materials A Equivalent emf H, is given by
Ω and
and B, respectively, have resistances of 200Ω
Ω at 0°C. Show on a diagram, the ‘colour
100Ω ⎛H H ⎞
H = ⎜ 1 + 2⎟U …(LL)
code’, of a carbon resistor, that would have a ⎝ U1

U2 ⎠
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 71

The current flowing through R, is Voltage across R, V1 = I2R

I=
H
…(LLL) ⎛ IR 0 ⎞ ⎛ R R0 ⎞ ⎛ V ⎞
(R + U ) R 0 ⎟ ⎜ ⎛ RR 0 ⎞ R 0 ⎟
Where H and U are given by the equations (LL) and
= ⎜
⎜2 R
⎝
(R0
2
)
⎟ R=⎜
⎟
⎠
⎜2 R+
⎝
( ⎟ ⎜ )
2 ⎠ ⎜ ⎝ 2R + R 0 ⎠
+ ⎟
2 ⎟
(L) respectively. ⎝ ⎠
2RV
=
R 0 + 4R
119. A resistance of R draws current from a 120. (D) The potential difference applied across a
potentiometer. The potentiometer wire, AB,
given resistor is altered so that the heat
has a total resistance of R0. A voltage V is
produced per second increases by a factor
supplied to the potentiometer. Derive an
of 9. By what factor does the applied
expression for the voltage across R when the
potential difference change?
sliding contact is in the middle of
(E) In the figure shown, an ammeter A and a
potentiometer wire. (Delhi)
resistor of 4Ω are connected to the
V terminals of the source. The emf of the
source is 12 V having an internal
A R0 resistance of 2 Ω. Calculate the voltmeter
B and ammeter readings. (Outside Delhi)
R V

Ans. Given : Total resistance of potentiometer wire

AB = R0
12 V 2:
Voltage applied = V, Given resistance = R A

s
Resistance between points A and C

1 1
= +
1
=
R
R. 0 [ Q Being in parallel

iv D
2 [ Q Given that the balance a R=4:

Sh
R AC R ⎛ R0 ⎞ R0 Ans. (D) Heat produced in a resistor ‘R’ when
⎜ ⎟ R + R applied, potential difference V, is :
⎝ 2 ⎠ 2 point is in middle, 0 ]
2
V2
V H=
R
R0 V12 V2 H2 V2
∴ H1 = , H2 = 2 or = 22
A B R R H1 V1
C
I1 H2 V2 V2
= 9 = 22 or = 9 =3
H1 V1 V1
R
∴ V2 = 3V1
Effective resistance between points A and B
(E) Given : R = 4 Ω, E = 12 V, U = 2 Ω,
⎛ R ⎞
R 0 V = ?, I=?
⎜ 2 ⎟ R0
R2 = RAC + RCB = ⎜
R ⎟+ 2 Since external resistance ‘R’ and internal
⎜R+ 0 ⎟ resistance ‘U’ of the battery are in series
⎝ 2 ⎠
V Req = R + U = 4 + 2 = 6 Ω
Current drawn from the voltage source, I =
R2 E 12
(L) Current I = = = 2A
V V R eq 6
I= =
R2 ⎛ R0 ⎞
(LL) We know E = V + IU
R
⎜ 2 ⎟ + R0
⎜ R ⎟ or V = E – IU
2
⎜R+ 0 ⎟ = 12 – (2 x 2) = 12 – 4
⎝ 2 ⎠
Let current through R be I1 = 8V
⎛R ⎞ 121. (D) Write the principle of working of a metre
I⎜ 0 ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ bridge.
∴ I1 = (E) In a metre bridge, the balance point is
R
R+ 0
2 found at a distance O1 with resistances R
and S as shown in the figure.
 72 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

An unknown resistance X is now YG Y

(LL) Mobility, μ = = G
connected in parallel to the resistance S E V
and the balance point is found at a  O
distance O2. Obtain a formula for X in So, as potential is doubled, drift velocity
terms of O1, O2 and S. (Outside Delhi) also gets doubled, therefore, there will be
R S
QR FKDQJH LQ PRELOLW\
123. Define the term current sensitivity of a
galvanotmer. In the circuits shown in the
G
figures, the galvanometer shows no deflection
in each case. Find the ratio of R1 and R2.
l1 (Comptt. All India)
A B

4 : R1 6 : 12 :
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 114, Page 69 3V
G
(E) From the principle of Meter Bridge, we
R O1 8 :
have = 6 : 4 : R2
S 100 − O1
When ‘X’ is connected in parallel with ‘S’,
XS 3V G
then S’ =

o
X+S
R R O2 P R
∴ = = Ans. • As per wheatstone bridge, =
S′ ⎛ XS ⎞ 100 − O2 Q S
⎜ ⎟ For circuit (1), we have
 ⎝ X + S⎠
[ Q O2 is the new balance point]

a s 4 R
= 1 ⇒ R1 =
8
Ω

iv D
6 4 3
O2 S (100 – O2 ) Similarly for circuit (2)
On solving, we get, X =
 100 (O2 − O1 )

Sh
6 12
= ⇒ R2 = 4 Ω
⎡ R O1 ⎤ R2 8
⎢Q = ⎥
S (100 − O ) 8
⎣ 1 ⎦
R1 2
122. Derive the expression for the current density of ∴ = 3 =
a conductor in terms of the conductivity and R2 4 3
applied electric field. Explain, with reason how
the mobility of electrons in a conductor Long Answer Type Questions (LA)
changes when the potential difference applied (5 Marks)
is doubled, keeping the temperature of the
conductor constant. (Comptt. Delhi)
124. (D) Derive the relation between current density
Ans. (L) Derivation of expression for current →
‘ J ’ and potential difference ‘V’ across a
density— current carrying conductor of length ‘O’, area
Using Ohm’s law, of cross-section ‘A’ and the number density
IρO ρO
= I ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟
‘Q’ of free electrons.
V = IR = …(L)
 A ⎝ A⎠ (E) Estimate the average drift speed of conduc-
Potential difference (V), across the ends of a tion electrons in a copper wire of cross-sec-
conductor of length ‘O’ where field ‘E’ is tional area 1.0 × 10–7 m2 carrying a current of
applied, is given by 1.5 A. [Assume that the number density of
V = EO …(LL) conduction electrons is 9 × 1028 m–3]
(Comptt. Delhi)
From equations (L) and (LL),
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 71, Page 56
⎛ ρO ⎞ 1
∴ EO = I ⎜ ⎟ (E) Since I = QHAYG ⇒ YG =
⎝ A ⎠ QHA
I 1.5
But current density J = ∴ YG = 28 −19 −7
A 9 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 × 1.0 × 10
JO ⎡ 1⎤ 1.5
EO = JρO = ⎢⎣Q ρ σ ⎥⎦ =
9 × 1.6
× 10–28+26
σ
⇒ J = σE 0.5
= × 10–2 = 1.04 × 10–3 m/s
4.8
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 73

125. Use Kirchhoff’s rules to obtain the balance con- (E) RRO = Red, Red and Orange.
dition in a Wheatstone bridge. = 22 × 103 Ω
B

2R

4R
A C

2R
R
D

V
Calculate the value of R in the balance condition
Under balanced condition
of the Wheatstone bridge, if the carbon resistor
AB BC 2R 2R
connected across the arm CD has the colour se- = ⇒ =
AD DC R RRO
quence red, red and orange, as is shown in the
figure. ∴ R = 22 × 103 Ω
If now the resistances of the arms BC and CD Under balance condition
are interchanged, to obtain the balance condi- 2R 4R
=
tion, another carbon resistor is connected in R 2R
place of R. What would now be the sequence of BC = 4 × R = 4(22 × 103) = 88 × 103 Ω
…[As R = 22 × 103 ...proved
colour bands of the carbon resistor?
∴ Sequence of colour bands :
(Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. (D) 'HULYDWLRQ RI EDODQFH FRQGLWLRQ IURP

a s &RGH → Grey, Grey, Orange

iv D
.LUFKKRII·V ODZV 
Applying Kirchhoff’s second law to the loop

Sh
126. (D) State the working principle of a
ABDA, we get potentiometer. With the help of the circuit
I1P + IgG – I2R = 0 diagram, explain how a potentiometer is
…where [G is the resistance of the galvanometer used to compare the emf’s of two primary
Again, applying Kirchhoff’s second law to cells. Obtain the required expression used
the loop BCDB, we get for comparing the emfs.
(I1 – Ig) Q – (I2 + Ig) S – IgG = 0 (E) Write WZR possible causes for one sided
In the balanced condition of the bridge, Ig = 0 deflection in a potentiometer experiment.
(Delhi)
The above equation becomes
Ans. (D) Principle : 7KHEDVLFSULQFLSOHRIDSRWHQWLRPHWHU
I1P – I2R = 0 ⇒ I1P = I2R …(L) LVWKDW´ZKHQDFRQVWDQWFXUUHQWIORZVWKURXJKD
and I1Q – I2S = 0 ⇒ I1Q = I2S …(LL) ZLUH RI XQLIRUP FURVVVHFWLRQDO DUHD DQG
On dividing equation (L) by (LL), we get FRPSRVLWLRQWKHSRWHQWLDOGURSDFURVVDQ\OHQJWK
P R RIWKHZLUHLVGLUHFWO\SURSRUWLRQDOWRWKDWOHQJWKµ
= Y ∝ O.
Q S
B Comparison of emf’s of two cells: First of all
I 1 – IJ the ends of potentiometer are connected to a
P Q
I1 IJ battery B1, key K and rheostat RK such that the
G positive terminal of battery B1 is connected to
A I2 C
IJ
S end A of the wire. This completes the primary
R circuit.
I D I2 + IJ
Now the positive terminals of the cells C1 and
C2 whose emfs are to be compared are
I
ε connected to A and the negative terminals to
&LUFXLWVKRZLQJ:KHDWVWRQHEULGJH the jockey J through a two-way key and a
galvanometer (fig). This is the secondary circuit.
Thus this equation relating to the four Method:
resistors is called the EDODQFH FRQGLWLRQ for (L) By closing key K, a potential difference is
the galvanometer to give zero or null established and rheostat is so adjusted that
deflection. when jockey J is made to touch at ends A
 74 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

and B of wire, the deflection in galvano- R1 R2

meter is on both sides. Suppose in this B
position the potential gradient is N.
G

D
A C

Ans. (D) Kirchhoff’s Rules :

(L) Junction rule. At any junction of circuit
elements, the algebraic sum of currents
entering the junction must be equal to
the sum of currents leaving it. LH ΣI = 0
(LL) Loop rule. The algebraic sum of changes
in potential around any closed loop
involving resistors and cells in the loop
is zero.
∴ ΣIR + ΣE = 0
Balance condition of wheatstone bridge :
(LL) Now plug is inserted between the terminals Refer to Q.125 (D), Page 73
1 and 3 so that cell C1 is included in the R1 40 40 2
secondary circuit and jockey J is slided on (E) 1st condition : = = = …(L)
R2 (100 − 40) 60 3
the wire at P1 (say) to obtain the null point.
2nd condition :
The distance of P1 from A is measured.
R 1 + 10 60 60 3
Suppose this length is O1 LH AP1 = O1 = = = …(LL)
∴ The emf of cell C1, ε1 = NO1

a
…(L)
s R2 100 − 60 40 2

iv D
(LLL) Now plug is taken off between the R1 2
R2
terminals 1 and 3 and inserted in between By dividing (L) by (LL) = 3

Sh
R 1 + 10 3
the terminals 2 and 3 to bring cell C2 in the
circuit. Jockey is slided on wire and null R2 2
R1 2 2 4
deflection position P2 is noted. Suppose ⇒ = × =
distance of P2 from A is O2 LH AP2 = O2 R 1 + 10 3 3 9
∴ The emf of cell C2, ε2 = NO2 …(LL) 9R1 = 4R1 + 40 5R1 = 40 ∴ R1 = 8Ω
ε1 O By putting the value of R1 in equation (L),
Dividing (L) by (LL), we get = 1 …(LLL)
ε O 8 2 3×8
 2 2 = ⇒ R2 = = 12
Thus emf’s of cells may be compared. Out R2 3 2
of these cells if one is standard cell, then ∴ R2 = 12Ω
the emf of other cell may be calculated.
(E) &DXVHVIRURQHVLGHGGHIOHFWLRQ
(L) Potential difference between the ends of 128. (L) Define the term drift velocity.
the potentiometer wire is less than the (LL) On the basis of electron drift, derive an
emf of the cell in the secondary circuit. expression for resistivity of a conductor in
(LL) The positive side of the driving cell is terms of number density of free electrons
connected to the negative terminal of the and relaxation time. On what factors does
cell in the secondary circuit. resistivity of a conductor depend?
127. (D) State Kirchhoff’s rules for an electric (LLL) Why alloys like constantan and manganin
network. Using Kirchhoff’s rules, obtain the are used for making standard resistors?
balance condition in terms of the resistances (Delhi))
Ans. (L) Drift velocity may be defined as the average
of four arms of Wheatstone bridge.
velocity gained by the free electrons of a
(E) In the meterbridge experimental set up,
conductor in the opposite direction of the
shown in the figure, the null point ‘D’ is
externally applied field.
obtained at a distance of 40 cm from end A (LL) Refer to Q. 94, Page 63
of the meterbridge wire. If a resistance of 10 (LLL) Because constantan and manganin show very
Ω is connected in series with R1, null point weak dependence of resistivity on
is obtained at AD = 60 cm. Calculate the temperature.
values of R1 and R2. (Delhi)
 Chapter 3 : CURRENT ELECTRICITY 75

129. (L) State the principle of working of a Ans. (D) The given circuit can be redrawn as :
potentiometer. B
(LL) In the given poten- 2V 15 Ω P LJ Q
tiometer circuit AB L3
is a uniform wire of A L1 C
length 1 m and re- O L2
A
sistance 10Ω Ω. Cal- B
X R L
1.2 Ω
culate the potential L4
D
gradient along the 1.5 V G

wire and balance 0.3 Ω

+ –
length AO (= O).
(Delhi) It is, therefore, a wheatstone bridge
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 126 (D), Page 73 Using Kirchoff’s laws, we get (when LJ = 0)
L1 = L3 and L2 = L4
(LL) Given : OAB = 1 m, RAB = 10 Ω, ES = 2V,
For the loop ABDA, we have
RS = 15 Ω, EC = 1.5 V,
– L1P + L2X = 0 or L1P = L2X
R F1 = 1.2 Ω, R F2 = 0.3 Ω, N = ? OAO = ?
Current flowing in the potentiometer wire For the loop BCDB, we have
E 2.0 2 – L3Q + L4R = 0 or L3Q = L4R
LS = = = A
R 15 + 10 25 Dividing we get,
 WRWDO
∴ Potential difference across the two ends L1P L X
of the wire = 2
L
 3 Q L 4R
2 20
VAB = × 10 = = 0.8 volt P X
25 25 or = ( QL1 = L3 and L2 = L4)
V 0.8 Q R

s
Hence, potential gradient K = AB =

a
 OAB 1 .0 (E) A simple device, based on the above

iv D
= 0.8 V/m condition is ‘Meter Bridge’.
Current flowing in the circuit containing :RUNLQJ RI 0HWHU %ULGJH  Refer to Q. 114,

Sh
experimental cell, Page 69
1.5 131. (D) Why do the ‘free electrons’, in a metal wire,
LF = = 1A
1.2 + 0.3 ‘flowing by themselves’, not cause any
Hence, potential difference across length AO current flow in the wire?
of the wire Define ‘drift velocity’ and obtain an
VAO = R C 2 × LF = 0.3 × 1 = 0.3 V expression for the current flowing in a wire,
Also VAO = K × OAO ⇒0.3 = 0.8 × OAO in terms of the ‘drift velocity’ of the free
0.3 electrons.
∴ OAO = m = 0.375 m = 37.5 cm
0.8 (E) Use the above expression to show that the
130. (D) Obtain the condition under which the ‘resistivity’, of the material of a wire, is
current flowing, in the ‘current detecting inversely proportional to the ‘relaxation
device’, used in the circuit shown in the
time’ for the ‘free electrons’ in the mwtal.
figure, becomes zero.
(E) Describe briefly the device, based on the (Comptt. Outside Delhi)
above condition. Draw a circuit diagram for Ans. (D) (L) The free electrons, in a metal, (flowing
this device and discuss, in brief, how it is by themselves), have a random
used for finding an unknown resistance. distribution of their velocities. Hence the
(Comptt. All India) net charge crossing any cross section in a
P Q unit time is zero.
(LL) The drift velocity equals the average
Current
(time dependent) velocity acquired by
(Resistance detecting free electrons, under the action of an
= R0) device applied (external) electric field.
(LLL) ([SUHVVLRQ IRU FXUUHQW LQ WHUPV RI GULIW
X R YHORFLW\  Refer to Q. 47, Page 52
(E) We know from above
+ –
I = – QHA YG …(L)
 76 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

the sum of currents leaving the junction.

⎛ →⎞
H E⎟ Loop Rule : The Algebraic sum of changes in
Also we know, YG = ⎜ τ …(LL)
⎜ P⎟ potential, around any closed loop involving
⎝
 ⎠
resistors and cells, in the loop is zero.
Putting the value of YG in equation (L) from Σ(ΔV) = 0
equation (LL) we have -XVWLILFDWLRQ : The first law is in accordance
HE ⎡ V with the law of conservation of charge.
I = – QHA τ ⎢QE = O
P ⎣ The second law is in accordance with the
E P ⎡ RA
or =− 2 ⎢Q ρ = O
law of conservation of energy.
I QH Aτ ⎣
 (E) Given : EMF = E, internal resistance = U,
P
ρ = − 2 resistance of each resistor = U
 QH τ The equivalent circuit diagram is shown
1
ρ∝ below
τ

r
132. (L) Derive an expression for drift velocity of G H
C r D E r F
electrons in a conductor. Hence deduce A r r B
Ohm’s law. J K
(LL) A wire whose cross-sectional area is r

increasing linearly from its one end to the

other, is connected across a battery of V
volts. Which of the following quantities (L) The two resistances of ‘U’ each between
remain constant in the wire? points C and D are in parallel
(D) drift speed (E) current density 1 1 1 U
(F) electric current (G) electric field

a s ∴
U
 CD
= + ⇒ UCD =
U U 2

…(L)

iv D
Justify your answer. (Delhi)
Similarly two resistances between points E
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 112 (D), Page 68

Sh
and F are in parallel,
(LL) (F) Electric current will remain constant in
U
the wire. ∴ UEF = …(LL)
5HDVRQ : All other quantities depend on the 2
cross sectional area of the wire and hence Now these resistances UCD and UEF are in
will not remain constant. series,
133. (D) State the WZR Kirchhoff’s laws. Explain U U
UCF = + =U …(LLL)
briefly how these rules are justified. 2
 2
(E) The current is drawn from a cell of emf E Now 3 resistances UGH, UCF and UJK of ‘U’
and internal resistance U connected to the each are in parallel
network of resistors each of resistance U as U
shown in the figure. Obtain the ∴ UHT = …(LY)
3
expression for (L) the current drawn from U
the cell and (LL) the power consumed in Total resistance R = UHT + UL = +U
3

the network. (Delhi) Hence current drawn from the cell
E 3E
I= =
A B U 4U
C
+U
3
Power consumed,
2
P = I2 ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ = ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ × ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟
E, r U 3E 4U

Ans. (D) Junction Rule : At any Junction, the sum of ⎝ 3 ⎠ ⎝ 4U ⎠ ⎝ 3⎠

2 2
9E 4U 3E
currents, entering the junction, is equal to = 2
× =
U 3 4U


16

 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 77

nit 3
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF CURRENT
AND MAGNETISM
4. Moving Charges and Magnetism

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Magnetic field. It is the space around a magnet or current carrying conductor in which magnetic influence can be experienced.
→
Magnetic field is denoted by B . The SI unit of magnetic field is Tesla (T).

a s
2. Magnetic force. The magnetic field exerts a force on any magnetic pole placed in the magnetic field.

iv D
→ → →
3. Lorentz force. The total force on a charge q moving with velocity ν in the presence of magnetic and electric field B and E

Sh
respectively is called the Lorentz force. It is given by
→ → → → → → →
F = Felectric + Fmagnetic or F = q E + q( ν × B )

→ → → →
The magnetic force F = q( ν × B ) is normal to ν and work done by it is zero.
→
4. Magnetic force on a current-carrying conductor. The force F experienced by a straight conductor of length l and carrying a
→
steady current I placed in a uniform magnetic field B is
→ → → → →
F = I( l × B ) = I l B sin θ where [θ is the angle between l and B ]
→
5. Motion in a magnetic field. When a charged particle moves in a uniform magnetic field with a velocity ν at angle θ to the
direction of magnetic field, the charged particle follows a helical path.
m ν sin θ
(i) Radius of path, r =
qB

2πmν cos θ
(ii) The pitch of helix, d =
qB

qB
(iii) The angular frequency ‘w’ of the particle =
m
2π 2πm
(iv) Time period, T = =
w qB
6. Cyclotron. The cyclotron is a machine to accelerate charged particles or ions to high energies. The cyclotron frequency is given
by
qB ⎡a charge q executes a circular orbit in a plane normal to B. This
νc = where ⎢frequency is independent of the particles’ speed and radius.
2πm ⎢⎣

Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 77

78 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

→
7. Biot-Savart law. It states that “the magnetic field d B due to a current element dl, carrying a steady current I, at a point P, at a
distance r from the current element is, I
→ →
→ μ0 d l ×r
dB = I B dB
4π r3
θ
Idl P
→ μ0 I dl sin θ ⎡ θ is the angle between the direction of the current and r →
∴ |d B | = where ⎢ the line joining the current element. A dp
4π r2 ⎢⎣
I
The constant μ0 is called the permeability of free space or vacuum.
8. Magnetic field due to a circular current loop. The magnitude of the magnetic field due to a circular coil of radius R carrying
a current I at an axial distance x from the centre is
μ 0 IR 2
B=
2( x + R 2 )3/2
2

μ0I
(i) At the centre, B =
2R
μ 0nI
(ii) If the coil has n number of turns then B =
2R
→
9. Ampere’s circuital law. It states that “the line integral of magnetic field B around any closed path in vacuum is equal to μ0 times
the total current enclosed by that path.”
→ →
∴
∫ B. dl = μ0I where [I is the net current enclosed by the closed circuit.]
10. Magnetic field due to a current carrying conductor. The magnitude of the magnetic field at a distance R from a long straight
wire carrying a current I is given by
μ0I

s
B=

a
2R

iv D
The field lines are circles concentric with the wire.
11. Magnetic field due to a solenoid:

Sh
(i) The magnitude of the field B inside a long solenoid carrying a current I is,
B = μ0nI where [n is the number of turns per unit length.
1
(ii) Magnetic field at a point on one end of the solenoid is given by B = μ nI
2 0
12. Magnetic field due to a toroid. The magnitude of magnetic field due to a toroid is
μ 0 NI ⎡ N is the total number of turns, r is the average radius and
B= = μ0nI where ⎢
2 πr ⎢⎣ n is number of turns per unit length.
13. Force between two parallel currents carrying conductors. When two infinitely long parallel conductors carrying currents I1
and I2 are placed at a distance r apart, then force on per unit length of a conductor due to the other conductor is given by
μ 0 2 I 1I 2
F= .
4π r
μ 0 I 1I 2
Force on length L of a conductor due to the other conductor is, F = . .L
2π r
NOTE : The force is attractive, if the currents in two conductors are in the same direction; and repulsive, if the currents are in
opposite direction.
→
14. Torque on a current carrying coil placed inside a magnetic field. Torque on a coil placed in a magnetic field B is
→ → →
τ = M × B
→
⇒ τ = MB sin θ where [θ is the angle between M and B and magnetic moment M is given by M = nIA]
Thus, Torqe, τ = nIAB sin θ
15. Potential energy of a current loop in a magnetic field. When a current loop of magnetic moment M = nIA is held in a uniform
magnetic field B in such a way that the direction of magnetic moment makes an angle θ with the direction of magnetic field,
then potential energy of the dipole is given by
→ →
U = – M. B ⇒ U = – MB cos θ
(i) When θ = 0°, U = – MB is minimum (ii) When θ = 180°, U = MB is maximum
16. Magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron. An electron moving around the central nucleus has a magnetic moment μl
given by
e ⎡ L is the magnitude of the angular momentum of
μl = L where ⎢
2m ⎢ the circulating electron about the central nucleus.
⎣
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 79

17. Moving coil galvanometer. A moving coil galvanometer is used to detect and measure small electric currents. It is based on
the principle that “when a current carrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field, the coil experiences a torque.”
At equilibrium, restoring torque = deflecting torque
∴ k φ = nIAB
⎛ n AB ⎞
⇒ nφ= ⎜ ⎟I ⇒ φ ∝ I n where [φ
φ is the deflection indicated on the scale of galvanometer.]
⎝ k ⎠
18. Sensitivity of a galvanometer. A galvanometer is said to be sensitive, if it gives a large deflection, even when a small current
passes through it or when a small voltage is applied across its coil.
φ n AB
(i) Current sensitivity, = …(rod μA–1)
I k
φ n AB
(ii) Voltage sensitivity, = …(rod μV–1)
V kR
19. Conversion of a galvanometer into a voltmeter. A galvanometer of a coil resistance G, showing full scale deflection of a current
Ig can be converted into a voltmeter for measuring potential difference V by connecting a large resistance R in series to its coil,
given by
V
R= –G
Ig
20. Conversion of a galvanometer into an ammeter. A galvanometer of resistance G can be converted into an ammeter of range
I by putting a small resistance S in parallel to its coil, which is given by
Ig G
S=
I − Ig

UNITS USED

Physical quantity

a
Symbol
s Units Dimensions

iv D
→
Magnetic field B T (Tesla) G (gauss) [MT–2A–1]

Sh
Permeability of free space μ0 TmA–1 [MLT–2A–2]
→
Magnetic moment m Am2 or J/T [L2A]
Torsion constant k Nm rod [ML2T–2]
 80 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

6. A beam of electrons
Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) projected along +[-axis,
X

(1 Mark) experiences a force due to a

magnetic field along the e
Z
1. What is the direction of the force acting on a +\-axis. What is the
→ direction of the magnetic
charged particle T, moving with a velocity ν in Y
→
field? (All India)
a uniform magnetic field B ? (Delhi) → → →
Ans. Direction of the magnetic field is F = T ( Y × B )
Ans. The direction of the force acting on a charged
→
particle T, moving with a velocity ν in a uniform towards positive direction of ]-axis.
→ 7. A beam of protons
magnetic field B is perpendicular to the plane of [
→
projected along +[-axis,
→
the vectors ν and B . experiences a force due to a
magnetic field along the Proton
→ →
→
Also, F = T ( ν × B ) …(L) – \-axis. What is the ]
→ → direction of the magnetic
So, force is perpendicular to both ν and B .
field? (All India) \
From equation (L), we can also say that the force
Ans. The direction of the magnetic field is towards
→ → →
F acts in the direction of the vector ν × B . positive direction of ]D[LV
2. Why should the spring/suspension wire in a
moving coil galvanometer have low torsional 8. Depict the trajectory of a charged particle moving
constant? (All India) →
Ans. Low torsional constant is basically required to

a s with velocity Y as it enters a uniform magnetic

iv D
field perpendicular to the direction of its motion.
increase the current/charge sensitivity in a mov-
(Comptt. All India)
ing coil ballistic galvanometer.

Sh
Ans. x x x x x x

x x x x x x
3. Magnetic field lines can be entirely confined +ve Charge –ve Charge
within the core of a toroid, but not within a x x x x x x
straight solenoid. Why? (Delhi) x x x x x x
Ans. At the edges of the solenoid, the field lines get
The force acting on the charge particle will be per-
diverged due to other fields and/or non-
availability of dipole loops, while in toroids the → →
pendicular to both Y and B and therefore will de-
dipoles (in loops) orient continuously. scribe a circular path.
4. An electron does not suffer any deflection while 9. Write the expression in vector form, for the mag-
passing through a region of uniform magnetic →
field. What is the direction of the magnetic netic force F acting on a charged particle mov-
field? (All India) →
→ → → →
ing with velocity V in the presence of a mag-
Ans. I = T ( Y × B ) = 0 Since Y || B →
netic field B . (Comptt. All India)
∴ Magnetic field will be in the line of the
velocity of electron. →
Ans. Magnetic force, F = T V × B ( → →
)
→
⇒ F = TVB sin θ
5. A beam of α particles [
projected along +[-axis,
experiences a force due to a ↑ 10. An ammeter of resistance 0.6 Ω can measure
magnetic field along the • α particle
] current upto 1.0 A. Calculate (L) The shunt
+\-axis. What is the direction
of the magnetic field? resistance required to enable the ammeter to
(All India) \ measure current upto 5.0 A (LL) The combined
→ → → resistance of the ammeter and the shunt. (Delhi)
Ans. F = T ( Y × B ) R ALJ 0.6 × 1
Direction of the magnetic field is towards Ans. (L) Shunt Resistance, S = = = 0.15 Ω
L−L 4
negative direction of z-axis.  J
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 81

1 1 1 25 Ans. Kinetic energy will NOT be affected.

(LL) Total Resistance, = + = →
R total 0.6 0.15 3 →
*(When Y is perpendicular to B , then magnetic
3 field provides necessary centripetal force)
Rtotal = Ω = 0.12 Ω
25

16. Write the underlying principle of a moving coil

11. Write the expression, in a vector form, for the galvanometer. (Delhi)
→ Ans. Principle of a galvanometer : “A current carrying
Lorentz magnetic force F due to a charge moving
coil, in the presence of magnetic field, experiences
→ →
with velocity V in a magnetic field B . What is a torque which produces proportionate
the direction of the magnetic force? (Delhi) deflection”.
RU deflection (θ) ∝ τ (Torque)
→ → → 17. A coil, of area A, carrying a steady current I, has
Ans. F = T( V × B ) …[T is the magnitude of the moving charges)
→
This force is normal to both the directions of a magnetic moment, P , associated with it. Write
→ → →
velocity V and magnetic field B . the relation between P , I and A in vector form.
12. Using the concept of force between two (Comptt. Delhi)
infinitely long parallel current carrying → →
conductors, define one ampere of current. Ans. Relation for magnetic moment = P = I A
(All India)
μ 0 I1I 2
Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I)
Ans. F= (2 Marks)
2 π U
“One ampere of current is the value of steady

a s
iv D
current, which when maintained in each of the 18. Using Ampere’s circuital law, obtain an expression
two very long, straight, parallel conductors of for the magnetic field along the axis of a current

Sh
negligible cross-section; and placed one metre carrying solenoid of length O and having N number
apart in vacuum, would produce on each of these of turns. (All India)
conductors a force of equal to 2 × 10–7 newtons Ans. Magnetic field due to Solenoid
per metre (Nm–1) of length. ” Let length of solenoid = L
13. Write the condition under which an electron will Total number of turns in solenoid = N
move undeflected in the presence of crossed N
No. of turns per unit length = =Q
electric and magnetic fields.(Comptt. All India) L
E ABCD is an Ampere’s loop
Ans. V= AB, DC are very large
B
and electric and magnetic fields are mutually →
BC is in a region of B = 0
perpendicular.
AD is a long axis
Length of AD = [
Current in one turn = I0
14. Why do the electrostatic field lines not form B C
closed loops? (All India)
Ans. Electric field lines do not form closed loops →
because the direction of an electric field is from G O
θ = 90°
positive to negative charge. So one can regard a → →
B B θ = 90°
line of force starting from a positive charge and →
ending on a negative charge. This indicates that G O D
→ →
electric field lines do not form closed loops. N → A B θ = 0° S Axis
B G O
15. A particle of mass ‘P’ and charge ‘T’ moving [
with velocity ‘Y’ enters the region of uniform
magnetic field at right angle to the direction of
its motion. How does its kinetic energy get $SSO\LQJ$PSHUH·VFLUFXLWDOORRS³
affected? (Comptt. Delhi) → →
∫

B . G O = μ0 I
 82 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

L.H.S. Z
B→ C→ D→ A→ I
→ → → → →
←
= ∫ B. GO + ∫ B. GO + ∫ B. GO + ∫ B. GO G O O U P
Y
A B C D
→
X (Delhi)
A→ → Ans. %LRW6DYDUW ODZ DQG LWV DSSOLFDWLRQV 
= 0 + 0 + 0 + ∫ B. GO Biot-Savart law states that ´WKH PDJQLWXGH RI WKH
D PDJQHWLFILHOGG%DWDQ\SRLQWGXHWRDVPDOOFXUUHQW
→ HOHPHQW GO LV JLYHQ E\
( Qθ = 90°) ( Q B = 0) ( Q θ = 90°) ( Q θ = 0°)
μ0 sin θ
A A GB = IGO 2 .”
→ → 4 π U Current element
= ∫ B . G O = B ∫ GO cos θ …[ Qcos θ = 1 …where ⎡I is the magnitude Y
D D ⎢of current; GO is the
of element; θ
⎢length
is the angle θ
A
⎢between the length IGO
= B ∫ GO = B[O] [
0
= B[ ⎢of element and the
⎢line joining the
U
P GB
D
No. of turns in [ length = Q[
⎢element to the point
⎢of observation; U is

⎯⎯→
Current in turns Q[, I = Q[ I0 ⎢the distance of the I
$FFRUGLQJWR$PSHUH·VFLUFXLWDOODZ ⎢point from the
B[ = μ0 I ⇒ B[ = μ0 Q[I0 ∴ B = μ0 QI0 ⎣element.
X
In vector form,
→ →
→ μ (G O × U )
GB = 0 I
19. A charge ‘T’ moving B
Z-axis

a s  4 π U3

iv D
along the X-axis with a Its S.I. unit is tesla. Its direction is perpendicular
→ → →
velocity Y is subje- O to the plane in which G O and U lie

Sh
Y
cted to a uniform →
→T Since, GB ∝ I( G O × U )
→
magnetic field B
acting along the Z-axis X GB is the direction given by (GO Nˆ × U ˆM )
as it crosses the origin O. (Delhi)
(L) Trace its trajectory. LH, –GOU L̂ is along the negative [-axis.
(LL) Does the charge gain kinetic energy as it
enters the magnetic field? Justify your
21. (D) In what respect is a toroid different from a
answer. solenoid? Draw and compare the pattern of
Ans. (L) Z-axis the magnetic field lines in the two cases.
B
↑ (E) How is the magnetic field inside a given
solenoid made strong? (All India)
O
Ans. (D) 6ROHQRLGconsists of a long wire wound in the
→ Y form of a helix where the neighbouring turns
helical are closely spaced, whereas, the WRURLG is a
T
hollow circular ring on which a large number
of turns of a wire is closely wound.
(LL) K.E does not change irrespective of the (E) Magnetic field inside a given solenoid is made
direction of the charge as strong by putting a soft iron core inside it. It is
→ → → → → strengthened by increasing the amount of
Power delivered, F . Y = T( Y × B). Y = 0
current through it.
→ → →
[ Q scalar triple product ( Y × B ). Y = 0 ] •Q B
20. State Biot-Savart law.
Q
A current I flows in a conductor placed P•
perpendicular to the plane of the paper. Indicate •P I
the direction of the magnetic field due to a small
→ →
element G O at point P situated at a distance U
from the element as shown in the figure. D 6ROHQRLG                E 7RURLG
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 83

22. Write the expression for Lorentz magnetic force B2

on a particle of charge ‘T’ moving with velocity tan θ = tan θ = 1 ∴ θ = 45°
B1
→ →
Y in a magnetic field B . Show that no work is The net magnetic field is directed at an angle of
done by this force on the charged particle. 45° with either of the fields.
(All India) 26. Two identical circular loops, P and Q, each of
Ans. Expression for Lorentz magnetic force on a radius U and carrying current I and 2I
→ respectively are lying in parallel planes such
particle of charge ‘T’ moving with velocity Y in a that they have a common axis. The direction of
→ → → → → current in both the loops is clockwise as seen
magnetic field B is F = T ( E + Y × B ) from O which is equidistant from both the
:RUN GRQH E\ D PDJQHWLF IRUFH RQ D FKDUJHG loops. Find the magnitude of the net magnetic
SDUWLFOH  field at point O. (Delhi)
→ → → → 2U
The magnetic force F = T ( E + Y × B ) always acts
→ •
perpendicular to the velocity Y on the direction P O
of motion of charge T. Q
I 2I
→ → → → →
F . Y = T ( Y × B ). Y = 0 Ans. When the currents are in the same direction, the
23. A steady current (I1) flows through a long
resultant field at point O is,
straight wire. Another wire carrying steady
current (I2) in the same direction is kept close μ 0 NID 2 μ 0 N2ID 2
B = B1 + B2 = +
and parallel to the first wire. Show with the help 2( U 2
 + D 2 ) 3/2 2( U 2 + D 2 ) 3/2
of a diagram how the magnetic field due to the 3 μ 0 NID 2
current I1 exerts a magnetic force on the second = where [D is the radius of loop.]
2( U + D )
2 2 3/2
wire. Write the expression for this force.

a s
27. Two identical circular loops, P and Q, each of

iv D
(All India) radius U and carrying equal currents are kept in
Ans. Refer to Q. 47, Page 87 the parallel planes having a common axis

Sh
24. Using Ampere’s circuital law, obtain the passing through O. The direction of current in P
expression for the magnetic field due to a long is clockwise and in Q is anti-clockwise as seen
solenoid at a point inside the solenoid on its from O which is equidistant from the loops P
axis. (All India) and Q. Find the magnitude of the net magnetic
Ans. Refer to Q. 18, Page 81 field at O. (Delhi)
2U

25. Two identical circular wires P Q

and Q each of radius R and O
I Q
carrying current ‘I’ are kept in P P
perpendicular planes such that I I I
they have a common centre as → μ 0U 2I μ 0 IU 2
Ans. BP = =
2( U + U ) 2 × 2 3/2 U 3
shown in the figure. Find the 2 2 3/2

magnitude and direction of the net magnetic

μ 0I →
field at the common centre of the two coils. = = B Q pointing towards P
(Delhi) 4 2 U
Ans. Magnetic field produced by the two coils at their
2U
common centre are: B2 B
μ 0 NI O
B1 = →
2R P →
μ 0 NI BS B Q X-axis
and B2 = I
I 2I
2R θ
The resultant field at the B1 μ 0I μ 0I
|B| = BP + BPQ = 2 =
common centre is: I 4 2 U 2 2U
B= B12 + B 2 2 So, the net magnetic field, at point O, has
μ 0I
2 μ 0 NI μ 0 NI × 2 2 μ NI magnitude and is directed towards the
= = = 0 2 2 U
2R 2 2R 2R coil P.
 84 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

28. A circular coil of closely wound N turns and 32. A particle of mass 5 × 10–3 kg and charge 4 μC
radius U carries a current I. Write the expressions enters into a uniform electric field of
for the following : 2 × 105 NC–1, moving with a velocity of 30 ms–1
(L) the magnetic field at its centre in a direction opposite to that of the field. Cal-
(LL) the magnetic moment of this coil (All India) culate the distance it would travel before com-
Ans. (L) The magnetic field at the centre of a circular ing to rest. (Comptt. Delhi)
coil of N turns and radius U carrying a Ans. Force applied on the charged particle,
μ 0 NI I = TE = 4 × 10–6 × 2 × 105 = 0.8 N
current, I is B =
 2 U Acceleration exerted on the charged particle when
(LL) Magnetic moment, M = NIA = NIπU2 it enters in electric field,
29. A proton and a deuteron, each moving with ve- I
→ 0.8 800
locity Y enter simultaneously in the region of D= = = = 160 m/sec2 …(L)
P 5 × 10 −3 5
→ 
magnetic field B acting normal to the direction Distance travelled by charged particle before com-
of velocity. Trace their trajectories establishing the ing to rest will be
relationship between the two. (Comptt. Delhi) Y2 = X2 – 2DS or 2DS = X2 – Y2
Ans. …where [Y = 0, X = 30 m/sec2, D = 160 m/sec2
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X2 − Y 2
∴ 'LVWDQFH S =
X X X X X X X X  2 D
X Proton
X X X X X X X ( 30)2 − (0)2 30 × 30 45
= = = = 2.81 m
X X Deutron
X X X X X X 2 × 160 320 16
X X X X X X X X

30. A particle of mass 10–3 kg and charge 5 μC enters 33. An ammeter of resistance 0.80 Ω can measure
into a uniform electric field of 2 × 105 NC–1, mov-
ing with a velocity of 20 ms–1 in a direction oppo-
a s current upto 1.0 A.

iv D
(L) What must be the value of shunt resistance
site to that of the field. Calculate the distance it to enable the ammeter to measure current

Sh
would travel before coming to rest. upto 5.0A?
(Comptt. Delhi) (LL) What is the combined resistance of the
Ans. F = TE, ⇒ PD = TE ammeter and the shunt? (Delhi)
−6 5
TE 5 × 10 × 2 × 10 Ans. (L) Rg = 0.80 Ω, LJ = 1.0 A, L = 5A
∴ D= = −3
= 103 ms–2
P 10
 ⎛ LJ ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞
AsY2 = X2 – 2DSY= 0, when particle comes at rest Shunt, S = ⎜ ⎟ R J = ⎜⎝ ⎟ 0.80
⎝ L − L J⎠ 5 − 1⎠
2 
X 20 × 20 400 −3
∴ Distance, S = = = × 10 = 0.2 m 1
2D 2 × 10
3 2 = × 0.80 = 0.20 Ω

4
∴ S = 20 cm
(LL) Combined resistance of ammeter and shunt,
31. A particle of mass 2 × 10–3 kg and charge 2 μC
enters into a uniform electric field of 1 1 1 1 1
= + = +
5 × 105 NC–1, moving with a velocity of 10 ms–1 R combined R J S 0.80 0.20

in a direction opposite to that of the field.
1+ 4 5 50
Calculate the distance it would travel before = = =
0.80 0.80 8
coming to rest. (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. Force applied on the charged particle, I = TE 8
∴ Rcombined = = 0.16 Ω
= 2 × 10–6 × 5 × 105 = 1N 50
Acceleration exerted on the charged particle will
be,
I 1N 34. (D) How is a toroid different from a solenoid?
D= = = 500 m/sec2 (E) Use Ampere's circuital law to obtain the
P 2 × 10 −3
Distance travelled by charged particle before magnetic field inside a toroid.
coming to rest will be, (F) Show that in an ideal toroid, the magnetic
Y2 = X2 – 2DS field (L) inside the toroid and (LL) outside the
…where [Y = 0, X = 10 m/sec2, D = 500 m/sec2
toroid at any point in the open space is zero.
2 2 2 (Comptt. All India)
⇒ Distance, S = X − Y ∴S = X = 10 × 10 = 0.1 m
 2 D 2 D 2 × 500
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 85

Ans. (D) A toroid is essentially a solenoid which has Ans. (L) •Q

been bent into a circular shape to close on
itself.
P•
(E) Refer to Q. 104 (E), Page 105
(F) For the loop 1, $PSHUH
V FLUFXLWDO ODZ gives,
B1 . 2πU1 = μ0(0)     LH B1 = 0
Thus the magnetic field, in the open space
inside the toroid is zero.
6ROHQRLG
Q U3
(LL) Expression for magnetic field : Refer to
S• Q. 18, Page 81
3 38. A rectangular coil of sides ‘O’ and ‘E’ carrying a
2
1 P current I is subjected to a uniform magnetic field
O
U1 →
B acting perpendicular to its plane. Obtain the
U2
expression for the torque acting on it.
(Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. Refer to Q. 103, Page 104
39. (L) State Biot - Savart law in vector form
Also at point Q, we have
expressing the magnetic field due to an
B3 (2πU3) = μ0 (Ienclosed) →
But from the sectional cut, we refer to that element GO carrying current I at a distance
the current coming out of the plane of the →
paper is cancelled exactly by the current U from the element.
going into it (LL) Write the expression for the magnitude of the
Hence IHnclosed = 0 ∴ B3 = 0

a s magnetic field at the centre of a circular loop

iv D
35. Derive an expression for the magnetic moment of radius U carrying a steady current I. Draw
→ the field lines due to the current loop.

Sh
( μ ) of an electron revolving around the nucleus (Comptt. All India)
→
in terms of its angular momentum (O ). What is Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 96, Page 101
the direction of the magnetic moment of the
μ 0I Field lines
electron with respect to its angular momentum?
(LL) B =
(Comptt. All India) 2U
Hν HνU
Ans. We have, μ = LA = × πU2 =
2 πU  2
Since O = PνU
→
O → HO
or νU = ∴ μ =– 40. A square loop 2A
P 2P
[ Qelectron has a negative charge of side 20 cm
→ 10 cm
→ carrying current 1A
The direction of μ is opposite to that of O , of 1A is kept 30 cm
because of the negative charge of the electron. near an infinite
20 cm
36. State the underlying principle of a cyclotron. long straight
Write briefly how this machine is used to wire carrying a
accelerate charged particles to high energies. current of 2A in 20 cm
(Delhi) the same plane
Ans. Refer to Q. 91, Page 100 as shown in the figure.
37. Draw the magnetic field lines due to a current Calculate the magnitude and direction of the net
passing through a long solenoid. Use Ampere's force exerted on the loop due to the current
circuital law, to obtain the expression for the carrying conductor. (Comptt. All India)
magnetic field due to the current I in a long Ans. Given : O = 20 cm = (20 × 10–2) m
solenoid having Q number of turns per unit I1 = 1 A, U1 = 10 cm = 10 × 10–2 m
length. (Comptt. Delhi)
I2 = 2 A, U2 = 30 cm = 30 × 10–2 m
 86 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

⎛1 1⎞ →
F = μ 0I 1 I 2 O ⎜ − ⎟ Force due to electric field = T E
⎝ U1 U2 ⎠

= (2 × 10–7) × (1) × (2) × (20 × 10–2) → →
Force due to electric field = T( Y × B )
⎡ 1 1 ⎤ → →
⎢⎣ 10 × 10 −2 − 30 × 10 −2 ⎥⎦
The required condition is T( Y × B )
= 5.3 × 10–7 N → → → E
The direction of force is towards the infinitely ⇒ T E = – T( Y × B )  ⇒ Y 
B
long straight wire. 43. A charge T of mass P is moving with a velocity
41. A square shaped plane coil of area 100 cm2 of of Y, at right angles to a uniform magnetic field
200 turns carries a steady current of 5A. It is B. Deduce the expression for the radius of the
placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T circular path it describes. (Comptt. Delhi)
acting perpendicular to the plane of the coil. Ans. Force experienced by charged particle in
Calculate the torque on the coil when its plane magnetic field
makes an angle of 60° with the direction of the → → →
field. In which orientation will the coil be in F   T( Y × B )
stable equilibrium? (Comptt. All India) As Y and B are perpendicular, F = TYB
Ans. Given : A = 100 cm2 = 100 × (10–4) m2 = 10–2 m This force is perpendicular to the direction of
N= 200 turns, I = 5A, B = 0.2 T velocity and hence acts as
θ = 90° – 60° = 30°
⎛ PY 2 ⎞
τ = NIAB sin θ centripetal force ⎜
U ⎟⎠
= (200) × (5) × (10–2) × (0.2) × ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟
1 ⎝
2 ⎝ ⎠ PY 2
= TYB
⎡ 1⎤  U
⎢⎣sin 30° = 2 ⎥⎦

a s On solving, U = ⎜
TB ⎟⎠
⎛ PY ⎞

iv D
= 1 Nm
⎝
The coil will be in stable equilibrium when it is 44. A proton and an alpha particle having the same

Sh
parallel to the magnetic field. kinetic energy are, in turn, passed through a
region of uniform magnetic field, acting normal
to the plane of the paper and travel in circular
42. Find the condition under which the charged paths. Deduce the ratio of the radii of the
particles moving with different speeds in the circular paths described by them.
presence of electric and magnetic field vectors (Comptt. Delhi)
can be used to select charged particles of a
Ans. Given : ES = E = E
particular speed. (All India)
PY 2
→ We know, = TYB
Ans. &RQGLWLRQ  The velocity Y of the charged  U
2PE 1
→ → or U= Q E= PY2
particles, and the E and B vectors, should be  TB 2
mutually perpendicular. 2PS E 2Pα E ⎡Q Pα = 4 PS
→ → US = and Uα = ⎢
TS B  Tα B Tα = 2 TS
It means that the forces on T, due to E and B  ⎢⎣
must be oppositely directed. US 2PS E Tα B PS Tα
= × = ×
y Uα TS B 2Pα E Pα TS
 
PS 2 TS 1
= × = ×2=1
4 PS TS 2
E 
US : UD :: 1 : 1
FE

x Short Answer Type Questions-II (SA-II)

v
(3 Marks)
B
FB
45. A circular coil of 200 turns and radius 10 cm is
z
placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T,
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 87

normal to the plane of the coil. If the current in Let G be the distance of separation between these
the coil is 3.0 A, calculate the two conductors. Wire 1 Wire 2
(D) total torque on the coil. μ 0 I1
(E) total force on the coil. B1 =
(F) average force on each electron in the coil, 2 πG
F2 = I2 × O2 × B1 sin θ
due to the magnetic field. → →
{sin θ = 1} F2 I
Assume the area of cross-section of the wire I1 F1
2
to be 10–5 m2 and the free electron density is μ 0 × I1 x B
⇒ F2 = I2 × O2 × • B2 1
1029/m3. (All India)  2 πG G
→ →
Ans. (D) As B is || to the dipole moment ( M ) Force per unit length,
μ 0 I1I 2 μ I
∴ τ = BM sin 0° = 0 F= , B2 = 0 2
(E) As the forces on different parts of the coil  2 πG 2 πG
F1 = I1 × O1 × B2 sin θ {sin θ = 1}
appear in pairs, equal in magnitude and
opposite in direction, net force on the coil is μ 0 I1I 2O1
⇒ F1 =
zero LH F = 0  2 πG
(F) F = BHYG { Q I = QHAYG} μ 0 I1I 2
Q Force per unit length, F =
I BI 0.5 × 3  2 πG
= Be = = 29 × 10 −5
QH
 A Q A 10 Hence, force is attractive in nature.
∴ F = 1.5 × 10–24 N $PSHUH  Ampere is
46. An electron moves around the nucleus in a that current which is if
hydrogen atom of radius 0.51 Å, with a velocity
maintained in two
of 2 × 105 m/s. Calculate the following : I = 1A I2 = 1A
infinitely long parallel 1
(L) the equivalent current due to orbital motion
conductors of negligible
of electron
cross-sectional area
(LL) the magnetic field produced at the centre of

a sseparated by 1 metre in
G = 1m
Vaccum
μG = 1

iv D
the nucleus
vacuum causes a force
(LLL) the magnetic moment associated with the
of 2 × 10–7 N on each

Sh
electron. (All India)
metre of the other wire.
Ans. *LYHQ  U = 0.51 × 10–10 m,   Y = 2 × 105 m/s
Then current flowing is 1A
H eY
(L) Equivalent current, I = = μ0 × 1 × 1
T 2πU F=
2π × 1
1.6 × 10 −19 × 2 × 10 5
∴ I= μ0
2 π × ( 0.51 × 10 −10 ) ∴ F= = 2 × 10–7 N
2π
3.2 × 10 −14 32 × 10–4
= = 48. Explain the principle and working of a cyclotron
6.28 × 0.51 × 10 −10 3.2028
= 9.99 × 10–5 A with the help of a schematic diagram. Write the
μ 0 I μ 0eY expression for cyclotron frequency. (Delhi)
(LL) Magnetic field, B = = Ans. &\FORWURQ  Refer to Q. 91, Page 100
 2U 4 πU 2
10 −7 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 2 × 10 5 49. Find the magnetic field at a point on the axis of
= −
= 1.23 T a circular coil carrying current and hence find
(0.51 × 10 )210
(LLL) Magnetic moment, M = IA = I × πU2 the magnetic field at the centre of the circular
eY eYU coil carrying current.
M = × πU2 =
2πU  2 Ans. 0DJQHWLFILHOGDWDSRLQWRQWKHD[LVRIDFLUFXODU
1.6 × 10 −19 × 2 × 10 5 × ( 0.51 × 10 −10 ) FRLO FDUU\LQJ FXUUHQW
=
2 Consider a circular coil of radius ‘D’ with centre
1.632 × 10 −24 ‘O’, carrying current I. Its plane is perpendicular
= = 0.816 × 10–24
2 to the plane of the loop. Suppose P is any point
= 8.16 × 10–25 Am2
on the axis of the circular coil at a distance [
from the centre, such that
47. Derive the expression for force per unit length OP = [
between two long straight parallel current carrying
Consider two small elements of length GO at C
conductors. Hence define RQH ampere. (Delhi)
and D at diametrically opposite current elements
Ans. Consider two infinitely long parallel conductors
of the coil
carrying current I1 and I2 in the same direction.
PC = PD = U = a 2 + x 2
88 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

dl 6SHFLDO FDVHV
C
Y (L) When the point P lies at the centre of the
a r
I φ coil, then [ = 0
d B sin φ
φ
O
x
X μ 0 Q ID 2 μ0 Q I
P
φ d B’ sin φ B= 3
=
d B’ cos φ d B’ Q’  2 D  2 D
Y′ (LL) When the point P lies far away from the
D
dl centre of the coil
According to %LRW6DYDUW
VODZthe magnitude of then [ >> D
magnetic field at P due to current element GO at ⇒ D2 + [ 2 = [ 2
C is …[ Q D2 is very small and can be neglected]
μ 0 Idl sin θ μ 0 Q ID 2
GB = B=
4π r2 3
 2 [
→ →
Q dl and r are perpendicular μ 2 nπ a 2 I
B= 0 …[ Q πD2 = A, area of loop
∴ θ = 90° 4π x3
μ 0 IGO sin 90° μ 2QIA μ 2M
GB = ∴ B= 0 ⇒B= 0
4 π  U 2 4 π  [ 3 4 π [ 3
where [M = QIA = magnetic dipole moment of current
μ Idl μ Idl
∴ GB = 0 2 = 0 …(L) loop. The SI unit of M is AP2.
4π r 4 π (a 2 + x 2 )
→ →
The direction of d B is perpendicular to r in the
50. Deduce the expression for the magnetic dipole
plane paper LH along PQ.
moment of an electron orbiting around the
Similarly, the magnitude of magnetic field at P
central nucleus. (All India)
due to current element dO at D is
μ0 IGO

a s Ans. Consider an electron

revolving around the nucleus

iv D
GB′ = …(LL) H–
4 π ( D + [ 2 )
2
of an atom. Electron is in U

Sh
Its direction is along PQ′ uniform circular motion
Ze
μ0 IGO around the nucleus of charge
From (L) and (LL), we get, GB = GB′ =
4 π ( D 2 + [ 2 ) + Ze. This constitutes a
Let ∠CPO = ∠DPO = φ current.
→ → I=
H
…(L)
Resolving G B and G B ′ into rectangular T

components : If ‘U’ is orbital radius of the electron and ‘Y’ is
(L) GB cos φ along PY and GB′ sin φ along PX orbital speed, then the time period is
(LL) GB cos φ along PY and GB′ sin φ along PX 2πU
T= …(LL)
Since the components of the magnetic field along  Y
Now putting the value of T in (L), we get
Y-axis are equal and opposite and cancel each
other, the components along X-axis are in the HY
I= …(LLL)
same direction and are added up. 2πU
Hence the total magnetic field at point P is, As magnetic moment is μO = I πU2
⎛ HY ⎞ HYU
We have μO = ⎜ ⎟ πU2 =
B= ∫ dBsin φ ⎝ 2πU ⎠
  2
μ IGO sin φ Multiplying and dividing by ‘P’, we get
⇒ B= ∫ 4π0
(D + [ ) 2 2
μO =
HYPU
=
H
O
μ0 I  2P 2P
⇒ B=
4 π ( D 2 + [ 2 )
sin φ ∫ dl …where [O is angular momentum of the electron.

D According to Bohr hypothesis angular

Since sin φ = and ∫ dl = 2πD momentum we can have discrete values only.
2 2
 D + [ QK HQK QHK
μ I D ∴ O= ∴ μO = =
∴ B= 0 · 2 · 2πD 2π 2 π( 2 P ) 4ππP
4 π ( D + [ 2 ) 2 2 51. A long straight wire of a circular cross-section of
 D + [
If there are Q turns in the coil, radius ‘D’ carries a steady current ‘I’. The current
μ 0 n Ia 2
is uniformly distributed across the cross-section.
then B = 3 Apply Ampere’s circuital law to calculate the
2(a 2 + x 2 ) 2
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 89

magnetic field at a point ‘U’ in the region for to the following two reasons:
(L) U < D and (LL) U > D. (Delhi) (D) Galvanometer is a very sensitive device.
→ It gives a full scale deflection for a small
Ans. Consider an infinite long G O→
thick wire of radius ‘D’ B
value of current.
a
with axis XY. Let I be the O I S (E) The galvanometer has to be connected in
→
current flowing through G O → series for measuring currents and as it
the wire. B has a large resistance, this will change the
U P U P value of the current in the circuit.
:KHQ WKH SRLQW 3 OLHV
α NBA
RXWVLGH WKH ZLUH  (LLL) Current sensitivity, Is = = .
I K
Let U be the perpen- It depends on the number of turns N of the coil,
dicular distance of point torsion constant and the area A of the coil.
P from the axis of the cylinder, where U > D. 53. Write the expression for the A I1 B
→ → →
Here B and GO are acting in the same direction. magnetic moment (M) due O
Applying $PSHUH·V FLUFXLWDO ODZ we have to a planar square loop of
→ side ‘O’ carrying a steady I
→ O

∫ ∫ B GO cos θ = μ0I

B .G O = μ0I ⇒ current I in a vector form.

2πU In the given figure this loop is placed in a
⇒ B ∫ GO = μ0I …[ Q cos 0 = 1 horizontal plane near a long straight conductor
carrying a steady current I1 at a distance O as shown.
 0
μ 0I 1 Give reasons to explain that the loop will
⇒ B.2πU = μ0I ⇒ B= ∴ B ∝ experience a net force but no torque. Write the
2 πU U
:KHQ WKH SRLQW 3 OLHV LQVLGH WKH ZLUH  expression for this force acting on the loop. (Delhi)
Here U ≤ D. We have two possibilities: Ans. A I1 B

s
According to $PSHUH FLUFXLWDO ODZ (L) The magnetic moment

a →
O F1
(L) ´:KHQHYHU WKH FXUUHQW IORZV RQO\ WKURXJK WKH

D ( M) due to a planar C E

v
VXUIDFHRIWKHZLUH% DVFXUUHQWLQWKHFORVHG I
SDWK ZLOO EH ]HURµ
(LL) ´:KHUHYHULQWKHFDVHZKHQFXUUHQWLVXQLIRUPO\
S h
GLVWULEXWHGWKURXJKWKHFURVVVHFWLRQRIFRQGXFWRU
i square loop of
carrying a
current I in a
form is
side ‘O’
steady
vector
O

D
F2
F

FXUUHQW WKURXJK WKH FORVHG SDWK ZLOO EH  → →

→
I′ = Current per unit area of the wire M = I A = , O2 …where [A = O2
× area of the circle of radius U (LL) CE will be attracted towards AB with a force
I IU 2 F1 given by
= × πU2 = 2 μ0 2 I I1
πD
2
D F1 = × × (length CE)
Applying $PSHUH·V FLUFXLWDO ODZ 4 π O
→ → μ 2 I I1 μ
= 0 × × O = 0 .2I I1
∫
= B. GO = μI′ 4 π O 4π

IU 2 DF will experience repulsion force away
⇒ B × 2πU = μUμ0 × 2 from AB, with a force F2, given by
D
μ U μ 0 IU μ0 2 I I1
⇒ B= ∴ B ∝ U F2 = × × (length DF)
 2 π D
2
4 π 2O
52. State the underlying principle of working of a μ 2I I μ
= 0 1 × O = 0 .I I1
moving coil galvanometer. Write WZR reasons 4 π × 2 O 4π
why a galvanometer can not be used as such to The forces on the portions CD and EF will
measure current in a given circuit. Name any cancel out each other’s effect
WZR factors on which the current sensitivity of a ∴ The net force on loop is
galvanometer depends. (Delhi) μ0 μ
Ans. (L) Moving coil galvanometer works on the F = F1 – F2 = 2I I1 – 0 I I1
4π 4π
principle of a torque experienced by a
μ0
current carrying coil placed in a magnetic = I I1 towards AB
field, whose magnitude is a function of 4π
current passing through the coil. As F1 ≠ F2 Hence no torque acts on loop.
(LL) The galvanometer cannot be used to measure 54. Write the expression for the magnetic moment
→
the value of the current in a given circuit due ( M) due to a planar square loop of side ‘O’
carrying a steady current I in a vector form.
 90 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

In the given figure this loop is placed in a Ans. (L) τ = IAB sin θ ⇒ τ = IAB sin 0 (as θ = 0)
horizontal plane near a long straight conductor μ0 2
τ = 2 × 4 × 10 × sin 0 = 0
carrying a steady current I1 at a distance O as 2 × π(1)
shown. Give reasons to A I1 B (LL) Force acting on the loop on |F|
explain that the loop will μ 0 I1I 2 ⎛ 1 1⎞
O = O⎜ − ⎟
experience a net force but 2 π ⎝ U1 U2 ⎠

no torque. Write the O
I ⎛ 1 1 ⎞
expression for this force = 2 × 10–7 × 5 × 2 × 10–1 ⎜ − ⎟N
⎝ 10 −2 5 × 10 −2 ⎠
acting on the loop. (Delhi) 20 × 10 −8 ⎛ 1⎞ ⎛ 4⎞
Ans. (L) The magnetic moment A = ⎜ 1 − ⎟ N = 20 × 10–6 ⎜ ⎟ N
I1 B 10 −2 ⎝ 5 ⎠ ⎝ 5⎠
→
( M) due to a planar = 16 × 10–6 N
O F1
C 'LUHFWLRQ  7RZDUGV FRQGXFWRU$WWUDFWLYH
square loop of side ‘O’ E
I Net force on the loop will act towards the
carrying a steady O
long conductor (attractive) if the current in
current I in a vector its closer side is in the same direction as the
D F
form is current in the long conductor, otherwise it
F2
→ → → will be repulsive.
M = I A = I O2 …where [A = O2 56. A rectangular loop of wire I = 4 A 2 cm
←⎯⎯⎯⎯ ⎯→
(LL) CE will be attracted towards AB with a force of size 2 cm × 5 cm carries a
F1 given by steady current of 1 A. A
μ0 2 I I1 straight long wire carrying 5 cm 1A
F1 = × × (length CE) 4 A current is kept near the
4 π O
loop as shown in the figure.
μ0 2 I I1 μ
= × × O = 0 .2I I1 If the loop and the wire are
4 π 4π

s
O coplanar, find 1 cm
DF will experience repulsion force away
from AB, with a force F2, given by

iv D a (L) the torque acting on the loop and

(LL) the magnitude and direction of the force on

Sh
μ0 2 I I1 the loop due to the current carrying wire.
F2 = × × (length DF)
4 π 2O (Delhi)
μ 2I I μ Ans. (L) τ (Torque on the loop) = MB sin θ
= 0 1 × O = 0 .I I1 → →
4 π × 2 O 4π
As M and B are parallel, hence τ = 0
The forces on the portions CD and EF will
(LL) Force acting on the loop, |F|
cancel out each other’s effect
μ 0 I1I 2 ⎛ 1 1⎞
∴ The net force on loop is = O⎜ − ⎟
2π ⎝ U1 U2 ⎠
μ0 μ 
F = F1 – F2 = 2I I1 – 0 I I1 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞
4π 4π = 2 × 10–7 × 4 × 1 × 5 × 10–2 ⎜ − ⎟
⎝ 10 −2 3 × 10 −2 ⎠
μ0
= I I1 towards AB 40 × 10 −9 ⎡ 1⎤ 2
⎢1 − 3 ⎥ N = 40 × 10 × 3 N
= –7
4π
10 −2 ⎣ ⎦
As F1 ≠ F2
80
Hence no torque acts on loop. = × 10–7 N = 26.66 × 10–7 T ≈ 2.67 μN
3
'LUHFWLRQ  7RZDUGV WKH FRQGXFWRU$WWUDFWLYH
Net force on the loop will act towards the
55. A rectangular loop of
long conductor (attractive) if the current in
wire of size 4 cm × 10 I = 5 A 4 cm
cm carries a steady its closer side is in the same direction as the
current of 2 A. A current in the long conductor, otherwise it
straight long wire 2A 10 cm 2A will be repulsive.
carrying 5 A current is 57. Two identical coils, each of radius ‘R’ and
kept near the loop as number of turns ‘N’ are lying in perpendicular
shown. If the loop and 1 cm
planes such that their centres coincide. Find the
the wire are coplanar, find magnitude and direction of the resultant
(L) the torque acting on the loop and magnetic field at the centre of the coils, if they are
(LL) the magnitude and direction of the force on carrying currents ‘I’ and 3 I respectively.
the loop due to the current carrying wire. (Comptt. Delhi)
(Delhi)
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 91

μ 0 2 πNI μ 0 NI current in the loop (LL) the force and (LLL) the power
Ans. B1 = = required to move the arm PQ. (Delhi)
4 πR 2R
Ans. Let the magnetic field acting on the loop be B and
μ 0 2 πNI 3 μ NI 3
B2 = = 0 length of the rod PQ be O
4 πR 2R
The induced e.m.f. ε = BOν
B1
B ε BOν
(L) Current in the loop, L = =
I 3 U U
BOν %2O 2 ν
(LL) Force F = LOB = × OB ⇒ F =
B2  U  U
(LLL) Power required to move the arm PQ : P = LU2
I %2O 2 ν
or εL =
 U
B
So, Resultant magnitude, 60. A rectangular conductor L M
μ NI μ NI LMNO is placed in a
B = B 12 + B 2 2 = 0 1+ 3 = 0 uniform magnetic field of
v
l
2R R
and Direction is FORFNZLVH. 0.5 T. The field is directed
58. Two identical coils, each of radius ‘R’ and perpendicular to the plane O N

number of turns ‘N’ are lying in perpendicular of the conductor. When the
planes such that their centres coincide. Find the arm MN of length of 20 cm is moved towards left
magnitude and direction of the resultant with a velocity of 10 ms–1, calculate the emf
magnetic field at the centre of the coils, if they are induced in the arm. Given the resistance of the
carrying currents ‘I’ and 2I respectively. arm to be 5Ω (assuming that other arms are of
(Comptt. Delhi) negligible resistance) find the value of the current
in the arm. (All India)
μ 0 2 πNI μ 0 NI

s
Ans. B1 = = Ans. B = 0.5 T ν = 10 ms–1

B2 =
4 πR
μ 0 2 πNI 2
2R
μ NI 2
= 0
i v D a O = 20 cm =
R=5Ω
20
100
= 20 × 10–2 m

h
4 πR 2R E=? I=?
B1
B
S E = BYO
E = 0.5 × 10 × 20 × 10–2 ⇒ E = 1 V
I=
E
R
1
= = 0.2 A
5
61. A wire AB is carrying a steady current of 12A
2I B2 and is lying on the table. Another wire CD
I carrying 5A is held directly above AB at a
height of 1 mm. Find the mass per unit length
of the wire CD so that it remains suspended at
∴ 0DJQLWXGH B its position when left free. Give the direction of
the current flowing in CD with respect to that
μ 0 NI μ NI 3 in AB. [Take the value of g = 10 ms–2]
= B 12 + B 2 2 = 1+ 2 = 0
4 πR 2R (All India)
and Direction is FORFNZLVH. Ans. Given :
Current in the wire AB(I1) = 12 A,
Current in wire CD (I2) = 5 A
59. Figure shows a
Separation between two wires (G) = 1 mm
rectangular loop
S = 10–3 m
conducting PQRS in ν P
which the arm PQ is Let ‘P’ be the mass of wire CD of length (L),
Q
free to move. A R P → →
hence =? Fmag = I( O × B )
uniform magnetic L
field acts in the Now the magnetic
direction perpendicular to the plane of the loop. Arm field due to wire
PQ is moved with a velocity ν towards the arm RS. (AB) on wire (CD) is
Assuming that the arms QR, RS and SP have → μ 0 2O1
negligible resistances and the moving arm PQ has B= ×
 4π G
the resistance U, obtain the expression for (L) the
 92 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Fweight = PJ 63. (D) Define the current sensitivity of a galva-

nometer.
To balance
(E) The coil area of a galvanometer is 16 × 10–4
→ → m2. It consists of 200 turns of a wire and is
Fweight = Fmag PJ = I2 ( L × B )
in a magnetic field of 0.2 T. The restoring
torque constant of the suspension fibre is
= = 10–6 Nm per degree. Assuming the magnetic
field to be radial, calculate the maximum
current that can be measured by the galva-
=
nometer if the scale can accommodate 30°
deflection. (Comptt. All India)
= Ans. (D) 6HQVLWLYLW\RIDJDOYDQRPHWHU A galvanom-
eter is said to be sensitive, if it gives a large
= 1.2 × 10–3 kg m–1
Direction of current in CD should be RSSRVLWH to deflection, even when a small current passes
that of AB. through it.
62. A wire AB is carrying a steady current of 10 A φ n AB
(L) Current sensitivity, = …(μA–1)
and is lying on the table. Another wire CD I k
φ Q AB
carrying 6 A is held directly above AB at a (LL) Voltage sensitivity, = …(μV–1)
V NR
height of 2 mm. Find the mass per unit length (E) A = 16 × 10–4 m2, N = 200 turns, B = 0.2 T,
of the wire CD so that it remains suspended at N = 10–6 Nm per degree
its position when left free. Give the direction of 30 × π π
the current flowing in CD with respect to that θ = 30° = = Rad
180 6
in AB. [Take the value of g = 10 ms–2] As NABI = Nθ
(All India)
π
Ans. Let AB has current in +ve [-direction ∴ 200 × (16 × 10–4) × (0.2) × I = 10–6 ×
(I1) Current in wire AB = 10 A,
(I2) Current in wire CD = 6 A
D a s ∴ I =
π × 10 −6
6

Separation between the two wires = 2 mm

= 2 × 10–3 m
To keep the wire CD suspended in its vertical
position when left free. For this magnetic force S h i v 6 × 200(16 × 10 −4 ) × (0.2)
= 8.17 × 10–6 A = 8.17 μA

64. (D) State Ampere’s circuital law, expressing it in

on CD due to AB should balance mg due to its
own weight. the integral form.
Let P be the mass of the wire CD and L be its (E) Two long coaxial insulated solenoids, S1
length and S2 of equal lengths are wound one over
→ →
the other as shown in the figure. A steady
Fmag = I ( O × B ) current “I” flows through the inner
→ solenoid S1 to the other end B, which is
( B ) magnetic field due to wire AB at CD is connected to the outer solenoid S2 through
μ0 2I AB which the same current “I” flows in the
=
4 π ( 2 × 10 −3 ) opposite direction so as to come out at end
μ0 2I AB A. If Q1 and Q2 are the number of turns per
Fmag on CD = ×6×L
4 π ( 2 × 10 −3 ) unit length, find the magnitude and
direction of the net magnetic field at a point
(L) inside on the axis and (LL) outside the
combined system. (Delhi)

U2 B
O
⇒ Fweight on CD = mg
μ 0 2 × 10 × 6 × L
mg = ×
4π 2 × 10 −3
P 10 × 6
= × 10–7 = 6 × 10–3 kg m–1
L 10 −3 A
U1 S1
Direction of current in CD should be RSSRVLWH to
I S2
that AB. Q1 turns
Q2 turns
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 93

Ans. (D) According to $PSHUH·V &LUFXLWDO ODZ the (E) “Increasing the current sensitivity of a
→ galvanometer does not necessarily increase
magnetic field B is related to steady current
the voltage sensitivity.” Justify this
→ → statement. (Comptt. Delhi)
∫
I as % . GO = μ 0I
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 111, Pages 109-110
(E) (L) Inside the combined system : Magnetic (E) Current sensitivity is defined as the
field at a point on the axis. deflection produced in the galvanometer
Using APSHUH·V &LUFXLWDO ODZ the when unit current is passed through its coil.
magnetic field due to inner solenoid S1 is θ QBA
given by Is = = radian/ampere or division A–1
I N
B1 = μ0Q1I …(L)
⎡Q = Number of turns in the galvanometer.
Similarly due to outer solenoid S2, …where ⎢N = Restoring couple per unit twist or
B2 = μ0Q2I …(LL) ⎣ torsional constant.
Since these two magnetic fields are Voltage sensitivity is defined as the
opposite in direction, deflection produced in the galvanometer
→ when unit voltage is applied across the coil
∴ B = B1 – B2 = μ0(Q1 – Q2) I in the of the galvanometer.
upward direction. θ QBR
(LL) Outside the combined system : At such Vs = = radian/volt or div. V–1
V NR
a point, magnetic field is zero, because …where [R = Resistance of the coil
corresponding turns of the two halves of
Is
the solenoid produce equal and opposite Since Vs = , increase in current sensitivity
R
magnetic fields.
may not necessarily increase the voltage
65. Consider the motion of a charged particle of
→ sensitivity. It may be affected by the
mass ‘P’ and charge ‘T’ moving with velocity Y
→
a s resistance used.

iv D
in a magnetic field B .
→ → →

Sh
(D) If Y is perpendicular to B , show that it 67. A uniform magnetic field B is set up along the
describes a circular path having angular positive[-axis. A particle of charge ‘T’ and mass
→
frequency ω = TB/m. ‘P’ moving with a velocity Y enters the field at
→
(E) If the velocity Y has a component parallel the origin in X-Y plane such that it has velocity
→ components both along and perpendicular to the
to the magnetic field B , trace the path →
described by the particle. Justify your magnetic field B . Trace, giving reason, the
answer. (Comptt. Delhi) trajectory followed by the particle. Find out the
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 108 (D), Page 108 expression for the distance moved by the
(E) Z-axis particle along the magnetic field in one rotation.
B
↑ (All India)
Ans. Since the velocity of the particle is inclined to
O
[-axis, thererfore, the velocity has a component along
Y
→ B, this component remains unchanged as the motion
T
helical along the magnetic field will not be affected by the
X magnetic field. The motion in a plane perpendicular
→
Justification : Component of velocity Y , parallel to B is as before a circular one, thereby producing a
to magnetic field, will make the particle move KHOLFDOPRWLRQ, which is its trajectory.
along the field. If U is the radius of the circular path of a particle,
→ then a force of PY2/U, acts perpendicular to the path
Perpendicular component of velocity Y will
towards the centre of the circle and is called the
cause the particle to move along a circular path in
the plane perpendicular to the magnetic field centripetal force. If the velocity Y is perpendicular
Hence, the particle will follow a helical path, as to the magnetic field B, the magnetic force is
shown above. perpendicular to both Y and B and acts like a
66. D) Draw a schematic sketch of a moving coil centripetal force. It has a magnitude TYB. Equating
galvanometer and describe briefly its the two expressions (for centripetal force)
working.
 94 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

\
Y1 Gφ E
Y ID = ε o
 GW
where [ID is displacement current and φE is electric flux.
Gφ E ⎞
= μo ⎛ I + εo
⎝ GW ⎠
Y2
It is now called $PSHUH0D[ZHOO ODZ This is the
generalization of $PSHUH·V &LUFXLWDO ODZ
T [
]
B 69. (D) Why is the magnetic field radial in a
moving coil galvanometer? Explain how it
is achieved.
Pitch
radius (E) A galvanometer of resistance ‘G’ can be
PY2/U = TYB, which gives U = PY/TB …(L) converted into a voltmeter of range (0 – V)
for the radius of the circle described by the volts by connecting a resistance ‘R’ in series
charged particle. with it. How much resistance will be
2π 2π 2 πP required to change its range from 0 to V/2?
We have, T = = = …(LL) (Comptt. All India)
Z Y / U TB
There is a component of the velocity parallel to Ans. (D) The magnetic field in a moving coil
the magnetic field (denoted by Y||), it will make galvanometer is made ‘radial’ to keep the
the particle move along the field and the path of magnetic field ‘normal’ to the area vector of
the particle would be a helical one. the coil. It is done by taking the cylindrical
The distance moved along the magnetic field in soft iron core. The torque acting on the coil is
one rotation is called pitch S. maximum (sin θ = 1, when, θ = 90°)
Using equation (LL), we have (E) Given : resistance of galvanomter = G Ω
S = Y||T = 2ππPY||/TB Range of voltmeter (RL) = (0 – V) volts
68. Write the expression for the generalized form of Resistance to be connected in parallel = R
Ampere’s circuital law. Discuss its significance
where range is ⎛⎜ 0 − ⎞⎟ Volts
V
and describe briefly how the concept of

a s R′ = ?,
⎝ 2⎠

iv D
displacement current is explained through
charging/discharging of a capacitor in an electric V
In the first case, LJ = …(L)

Sh
circuit. (All India) R+G
Ans. 0D[ZHOO
V GLVSODFHPHQW FXUUHQW  According to V/2
→ In the second case LJ = …(LL)
R′ + G
$PSHUH·V FLUFXLWDO ODZ the magnetic field B is
[LJ is the maximum current which can flow
related to steady current I as,
through galvanometer]
→ →

∫
B . GO = μ o I …(L) From equation (L) and (LL), on solving we get
R − G⎞
Maxwell showed that this C 1 P C2 Q R′′ = ⎛⎜ ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠
relation is logically
inconsistent. He accounted B
70. A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and
this inconsistency as follows : < cross sectional area 1.6 × 10–4 m2 carrying a
$PSHUH·V FLUFXLWDO ODZ I current of 4.0 A is suspended through its centre
for loop C1 gives allowing it to turn in a horizontal plane. Find
→ → (L) the magnetic moment associated with the
∫ B . GO = μ o I …(LL) solenoid, (LL) magnitude and direction of the
C1 torque on the solenoid if a horizontal magnetic
Loop C2 lies in the region between the plates field of 7.5 × 10–2 T is set up at an angle of 30°
→ →
with the axis of the solenoid. (Comptt. All India)
∴ ∫ B . GO = 0 …(LLL)
Ans. Given : Q = 2000 turns, A = 1.6 × 10–4 m2
C2
 I = 4.0 A, B = 7.5 × 10–2 T
→ → → →
It is expected that, ∫ B . GO = ∫ B . GO …(LY) θ = 30°, ⎛ 1⎞
⎜ sin 30° = 2 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
C1 C2
which is logically inconsistent. So, Maxwell gave (L) Magnetic moment (M)
idea of displacement current. M = NIA = (2000) × (4) × (1.6 × 10–4)
Thus displacement current is that current which = 1.28 Am2
comes into play in the region in which the electric (LL) Magnitude of torque
field and hence the electric flux is changing with
→ → →
time. τ = M × B = MB sin θ
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 95

1
= (1.28) × (7.5 × 10–2) ×
2 Y
= 48 × 10–3 Nm I1 I2
(LLL) Direction of torque is perpendicular to both the O X
planes of the solenoid and the magnetic field. Z
I

71. (D) Write the expression for the magnetic force

acting on a charged particle moving with
(1) (2) (3)
velocity ν in the presence of magnetic D D
field B.
(L) The direction of flow of current I in wire
(E) A neutron, an electron and an alpha particle
(3), is such that the net force, on wire (1),
moving with equal velocities, enter a
due to the other two wires, is zero.
uniform magnetic field going into the plane (LL) By reversing the direction of I, the net force,
of the paper as shown. Trace their paths in on wire (2), due to the other two wires,
the field and justify your answer. (Delhi) becomes zero. What will be the directions
x x x x x x of current I, in the two cases? Also obtain
α the relation between the magnitudes of
x x x x x x
n currents I1, I2 and I. (Comptt. Delhi)
x x x x x x Ans.
e
x x x x x x
Y
Ans. (D) Expression for magnetic force :
→ → → I1
F = T( ν × B ) = TνB sin θ
I2 I

This force (F) acts perpendicular to the plane

a s
iv D
X
→ →

Sh
containing ν and B (1) (2) (3) Z
x x x x D D
(E) Justification : Direction
α x x x x (L) Net force experienced by wire (1) can be zero
of force experienced by
the particle will be n x x x x only, when the current in wire (3) flows along
according to Fleming’s –1 – Ĵ LH downwards, it means that the forces
e x x x x
Left hand rule. acting on wire (1) due to wire (3) and wire (2)
x x x x are equal and opposite.
72. Two long straight parallel conductors carry μ 0 I1I μ II
steady current I1 and I2 separated by a distance = 012 ∴ I = 2I2
2 π( 2 D) 2 π( D )
G. If the currents are flowing in the same (LL) When direction of current in wire (3) is
direction, show how the magnetic field set up in
one produces an attractive force on the other. reversed then current should be along + Ĵ LH
Obtain the expression for this force. Hence upwards.
define one ampere. (Delhi) For this case net force on wire (2) becomes
zero, which means that the forces due to wire
Ans. Refer to Q. 47, Page 87
(1) and wire (3) are equal and opposite.
73. Use Biot-Savart law to derive the expression for
μ 0 I1I 2 μ 0 I 2 I
the magnetic field on the axis of a current =
carrying circular loop of radius R.  2 πD 2 π( D)
∴ I = I1 ⇒ I = I1 = 2I2
Draw the magnetic field lines due to a circular
75. A circular coil, having 100 turns of wire, of
wire carrying current I. (All India)
radius (nearly) 20 cm each, lies in the XY plane
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 96, Page 101 with its centre at the origin of co-ordinates. Find
(LL) Refer to Q. 107 (D), Page 107
the magnetic field, at the point (0, 0, 20 3 cm),
74. Three long straight parallel wires are kept as
when this coil carries a current of ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ A.
shown in the figure. The wire (3) carries a 2
⎝ π⎠
current I
(Comptt. Delhi)
 96 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. Given : N = 100 turns, 77. A long straight wire, of circular cross section
R = 20 cm = 20 × 10–2 m = 0.2 m (radius = D) carries a current I which is
uniformly distributed across the cross section of
I = ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ A,
2
⎝ π⎠ the wire.
Use Ampere’s circuital law to calculate the
] = 20 3 cm = 20 3 × 10–2 m = 0.2 3 m,
magnetic field B(U), due to this wire, at a point
B=?
distance U < D and U > D from its axis. Draw a
The plane of coil is XY plane and field point is on
graph showing the dependence of B(U)
the Z-axis.
on U. (Comptt. All India)
∴ Magnetic field on the axial point
μ 0 IR 2 N
→ →

∫
B= 3
Ans. As per Ampere’s Circuital law : B .G O = μ 0I
2(R 2
 + ]2 ) 2 (L) For U < D
⎛ 2⎞ IH = current enclosed by Amperian
(4π × 10 −7 ) × ⎜ ⎟ × (0.2)2 × 100
⎝ π⎠ circuital loop of radius U
= 3
T
2[(0.2)2 + (0.2 3 )2 ] 2 πU 2 IU 2
=I. = 2
πD
2
8 × 0.04 × 10 −7 × 100 D
= T = 25 × 10–6 = 25 μT
2 × 0.04 × 8 × 0.2 μ 0 IU 2
76. Write the expression for the magnetic force ∫
∴ B GO = μ 0 .I H =
 D2
→ μ 0 IU 2 ⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎛ μ 0 I ⎞
F acting on a charged particle T moving with or B = .⎜ ⎟ =⎜ ⎟U
 D
2 ⎝ 2 πU ⎠ ⎝ 2 π D2 ⎠
→
velocity Y in the presence of the magnetic field ⎡ U
or B ∝  U ⎢Q GO = 2 πU
→ ⎢ ∫
B in a vector form. Show that no work is done ⎣ 0

s
(LL) For U > D

a
and no change in the magnitude of the velocity
→

D
of the particle is produced by this force. Hence →

∫
= μ 0I

v
F .G O
define the unit of magnetic field.
(Comptt. All India)
→ → →
S h i ∴ B. 2πU = μ0I
B

B∝
Ans. (L) The required expression is F = T( Y × B ) μ 0I U
or B = ∝
 πU

1/U
2 B
(LL) The magnetic force, at all instants, is,
therefore, perpendicular to the instantaneous 1 U
→ or B ∝ D
direction of Y , which is
the also U
→ The graph of, B(U) YV U, is as shown in the
instantaneous direction of displacement ( GV) . adjoining figure.
→ → 78. Derive the expression for the torque τ acting on
Since, F is perpendicular to ( GV) , at all a rectangular current loop of area A placed in a
→ → → → →
instants, work done ( = F . GV ) is zero. uniform magnetic field B. Show that τ = P × B
There being no work done, there can be no →
→
where P is the magnetic moment of the current
change in the magnitude of Y . → →
→ → → loop given by P = I A . (Comptt. All India)
From F = T( Y × B ) , we get Ans. Refer to Q. 103 (D), Page 104-105
→
| F | = F = TYB sin θ
π
(LLL) ∴ F = B if T = 1, Y = 1 and θ = 79. (L) Obtain the expression for the cyclotron
2
frequency.
→
Hence, the magnetic field B , at a point (LL) A deuteron and a proton are accelerated by
equals one tesla if a charge of one coulomb, the cyclotron. Can both be accelerated with
moving with a velocity of 1 m/s, along a the same oscillator frequency? Give reason
direction perpendicular to the direction of to justify your answer. (Delhi)
→
B , experiences a force of one newton.
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 97

Ans. (L) ([SUHVVLRQ IRU F\FORWURQ IUHTXHQF\ : The Magnetic moment of the loop, μ = IA
magnetic field provides necessary
μ = IA = ⎛⎜
HY ⎞ 2 HYU H(PH YU )
centripetal force needed by the charged ⎟ πU = =
⎝ ⎠
particle to move in a circular path.  2 πU 2 2PH

P = mass of the charged particle, Orbital angular momentum of the electron,

Y = velocity, U radius of the circular path L = PHYU
T = charge, B = Magnetic field → −H →
2 μ = L
PY PY 2PH
∴ = T YB RU, U = 
 U TB Negative sign signifies that the angular
Frequency of revolution (Y)
momentum of the revolving electron is
1 Y Y
= = = opposite in direction to the magnetic
Time period 2 πU ( 2 π PY / TB) moment associated with it.
TB
= →
2ππP 82. (D) Write the expression for the force F acting
Therefore, the frequency of revolution is on a particle of mass P and charge T
independent of energy of the particle. →
(LL) The mass of the two particles, LH deuteron moving with velocity V in a magnetic
and proton, is different. Since cyclotron →
frequency depends inversely on the mass, field B . Under what conditions will it
they cannot be accelerated by the same move in (L) a circular path and (LL) a helical
oscillator frequency. path?
80. Describe the working principle of a moving coil (E) Show that the kinetic energy of the particle
galvanometer. Why is it necessary to use (L) a moving in magnetic field remains constant.
radial magnetic field and (LL) a cylindrical soft (Delhi)
iron core in a galvanometer? Write the
expression for current sensitivity of the
a s → → →

iv D
Ans. (D) F = T( Y − B )
galvanometer.
(L) When velocity of charged particle and

Sh
Can a galvanometer as such be used for
measuring the current? Explain. (Delhi) magnetic field are perpendicular to
Ans. Refer to Q. 111, Page 109-110 each other, it will move in a circular
No, the galvanometer cannot be used to measure path.
current. It can only detect current but cannot (LL) When velocity is neither parallel nor
measure as it is not calibrated. The galvanometer perpendicular to the magnetic field, it
coil is likely to be damaged by currents in the will move in helical path.
(mA/A) range. (E) The force experienced by the charged
81. An electron of mass PH revolves around a particle, is perpendicular to the
nucleus of charge +Ze. Show that it behaves →
like a tiny magnetic dipole. Hence prove that instantaneous velocity Y , at all instants.
the magnetic moment associated with it is Hence the magnetic force cannot bring any
→ H → → change in the speed of the charged particle.
expressed as μ =− L where L is the Since speed remains constant, the kinetic
 2 PH
orbital angular momentum of the electron. Give energy also stays constant.
the significance of negative sign. (Delhi) 83. (D) State Biot-Savart law and express this law
Ans. (L) Electron, in circular motion around the in vector form.
nucleus, constitutes a current loop which (E) Two identical circular coils, P and Q each
behaves like a tiny magnetic dipole. of radius R, carrying currents 1 A and 3 A
Current associated with the revolving respectively, are placed concentrically and
electron : perpendicular to each other lying in the XY
e– and YZ planes. Find the magnitude and
H
I= and
T
 direction of the net magnetic field at the
2πU r centre of the coils. (All India)
T= Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 106 (D), Page 107
 Y
H +Z e (E) Given : RP = RQ = R, IP = 1A, IQ = 3 A
∴ I= Y Pl
 U
2π B = ? (Magnitude and direction)
 98 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

μ0 × 1 μ0 expression for the force acting on a current

BP = = (along Z-direction)
2R 2R carrying conductor of length L in a uniform
⎡ μ 0I ⎤ magnetic field ‘B’. (Comptt. Delhi)
⎢⎣Q B = 25 ⎥⎦ Ans. Lorentz’s magnetic force is force experienced by

μ0 × 3 μ 3 a charged particle of charge ‘T’ moving in
BQ = = 0 (along x-direction) →
2R 2R →
magnetic field B with velocity Y .
μ0 ⎞
2 ⎛μ 3⎞ μ0
∴ B= BP2 + BQ
2
= ⎛⎜ ⎟ +⎜ 0 ⎟ = R
→ → →
⎝ 2R ⎠ ⎝ R ⎠ FP = T( Y × B )
This net magnetic field B, is inclined to → → → →
the field BP , at an angle θ, where Two pairs FP and Y and FP and B are always
perpendicular to each other
BQ B sin θ μ 3 / 2R
= = tan θ = 0 = 3 Let us consider a conductor of uniform cross-
BP B cos θ μ 0 / 2R
sectional area A and length ‘L’ having number
tan θ = 3 density of electrons as ‘Q’
θ = tan–1 = 60˚ (in XZ plane) Total force on charge carriers in the conductor,
84. Two identical loops P and → →
Q each of radius 5 cm are Q = [(QAL)T]YG × B
lying in perpendicular
→→ →
planes such that they have But since QTAYG L = I L
a common centre as shown P
in the figure. Find the → → →
magnitude and direction of ∴ F = I( L × B )
86. Define the term magnetic moment of a current

s
the net magnetic field at the common centre of

a
the two coils, if they carry currents equal to 3 A loop. Derive an expression for the magnetic

iv D
and 4 A respectively. (All India) field at any point along the axis of a solenoid of
Ans. Given : RP = RQ = R = 5 cm = 5 × 10–2 m length 2O, and radius D, and number of terms

Sh
IP = 3A, IQ = 4A per unit length Q. (Comptt. Delhi)
Magnitude and direction of magnetic field (B) = ? Ans. (L) Definition of magnetic moment : Magnetic
We know that the field at the centre of a circular moment of a current loop is equal to the
coil is given by product of current flowing in the loop and
μ 0I its area; and its direction is along area vector
B= as per the right handed screw rule.
2R
μ0 × 3 (LL) 0DJQHWLF ILHOG IRU VROHQRLG 
∴ Field due to coil P(BP) =
2 × (5 × 10˙-2 )
Q
= 12π x 10–6 tesla …(LL) h
[ Qμ0 = 4π x 10–7] d c
w
μ0 × 4
∴ Field due to coil Q(BQ) =
2 × (5 × 10 -2 ) a b
B
= 16π × 10–6 tesla …(LLL) P
Resultant Field
= (12 π × 10 −6 ) 2 + (16 × 10 −6 ) 2
= 4π × 10–6 9 + 16 = 4π × 10–6 25 Using Ampere’s circuital law
= 20π × 10–6 T = 20π μT →→
For direction, ∫

B . GO = μ0QK,
B 12 π × 10 −6 3
tan θ = P = = → →
BQ 16 π × 10 −6 4
P = I A
θ = tan–1 ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ BK = μ0QK,
3
∴
⎝ 4⎠ ⇒ B = μ0Q,
85. State the Lorentz’s force and express it in vector
87. (D) Draw the pattern of magnetic field lines for
form. Which pair of vectors are always
a circular coil carrying current.
perpendicular to each other? Derive the
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 99

(E) Two identical • Since bismuth is diamagnetic, its μU < 1,

i
circular loops X and X x therefore the magnetic field in the core will
P
Y of radius R and O be very much reduced.
carrying the same
current are kept in x Long Answer Type Questions (LA)
perpendicular planes
such that they have a (5 Marks)
common centre at P Y Oc
as shown in the 90. (D) Using Biot-Savart’s law, derive DQ
figure. Find the magnitude and direction of expression for the magnetic field at the
the net magnetic field at the point P due to centre of a circular coil of radius R, number
the loops. (Comptt. All India) of turns N, carrying current L.
Ans. (D) Pattern of magnetic field lines for a circular (E) Two small identical circular coils marked 1,
coil carrying current : 2 carry equal currents and are placed with
Refer to Q. 107 (D), Page 107 their geometric axes perpendicular to each
(E) The magnetic field due to a circular coil at a other as shown in the figure. Derive an
point carrying current is given by expression for the resultant magnetic field
μ 0LR 2
at O. (Delhi)
B= 2 2 3/2 1
2(R + [ ) L R [
O
Since these two circular coils are identical
and carrying the same current,
μ 0LR 2 [
B X = BY = 2 2 3/2
=B
2(R + [ )
Resultant magnetic field (BR)
a s
iv D
2
O′ R
= B 2X + B 2Y = B 2 + B 2 = B (1 + 1) = 2B

Sh
L

2 μ DLR 2 Ans. (D) Consider a circular loop

= and making 45° with BX or BY.
2
2(R + [ )
2 3/ 2 of wire of radius R
carrying current I. The ⊗
88. Define the term current sensitivity of a I → O
entire loop can be →
galvanometer. Write its SI unit. R
divided into a large IGO
(Comptt. All India)
number of small current
Ans. • Current sensitivity of a galvanometer is elements.
“deflection per unit current”. It is defined as According to %LRW6DYDUW·VODZmagnetic field
the ratio of deflection produced in the due to current element ‘IGO’ at the centre O of
galvanometer to the current flowing through a coil is
it. → →
→ μ (G O × R )
φ NAB GB = 0 I
IS = = . 4 π R3
I K 
SI unit is radian per ampere. μ IGO
GB = 0 2 ( Q sin 90° = 1)
89. A toroidal solenoid of mean radius 20 cm has 4 π R
4000 turns of wire wound on a ferromagnetic →
The direction of GO is along the tangent,
core of relative permeability 800. Calculate the
→ →
magnetic field in the core for a current of 3A
so GO ⊥ R
passing through the coil. How does the field
Magnetic field due to whole coil is
change, when this core is replaced by a core of
μ 0I μ 0I
Bismuth? (Comptt. All India)
Ans. • Given : U = 20 cm = 20 × 10–2 m, N = 4000 turns,
B=
4 πR
2
GO ∫ or B=
4 πR 2
.O

μU = 800, I = 3A μ 0I μ I
⇒ B= . 2πR or B= 0
B = μU0QI [Q = number of turns per unit length 4 πR 2 2R
In case of N number of turns
⎧ 4000 ⎫
= (800) × (4π × 10–7) × ⎨ −2 ⎬
×3 μ 0 NI
⎩ ( 2 π × 20 × 10 ) ⎭ B=
2R
= 9.6 T (E) Field at ‘O’ due to 1st loop is
 100 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

μ 0 IR 2 dee D1 to be negative. It gets accelerated towards

B1 = dee D1. As it enters the dee D1, it does not
2( [ + R )
2 2 3/2
experience any electric field due to shielding
→ →
B B2 effect of the metallic dee. The perpendicular
1 R
magnetic field throws it into a circular path.
→
O At the instant the proton comes out of dee D1. It
L B1 finds dee D1 positive and dee D2 negative. It now
[
gets accelerated towards dee D2. It moves faster
[ through dee D2 describing a larger semicircle than
before. Thus if the frequency of the applied
2 voltage is kept exactly the same as the frequency
R O′
of the revolution of the proton, then everytime the
L proton reaches the gap between the two dees, the
→ electric field is reversed and proton receives a push
B1 is directed towards the centre of the loop.
and finally it acquires very high energy. This
Field at ‘O’ due to 2nd loop is proton follows a spiral path. The accelerated
μ 0 IR 2 proton is ejected through a window by a deflecting
B2 = voltage and hits the target.
2( [ + R )
2 2 3/2

→
Centripetal force is provided by magnetic field to
B 2 is directed away from the centre of the charged particle to move in a circular back.
loop because current flows in second loop is PY 2 TBU
 TYB or Y =
anticlockwise.  U  P
→ → 2πU
Period of revolution, T =
As B1 ⊥ B 2 , so the net field at O is  Y
2πU 2πP
B= B12 + B2 2 or B =
μ 0 IR 2 2

a s T=
TBU
P or T =
 TB

iv D
 +
2( [ 2 R 2 ) 3/2
Thus ‘T’ is independent of ‘Y’.
μ 0 IR 2 2
In case [ >> R ∴ B=

Sh
3
 2 [
91. Draw a schematic diagram of a cyclotron.
92. Draw a schematic sketch of a cyclotron. Explain
Explain its underlying principle and working,
briefly how it works and how it is used to
stating clearly the function of the electric and
accelerate the charged particles.
magnetic field applied on a charged particle.
(L) Show that time period of ions in a cyclotron
Deduce an expression for the period of
is independent of both the speed and radius
revolution and show that it does not depend on
of circular path.
the speed of the charged particle. (Delhi)
(LL) What is resonance condition? How is it
Ans. Principle : When a positively charged particle is
used to accelerate the charged particles?
made to move again and again in a high
(All India)
frequency electric field, it gets accelerated and
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 91, Page 100
acquires sufficiently large amount of energy.
(LL) The frequency νD of the applied voltage is
Target adjusted so that the polarity of the dees is
reversed in the same time that it takes the
→
↑↑↑ B ions to complete one-half of the revolution.
The requirement νD = νF is called the
into the resonance condition.
plane of
paper The phase of the supply is adjusted so that
D2 when the positive ions arrive at the edge of
D1 D1, D2 is at a lower potential and the ions are
P
accelerated across the gap.
93. (D) Two straight long parallel conductors carry
Hollow
Metallic dees currents I1 and I2 in the same direction.
H.F. oscillator Deduce the expression for the force per unit
Cyclotron length between them.
:RUNLQJ  Suppose a positive ion, say a proton, Depict the pattern of magnetic field lines
enters the gap between the two dees and finds around them.
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 101

(E) A rectangular B
current carrying E F
I
loop EFGH is
P
kept in a uniform N I S G PROTON
magnetic field as
shown in the H G
Y
figure.
A
(L) What is the direction of the magnetic
moment of the current loop? (E) Use this expression to define S.I. unit of
(LL) When is the torque acting on the loop current.
(A) maximum, (B) zero? (All India) (F) A long straight wire AB carries a current I. A
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 47, Page 87 proton P travels with a speed Y, parallel to
(E) (L) Magnetic moment will be out of the plane the wire, at a distance G from it in a direction
from the surface HEFG. opposite to the current as shown in the
→ → figure. What is the force experienced by the
(LL) Torque = M × B proton and what is its direction? (All India)
→ → Ans. (D) For (D) and (E) : Refer to Q. 47, Page 87
(A) Torque is maximum when M || B LH, (F) Force experienced by the proton,
when it gets rotated by 90°.
→ →
→ → F = T ( Y × B )
(B) Torque is minimum when M and B
are at 270° to each other. As magnetic field due to the current
carrying wire is directed into the plane of the
paper (θ = 90°)
94. (D) With the help of a diagram, explain the μ I μ HYI
principle and working of a moving coil Here T = H B= 0 , I= 0
2 πG  2 πG

s

galvanometer.

a
Force is directed away from the current

iv D
(E) What is the importance of a radial magnetic carrying wire or in the right direction of
field and how is it produced? observer.

Sh
(F) Why is it that while using a moving coil
galvanometer as a voltmeter a high
resistance in series is required whereas in 96. State Biot-Savart law, giving the mathematical
an ammeter a shunt is used? (All India) expression for it.
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 111, Page 109-110 Use this law to derive the expression for the
(E) For radial magnetic field, sin θ = 1, so torque magnetic field due to a circular coil carrying
τ = NIAB. Thus when radial magnetic field is current at a point along its axis.
used, the deflection of the coil is proportional How does a circular loop carrying current
to the current flowing through it. Hence a behave as a magnet? (Delhi)
linear scale can be used to determine the
Ans. According to %LRW6DYDUW·V Current element
deflection of the coil.
ODZ, ´PDJQHWLFILHOGDFWLQJDW
(F) A high resistance is joined in series with a Y
galvanometer so that when the arrangement D SDUWLFXODU SRLQW GXH WR
θ
(voltmeter) is used in parallel with the FXUUHQW FDUU\LQJ HOHPHQW LV IGO
U GB
SURSRUWLRQDOWRWKHGLYLVLRQRI P
selected section of the circuit, it should draw
least amount of current. In case voltmeter FURVV SURGXFW RI FXUUHQW
←

draws appreciable amount of current, it will HOHPHQW DQG SRVLWLRQ YHFWRU I

disturb the original value of potential RI SRLQW ZKHUH WKH ILHOG LV WR
difference by a good amount. EH FDOFXODWHG IURP WKH X
To convert a galvanometer into ammeter, a FXUUHQWHOHPHQWWRWKHFXEHRI
shunt is used in parallel with it so that when WKH GLVWDQFH EHWZHHQ FXUUHQW HOHPHQW DQG WKH SRLQW
the arrangement is joined in series, the ZKHUH WKH ILHOG LV WR EH FDOFXODWHGµ.
maximum current flows through the shunt, → →
and thus the galvanometer is saved from its → μ 0 I GO × U μ 0 I GO U sin θ
damage, when the current is passed through GB = ⇒ GB =
4 π U 4 π
3
U3
ammeter. μ 0 I GO sin θ
95. (D) Derive an expression for the force between ∴ GB =
4 π U2
two long parallel current carrying 0DJQHWLF ILHOG RQ WKH D[LV RI FLUFXODU FXUUHQW
conductors. ORRS 
 102 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

→ → 98. (D) State the principle of the working of a

→ μ 0 I GO × U → →
GB = ⇒ GB ⊥ I GO moving coil galvanometer, giving its
4 π
3
U labelled diagram.
IGO
→ GB cos φ → (E) “Increasing the current sensitivity of a
A 90° U φ GB galvanometer may not necessarily increase its
W voltage sensitivity.” Justify this statement.
D φ
O
[ GB sin φ (F) Outline the necessary steps to convert a
φ→
→ GB galvanometer of resistance RG into an
→
U GB cos φ ammeter of a given range. (All India)
I GO Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 111, Page 109-110
→ →
⇒ GB ⊥ U (E) Since VS =
IS
, increase in current sensitivity
R
∫
B = GB sin φ
 may not necessarily increase the voltage
μ I GO sin θ sensitivity. It may be affected by the
B= ∫ 0 sin φ
 4 π U2 resistance used.
μ I GO → → (F) Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter : By
∴ Β = ∫ 0 2 sin φ As sin θ = 1 [Q U ⊥ I GO ]
 4 π U just connecting a low resistance known as VKXQW
D in parallel to the galvanometer, it can be
In ΔAOP, sin φ =
U 2 πD
converted into an ammeter.
μ 0 I GO D μ0 D
B= ∫
 4 π U U
2
⇒ B= ∫ 4π U 3
I DO Ammeter
 0 S
2 πD
μ0 D μ D 2 πD
⇒ B=
4 πU 3
I ∫ GO ⇒ B = 0 3 DI [O]0
4
 πU
(I – Ig) (I – Ig)
G
 0 I A B I
μ0
⇒ B= DI [2πD – 0]
4 πU
s
3

⇒ B=
μ0
4 πU
3
DI × 2πD ⇒ B = 0
μ D2 I × 2 π
 4 πU
3

iv D a Let G = resistance of the galvanometer.

Ig = the current with which
galvanometer gives full scale

Sh
2
⇒ B=
μ 0 ID
 2U
3
…
 Q U = D + [
2 2 [ deflection.
S = shunt resistance
μ 0 ID2 I – Ig = current through the shunt.
∴ B= 2 2 3/2
2( [ + D ) As the galvanometer and shunt are
As in a special case we may obtain the field at the connected in parallel,
centre of the loop. Here [ = 0, and we obtain ∴ Potential difference across the
galvanometer = Potential difference
μ 0I
B0 = across the shunt
2R IJ
In a current loop, both the opposite faces behave as IJ G = (I – IJ) S ⇒ S = ×G
opposite poles, making it a magnetic dipole. One I − IJ

side of the current carrying coil behaves like the
N-pole and the other side as the S-pole of a magnet.
97. With the help of a labelled diagram, state the →
99. (D) Write the expression for the force, F , acting
underlying principle of a cyclotron. Explain clearly
how it works to accelerate the charged particles. on a charged particle of charge ‘T’, moving
Show that cyclotron frequency is independent →
with a velocity Y in the presence of both
of energy of the particle. Is there an upper limit → →
on the energy acquired by the particle? Give electric field E and magnetic field B . Obtain
reason. (Delhi) the condition under which the particle moves
Ans. Refer to Q. 91, Page 100 undeflected through the fields.
Yes, there is an upper limit. The increase in the (E) A rectangular loop of size O × E carrying a
kinetic energy of particles is TY. Therefore, the steady current I is placed in a uniform
radius of their path goes on increasing each time, → →
their kinetic energy increases. The lines are magnetic field B . Prove tht the torque τ
→
repeatedly accelerated across the dees, untill they →
acting on the loop is given by τ = P × B ,
→
have the required energy to have a radius
approximately that of the dees. Hence, this is the →
where P is the magnetic moment of the loop.
upper limit on the energy required by the (All India)
particles due to definite size of dees.
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 103

→ Its magnitude is F4 = IEB sin 90° = IEB

Ans. (D) A charge T in an electric field E experiences According to )OHPLQJ·V OHIW KDQG UXOH the
→ → → →
the electric force, FH = T E forces F1 and F3 act along the axis of the
→
This force acts in the direction of field E and loop as shown in the figure. These forces are
equal, opposite and collinear. So they give
is independent of the velocity of the charge. →
The magnetic force experienced by the rise to no net forces or torques. The forces F4
→ → → →
charge T moving with velocity ν in the and F2 on the sides SP and QR are equal
→ → → →
magnetic field B is given by = T( ν × B ) FP and opposite but not collinear. So they form
This force acts perpendicular to the plane of a couple. The perpendicular distance
→
→
→ between the two forces is D sin θ.
ν and B and depends on the velocity ν of τ = Force × perpendicular distance
the charge. = IEB × D sin θ
The total force, or the Lorentz force, = IBA sin θ from the axis of rotation
experienced by the charge T due to both τ = mB sin θ
electric and magnetic field is given by [where m = IA = magnitude of the magnetic dipole
→ → → moment]
F = FH + FP → → →
∴ τ = P × B
→ → → →
∴ F = T( E + ν × B ) 100. (D) Explain, giving reasons, the basic difference
Hence, A stationary charged particle does in converting a galvanometer into (L) a
voltmeter and (LL) an ammeter.
not experience any force in a magnetic field.
(E) Two long straight parallel conductors carrying
(E) 7RUTXH RQ D FXUUHQW ORRS LQ D XQLIRUP
steady currents I1 and I2 are separated by a
PDJQHWLF ILHOG
distance ‘G’. Explain briefly, with the help of
Let I = Current flowing through the coil

a s a suitable diagram, how the magnetic field

iv D
PQRS due to one conductor acts on the other. Hence
F1 deduce the expression for the force acting

Sh
P N →
B
F4 between the two conductors. Mention the
I Q nature of this force. (All India)
E → Ans. (D) (L) Voltmeter is Voltmeter
→ → F4 → connected in
B B θ
P parallel with the A R
→ θ → G B
B D B
→ I
circuit element IJ
F2 across which
→
S F3 D sin θ the potential U
D
R → difference is intended to be measured.
F2 A galvanometer can be converted into a
voltmeter by connecting a higher
D, E = Sides of the coil PQRS
A = DE = area of the coil resistance in series with it. The value of
→ this resistance is so adjusted that only
θ = angle between the direction of B and current IJ which produces full scale
→
that of the vector N drawn normal to deflection in the galvanometer, passes
the plane of the coil. through the galvanometer.
→ → → → V
∴ Force on side PQ , F1 = I(PQ × B ) R= –G
IJ
Its magnitude is F1 = IDB sin (90° – θ) 
= IDB cos θ (LL) A galvanometer Ammeter

→ →
can be converted
→ → S
Force on side QR , F2 = (QR × B ) into an ammeter
(I – IJ)
Its magnitude is F2 = IEB sin 90° = IEB by connecting a
→ → → → low value A IJ G
B I
I
Force on side RS , F3 = I( RS × B ) resistance in
Its magnitude is, F3 = IDB sin(90° + θ) parallel with it.
= IDBcos θ IJ
→ → → → S= ×G
Force on side SP , F4 = I( SP × B ) I − IJ

 104 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(E) Refer to Q. 47, Page 87 → →

101. (D) Explain briefly with the help of a labelled The direction of G B is shown by vector P Q .
→
diagram, the principle and working of a G B can be resolved into two rectangular
moving coil galvanometer. components,
(E) Define the term ‘current sensitivity’ of a → →
LH, G B sin φ along the axis and G B cos φ
galvanometer. How is it that increasing
perpendicular to the axis.
current sensitivity may not necessarily
The components perpendicular to the axis of
increase its voltage sensitivity? Explain. the loop will be equal and opposite to com-
(Comptt. All India) ponent along the axis of the loop and will
Ans. (D) 3ULQFLSOH DQG ZRUNLQJ RI D PRYLQJ FRLO cancel out. Their axial components will be in
JDOYDQRPHWHU Refer to Q. 111, Pages 109-110 the same direction, LH along CP and get
(E) &XUUHQWVHQVLWLYLW\ Refer to Q. 66 (E), Page 93 added up.
102. (D) State Biot-Savart law. Deduce the ∴ Total magnetic field at point P in the direc-
expression for the magnetic field due to a tion CP is
circular current carrying loop at a point
∫
B= GB sin φ
lying on its axis.
(E) Two long parallel wires carry currents I1 and D μ IGO
But sin φ = and GB = 0 ⋅ 2 ,
I2 flowing in the same direction. When a third V 4 π V
current carrying wire is placed parallel and μ 0 IGO D
coplanar in between the two, find the
∴ B= ∫
 4 π V
⋅ 2 ⋅
V
condition when the third wire would μ0 ID
experience no force due to these two wires.
∴ B= ⋅ 2
4 π ( D + U )
2 3/ 2 ∫ GO …[ Q V = D2 + U2

(Comptt. All India) μ 0 ID

Ans. (D) %LRW6DYDUW /DZ ⇒ B= ⋅ 2 πD

s 4 π ( D 2 + U 2 ) 3/ 2


→ μ I G O× U
GB = 0
4π U3
→ →

iv D a ⇒ B=
4 π
μ 0 ,D 2 πD
 D + U )
( 2 2 3/ 2

Sh
…where [The terms have the meaning μ 0 ID 2
as shown in the figure ∴ B= along CP
Y
P 2(D 2
 + U 2 )3 / 2
I dB The direction of this field is along the axis, in
the sense given by the right hand (thumb)
rule.
→
(E) The force I1 on the third wire due to wire 1
I →
X is directed opposite to the force I2 on the
→ third wire due to wire 2. Hence, the net force
The magnitude G B of the magnetic field,
on the third wire would become 0.
→
due to the element G O , is given by (1) (2) (3)
→ →
→ μ 0I G O × U μ IGO
G B = = 0 2
4π U
3
4 πU
 I1 I I2
→ →
Q G O and U are ⊥ to each other)
(Q

μ 0I GO
=
4 π ( D + U )
2 2 r1 r2
→ → μ 0 I 1I μ 0 I 2 I
If I = I2 ∴ =
Q
 1  2 πU1 2 πU2
s ...where [I1 and I2 are the forces per unit length
a dB cos f I1 U
dB
dB sin f Hence required condition will be = 1
I r I
 0 U2
C P dB dB sin f
I

Q’ 103. (D) Derive the expression for the torque on a

dB cos f rectangular current carrying loop
suspended in a uniform magnetic field.
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 105

(E) A proton and a deutron having equal If loop has Q turns then M = Q I A
momenta enter in a region of uniform ∴ τ = QIAB sin θ
magnetic field at right angle to the direction When θ = 90° then τmax = QIAB
of the field. Depict their trajectories in the When θ = 0° then τ = 0
field. (Delhi) (E) Since the
Ans. (D) Torque on a rectangular current loop in a momentum and
uniform magnetic field: the charge on both Proton r1
Let I = current through the coil the proton and
D, E = sides of the rectangular loop deutron are the Deutron r2
A = DE = area of the loop same, the particle
Q = Number of turns in the loop will follow a
B = Magnetic field circular path with radius 1 : 1.
θ = angle between magnetic field 104. (D) Using Biot-Savart’s law, derive the
→ → expression for the magnetic field in the
B and area vector A vector form at a point on the axis of a
a
circular current loop.
(E) What does a toroid consist of? Find out the
D C
expression for the magnetic field inside a
m
toroid for N turns of the coil having the
N F1 θ S average radius U and carrying a current I.
b
F2 Show that the magnetic field in the open
space inside and exterior to the toroid is zero.
A B (All India)
Ans. (D) Let P be the point on the axis of a circular loop

a s or coil of radius D carrying current I. The

iv D
distance of P from the centre of loop is [.

Sh
dl
Force exerted on the arm DA LQZDUG XcY 2
dB cos θ L
a +x
2

F1 = I E B …[ Q F= ILB] r= dB
a 90°
θ
Force exerted on the arm BC RXWZDUG
O θ
dB sin θ
F2 = I E B ∴ F2 = F1 I x P
Thus net force on the loop is zero
∴ Two equal and opposite forces form a dB cos θ d B
X′ Y′
couple which exerts a torque
∴ Magnitude of the torque on the loop is, According to Biot-Savart’s Law, magnetic field
due to a small element XY (GO) at point P is
τ = F1 sin θ + F2 sin θ μ 0 IGO sin θ
GB = …(L)
4 π U2
→ →
= (F1 + F2) sin θ Angle θ between GO and U can be taken as π/
2 because radius of loop is small
F1
So, equation (L) can be written as
= (IEB + IEB) sin θ π
m μ 0 LGO sin 2 μ LGO
GB = × = 0 2 …(LL)
4 π
2
U 4 πU
θ θ
⇒ τ = 2IEB sin θ β The perpendicular components of the
a magnetic field due to these elements being
sin θ
= IDEB sin 2 equal and opposite cancel each other. Hence
F2
= IAB sin θ the total contribution of perpendicular
∴ Magnetic moment of the current loop is, components, (LH GB cos θ) to the net magnetic
field is zero.
M=IA
On the other hand, GB sin θ component of
⇒ magnetic field due to each element of the coil
∴ τ = MB sin θ
or loop is directed in the same direction.
106 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Therefore, magnetic field at point P due to the (E) An α-particle and a proton are realeased
whole coil or loop is equal to the sum of GB from the centre of the cyclotron and made
sin θ components of magnetic field due to to accelerate.
each element (L) Can both be accelerated at the same
LH B = ΣGB sin θ cyclotron frequency? Give reason to
μ IGO justify your answer.
or B = ∫ GB sin θ or B = ∫ 40πr 2 sin θ
 (LL) When they are accelerated in turn,
μ I sin θ μ I sin θ × 2 πD which of the two will have higher
or B = 0 2 ∫ GO = 0
 4 πU 4 πU 2 velocity at the exit slit of the dees?
(D = radius of coil)
(All India)
μ I D μ I 2 πD2
or B = 0 2 .⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ 2πD = 0 Ans. (D) &\FORWURQ 
4 πU ⎝ U ⎠ 4π U 3 Magnetic field
out of the paper Deflection plate
⎡ D⎤
⎢⎣Q sin θ = U ⎥⎦
 Exit Port
μ 2 πID2
But U =  D2 + [ 2 ∴ B= 0 2
4 π ( D + [ )
2 3/2

The ULJKWKDQGWKXPEUXOH can be used to find Charged

particle
the direction of the field. P
(E) A toroid is a solenoid bent to form a ring
D2
shape.
Let N number of turns per unit length of
toroid and I be current flowing in it.
D1
OSCILLATOR
5ROHRIFURVVHGHOHFWULFDQGPDJQHWLFILHOGLQ

s
Magnetic fie
lines F\FORWURQ  The magnetic field makes the
I II III
r

iv D a
Amperian lo charged particle to cross the gap between
the dees again and again by making it move

Sh
along a circular path, while the oscillating
electric field, applied across the dees,
Consider a loop (region II) of radius U passes accelerates the charged particle again and
through the centre of the toroid. again and hence increases its K.E.
([SUHVVLRQ 
Let (region II) be magnetic field along the If the velocity Y is perpendicular to the
loop is magnetic field B, the magnetic force is
→ →

∫
B. GO = μ0I × number of turns perpendicular to both Y and B and acts like
a centripetal force. It has a magnitude TYB.
B.2πU = μ0IN ⇒ B= …(L) Equating the two expressions for centripetal
force,
Let (region I) B1, be magnetic field outside
toroid in open space. Draw an amperian loop PY 2 TBU
= TYB, which gives Y =
L2 of radius U2 through point Q.  U  P
→
where [ U is the radius of the trajecting at exit,
Now applying DPSHUH·VODZ ∫ B 2 GO  μ0NI equals the radius of a dee.
Hence, the kinetic energy of the ions is
L 2
As I = 0, because the circular turn current 2 2 2
1
PY 2 = T B U
coming out of plane of paper is cancelled 2 2P
exactly by current going into it, so net (E) An α-particle is 2He4 and proton is 1H1
I = 0, equation (L) becomes (L) Cyclotron frequency is given by
∫ B 2 GO = 0 ∴ B2 = 0
Y=
1
=
%T
L T 2 πP
105. (D) Draw a schematic sketch of a cyclotron. No, both cannot be accelerated to same
Explain clearly the role of crossed electric frequency because frequency depends
and magnetic field in accelerating the upon mass and charge.
charge. Hence derive the expression for the %TU
(LL) Velocity is given by the formula Y =
kinetic energy acquired by the particles.  P
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 107

Velocity is also inversely proportional to Magnetic field due to

I–
mass and directly proportional to charge all such current
→
90°
2BTU BTU elements will point
Hence Yα = = GO
→
O
 4 P 2P into the plane of paper. U
BTU Hence total field at O
⇒ Yproton =
 P is,
Velocity of proton is higher than that
→ μ 0I I I
α-particle.
106. State Biot-Savart law, expressing it in the vector
B= ∫ d B = 4 πr ∫ dl
2

form. Use it to obtain the expression for the μ 0I μ 0I μ 0I

magnetic field at an axial point, distance ‘G’ = ×l = × 2 πr =
4 πr 2 4 πr 2 2r
from the centre of a circular coil of radius ‘D’ μ 0nI
carrying current ‘I’. Also find the ratio of the ∴ For a coil of Q turns, B = .
2r
magnitudes of the magnetic field of this coil at μ QI
B (at centre) = 0 …(L)
the centre and at an axial point for which  2 D
μ 0QID2
G = D 3. (Comptt. Delhi) B at axial point =
2( D + [ )
2 2 3/2
Ans. (D) %LRW6DYDUWODZ: It states that ´WKHPDJQHWLF
→ Given : [ = D 3
ILHOG G % GXH WR D FXUUHQW HOHPHQW G O  DW DQ\
μ 0QID2
SRLQW 3 LV Baxis =
2[ D2 + ( D 3 )2 ]3/ 2
(L) GLUHFWO\ SURSRUWLRQDO μ 0QID2 μ 0QID2
WR FXUUHQW G % ∝ , Y ⇒ Baxis = ⇒ Baxis =
2( D + 3 D )
dB 2 2 3 / 2 2 3/ 2
2( 4 D )
(LL) GLUHFWO\ SURSRUWLRQDO r μ 0QID 2 μ 0QI
WRWKHOHQJWKGORIWKH B θ P ∴ Baxis = = …(LL)
2 × 64 D 2 × 64 D
dl 3

s
→ A Comparing equations (L) and (LL), we get
HOHPHQW d B  ∝ GO
(LLL) GLUHFWO\ SURSRUWLRQDO
WR VLQ θ ZKHUH θ LV
X

iv D a Bcentre
μ 0QI
= 2D =
64

Sh
∴ Ratio : 64 : 1
Baxial μ 0QI 1
→ →
WKH DQJOH EHWZHHQ d l  DQG r   2 D × 64
→ 107. (D) Draw the magnetic field lines due to a cur-
7KHUHIRUH d B  ∝ VLQ θ rent carrying loop.
(LY) LQYHUVHO\SURSRUWLRQDOWRWKHVTXDUHRIWKH (E) State using a suitable diagram, the working
principle of a moving coil galvanometer.
GLVWDQFH U IURP WKH FXUUHQW HOHPHQW
What is the function of a radial magnetic
→ 1
d B  ∝ µ field and the soft iron core used in it?
r2 (F) For converting a galvanometer into an am-
Combining (L), (LL), (LLL) and (LY), we get meter, a shunt resistance of small value is
→ I dl sin θ → μ 0 I dl sin θ used in parallel, whereas in the case of a
dB ∝ ⇒ d B = voltmeter a resistance of large value is used
r2 4π r2
→ → → in series. Explain why. (Comptt. Delhi)
μ 0 I(d l × r ) Ans. (D) 0DJQHWLF ILHOG OLQHV 
IQ vector forms d B = .
4π r3
→
The direction of d B is perpendicular to the
→ →
plane of the vector G l and r given by
5LJKW +DQGHG 6FUHZ 5XOH
(E) Consider a circular coil of radis U, carrying
current I. It consists of a large number of
small current elements of length GO.
According to %LRW6DYDUW ODZ magnetic field (E) 0RYLQJFRLOJDOYDQRPHWHU It is a device used
at the centre O due to current element GO is, for the detection and measurement of small
electric current.
→ μ 0 I dl sin 90° μ 0 Idl 3ULQFLSOH The working is based on the fact
dB = =
4π r2 4π r 2 that a current carrying coil suspended in a
magnetic field experiences a torque.
108 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

&RQVWUXFWLRQ It consists of a coil having a )XQFWLRQ RI D UDGLDO PDJQHWLF ILHOG  Radial
large number of turns of insulated copper wire magnetic field being normal in all directions
wound on a metallic frame. The coil is is formed to get maximum torque.
suspended by means of a phosphor-bronze )XQFWLRQ RI 6RIW LURQ FRUH, which not only
strip and is surrounded by a horse-shoe makes the field radial but also increases the
magnet NS. A hair spring is attached to lower strength of the magnetic field.
end of the coil. The other end of the spring is (F) One uses a shunt resistance in parallel with
attached to the scale through a pointer. the galvanometer, so that most of the current
passes through the shunt. In the case of a
Scale
voltmeter, a resistance of large value is used
in series because it must draw a very small
⎯→

current, otherwise the voltage measurement

⎯⎯

Pointer⎯→ will disturb the original set up by an amount

⎯

Permanent magnet
⎯⎯

which is very large.

⎯
⎯⎯

Coil
⎯⎯

B 108. (D) Deduce an expression for the frequency of

N C revolution of a charged particle in a
Sp S
A magnetic field and show that it is
D Pivot independent of velocity or energy of the
Soft-iron particle.
core (E) Draw a schematic sketch of a cyclotron.
Explain, giving the essential details of its
Uniform radial magnetic field
construction, how it is used to accelerate the
:RUNLQJ When current is passed, say along
ABCD, the couple acts on it. Since the plane

a s charged particles. (All India)

iv D
Ans. (D) When a charged particle with charge Tmoves
remains always parallel to the magnetic field →
in all positions of the coil (radial field), the inside a magnetic field B with velocity Y, it

Sh
force on the vertical arms always remains
perpendicular to the place of the coil.
Let, I be the current flowing through coil,
B be magnetic field supposed to be
experiences a force, which is given by
→ → →
F = T( ν × B )
→ →
uniform and always parallel to the coil, Here, → ν is perpendicular to B , F is the
A be area of the coil force on the charged particle which acts as
Deflecting torque acting on the coil is, the centripetal force and makes it move along
τ = QI BA sin 90° = QIBA a circular path.
Due to deflecting torque, the coil rotates and ]
suspension wire gets twisted. A restoring
torque is set up in the suspension fibre. If φ is → →
angle through which the coil rotates and N is B B
the restoring torque per unit angular twist,
then restoring torque, τ = N φ → → O \
Y F →
,Q HTXLOLEULXP F
T
Deflecting torque = Restoring torque B T
→ A
⎛ n AB ⎞ Y
QIBA = Nφ ⇒ φ= ⎜ ⎟ I = GI [
⎝ k ⎠
or φ = GI Let P be the mass of the charged particle and
U bethe radius of the circular path
⎛ n AB ⎞
… where [G = ⎜ ⎟ → → PY 2
⎝ k ⎠ ∴ T( Y × B ) =
 U
is the galvanometer constant]
Y and B are at right angles
∴ φ∝I
This provides a linear scale for the PY PY
∴ TB = ∴ U=
galvanometer.  U BT
 Chapter 4 : MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 109

Time period of circular motion of the charged polarity and show that it acts as a bar magnet
particle can be calculated as shown below: of magnetic moment P = NIA. (Delhi)
2 πU 2 πPY 2πP Ans. (D) (L) Ampere’s Circuital Law. Line integral of
T= = ⇒ T= magnetic field over a closed loop is equal
 Y YBT  BT
to μ0 times the total current passing
2π
∴ Angular frequency is, ω = through the surface enclosed by the loop.
T
$OWHUQDWLYHO\
BT
∴ ω= →→
P
Therefore, the frequency of the revolution of
∫

B . GO = μ 0I

the charged particle is independent of the (LL) Expression for magnetic field inside
velocity or the energy of the particle. toroid
(E) &\FORWURQ Refer to Q. 91, Page 100 B
109. (D) Draw a labelled diagram of a moving coil •Q
galvanometer. Describe briefly its principle Q S
•P
and working.
Ι 1
(E) Answer the following : 2
3
(L) Why is it necessary to introduce a
cylindrical soft iron core inside the coil
of a galvanometer?
(LL) Increasing the current sensitivity of a D E
galvanometer may not necessarily Let the current flowing through each
increase its voltage sensitivity. Explain, turn of the toroid be I. The total number
giving reason. (All India) of turns equals Q(2πU) where Q is the
Ans. (D) 0RYLQJ FRLO JDOYDQRPHWHU Refer to Q. 111,

a s number of turns per unit length.

iv D
Page 109-110 Applying Ampere’s circuital law, for the
Amperian loop, for interior points.

Sh
(E) (L) ,URQ FRUH LQ JDOYDQRPHWHU The cylindrical
soft iron core, when placed inside the coil →→
∫
of a galvanometer, makes the magnetic B . GO = μ 0 (Q2 πUI)
field stronger and radial in the space
between it and pole pieces, such that ⇒ ∫ BGO cos θ = μ 0 Q2πUI

whatever the position of the rotation of ⇒ B × 2πU = μ0Q2πUI ⇒ B = μ0QI
the coil may be, the magnetic field is
This is the expression for magnetic field
always parallel to its plane.
inside air-cored toroid.
(LL) &XUUHQW VHQVLWLYLW\ DQG YROWDJH
(E) (L) Depiction of magnetic field for a sole-
VHQVLWLYLW\ Refer to Q. 66 (E), Page 93
noid.

110. (D) State Ampere’s circuital law. Use this law to

obtain the expression for the magnetic field
inside an air cored toroid of average radius
‘U’, having ‘Q’ turns per unit length and (LL) The solenoid contains N loops, each car-
carrying a steady current I. rying a current I. Therefore, each loop
(E) acts as a magnetic dipole. The magnetic
A
moment for a current I, flowing in loop
of area (vector) A is given by, P = IA.
The magnetic moments of all loops are
aligned along the same direction.
N
Hence, net magnetic moment equals
An observer to the left of a solenoid of N NIA.
111. Explain, using a labelled diagram, the principle
turns each of cross section area ‘A’ observes
and working of a moving coil galvanometer.
that a steady current I in it flows in the (D) What is the function of (L) uniform radial
clockwise direction. Depict the magnetic magnetic field, (LL) soft iron core?
field lines due to the solenoid specifying its
 110 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(E) Define the terms (L) current sensitivity and when unit current is passed through its coil.
(LL) voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer. φ QBA
Is = = radian/ampere or division A–1
Why does increasing the current sensitivity I N
not necessarily increase voltage sensitivity? ⎡ Q = Number of turns in the galvanometer.
(All India) ⎢
…where ⎢ N = Restoring couple per unit twist or
Ans. 3ULQFLSOH  ´,I D FXUUHQW FDUU\LQJ FRLO LV IUHHO\ ⎢⎣ torsional constant.
VXVSHQGHGSLYRWHG LQ D XQLIRUP PDJQHWLF ILHOG LW (LL) Voltage sensitivity is defined as the
H[SHULHQFHV D GHIOHFWLQJ WRUTXHµ
deflection produced in the galvanometer
:RUNLQJAs the pivoted coil is placed in a radial
when unit voltage is applied across the
magnetic field, hence on passing current I
through it, a deflecting torque acts on the coil coil of the galvanometer.
which is given by, φ
Vs = V = ⎛⎜ N ⎞⎟ × R radian/volt or div. V–1
QBA 1
τ = NAIB  ⎝ ⎠
… where ⎡ N = total number of turns in the coil, …where [R = Resistance of the coil
⎢ A = area of coil, B = magnetic field.
⎣ I
The spring SS attached to the coil provides the Since Vs = s , increase in current sensitivity
R
counter torque and in equilibrium state balances
does not necessarily increase the voltage
the deflecting torque. If φ is steady angular
sensitivity. It may be affected by the
deflection then counter torque is Nφ.
…where [N = torsional constant of the spring resistance used.
112. (D) Write, using Biot-Savart law, the expression
Scale →
for the magnetic field B due to an element
→ →
Pointer Permanent magnet dO carrying current I at a distance U from it
↑

in a vector form.
Coil

a s Hence derive the expression for the magnetic

iv D
Sp field due to a current carrying loop of radius
N S R at a point P distant [from its centre along

Sh
the axis of the loop.
(E) Explain how Biot-Savart law enables one to
Soft-iron
core Pivot express the Ampere’s circuital law in the
Uniform radial magnetic field
integral form, viz.,
→→
∫
In equilibrium state, B . dO = μ 0I
⇒ φ = ⎛⎜
NAB ⎞
N ⎟⎠
NAIB = Nφ I …where [I is the total current passing
⎝
 through the surface.
Thus, deflection is directly proportional to the (All India)
current flowing in the coil. Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 96, Page 101
(D) (L) Uniform radial magnetic field. It keeps (E) Biot-Savart law can be expressed as
the magnetic field line normal to the area Ampere’s Circuital law by considering the
vector of the coil. surface to be made up of a large number of
(LL) Soft iron core in galvanometer. The loops. The sum of the tangential components
cylindrical soft iron core, when placed of the magnetic field multiplied by the length
inside the coil of a galvanometer, makes of all such elements leads to integral.
the magnetic field stronger and radial in Ampere’s circuital law states that this
the space between it and pole pieces, integral is equal to μ0 times the total current
such that whatever the position of the passing through that surface, LH,
rotation of the coil may be, the magnetic → →
field is always parallel to its plane. ∫

B . GO = μ0 I
(E) (L) Current sensitivity is defined as the


deflection produced in the galvanometer
 Chapter 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER 111

5. Magnetism and Matter

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Bar magnet. When a bar magnet is freely suspended, its poles point approximately towards the geographic north and south
poles respectively.
2. Magnetic field lines:
(i) The magnetic field lines of a magnet are imaginary lines making closed continuous loop.
→
(ii) The tangent to the field line at a given point represents the direction of the net magnetic field B at that point.
3. Magnetic flux (φ)
4. Magnetic moment (M)
→
5. Magnetic field due to a bar magnet. Consider a bar magnet of size l and magnetic moment M , at a distance r from its mid-
→
point, where r >> l, the magnetic field B due to this bar magnet is,
→ →
→ μ0 2 M μ0 M
B = . = . …(along axis)
4π r 3 2π r 3

→
→ μ0 M
B = …(along equator)
4 πr 3

a s
6. Gauss’s law for magnetism. The net magnetic flux through any closed surface is zero

iv D
→ →
∴ φB = ∑ B . Δ S = 0

Sh
→ → → →
7. Torque on a dipole in vector form is given by | τ | = M . B , | τ | = MB sin θ
→ →
8. Potential energy of a magnetic dipole is given by U = – M . B = – MB cos θ
9. The Dipole Analog
S. No. Electrostatics Magnetism
1/ε0 μ0
→ →
1. Dipole moment p M
→ →
2. Equatorial field for a short dipole – p /4πε0r3 – μ0 M /4πr3
→ →
3. Axial field for a short dipole 2 p /4πε0r3 μ02 M /4πr3
→ → → →
4. External field : Torque p× E M× B

→ → → →
5. External field : Energy – p . E – M. B

10. Elements of earth’s magnetic field. The physical quantities which describe the earth’s magnetic field are called elements of
earth’s magnetism.
These three quantities are (i) the horizontal component (ii) the magnetic declination and (iii) the magnetic dip.
11. Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field. If B is intensity of the earth’s total magnetic field and BH and BV are the
horizontal and vertical components of the earth’s magnetic field respectively, then
BH = B cos δ and BV = B sin δ
2 2
Such that B = BH + B V …where [δ be the magnetic dip]
12. Magnetic declination. It is the angle between the geographic meridian and the magnetic meridian at a place on the earth. It
is denoted by θ.
13. Magnetic inclination (dip). It is the angle between the direction of the intensity of the total earth’s magnetic field and the
horizontal. It is denoted by δ.

Chapter 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER 111

112 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

14. Magnetic intensity. The magnetic intensity is given by

→
→ B0 →
H = …where [ B 0 is an external magnetic field]
μ0
→ → → → →
15. Relation between B , H and M . Let M be the magnetisation of the material in its dipole moment per unit volume and H be
→
the magnetic intensity, then the magnetic field B in the material is
→ → →
B = μ0 ( H + M )
16. Magnetic permeability. The magnetic permeability of a material is defined as the ratio of the magnetic induction (B) of the
B
material to the strength of magnetic field (H). It is given by μ =
H
The SI unit of μ is Tm A–1
μ
If μ0 is the absolute permeability of free space, then μr =
μ0
17. Magnetic susceptibility. It is defined as the ratio of the intensity of magnetisation (I) and the strength of the magnetic field (H).
I
It is given by χm =
H
It has no unit.

RELATIONS : (i) μ = μ0(1 + χm) (ii) μr = 1 + χm

18. Magnetic materials. Magnetic materials are classified into three categories as diamagnetic, paramagnetic and ferromagnetic
materials.
(i) For diamagnetic materials χ is negative and small.
(ii) For paramagnetic materials χ is positive and small.
(iii) For ferromagnetic materials, χ is positive and large.

a s
19. Curie law. It states that “magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic substance is inversely proportional to the absolute

iv D
temperature T.”

Sh
1
∴ χm ∝ ⇒ χm T = Constant
T

UNITS USED

S.No. Magnetic Quantity Dimensions Conversion factor

1. Magnetic flux [φ] M1L2T–2A–1 1 Weber = 108 maxwell

2. Magnetic Field density [B] M1L0T–2A–1 1 Tesla = 104 gauss
3. Magnetic permeability [μ] M1L2T–3A–1 1 henry m–1 = 9 × 109 Stat henry cm–1
4. Magnetic intensity [H] M0L–1T0A1 1 ampere turn per metre = 4π × 10–3 orsted
5. Pole strength [m] M0L1T0A1 1 Am = 3 × 1011 stat ampere cm
6. Magnetic moment [M] M0L2T0A1 1 Am2 = 3 × 1013 stat ampere cm–2
7. Intensity of magnetisation [I] M0L–1T0A1 1 Am–1 = 3 × 107 stat ampere cm–1
8. Magnetomotive force [Fm] M0L0T0A1 1 ampere turn = 3 × 109 stat ampere turn
 Chapter 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER 113

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

9. A straight wire extending from east to west falls
Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) with a speed Y at right angles to the horizontal
(1 Mark) component of the Earth’s magnetic field. Which
end of the wire would be at the higher electrical
1. The permeability of a magnetic material is potential and why? (Comptt. Delhi)
0.9983. Name the type of magnetic materials it Ans. West end of the wire must be at higher electric
represents. (Delhi) potential. According to )OHPLQJ·V 5LJKW +DQG UXOH
Ans. It represents GLDPDJQHWLF PDWHULDOV. ´WKH GLUHFWLRQ RI LQGXFHG HPI LV IURP :HVW WR (DVWµ.
2. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 1.9 ×
10–5. Name the type of magnetic materials it
10. What are permanent magnets? Give RQH example.
represents. (Delhi)
(Delhi)
Ans. It represents 3DUDPDJQHWLF VXEVWDQFH
Ans. Substances which at room temperature retain their
3. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is – 4.2
ferromagnetic property for a long period of time
× 10–6. Name the type of magnetic materials it
are called SHUPDQHQWPDJQHWV
represents. (Delhi)
([DPSOH Steel, alinco
Ans. It represents GLDPDJQHWLF VXEVWDQFHV.
11. Which of the following substances are
4. Where on the surface of Earth is the angle of dip diamagnetic?
90°? (All India) Bi, Al, Na, Cu, Ca and Ni (Delhi)
Ans. At the magnetic poles, the angle of dip is 90° on Ans. Bi and Cu
the surface of Earth. 12. Which of the following substances are para-
5. Where on the surface of Earth is the angle of dip magnetic ?
zero? (All India)

a s Bi, Al, Cu, Ca, Pb, Ni (Delhi)

iv D
Ans. At the magnetic equator, the angle of dip is 0°. Ans. Al and Ca are para-magnetic.
6. Where on the surface of Earth is the vertical

Sh
13. Is the steady electric current the only source of
component of Earth’s magnetic field zero? magnetic field? Justify your answer.
(All India) (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. At the 0DJQHWLFHTXDWRUthe vertical component of Ans. No. Steady current is not the only source of mag-
Earth’s magnetic field is zero. netic field. Magnets are also source of magnetic field.
Unsteady current will also be source of varying
magnetic field.
7. The horizontal component of the earth’s 14. Where on the surface of Earth is the vertical com-
magnetic field at a place is B and angle of dip is ponent of Earth’s magnetic field zero?
60°. What is the value of vertical component of (Comptt. Delhi)
earth’s magnetic field at equator? (Delhi) Ans. At the (TXDWRUthe vertical component of the Earth’s
Ans. BH = B cos δ ΒV = B sin δ magnetic field is zero.
BV = BH tan δ = B tan 60° = B × 3 = 3 B 15. Where on the surface of Earth is the horizontal
component of Earth’s magnetic field zero?
∴ At equator, BV = 0 (zero)
(Comptt. Delhi)
8. Current flows through a circular loop. Depict
Ans. At poles of Earth the horizontal component of
the north and south pole of its equivalent mag-
Earth’s magnetic field is zero.
netic dipole. (Comptt. Delhi)
16. Where on the surface of Earth is the Earth’s
Ans. Direction of the magnetic field lines is given by magnetic field perpendicular to the surface of
right hand WKXPE UXOH the Earth? (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. $W SROHV RI WKH (DUWK. The Earth’s magnetic field
is perpendicular to the surface of the Earth.
North South 17. The motion of copper plate is damped when it
is allowed to oscillate between the two poles of
a magnet. What is the cause of this damping?
(All India)
Ans. The cause of this damping is HGG\ FXUUHQW
0DJQHWLF ILHOG OLQHV
 114 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Also, it is the ratio of intensity of

18. Relative permeability of a material, μU = 0.5. magnetisation (I) produced in the material
Identify the nature of the magnetic material and to the intensity of magnetising field (H)
write its relation to magnetic susceptibility. I
(Comptt. Delhi) χP =
H
Ans. (L) Diamagnetic material
(LL) Positive susceptibility : SDUDPDJQHWLF
(LL) μU = 1 + XP
PDWHULDO
19. Relative permeability of a material μr = 400.
Identify the nature of the magnetic material ([DPSOH Al, Ca.
(Comptt. Delhi) Negative susceptibility : GLDPDJQHWLF
Ans. It is Ferromagnetic. PDWHULDO
20. Relative permeability (μ μU ) of a material has a ([DPSOH Bi, Cu.
value lying 1 < μU < 1 + ε (where ε is a small (LLL) Negative susceptibility signifies that the
quantity). Identify the nature of the magnetic material is diamagnetic in nature.
material. (Comptt. Delhi) 24. The figure shows the I
Ans. Substance : Paramagnetic variation of intensity of B
magnetisation versus the A
applied magnetic field
21. In what way is the behaviour of a diamagnetic intensity, H, for two magnetic
material different from that of a paramagnetic, H
materials A and B :
when kept in an external magnetic field? (D) Identify the materials A and B.
(All India) (E) Why does the material B, has a larger sus-
Ans. (L) A diamagnetic specimen would move ceptibility than A, for a given field at con-
towards the weaker region of the field; while stant temperature? (All India)
a paramagnetic specimen would move
I
towards the stronger region.

a sAns. (D) As χP =
H

iv D
(LL) A diamagnetic specimen is repelled by a
Slope of the line gives magnetic susce-
magnet while a paramagnetic specimen
ptibilities.

Sh
moves towards the magnet.
For magnetic PDWHULDO %, it is giving higher
(LLL) The paramagnetic gets aligned along the field
+ve value.
and the diamagnetic perpendicular to the field. So material is ¶IHUURPDJQHWLF·
For magnetic PDWHULDO $ it is giving lesser
+ve value than ‘B’.
22. At a place, the horizontal component of earth’s
So material is ¶SDUDPDJQHWLF·
magnetic field is B and angle of dip is 60o. What
(E) Larger susceptibility is due to characteristic
is the value of horizontal component of the
‘domain structure’. More number of mag-
earth’s magnetic field at the equator? (Delhi)
netic moments get aligned in the direction of
Ans. BH = BE cos δ Q 4BH = B (Given) magnetising field in comparision to that for
1 paramagnetic materials for the same value of
B = BE cos 60˚ ⇒ B = BE × ⇒ BE = 2B
2 magnetising field.
At equator, δ = 0˚ ∴ BH = 2B (cos 0) = 2B (1)
= 2B
25. (L) Write WZR characteristics of a material used
Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I) for making permanent magnets.
(LL) Why is core of an electromagnet made of
(2 Marks)
ferromagnetic materials? (Delhi)
Ans. (L) 7ZRFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDPDWHULDOXVHGIRUPDNLQJ
23. Define magnetic susceptibility of a material. SHUPDQHQW PDJQHWV DUH 
Name WZR elements, RQH having positive (D) High retentivity so that it produces a
susceptibility and the other having negative strong magnetic field.
susceptibility. What does negative susceptibility (E) High coercivity so that its magnetisation
signify? (Delhi) is not destroyed by strong magnetic
Ans. (L) Magnetic susceptibility (χP) : It is the fields, temperature variations or minor
property of a material which determines mechanical damage.
how easily it can be magnetised when kept (LL) The core of electromagnet is made of
in a magnetising field. ferromagnetic materials because they have
 Chapter 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER 115

high initial permeability so that (LL) In a non-uniform magnetic field, they tend to
magnetisation is large even for a small move slowly from weaker to stronger parts
magnetising field and low resistivity to of the field.
reduce losses due to eddy currents. 30. The relative magnetic permeability of a
26. Draw magnetic field lines when a (L) diamagnetic, magnetic material is 800. Identify the nature of
(LL) paramagnetic substance is placed in an external magnetic material and state its WZR properties.
magnetic field. Which magnetic property (Delhi)
distinguishes this behaviour of the field lines due Ans. Substance is IHUURPDJQHWLF
to the two substances? (Delhi) ,WV SURSHUWLHV DUH 
Ans. (L) When a diamagnetic (L) They are strongly attracted by magnets.
material is placed in an N S (LL) In a non-uniform magnetic field, they tend to
external magnetic field. move quickly from weaker to stronger parts
(LL) When a paramagnetic of the field.
material is placed in an 'LDPDJQHWLF
31. A circular coil of N turns and radius R carries a
external magnetic field. current I. It is unwound and rewound to make
Magnetic susceptibility another coil of radius R/2, current I remaining
N S
distinguishes this the same. Calculate the ratio of the magnetic
behaviour of the field moments of the new coil and the original coil.
lines due to the two 3DUDPDJQHWLF (All India)
substances. Ans. Magnetic moment N1.2πR = N2.2π(R/2)
= NIA = N1IπU2 N2 = 2N1
When radius of another coil = R/2
27. A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical Then Magnetic moment of new coil
plane parallel to the magnetic meridian has its 2
north tip down at 60° with the horizontal. The ⎛ R⎞ R2
= N2I × π ⎜ = N2 I × π

s
⎟
⎝ 2⎠

a
horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic 4

iv D
field at the place is known to be 0.4 G. Magnetic moment of new coil
Determine the magnitude of the earth’s ∴
Magnetic moment of original coil

Sh
magnetic field at the place. (Delhi)
2 N1I × πR 2/4 1
Ans. Given : δ = 60°, H = 0.4 G, R=? = = ∴ Ratio = 1 : 2
N1I × πR 2 2
As H = R cos δ
32. A circular coil of N turns and diameter ‘G’ carries
H 0.4 0.4
R= = ∴ R= = 0.8 G a current ‘I’. It is unwound and rewound to
cos δ cos 60° 1
2 make another coil of diameter ‘2G’, current ‘I’
remaining the same. Calculate the ratio of the
magnetic moments of the new coil and the
28. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is – 2.6
× 10–5. Identify the type of magnetic material original coil. (All India)
and state its WZR properties. (Delhi) Ans. Magnetic moment of the coil is given by M = NIA
where [A = πU2]
Ans. Magnetic material is diamagnetic, because
2
susceptibility of a magnetic material is in G1
1st case : M1 = N1Iπ ,
negative.  4
2
3URSHUWLHV DUH  G2
(L) In a non-uniform magnetic field, it tends to 2nd case : M2 = N2Iπ
 4
move slowly from stronger to weaker parts But as given, Ist coil is rewound to make new coil.
of the field. So, N1(2πU1) = N2(2πU2) or N1G1 = N2G2
(LL) A freely suspended diamagnetic rod aligns from given condition G2 = 2G1
itself perpendicular to the field. ⇒ N1G1 = N2(2G1) ⇒ N1 = 2N2
(LLL) They expel magnetic field lines. Ratio of M1 and M2 will be,
(LY) Such substances are repelled by a magnet. 2 2
M1 N IπG / 4 2N 2 × G1 2 1
[DQ\ WZR] = 1 12 = 2
= =
M2 N 2 IπG2 / 4 N
 2 ( 2 G ) 4 2
29. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 2.6 × 
10–5. Identify the type of magnetic material and ∴ M1 : M 2 = 1 : 2
state its WZR properties. (Delhi) 33. (D) How does a diamagnetic material behave
Ans. The material is SDUDPDJQHWLF when it is cooled to very low temperatures?
,WV WZR SURSHUWLHV DUH  (E) Why does a paramagnetic sample display
(L) They are feebly attracted by magnets. greater magnetisation when cooled? Explain.
(Comptt. Delhi)
 116 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (D) When diamagnetic material is cooled to very ratio of the magnetic moments of the square coil
low temperature then it exhibits both perfect and the circular coil. (Comptt. Delhi)
conductivity and perfect diamagnetism. Ans. Magnetic moment due to a circular coil,
(E) This is because at lower temperature, the NIA = NI (πR2) …(L)
tendency to disrupt the alignment of dipoles Magnetic moment due to square coil,
(due to magnetising field) decreases on account 2
2 πR ⎞
of reduced random thermal motion. NIA = NI ⎛⎜ ⎟
⎝ 4 ⎠
34. State WZRcharacteristic properties distinguishing
the behaviour of paramagnetic and diamagnetic Q Circumference of a circle of radius is 2πR,
materials. (Comptt. All India) which makes 4 sides of a square
Ans. 3DUDPDJQHWLF 'LDPDJQHWLF 2 πR πR
Hence one side of a square = =
4 2
(L) Susceptibility is small Susceptibility is small
and positive, LH 0 < χP and negative, LH–1 ≤ NI( π 2 R 2 )
< ε (where ε is a small χ P < 0 for diamag- ( M)sq 4
Ratio = =
number) for paramag- netic. ( M)cir NI( πR 2 )
netic.
π 3.14 32 4
(LL) Paramagnetic materials Diamagnetic materi- = = = = = 4 : 5 [Q 3.14 ≈ 3.2
4 4 40 5
are feebly attracted by als are feebly repelled
by magnets. 38. Depict the behaviour of magnetic field lines
magnets.
when (L) a diamagnetic material and (LL) a para-
35. State WZR characteristic properties distinguish- magnetic material is placed in an external mag-
ing the behaviour of diamagnetic and ferromag- netic field. Mention briefly the properties of
netic materials. (Comptt. All India) these materials which explain this distinguish-
Ans. 'LDPDJQHWLF )HUURPDJQHWLF ing behaviour. (Comptt. All India)
PDWHULDO PDWHULDO

a s
Ans. 'LDPDJQHWLF PDWHULDOV Diamagnetic materials

iv D
(L) Relative magnetic Relative magnetic per- are those which have tendency to move from
stronger to the weaker part of the external mag-

Sh
permeability of dia- meability of ferro-
magnetic substances is magnetic materials is netic field.
always less than unity, very large ([DPSOHV Bismuth, copper, lead and silicon.
LH μU < 1. (= 103 to 105). 3URSHUWLHV 
(LL) The susceptibility of (L) When a rod of diamagnetic material is sus-
The susceptibility of
d i a m a g n e t i c pended inside a magnetic field, it slowly
ferromagnetic materi-
substances has a small sets itself at right angles to the direction of
als is very large
–ve value : field.
χP > 1
μU < 1 ⇒ –1 ≤ χP ≤ 0 (LL) When a diamagnetic material is placed
inside a magnetic field, the magnetic field
36. Write WZRcharacteristic properties each to select lines become slightly less dense in the
materials suitable for (L) permanent magnets and diamagnetic material.
(LL) electromagnets. (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Properties of a material—
(D) )RU PDNLQJ D SHUPDQHQW PDJQHW
(L) High retentivity
(LL) High coercivity
(LLL) High permeability (LLL) For diamagnetic material :
(E) )RU PDNLQJ DQ HOHFWURPDJQHW
– 1 ≤ χP < 0, 0 ≤ μU < 1, μ < μ0
(L) High permeability
⎡χ is magnetic susceptibility, μU is relative magnetic
(LL) Low retentivity where ⎢permeability and μ is permeability
⎢ in vacuum.
(LLL) Low coercivity ⎣ 0

3DUDPDJQHWLFPDWHULDOV Paramagnetic materials

are those which get weakly magnetised when
37. A coil of ‘N’ turns and radius ‘R’ carries a cur- placed in an external magnetic field. They have
rent ‘I’. It is unwound and rewound to make a tendency to move from a region of weak
square coil of side ‘D’ having same number of magnetic field to strong magnetic field.
turns (N). Keeping the current ‘I’ same, find the ([DPSOHV Aluminium, sodium, calcium and
oxygen.
 Chapter 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER 117

3URSHUWLHV  (E) Write WZR properties of a material which

(L) When a rod of paramagnetic material is make it suitable for making electromagnets.
suspended inside a magnetic field, it slowly (Comptt. All India)
sets itself parallel to the direction of the Ans. (D) A permanent magnet is prepared from a
magnetic field. ferromagnetic material, which retains
(LL) When a paramagnetic material is placed magnetic properties for a long time at room
inside a magnetic field, the magnetic field temperature while
lines become slightly more dense in the • an electromagnet consists of a core made of
paramagnetic material. a ferromagnetic material placed inside a
solenoid. It behaves like a permanent magnet
as long as a current flows through it.
(E) Properties of material :
(L) high permeability
(LLL) The magnetic susceptibility ‘χP’ of a (LL) low retentivity
paramagnetic material has a small positive (LLL) low coercivity (DQ\ WZR)
value, LH 0 < χP < ε.

42. Write WZR properties of a material suitable for

39. Out of the two magnetic materials, ‘A’ has making (D) a permanent magnet, and (E) an
relative permeability slightly greater than unity electromagnet. (All India)
while ‘B’ has less than unity. Identify the nature Ans. Refer to Q. 36, Page 116
of the materials ‘A’ and ‘B’. Will their 43. Depict the behaviour of magnetic field lines
susceptibilities be positive or negative? (Delhi) near (L) diamagnetic and (LL) paramagnetic
Ans. ‘A’ is paramagnetic substances. Justify, giving reasons.
‘B’ is diamagnetic

a s (Comptt. Delhi)

iv D
The susceptibility of material ‘A’ is positive while Ans. Behaviour of magnetic lines of force near
of ‘B’ is negative. (L) diamagnetic substances

Sh
40. Show diagrammmatically the behaviour of
magnetic field lines in the presence of
(L) paramagnetic and
(LL) diamagnetic substances.
How does one explain this distinguishing
feature? (All India)
Ans. (L) Paramagnetic substance
(LL) paramagnetic substances

(LL) Diamagnetic substance

Justification : The field lines are repelled or

expelled and the field inside the material is
reduced near diamagnetic substances.
In the presence of magnetic field, the individual
The range of relative magnetic permeability (μU) atomic dipoles can get aligned in the direction of
of paramagnetic substance is μU > 1 the applied magnetic field. Therefore, field lines
while for diamagnetic substance, it is μU < 1. get concentrated inside the material and the field
41. (D) How is an electromagnet different from a inside is enhanced near paramagnetic substances.
permanent magnet?


118 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

nit 4
ELECTR0MAGNETIC INDUCTION
AND ALTERNATING CURRENTS
6. Electromagnetic Induction

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Magnetic flux. The number of magnetic field lines crossing a surface normally is called magnetic flux (φ) linked with the surface.
→ → → →

s
∴ φ = B . A = BA cos θ where [θ is the angle between magnetic field B and surface area A .]
The SI unit of magnetic flux is Weber (Wb).

iv D a
2. Faraday’s law of induction. It states “that the emf induced in a coil of N turns is directly related to the rate of change of flux through

Sh
it.”

dφ B ⎡ φB is the flux linked with one turn of the coil. If the

∴ ε = –N where ⎢ ε
dt ⎢ circuit is closed, a current I =
⎣
is set up in it.
R
3. Lenz’s law. It states “that the induced current produced in a circuit always flows in such a direction that it opposes the change
or the cause that produces it.” It is used to find the direction of the induced current.
4. Motional electromotive force. When a conductor of length l is placed normal to a uniform magnetic field B and moved with a velocity
v perpendicular to the field, the induced emf (motional emf) across its ends is, ε = Bl v
5. Eddy currents. The currents induced in the body of a conductor, when the magnetic flux linked with the conductor changes,
are called eddy currents or Focault’s currents.
The direction of eddy currents can be found by using Lenz’s law or Fleming’s right hand rule.
Nφ B
6. Inductance. It is the ratio of the flux-linkage to current. It is equal to . It is a scalar quantity. The SI unit of inductance
I
is henry.
7. Mutual inductance. The mutual inductance of two coils is numerically equal to the induced emf produced in one coil, when
the rate of change of current is unit in the other coil.

dI
∴ ε1 = – M
dt
8. Mutual inductance of long solenoids. It is given by

⎡ l is the length of solenoid

M = μr μ0n1n2πr12l where ⎢
⎢⎣ n1, n2 are the number of turns of two coils.

⎡ l is the length of solenoid

or M = μ0n1n2l A where ⎢ n , n are the number of turns of two coils.
⎢⎣ 1 2

118 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 119

9. Self inductance. The self inductance of a coil is numerically equal to the induced emf produced in the coil, when the rate of
change of current in the coil is unit

dI
∴ ε = –L where [L is the self-inductance of the coil and its SI unit is henry.]
dt
10. Self inductance of a long solenoid. The self inductance of a long solenoid, the core of which consists of a magnetic material
of permeability μr is given by

⎡ A is the area of the cross-section of the solenoid

⎢
L = μr μ0n2Al where ⎢ l is length
⎢ n is the number of turns per unit length.
⎣

11. Magnetic energy stored in a solenoid. The magnetic energy stored in a solenoid placed in magnetic field B, area A and length
l is,

1
UB = B2Al
2μ0

12. A.C. generator. Alternating current (a.c.) generator is a device used to obtain a supply of alternating emf by converting
mechanical energy into electrical energy. It is based on the principle of electromagnetic induction. The instantaneous value of
emf is

⎡ N is number of turns of the coil,

⎢
ε = NBAω sin ωt where ⎢ A is the area of coil,
⎢ ω is angular frequency of rotation of the coil inside a magnetic field strength B
⎣

UNITS USED
Physical quantity Symbol

D a s Unit Dimensions
Magnetic flux
emf
Mutual inductance
Self inductance
S h i v φB
ε, E
M
L
Wb (Weber)
V (Volt)
H (Henry)
H (Henry)
[ML2T–2A–1]
[ML2T–3A–1]
[ML2T–2A–2]
[ML2T–2A–2]
 120 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) In metal ring 2, the induced current flows in the
DQWLFORFNZLVH GLUHFWLRQ
(1 Mark) 6. Predict the direction of
induced current in a metal
Y I
ring when the ring is
1. A plot of magnetic flux (φ φ) A
versus current (I) is shown in the φ moved towards a straight conductor with
figure for two inductors A and B constant speed Y. The conductor is carrying
B. Which of the two has larger current I in the direction shown in the figure.
value of self inductance? (Delhi) (Delhi)
I
φ Ans. &ORFNZLVH GLUHFWLRQ
Ans. Since φ = LI ∴ L= = slope
I 7. Predict the directions of
Slope of A is greater than slope of B induced current in metal rings 1
∴ Inductor A has larger value of self inductance 1 and 2 when current I in the I 2
than inductor B. wire is steadily decreasing?
2. Define self-inductance of a coil. Write its S.I. (Delhi)
unit. (All India) Ans. In metal ring 1, the induced current flows in
Ans. Self induction is the property of a coil by virtue of
$QWLFORFNZLVH direction.
which it opposes the growth or decay of the
In metal ring 2, the induced current flows in the
current flowing through it.
&ORFNZLVH direction.
S.I. unit of self-inductance is henry (H).
8. A bar magnet is moved in the direction
indicated by the arrow between two coils PQ

s
3. Two bar magnets are C and CD. Predict the directions of induced
quickly moved to- S
wards a metallic loop
N S N

iv D a current in each coil.

Q
(All India)

Sh
connected across P ⎯→ C D
a capacitor ‘C’ as shown in the figure. Predict the
polarity of the capacitor. (All India) N S
Ans. When both magnets A A A
C L
move towards loop, B
N N Ans. By Lenz’s law, the ends of both the coils closer to
the A side plate of S S
capacitor will be the magnet behave as south pole. Hence the
positive while the lower plate B is negative, current induced in both the coils will flow
making the induced current in a clockwise clockwise when seen from the magnet side.
direction. 9. State Lenz’s law. (Comptt. All India)
4. Predict the polarity of the capacitor when the Ans. Lenz’s law states that ´WKHSRODULW\RILQGXFHGHPILV
two magnets are quickly moved in the VXFKWKDWLWWHQGVWRSURGXFHDFXUUHQWZKLFKRSSRVHV
directions marked by arrows. (Delhi) WKHFKDQJHLQPDJQHWLFIOX[WKDWLQGXFHGLWµ.
A 10. Predict the direction b
B of the induced a
the × × F× × × × × ×
S N S N
current in
rectangular loop abcd × d× × × × × × ×
Ans. Curerent in the coil will be anti-clockwise, when as it is moved into the × × × × × × × ×
seen from the left, therefore plate A will become region of a uniform × × × × × × × ×
→
+ ve (positive) and plate B will be negative. magnetic field B × × × × × × × ×
directed normal to the plane of the loop.
(Comptt. All India)
5. Predict the directions of 1 Ans. The direction of the induced current in the given
induced currents in metal
2 I rectangular loop is anti-clockwise, LH cbadc.
rings 1 and 2 lying in the
11. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induc-
same plane where current I
tion. (Comptt. All India)
in the wire is increasing steadily. (Delhi)
Ans. Faraday’s law states that ´7KH PDJQLWXGH RI HPI
Ans. In metal ring 1, the induced current flows in the
LQGXFHGLQDFLUFXLWLVGLUHFWO\SURSRUWLRQDOWRWKHUDWH
FORFNZLVH GLUHFWLRQ
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 121

RI FKDQJH RI PDJQHWLF IOX[ OLQNHG ZLWK WKH FLUFXLWµ.

0DWKHPDWLFDOO\ we can write, 18. Two spherical bobs, one metallic and the other of
Gφ glass, of the same size are allowed to fall freely from
H= − φ is the small change in magnetic
…where [Gφ
 GW the same height above the ground. Which of the
flux in small time GW two would reach earlier and why? (Delhi)
Ans. Glass bob would reach earlier because there
would be a force acting upward due to eddy
12. How does the mutual inductance of a pair of currents on metallic bob being conducting, due to
coils change when earth’s magnetic field. This will slow down the
(L) distance between the coils is increased and metallic bob.
19. The electric current
(LL) number of turns in the coils is increased
flowing in a wire in
(All India) the direction from B to
Ans. (L) Mutual inductance GHFUHDVHV because flux A is decreasing. Find A B
linked with the secondary coil decreases. out the direction of the induced current in the
(LL) M = μ0Q1Q2Al, so when Q1 and Q2 increase, metallic loop kept above the wire as shown.
mutual inductance (M) LQFUHDVHV (All India)
13. A light metal disc on the top of an Ans. The direction of current in loop wire will be
electromagnet is thrown up as the current is clockwise.
switched on. Why? Give reason. (All India) 20. A conducting loop is held
Ans. Because of Eddy Current above a current carrying
If the upper force of the core of the electromagnet wire ‘PQ’ as shown in the
P Q
acquires north polarity, then according to Lenz’s figure. Depict the direct-
Law, the lower face of the disc will also acquire ion of the current induced in the loop when the
north polarity. Due to the force of repulsion current in the wire PQ is constantly increasing.
between the lower face (N-pole) of the core of the

a s (All India)

iv D
electromagnet, the disc jumps upto a certain Ans. The current induced is in clockwise direction.
height. 21. A conducting loop

Sh
Q
14. The motion of copper plate is damped when it is held below a P
is allowed to oscillate between the two poles of current carrying
a magnet. What do the cause of this damping? wire PQ as shown.
(All India) Predict the direction of the induced current in
Ans. The cause of this damping is eddy current. the loop when the current in the wire is
15. The motion of copper plates is damped when it constantly increasing. (All India)
is allowed to oscillate between the two poles of Ans. The current induced is in anti clockwise direction.
a magnet. If slots are cut in the plate, how will 22. A metallic piece gets hot when surrounded by
the damping be affected? (All India) a coil carrying high frequency alternating
Ans. Eddy current will decrease due to which current. Why? (Comptt. Delhi)
damping reduces. Ans. Due to the heating effect of eddy currents set up
16. How does the mutual inductance of a pair of in the metallic piece.
coils change when 23. Predict the polarity of the
(L) distance between the coils is decreased and plate A of the capacitor,
when a magnet is moved S N A
(LL) number of turns in the coils is decreased? B
towards it, as shown in the
(All India)
figure. (Comptt. All India)
Ans. (L) increases.
(LL) decreases, because Ans. The plate 'A' has the positive polarity.
M = P0Q1Q2AO
where [N1 and N2 are number of turns
17. Predict the polarity 24. Define the term ‘self-inductance’ of a coil. Write
of the capacitor in its S.I. Unit. (All India)
C Ans. The self inductance of a coil numerically equals to
the situation S N S N
←⎯
⎯
⎯⎯
←⎯ the induced emf produced in the coil, when the
described in the
rate of change of current in the coil is unity.
figure.
GI
(Comptt. Delhi) H = –L
GW
Ans. Refer to Q. 3, Page 120 (where L is the self inductance of the coil)
S.I. Unit : Henry.
 122 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. The polarity of plate is positive; 1while that of

25. Name any two applications where eddy currents plate B is negative.
are used to advantage. (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. $SSOLFDWLRQV RI (GG\ FXUUHQWV  Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I)
(L) Electromagnetic Damping
(2 Marks)
(LL) Magnetic Breaking
(LLL) Induction Furnace
(LY) Electric Power metres (DQ\ WZR) 31. Derive an expression for the self-inductance of a
long air-cored solenoid of length O and number
of turns N. (Delhi)
26. A long straight current carrying wire passes Ans. Consider a long solenoid of length O and radius U
normally through the centre of a circular loop. with U << O and having Q turns per unit length. If
If the current through the wire increases, will a current I flows through the coil, then the
there be an induced emf in the loop? Justify. magnetic field inside the coil is almost constant
(Delhi) and is given by
Ans. 1RAs the magnetic field due to current carrying B = μ0QI
wire will be in the plane of the circular loop, so Magnetic flux linked with each turn = BA = μ0QIA
magnetic flux will remain zero. …where [A = πU2 = cross-sectional area of the solenoid
27. Predict the ∴ Magnetic flux linked with the entire solenoid is
polarity of the A φ = Flux linked with each turn × Total
S N S N number of turns
capacitor in m B m
the situation = μ0QIA × QO = μ0Q2IAO
described in the given diagram. (All India) But φ = LI
Ans. The polarity of plate ‘A’ of the given capacitor is ∴ Self-inductance of the long solenoid is
L = μ0Q2OA
positive, while that of plate ‘B’ is negative.

a s If N is the total number of turns in the solenoid

iv D
28. A bar magnet is moved in the direction
indicated by the arrow between two coils PQ N
then Q =

Sh
and CD. Predict the direction of the induced  O
current in each coil (All India) μ 0N 2 A
∴ L=
 O
P Q C D

N S 32. (L) When primary coil P is moved towards

A A secondary coil S (as shown in the figure) the
galvanometer shows momentary deflection.
Ans. Induced current flows from P to Q through What can be done to have larger deflection
ammeter; in the galvanometer with the same battery?
while it flows from D to C through ammeter. S P
29. What is the direction ←
of induced currents in
1 – +
metal rings 1 and 2 G V
when current I in the I (LL) State the related law. (Delhi)
2
wire is increasing Ans. (L) To have larger deflection in the galvanometer
steadily? (All India) with the same battery, coil P has to be moved
Ans. The direction of induced current is clockwise in faster towards S so that rate of change of
metal ring ‘1’ and anti-clockwise in metal ring ‘2’. magnetic flux is more.
30. In the figure given, mark the polarity of plates (LL) The related law governing this phenomenon
A and B of a capacitor when the magnets are is )DUDGD\·V VHFRQG ODZ RI HOHFWURPDJQHWLF
quickly moved towards the coil. LQGXFWLRQ which states that induced emf is set
(Comptt. All India) up in a circuit when magnetic flux linked
A with it changes. The magnitude of induced
B emf is proportional to the rate of change of
S N S N magnetic flux.
33. A coil Q is connected to low voltage bulb B and
placed near another coil P as shown in the
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 123

figure. Give reasons to explain the following Ans. (D) To obtain a large deflection, one or more of
observations : the following steps can be taken :
a.c. Source
B (L) Use a rod made of soft iron inside the
coil C2.
(LL) Connect the coil to a powerful battery.
←⎯⎯⎯Q P (LLL) Move the arrangement rapidly towards
(D) The bulb ‘B’ lights. the test coil C1.
(E) Bulb gets dimmer if the coil Q is moved (E) Replace the galvanometer by a small torch
towards left. (Delhi) bulb.
Ans. (L) The bulb B lights on account of emf induced 37. A magnet is quickly moved in the direction
in the coil Q due to mutual induction indicated by an arrow between two coils C1 and
between P and Q. C2 as shown in the figure. What will be the
(LL) When coil Q is moved towards left, magnetic direction of induced current in each coil as seen
flux linked with Q decreases and may even from the magnet? Justify your answer. (Delhi)
reduce to zero at some distance. The emf C1
C2
induced may decrease and the bulb B gets
dimmer. N S
34. Two identical loops, one of copper and the other
of aluminium, are rotated with the same angular A
speed in the same magnetic field. Compare A
(L) the induced emf and (LL) the current produced
Ans. When magnet moves in given direction, induced
in the two coils. Justify your answer.(All India)
current will be clockwise in both the coils as
Ans. (L) Induced emf in a coil is ε = NBAω sin ωW
As the angular speed is same, induced emf magnet is going away from C1 and moving
towards C2 making C1 as S pole and C2 also as S

s
will also be same in both the loops.

a
pole according to /HQ] UXOH. So C1 will try to
ε εA

iv D
(LL) Current induced in a loop is I = = attract and C2 will try to repel the motion of
R
 ρO
magnet.

Sh
As the resistivity of copper is lesser, more 38. What are eddy currents? Write any WZR
amount of current is induced in it. applications of eddy currents. (All India)
35. A rectangular loop and
Ans. Refer to Q. 69 (D), Page 131
a circular loop are
moving out of a
uniform magnetic field Y Y
39. Define self-inductance of a coil. Show that
to a field-free region → magnetic energy required to build up the
with a constant velocity B current I in a coil of self inductance L is given
‘Y’ as shown in the figure. Explain in which loop
1
do you expect the induced emf to be constant by LI2. (Delhi)
2
during the passage out of the field region. The Ans. The self-inductance of a coil may be defined as
magnetic field is normal to the loops. (All India) the induced emf set up in the coil due to a unit
Ans. In case of rectangular loop, induced emf will be rate of change of current through it.
constant. It is because rate of change of the area of Let I be the current through the inductor L at any
rectangular loop is uniform whereas that of a instant W
circular loop is not constant. The current rises at the rate G,/GW, so the induced
G,
emf is H = – L
36. A current is in- C2 GW
C1 Work done against the induced emf in small time
duced in coil C1 GW is
due to the motion
GI
of current carry- G: = |H|IGW = LI GW = LIGI
ing coil C2. G GW
K
Total work done in building up the current from
(D) Write any WZR ways by which a large
0 to I in
deflection can be obtained in the
galvanometer G. 1 1 1
⎡ I2 ⎤ 1 2
(E) Suggest an alternative device to demons- := ∫ G: = ∫ ∫
LIGI = L IGI = L ⎢ ⎥ = LI
⎣ 2 ⎦0 2
trate the induced current in place of a  0 0
galvanometer. (Delhi)
 124 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

This work done is stored as the magnetic field the centre and the other end at the circumference
energy U in the inductor of a circular metallic ring of radius L, about an
1 axis passing through the centre and
∴ U= LI2 perpendicular to the plane of the ring. A
2
40. Define mutual inductance between two long constant and uniform magnetic field B parallel
coaxial solenoids. Find out the expression for to the axis is present everywhere. Deduce the
the mutual inductance of inner solenoid of expression for the emf between the centre and
length O having the radiusU1 and the number of the metallic ring. (Delhi)
turns Q1 per unit length due to the second outer Ans. The magnitude of the emf, generated across a
solenoid of same length and Q2 number of turns length GU of the rod, as it moves at right angles to
per unit length. (Delhi) the magnetic field, is given by
Ans. Mutual induction is the phenomenon of inducing Gε = BνGU
emf in a coil due to the rate of change of current R R BωR 2
∴ ε = ∫ Gε = ∫ BνGU = ∫ BωUGU =
in a nearby coil. 0 0 2

When a current I2 is set up through S2 (outer
O
solenoid), it in turn sets up a magnetic flux
through S1. Let us denote it by φ1. The Metallic ring
corresponding flux linkage with solenoid S1 is, →
R⎯
⎯
N1φ1 = M12I2 …(1) ω⎯
(Here N1 is total no. of turns with S1) ← θ = ωt P
O
M12 is referred to as coeficient of mutual
inductance.
U2
O $OWHUQDWLYHO\ The potential difference across the

a s resistor is equal to the induced emf and equal B ×

iv D
(rate of change of area of loop), If θ is the angle
between the rod and the radius of the circle at P

Sh
U1 S1 at time W, the area of the sector OPQ (as shown in
N1 turns the figure) is given by
S2
θ 1
N2 turns πU 2 × = R 2θ
 2π 2
The flux linkage with coil S1 is, where [R is the radius of the circle]
N1φ1 = (Q1O) (πU12) (μ0Q2I2) G ⎡1 2 ⎤ 1 Gθ BωR 2
= μ0Q1Q2πU12OI2 …(2) ε = B× ⎢ R θ ⎥ = BR 2 =
 GW ⎣ 2 ⎦ 2 GW 2
from equation (1)
42. Derive the expression for the self inductance of
M12 = μ0Q1Q2πU12O
a long solenoid of cross sectional area A and
Now consider reverse case
length O, having Q turns per unit length.(Delhi)
N2φ2 = M21I1 …(3)
Ans. 6HOILQGXFWLRQ RI D ORQJ VROHQRLG  Consider a
(Here N2 is total no. of turns with S2)
long solenoid of length O and radius U with U << O
M21 is referred to as coefficient of mutual and having Q turns per unit length. If a current I
inductance of solenoid S2 with respect to flows through the coil, then the magnetic field
solenoid S1. inside the coil is almost constant and is given by
Thus, flux linkage with solenoid S2 is B = μ0QI
N2φ2 = (Q2O) (πU12) (μ0Q1I1) …(4) Magnetic flux linked with each turn,
∴ from equation (3), we get BA = μ0QIA where [Q = number of turns per
M21 = μ0Q1Q2πU12O unit length, I = current flowing]
Using equations (2) and (3), we get When A = πU2
M12 = M21 = M = the cross-sectional area of the solenoid
If a medium of relative permeability μU had been ∴ Magnetic flux linked with the entire solenoid is,
present the mutual inductance would be φ = μ0QIA × QO = μ0Q2 IAO
But φ = LI
M = μUμ0Q1Q2πU12O ∴ Self inductance of the long solenoid is,
41. A metallic rod of ‘L’ length is rotated with L = μ0Q2AO
ω’ with one end hinged at
angular frequency of ‘ω
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 125

Ans. (L) emf induced

43. State Lenz’s Law. H = BOY = (0.2) × (20 × 10–2) × 15 V = 0.6 V
A metallic rod held horizontally along east-west H 0.6
(LL) Current in the loop, L = = = 0.12 A
direction, is allowed to fall under gravity. Will R 5
there be an emf induced at its ends? Justify your
answer. (Delhi) Short Answer Type Questions-II (SA-II)
Ans. Lenz’s law states that ´WKHSRODULW\RILQGXFHGHPILV (3 Marks)
VXFK WKDW LW WHQGV WR SURGXFH D FXUUHQW ZKLFK RSSRVH
WKH FKDQJH LQ PDJQHWLF IOX[ WKDW LQGXFHG LWµ
Yes there will be an emf induced as the horizontal 46. A metallic rod of length O is rotated at a constant
component of field of earth, velocity of the motion angular speed ω, normal to a uniform magnetic
of the rod and the length of the rod are all field B. Derive an expression for the current
perpendicular to each other. induced in the rod, if the resistance of the rod
The magnetic flux due to vertical component of is R. (Delhi)
Earth’s magnetic field keeps on changing as the Ans. emf produced/induced across a small section (GU)
metallic rod falls down. of the rod
Gε = BYGU
Gε = BUωGU [ Q Y = Uω]
44. A rectangular loop PQMN with movable arm
PQ of length 10 cm and resistance 2 Ω is placed
in a uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T acting N
W

⎯ ⎯⎯→
perpendicular to the plane of the loop as is
shown in the figure. The resistances of the arms
MN, NP and MQ are negligible. Calculate the θ GU
O U M U radius

s
(L) emf induced in the arm PQ and (LL) current O O length
induced in the loop when arm PQ is moved with
velocity 20 m/s. (Comptt. Delhi)

iv D a
Sh
×N × × × × × P× × ↑ Metallic ring
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × Y Net emf induced across the length ‘O’ of the rod
× × × × × × × × O
× × × × × × × × BωO 2
× × × × × × × ×
ε= ∫ BωUGU or ε=
 2
0
×M × × × × × Q× × If resistence of the rod is ‘R’, current induced is,
Ans. (L) emf induced ε BωO 2
I= = .
H = BOY = (0.1) × (10 × 10–2) × 20 V = 0.2 V R  2 R
H 0.2 47. An inductor 200 mH, capacitor 500 μF, resistor 10
(LL) Current in the loop, L = = = 0.1 A Ω are connected in series with a 100 V variable
R 2
45. A rectangular loop PQMN with movable arm PQ frequency a.c. source. Calculate the
of length 20 cm and resistance 5 Ω is placed in a (L) frequency at which the power factor of the
uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T acting perpendicular circuit is unity
to the plane of the loop as is shown in the figure. (LL) current amplitude at this frequency
(LLL) Q-factor (Delhi)
×N × × × × × P× × Ans. (L) Power factor will be unity at resonance,
× × × × × × × × R
because then Z = R and cos φ = =1
× × × × × × × × Y Z
× × × × × × × × ∴ IU =
1
× × × × × × × × 2 π LC
× × × × × × × × ...where [IU = frequency at resonance
×M × × × × × Q× × =
1
Hz
2 π 200 × 10 −3 × 500 × 10 −6
The resistances of the arms MN, NP and MQ are 1
negligible. Calculate the (L) emf induced in the arm = Hz
2 π 10 5 × 10 −9
PQ and (LL) current induced in the loop when arm
1 50
PQ is moved with velocity 15m/s (Comptt. Delhi) = = Hz
2 π × 10 −2 π
 126 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

ε0 2 ε UPV 1.414 × 100 LV HTXDO WR WKH UDWH RI FKDQJH RI PDJQHWLF IOX[
(LL) I0 = = = = 14.14 A OLQNHG ZLWK WKH FORVHG FLUFXLW
R R 10
(LLL) Q-factor Gφ
Mathematically |ε| =
1 L 1 200 × 10 −3 GW
Q= = (LL) Y = 1800 km/h in the west, O = 25 m, BR
R C 10 500 × 10 −6
= 5 × 10–4 tesla, δ = 30°
1 2 × 10 −1 20
= = =2 Since Y, O and B are to be perpendicular to get
10 5 × 10 −4 10
48. A coil of number of turns N, area A, is rotated at induced emf, the vertical component alone
a constant angular speed ω, in a uniform will contribute to the induction
magnetic field B, and connected to a resistor R. BV = BR sin δ = 5 × 10–4 × sin 30°
Deduce expressions for : = 2.5 × 10–4 tesla
(L) Maximum emf induced in the coil. The induced emf = – BV YO
(LL) Power dissipation in the coil. (Delhi) 1800 × 10 3
Ans. We know that induced emf = – 2.5 × 10–4 × × 25
3600
Gφ −G
(L) H = − or H = (NAB cos ωW) 62.5
 GW GW =– × 10–1 = – 3.125 volt
∴  H = NABω sin ωW ω]
…where [Hmax = NABω] 2
(LL) Power dissipation, – ve sign signifies that the emf will oppose
ε2 UPV N 2 A 2 B 2ω 2 sin 2 ZW the change in magnetic flux causing it.
P= = 51. State the law that gives the polarity of the
 R  R
Power dissipated over a complete cycle is, induced emf. (All India)
N 2 B 2 A 2ω 2 Ans. Law that gives the polarity of the induced emf is :
P=
2R /HQ]
VODZ´7KHGLUHFWLRQRILQGXFHGHPILVVXFK
WKDW LW RSSRVHV WKH FDXVH ZKLFK SURGXFHV LW 7KH

49. (D) Define self inductance. Write its S.I. units.

a s SRODULW\RILQGXFHGHPIFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\/HQ]·V
ODZµ

iv D
(E) Derive an expression for self inductance of
a long solenoid of length O, cross-sectional

Sh
area A having N number of turns. (Delhi) 52. A metallic rod of length ‘O’ is rotated with a
Ans. (D) 6HOILQGXFWDQFH RI D FRLO frequency Y with one end hinged at the centre
Since flux φ = LI and the other end at the circumference of a
Gφ GI circular metallic ring of radius U, about an axis
emf induced ε = – = −L
GW GW passing through the centre and perpendicular to
where [L is coefficient of self-induction the plane of the ring. A constant uniform
or self inductance] magnetic field B parallel to the axis is present
Self inductance is numerically equal to the every where. Using Lorentz force, explain how
magnetic flux linked with the coil when unit emf is induced between the centre and the
current passes through it. metallic ring and hence obtain the expression
Its S.I. unit is henry. for it. (Delhi)
(E) Refer to Q. 31, Page 122 Ans. Refer to Q. 41, Page 124
50. (L) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic 53. Starting from the expression for the energy
induction. 1
(LL) A jet plane is travelling towards west at a W = LI2, stored in a solenoid of self-
2
speed of 1800 km/h. What is the voltage inductance L to build up the current I, obtain the
difference developed between the ends of expression for the magnetic energy in terms of
the wing having a span of 25 m, if the the magnetic field B, area A and lengthO of the
Earth’s magnetic field at the location has a solenoid having Q number of turns per unit
magnitude of 5 × 10–4 T and the dip angle is length. Hence show that the energy density is
30°? (All India) μ 0.
given by B2/2μ (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. (L) )LUVW ODZ  :KHQHYHU WKH PDJQHWLF IOX[ OLQNHG
ZLWK D FORVHG FLUFXLW FKDQJHV DQ HPI DQG KHQFH 1 2
Ans. Given : W = LI
D FXUUHQW LV LQGXFHG LQ LW ZKLFK ODVWV RQO\ VR 2
ORQJ DV WKH FKDQJH LQ IOX[ LV WDNLQJ SODFH 7KLV Gφ GI
We know that H = –N Also H = – L
SKHQRPHQRQ LV FDOOHG HOHFWURPDJQHWLF LQGXFWLRQ GW GW
6HFRQGODZ7KHPDJQLWXGHRIWKHLQGXFHGHPI From these two equations, we get
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 127

NGφ / GW Nφ Ans. &RHIILFLHQW RI VHOI LQGXFWLRQ L

L= = (N = Q × O) Consider a coil L as shown in
 GI / GW I
Figure. Suppose a current I I
→
N( B • A) N(μ 0QI)A flows through the coil at any
⇒ L= = instant then magnetic flux φ
 I I E
linked with the coil is directly
QO(μ 0QI)A
⇒ L= = μ 0Q2 AO proportional to the current passing through it at
 I that instant.
1 2 1 ∴ φ∝I
Since magnetic energy = LI = (μ0Q2AO)I2
2 2 ⇒ φ = LI where [L is called coefficient of self induction.]
⇒ Expression for magnetic energy If I = 1, then φ = L
1 Thus, VHOI LQGXFWDQFH of a coil is numerically
= (μ Q2I2AO) equal to the magnetic flux linked with the coil,
2 0
when a unit current flows through it.
Energy
Energy density = The SI unit of self inductance is KHQU\ (H).
Volume ([SUHVVLRQ IRU VHOILQGXFWDQFH  Consider a long
1 μ 02Q2 I 2 ( AO) solenoid of length O and cross-sectional area A
= (V = AO) having Q turns per unit length.
2  μ 0 ( AO)
The magnetic field due to a current flowing in
=
1 (μ 0QI)2 the solenoid is B = μ0QI
2 μ 0 Total flux linked with the solenoid is,
φ = (QO ) (μ0QI) A = μ0Q2 AO I
B2
∴ Energy density = where [QO is the total number of turns.]
μ0
2μ
φ
Thus, the self inductance is, L =
54. A metallic rod of length ‘O’ is rotated with a
uniform angular speed ω, with one end hinged
a s I

iv D
μ 0 Q 2 AO I
at the centre and the other end at the = = μ0Q2 AO

Sh
circumference of a circular metallic ring of I
radius R = O, about an axis passing through the If we fill the inside of the solenoid with a
centre and perpendicular to the plane of the material of relative permeability μU
then, L = μU μ0 Q2 AO
ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field B
56. A wheel with 8 metallic spokes each 50 cm long
parallel to the axis is present everywhere.
is rotated with a speed of 120 rev/min in a plane
Deduce the expression for the emf induced in
normal to the horizontal component of the
the rod.
Earth’s magnetic field. The Earth’s magnetic
If U is the resistance of the rod and the metallic
field at the place is 0.4 G and the angle of dip
ring has negligible resistance, obtain the
is 60°. Calculate the emf induced between the
expression for the power generated.
axle and the rim of the wheel. How will the
(Comptt. All India)
value of emf be affected if the number of
Ans. Area swept per rotation = πR2 = πO2 [Q R = O
spokes were increased? (All India)
GA
Area swept in v rotation per sec = νπO2 = Ans. If a rod of length ‘O’ rotates with angular speed ω
 GW in the uniform magnetic field B,
GA
= νπO2 ω 1 2
 GW ε= BO ω
O=R 2
Gφ G
ε=– ⇒ ε= (BA) In case of earth’s magnetic field BH = |BH| cos δ
GW GW
and Bν = |BH| sin δ
GA
⇒ ε=B ⇒ ε = BνπO2 1
 GW ε = |BH| cos δO2ω
ω 1 2
⇒ ε=B × π/ O 2 ∴ ε = BO2ω
 /
2 π 2 1
= × 0.4 × 10–4 cos 60° × (0.5)2 × 2πν
55. Write its SI unit for self-inductance of a coil. 2
Derive the expression for self-inductance of a 1 1 ⎛ 120 rev ⎞
long solenoid of cross-sectional area ‘A’, length = × 0.4 × 10–4 × × (0.5)2 × 2π × ⎜ ⎟
2 2 ⎝ 60 sec ⎠
‘O’ having ‘Q’ turns per unit length.
= 10–5 × 0.25 × 2 × 3.14 × 2 = 3.14 × 10–5 volt
(Comptt. All India
 128 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

The induced emf will not change with the has a high value of relative permiability), then
increase in the number of spokes. L = μUμ0Q2AO
The self-inductance of the coil depends on its
geometry and on the permeability of the medium.
57. Define the term ‘mutual inductance’ between The self-induced emf is also called the EDFNHPIas
the two coils. it opposes any change in the current in a circuit.
Obtain the expression for mutual inductance of Physically, the VHOILQGXFWDQFH SOD\V WKH UROH RI
a pair of long coaxial solenoids each of length O LQHUWLD It is the electromagnetic analogue of mass
and radii U1 and U2 (U2 >> U1). Total number of in mechanics. So, work needs to be done against
turns in the two solenoids are N1 and N2 the back emf (ε) in establishing the current. This
respectively. (All India) work done is stored as magnetic potential energy.
Ans. (L) 0XWXDO LQGXFWDQFH The mutual inductance For the current I at an instant in a circuit, the rate
of two coils is numerically equal to the of work done is
induced emf produced in one coil, when the GW
rate of change of current is unit in the other =|ε|I
 GW
coil. If we ignore the resistive losses and consider only
GI
∴ ε1 = – M inductive effect,
GW then using
(LL) Refer to Q. 70 (E), Page 132
GI GW GI
58. Define the term self-inductance of a solenoid. ε = –L , = LI
GW
  GW GW
Obtain the expression for the magnetic energy Total amount of work done in establishing the
stored in an inductor of self-inductance L to current I is,
build up a current I through it. (All India) I
Ans. 6HOILQGXFWDQFHemf is induced in a single isolated 1
coil due to change of flux through the coil by
W= ∫ ∫
G: = LI GI = LI2
2
means of varying the current through the same

a s  0
Thus, the magnetic energy required to build up

iv D
coil. This phenomenon is called VHOILQGXFWLRQ In 1 2
this case, flux linkage through a coil of N turns is the current I is, W = LI

Sh
2
proportional to the current through the coil and is 59. (D) A rod of length O is moved horizontally with
expressed as a uniform velocity ‘Y’ in a direction
NφB ∝ I, NφB = LI perpendicular to its length through a region
where constant of proportionality L is called VHOI in which a uniform magnetic field is acting
LQGXFWDQFH of the coil. It is also called the FRHIILFLHQW vertically downward. Derive the expression
RI VHOILQGXFWLRQ of the coil. When the current is for the emf induced across the ends of the rod.
varied, the flux linked with the coil also changes (E) How does one understand this motional emf
and an emf is induced in the coil. Using the above by invoking the Lorentz force acting on the
equation the induced emf is given by free charge carriers of the conductor? Explain.
G( Nφ B ) GI (All India)
ε= or ε = – L Ans. (D) Induced emf in rotating metallic rod:
 GW GW Suppose a rectangular loop LMNO is placed
Thus, the self-induced emf always opposes any
in a uniform magnetic field B
change (increase or decrease) of current in the
X X X X X X
coil. It is possible to calculate the self-inductance L M
⎯→

for circuits with simple geometries. Let us X X X X X X

←⎯⎯

calculate the self-inductance of a long solenoid of

l

X X X X X X
cross-sectional area A and length O, having Q turns O N
per unit length. The magnetic field due to a X X X X X X
←⎯⎯⎯⎯→
current I flowing in the solenoid is B = μ0QI x
(neglecting edge effects, as before). The total flux Suppose at any instant, length ON = [
linked with the solenoid is Area of the loop LMNO = O [
NφB = (QO) (μ0QI) (A) = μ0Q2AOI Flux through the loop, φ = BO [
where [QO is the total number of turns. …[ Q Max flux, φ = BA]
Gφ G
Nφ B Induced emf, E = – =– BO[
Thus, the self-inductance is, L = = μ0Q2AO GW GW

I
G[
If we fill the inside of the solenoid with a material = – BO = BOY
of relative permeability μU (HJ soft iron, which GW
where ⎡⎢
G[
= – Y, that is the velocity of conductor MN.
⎣ GW
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 129

(E) The induced emf produced in a rod (O) coil changes from 0 to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is
moved with velocity (Y) kept in a magnetic the change of flux linkage with the other
field (perpendicular to the plane of length of coil? (Delhi)
the rod) is given by H = BOY …(L) Ans. (L) Mutual inductance : Magnetic flux, linked
This induced emf is called motional emf, by with the secondary coil due to the unit
moving a conductor instead of varying the current flowing in the primary coil, φ2 = MI1.
magnetic field; that is by changing the Therefore, induced emf associated with the
magnetic flux enclosed by the circuit. secondary coil, for a unit rate of change of
We can explain motional emf by invoking the
Lorentz force acting on the free charge GO1
current in the primary coil. H2 = – M
carriers of the conductor. GW
Lorentz force acting on charge T is [LH the phenomenon of production of
|F| = |TYB| …(LL) induced emf in one coil due to change in
The work done in moving the charge current in neighbouring coil]
through a distance ‘O’ is : W = TYBO (LL) Given : M = 1.5 H, I1 = 0, I2 = 20 A, ΔW =
Since the emf is the work done per unit 0.5 sec,  Gφ = ?
W TYBO Change in flux (Gφ) = MGI = M(I2 – I1) = 1.5
charge, H = = = BOY …(LLL) (20 – 0) = 30 Weber
 T T
62. (D) Define self-inductance of a coil and hence
This expression is the same as given in (L)
write the definition of ‘Henry’.
(E) Write any WZR factors each on which the
following depends :
60. Derive the expression for the magnetic energy
(L) Self inductance of a coil.
stored in a solenoid in terms of magnetic field B,
(LL) mutual inductance of a pair of coils.
area A and length O of the solenoid carrying a
(Comptt. All India)
steady current I. How does this magnetic energy

a s
Ans. (D) The self-inductance (L) of a coil equal the

iv D
per unit volume compare with the electrostatic
energy density stored in a parallel plate magnetic flux linked with it, when a unit
current flows through it.

Sh
capacitor? (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. Magnetic energy in a solenoid, 2QHKHQU\ is the self inductance of a coil for
which the magnetic flux, linked with it, due
GW G,
Rate of work done, = |ε| I = (LI) to a current of 1A, flowing in it, equals RQH
 GW GW ZHEHU.
Q GW = LIGI
(E) (L) Self inductance of a coil depends on
Total amount of work done,
• Its geometry (area and length of a coil.
1 2
∫ GW = ∫ LI GI ,

W=
2
LI • Number of turns
• Medium within the coil
For the solenoid, we know
(LL) Mutual inductance of a given pair of
Inductance, L = μ0Q2AO; also, B = μ0QI
2
coils depends on
1 2 1 ⎛ B ⎞ • Their geometries
∴ W = UB = LI = ( μ0Q2AO) ⎜
μ Q⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
2 2 • Their distance of separation
B 2 AO B2 V • Number of turns in each coil.
= =
2μ 0 μ0
2μ • Nature of medium in the intervening

Q Magnetic energy per unit volume (EM) space.
B2 1
= = B2 …(L)
2μ 0 2μ 0
63. (D) Define the term ‘self-inductance’ and write
The electrostatic energy stored per unit volume its S.I. unit.
for a parallel plate capacitor, (E) Obtain the expression for the mutual
1 inductance of two long co-axial solenoids
ES = ∈ E2 …(LL)
2 0 S1 and S2 wound one over the other, each of
These two expressions are similiar in nature. length L and radii U1 and U2 and Q1
and Q2 number of turns per unit length,
when a current I is set up in the outer
61. (L) Define mutual inductance. solenoid S2. (Delhi)
(LL) A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual Ans. (D) Self inductance of a coil, equals the
inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one magnitude of the emf induced in it, when
 130 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

the current in the coil, is changing at a unit

rate.
S.I. unit : henry
(E) Refer to Q. 76 (E) and (F), Pages 134-135
64. Define mutual inductance between a pair of
coils. Derive an expression for the mutual N

inductance of two long coaxial solenoids of (a)

same length wound one over the other.
(All India)
Ans. Refer to Q. 76 (D) and (E), Page 134
65. Define self-inductance of a coil. Obtain the
N
expression for the energy stored in an inductor
(b)
L connected across a source of emf.
(All India) As shown in the diagram (D) given, when the north
Ans. (L) Definition of self-inductance : Refer to pole of a bar magnet is pushed towards the close
Q. 62 (D), Page 129 coil, the magnetic flux through the coil increases
(LL) Expression for Magnetic Energy density in and the current is induced in the coil in such a
an ideal inductor : Instantaneous induced direction that it opposes the increase in flux. This is
emf in an inductor when current changes possible when the induced current in the coil is in
through it the anticlockwise direction.
GI Similarly as shown in the diagram (E), just the
H = –L
GW opposite happens when the north pole is moved
Hence instantaneous applied voltage away from the coil.
GI In either case, it is the work done against the force
H=V=L
GW
Work done GW = V.GT = VIGW
a s of magnetic repulsion or attraction that gets

iv D
‘converted’ into the induced emf.
⎛ GI ⎞
67. The current through two inductors of self-
GW = ⎜ L ⎟ IGW

Sh
⎝ GW ⎠ inductance 12 mH and 30 mH is increasing with
∴ GW = LIGI
time at the same rate. Draw graphs showing the
I
variation of the
⇒
∫ GW = ∫ LI GI (D) emf induced with the rate of change of
 0 current in each inductor
1 (E) energy stored in each inductor with the
W = LI2
2 current flowing through it.
Total Energy Stored Compare the energy stored in the coils, if the
Energy Density (X) =
Volume power dissipated in the coils is the same.
⎛ 1⎞ 2 1 (Comptt. All India)
⎜ ⎟ LI (LI)I
⎝ 2⎠ 2 Ans. (D) *UDSK IRU LQGXFHG HPI 
X= = …(L)
 AO AO
Flux = NBA = (LI) …(LL) dI/dt

μ 0 NI BO
and B = ⇒I= …(LLL)
 O μ0N i
Putting the values of (LI) and (I) from
equations (LL) and (LLL) in equation (L), we (L1 = 12 mH)
have
1 BO (L2 = 30 mH)
( NBA).
2 μ0N B2 (E) *UDSK IRU HQHUJ\ VWRUHG
X= =
 AO 2μ 0
66. State Lenz’s law. Explain, by giving examples that L2 = 30 mH L1 = 12 mH
Lenz’s law is a consequence of conservation of
energy. (Comptt. Delhi)
u
Ans. Lenz’s law states that “The polarity of induced emf is
such that it tends to produce a current which opposes
the change in magnetic flux that produced it.”
I
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 131

Comparison of energy stored : Long Answer Type Questions (LA)

1 (5 Marks)
X1 L1L12
= 2
X2 1
L 2L12
 2
69. (D) What are eddy currents? Write their WZR
But ε1L1 = ε2L2 applications.
( Q power dissipated is the same, as given in (E) Figure shows a P R
the question) rectangular con-
L1 ε L ducting loop
∴ = 2 = 2 PQSR in which O Y
L
 2 ε 1 L1
arm RS of length ‘O’
⎛ G, G, ⎞ is movable. The
⎜Q is same and also ε = − L ⎟ Q S
⎝
 GW GW ⎠ loop is kept in a
uniform magnetic
2
X1 L ⎛L ⎞ L 30 field ‘B’ directed downward perpendicular to
∴ = 1 ⎜ 2⎟ = 2 = = 2.5
X2 L 2 ⎝ L1 ⎠ L1 12 the plane of the loop. The arm RS is moved

with a uniform speed ‘Y’.
68. The current through two inductors of self-
Deduce an expression for
inductance 15 mH and 25 mH is increasing with
(L) the emf induced across the arm ‘RS’,
time at the same rate. Draw graphs showing the
variation of the (LL) the external force required to move the
arm, and
(D) emf induced with the rate of change of
(LLL) the power dissipated as heat.
current
(All India)
(E) energy stored in each inductor with the
Ans. (D) (GG\ FXUUHQW  Due to change in magnetic
current flowing through it.

a s flux, if there is induced current in the volume

iv D
Compare the energy stored in the coils, if the
(bulk) of the material, it is called as HGG\
power dissipated in the coils is the same.
FXUUHQWV. It is a necessary evil in an

Sh
(Comptt. All India)
arrangement as it can be used in applications
Ans. Given : L1 = 15 mH and L2 = 25 mH
like electric brakes, induction furnaces and
(D) dI/dt dead-beat galvanometers and brings loss of
energy with heat production etc.
(E) (L) As the arm RS of length O is moved with
i a uniform speed, there is a change in
area. It is given by GA = OG[ = OYGW
L1 = 15 mH Gφ
The emf induced, H = –
GW
L2 = 25 mH ...where ⎡φ is the magnetic flux,
⎢ BGA
⎢H = = − BOY
(E) L2 = 25 mH L1 = 15 mH  ⎣ GW
(LL) The current flow due to this,
H BOY
I= =−
R R
u …where [R is the net resistance
in the network with arm RS
I The force experienced is therefore
1 B 2O 2 Y
X1 L1L12 I = IOB = .
= 2  R
X2 1 (LLL) Power dissipated or required for the
L 2L12
 2 → → ⎛ B 2O 2 Y 2 ⎞
But ε1L1 = ε2L2 ( Q power dissipated is same) movement, P = F . Y = FY = ⎜ ⎟
 ⎝ R2 ⎠
L1 ε L ⎛ G, G, ⎞
∴ = 2 = 2 ⎜Q is same and ε = − L ⎟ 70. (D) State Lenz’s law. Give RQH example to
ε1 ⎝ GW ⎠
L2 L1  GW illustrate this law. “The Lenz’s law is a
2
X1 L ⎛L ⎞ L 25 consequence of the principle of conservation
∴ = 1 ⎜ 2⎟ = 2 = = 1.66
X2 L 2 ⎝ L1 ⎠ L1 15 of energy.” Justify this statement.

 132 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(E) Deduce an expression for the mutual N2φ2 = (Q2O) (πU12) (μ0Q1O1) …(Y)
inductance of two long coaxial solenoids where [Q2O is the total number of turns of S2
but having different radii and different From equation (LY)
number of turns. (All India) M21 = μ0Q1Q2πU12O
Ans. (D) /HQ]·V ODZ 'LUHFWLRQ  ´7KH GLUHFWLRQ RI From equations (LL) and (LLL), we get
LQGXFHG FXUUHQW LQ D FLUFXLW LV VXFK DV WR RSSRVH
M12 = M21 = M (say)
Gφ
WKH FKDQJH WKDW FDXVHV LW 6R HPI  ² µ
GW ∴ M = μUμ0Q1Q2πU12O
When north pole of a magnet, IRU H[DPSOH is
brought near a coil, then the nearer end of
the coil will acquire north polarity and
mechanical work will be needed to cause the 71. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
relative motion between the coil and the Figure shows a rectangular conductor PQRS in
magnet. This work, in fact, converts itself in which the conductor PQ is free to move in a
the form of induced emf. Hence, the uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the
phenomenon of electromagnetic induction is plane of the paper. The field extends from [ = 0
in accordance with the law of conservation of to [ = E and is zero for [ > E. Assume that only the
energy. arm PQ possesses resistance U.
(E) When a current I2 is set up through S2, it in When the arm
turn sets up a magnetic flux through S1. Let PQ is pulled S
us denote it by φ1. The corresponding flux outward from P
linkage with solenoid S1 is [ = 0 to [ = 2E and
N1φ1 = M12I2 …(L) is then moved
Q
backward to [ = R
U2

a s 0 with constant
[=0 [=E [ = 2E

iv D
speed Y, obtain
O
the expressions for the flux and the induced emf.

Sh
Sketch the variations of these quantities with
distance 0 ≤ [ ≤ 2E. (All India)
Ans. )DUDGD\·VODZRIHOHFWURPDJQHWLFLQGXFWLRQ “7KH
U1 S1 PDJQLWXGH RI WKH LQGXFHG HPI LQ D FLUFXLW LV HTXDO WR
N1 turns S2 WKH WLPH UDWH RI FKDQJH RI PDJQHWLF IOX[ WKURXJK WKH
N2 turns FLUFXLW”
⎯⎯→

L M L K
M12 is called the mutual inductance of BOE
solenoid S1 with respect to solenoid S2. Flux
The magnetic field due to the current I2 in S2 O E
E 2E O
is μ0Q2I2. The resulting flux linkage with coil
S1 is, ⎯ ⎯⎯⎯⎯→ ⎯ ⎯⎯⎯→
Outward Inward
N1φ1 = (Q1O) (πU12) (μ0Q2I2) −Gφ B
= μ0Q1.QπU12OI2 …(LL) LH, ε =
 GW
where [QO is the total number of turns
The flux φB linked with the circuit SPQR is
in solenoid S1
φB = BO[ 0≤[<E
Thus M12 = μ0Q1Q2πU2O …(LLL)
= BOE E ≤ [ ≤ 2E
We now consider the reverse case :
A current I1 is passed through the solenoid S1
BOY
and the flux linkage with coil S2 is,
emf

N2φ2 = M21I1 …(LY) O

E 2E E O
– BOY
M21 is called the mutual inductance of the
solenoid S2 with respect to solenoid S1.
The flux due to the current I1 in S1 can be
The induced emf is
assumed to be confined solely inside S1 since
the solenoid are very long. Thus, flux linkage −Gφ B
ε= = –BOY 0≤[<E
with solenoid S2 is  GW
=0 E ≤ [ ≤ 2E
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 133

Ans. (D) From /RUHQW] PDJQHWLF IRUFH

72. (D) Show that in an a.c. circuit containing a I = TYB
pure inductor, the voltage is ahead of Work done, W = TYB × O
current by π/2 in phase. ...where [O is the length of the conductor
(E) A horizontal straight wire of length L As emf is work done per unit change
extending from east to west is falling with Z
∴ H= = YBO ∴ H = BOY
speed Y at right angles to the horizontal
T
component of Earth’s magnetic field B. H BOY
(E) Current induced in the loop, I = =
(L) Write the expression for the U
 U
instantaneous value of the emf induced Magnitude of force on the conductor,
in the wire. 2 2
⎛ BOY ⎞ B O Y
(LL) What is the direction of the emf? I = BIO = B ⎝ ⎠ O =
 U  U
(LLL) Which end of the wire is at the higher
potential? (All India) Power required to push the conductor,
Ans. (D) $YHUDJH SRZHU DVVRFLDWHG ZLWK DQ LQGXFWRU 2 2 2 2 2
B O Y
When a.c. is applied to an ideal P=I×Y= B O Y ×Y=
 U  U
inductor,current lags behind the voltage in Power dissipated, P = I2U
π 2 2 2 2
phase by radian. So we can write the ⎛ BOY ⎞ U = B O Y
2 ∴ P=
instantaneous values of voltage and current ⎝ U ⎠ U
as follows : Hence, power required to push the conduct
V = V0 sin ωW and I = I0 sin (ωW – π/2) is same as the power dissipated.
I = I0 sin (π/2 – ωW) or I = – I0 cos ωW
Work done in small time GW is
GW = PGW= – V0I0 sin ωW cos ωW GW 74. (D) Describe a simple experiment (or activity)
[ Q 2 sin ωt cos ωt = sin 2 ωt]

a s to show that the polarity of emf induced in

iv D
V0 I 0
a coil is always such that it tends to produce
=– sin 2 ωW GW a current which opposes the change of

Sh
2
magnetic flux that produces it.
The average power dissipated per cycle in
(E) The current flowing through an inductor of
the inductor is
T T
self inductance L is continuously increasing.
W 1 − V0 I 0 Plot a graph showing the variation of
PDY =
T
=
T∫ GW =
2T ∫ sin 2 ωW GW
(L) Magnetic flux versus the current
 0 0
(LL) Induced emf versus GI/GW
T
V I cos 2ωW ⎤ VI ⎡ 4 πT ⎤
= 0 0 ⎡⎢ ⎥ = 0 0 ⎢ cos − 1⎥ (LLL) Magnetic potential energy stored versus
 2 T ⎣ 2 ω ⎦0 2 T ⎣ T ⎦ the current. (Delhi)
V0 I 0 Ans. (D) /HQ]·V ODZ  According to Lenz law, ´WKH
= [1 – 1] = 0
2I SRODULW\RIWKHLQGXFHGHPILVVXFKWKDWLWRSSRVHV
Thus the average power dissipated per D FKDQJH LQ PDJQHWLF IOX[ UHVSRQVLEOH IRU LWV
cycle in an inductor is zero. SURGXFWLRQµ
(E) (L) The expression for the instantaneous Activity :
value of the emf induced in the wire is
ε = BOY
(LL) According to )OHPLQJ·V ULJKW KDQG UXOH,
´WKH GLUHFWLRQ RI HPI LV IURP ZHVW WR HDVWµ. S N N S N S
N S
(LLL) (DVWHUQ HQG of the wire is at the higher
electrical potential.

When the north pole of a bar magnet is

73. (D) Starting from the expression for the Lorentz pushed towards the coil, the amount of
magnetic force acting on the free charge
magnetic flux linked with the coil increases.
carriers of a conductor moving in a
Current is induced in the coil from a
perpendicular magnetic field, obtain the
direction such that it opposes the increase in
expression for the motional emf induced.
(E) Hence deduce the expressions for the power magnetic flux. This is possible only when the
delivered by the source and the power current induced in the coil is in anti-
dissipated as Joule heat. (Comptt. Delhi) clockwise direction, with respect to an
observer.
134 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

The magnetic movement → M associated radius O, about an axis passing through the
with this induced emf has north polarity centre and perpendicular to the plane of the
towards the north pole of the approaching ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field B
bar magnet. parallel to the axis is present everywhere.
Similarly, when the north pole of the bar (D) Derive the expression for the induced emf
magnet is moved away from the coil, the and the current in the rod.
magnetic flux linked with the coil decreases. (E) Due to the presence of the current in the rod
To counter this decrease in magnetic flux, and of the magnetic field, find the
current is induced in the coil in clockwise expression for the magnitude and direction
direction so that its south pole faces the of the force acting on this rod.
receding north pole of the bar magnet. This (F) Hence obtain the expression for the power
would result in an attractive force which required to rotate the rod.
opposes the motion of the magnet and the (Comptt. All India)
corresponding decrease in magnetic flux. Ans. (D) In one revolution, change of area, GA = πO2
(E) (L) Since φ = LI. [Graph (L)] ∴ Change of magnetic flux,
⎡ → →
where⎢I = Strength of current Gφ = B . GA = BGA cos 0° = BπO2
⎢ through the coil at any
If the period of revolution is T, then :
⎢ time
⎢φ = Amount of magnetic Gφ BπO 2
φ ⎢ (L) Induced emf ε = =
flux linked with all GW
  T
⎢ turns of the coil at that 1
⎢ time πO2ν
= Bπ Q =ν
⎢ T
⎢L = Constant of (LL) Induced current in the rod,
I ⎢ proportionality called
ε πνBO 2
*UDSK L ⎢ coefficient of self I= =
⎢ R  R

s
induction
⎢⎣ πνB2O 3
(LL) Induced emf,
Gφ
iv D a (E) Force acting on the rod, F = IOB =
 R
The external force required to rotate the rod

Sh
G GI opposes the Lorentz force acting on the rod/
H = − = − (LI) = − L
 GW GW GW external force acts in the direction opposite to
(GIGW) the Lorentz force.
(F) Power required to rotate the rod
πνB2O 3 Y
P = FY =
 R
where Y = Velocity of rotation

76. (D) Define mutual inductance and write its S.I.

²H
*UDSK LL units.
(E) Derive an expression for the mutual
(LLL) Since magnetic potential energy is given inductance of two long co-axial solenoids of
by same length wound one over the other.
1 2 (F) In an experiment, two coils F1 and F2 are
U= LI . [Graph (LLL)
2 placed close to each other. Find out the
expression for the emf induced in the coil F1
due to a change in the current through the
U coil F2. (Delhi)
Ans. (D) Mutual inductance of two coils is equal to
the magnetic flux linked with one coil when
a unit current is passed in the other coil.
φ = MI
I Gφ GI
*UDSK LLL
H=– H = –M
GW GW
75. A metallic rod of length O and resistance R is Hence, Mutual inductance is equal to the
rotated with a frequency ν, with one end hinged induced emf set up in one coil when the rate
at the centre and the other end at the of change of current flowing through the
circumference of a circular metallic ring of other coil is unity.
 Chapter 6 : ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 135

S.I. unit : Henry, (Weber ampere–1) (E) A jet plane is travelling towards west at a
or (volt second ampere–1) speed of 1800 km/h.
(E) Consider two long solenoids S1 and S2 of same (L) Estimate voltage difference developed
length O such that solenoid S2 surrounds S1
between the ends of the wing having a
completely.
Let a current I2 flow through S2. This sets up a span of 25 m if the earth’s magnetic field
magnetic flux φ1 through each turn of the coil S1. at the location has a magnitude of
5 × 10–4 T and dip angle is 30°.
U2 (LL) How will the voltage developed be
O affected if the jet changes its direction
from west to north? (Comptt. All India)
Ans. (D) Lenz’s law : It states that ´WKH GLUHFWLRQ RI
LQGXFHG HPI LV VXFK WKDW LW WHQGV WR SURGXFH D
FXUUHQW ZKLFK RSSRVHV WKH FKDQJH LQ PDJQHWLF
U1 S1 IOX[ SURGXFLQJ LWµ
S2 3RODULW\RIFDSDFLWRUCurrent induced in the
N1 turns
coil will oppose the approach of the magnet,
N2 turns therefore, left face of the coil will act as N-pole
Total flux linked with S1, N1φ1 = M12I2 …(L) and right face S-pole. For this the current in
where M12 is the mutual inductance between coil will be anticlockwise, as seen from left;
the two solenoids. and hence the plate ‘A’ of the capacitor will be
Magnetic field due to the current I2 in S2 is positive and plate ‘B’ will be negative.
μ0Q2I2. (E) (L) Given: Y = 1800 km h–1
Therefore, resulting flux linked with S1. = 1800 × 103 × (60 × 60)–1
N1φ1 = [(Q1O)πU12] (μ0Q2I2) …(LL)

a s = 500 ms–1

iv D
Comparing (L) and (LL), we get O = 25 m, B = 5 × 10–4 T, θ = 30°
M12I2 = (Q1O)πU12 (μ0Q2I2) H = BY OY = [(5 × 104) (sin 30°)]
∴ M12 = μ0Q1Q2 πU12 O

due to current (I2) in coil C2.

We have φ1 ∝ I2 ⇒ φ1 ∝ MI2
Sh
(F) Let a magnetic flux be (φ1) linked with coil C1 = 3.125 V
× 25 × 500

[sin 30° =
(LL) When the jet changes its direction from
1
2

Gφ 1 GI GI 2 west to north, the voltage developed will

∴ =M 2 ⇒ H = –M
 GW GW GW not be affected.
77. (D) State Lenz’s law. Use it to predict the
polarity of the capacitor in the situation
given below :
A
B
S N


136 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

7. Alternating Current

QUICK REVISION OF THE CHAPTER

1. Alternating current. The current whose magnitude changes with time and the direction reverse periodically is called the
alternating current. Instantaneous value of an alternating current is given by
I = Io sin ωt
I is called peak value or maximum value of a.c.
⎡ o
or I = Io cos ωt where ⎢ 2π
⎢⎣ ω = = 2πν
T
2. Alternating voltage. The instantaneous value of an alternating voltage is given by
V = Vo sin ωt or V = Vo cos ωt
or V = Vm sin ωt or V = Vm cos ωt
3. Mean or average value of a.c. It is the steady current which when passes through a circuit for half the time-period of alternating
current sends the same amount of charge as is done by the alternating current in the same time through the same circuit.
2I m ⎡ Vo = Vm is the maximum value of alternating
∴ Ia = = 0.636 Im where ⎢
π ⎢⎣ voltage.
4. Root mean square (rms) or effective or virtual value of a.c. It is the steady current, which when passes through a resistance
for a given time will produce the same amount of heat as the alternating current does in the same resistance and in the same
time.
Im Vm
∴ Irms = = 0.707 Im Similarly Vrms = = 0.707 Vm

s
2 2

each other.

iv D a
5. A.C. voltage applied to a resistor. When a.c. voltage is applied across a resistor R, then voltage and current are in phase with

6. A.C. voltage applied to an inductor. When a.c. voltage V = Vm sin ωt is applied across the inductor L, then the current lags the

Sh
π
voltage by
2

⎛ π⎞
(i) Current: I = Im sin ⎜ ωt − ⎟ (ii) Inductive reactance: XL = ωL
⎝ 2⎠

Vm
(iii) The amplitude of current, Im =
XL
(iv) The average power supplied to an inductor over one complete cycle is zero.
7. A.C. voltage applied to a capacitor. When a.c. voltage V = Vm sin ωt is applied across the capacitor C, then the current aheads
π
the voltage by
2
⎛ π⎞ 1
(i) Current: I = Im sin ⎜ ω t + ⎟ (ii) Capacitive reactance: XC =
⎝ 2⎠ ωC
Vm
(iii) The amplitude of current, Im =
XC
(iv) The average power supplied to a capacitor over one complete cycle is zero.
8. A.C. voltage applied to a series LCR circuit. The alternating emf leads/lags behind the current by a phase angle φ
⎛ XC − XL ⎞
(i) Phase angle, φ = tan–1 ⎜ ⎟ (ii) Impedance, Z = R 2 + ( X C − X L )2
⎝ R ⎠
Vm
(iii) Current Im =
Z
9. Resonance. A series LCR circuit is said to be electrical resonant at particular resonant frequency when the amplitude current
is maximum
Vm
∴ Im =
R
1
(i) Resonant frequency ωo = (ii) XC = XL
LC

136 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 137

10. Quality factor. The quality factor or Q-factor of a resonant LCR circuit is defined as the ratio of the voltage drop across inductor
or capacitor to the applied voltage
Voltage across L (or C) ω 0L 1 L
∴ Q= or Q= =
applied voltage R R C
11. Power in a.c. circuit. Let V = Vm sin ωt is applied to a series LCR circuit.
Then average power loss over a complete cycle will be
P = VI cos φ or P = I2Z cos φ …where [cos φ is the power factor]
(i) In resistive circuit, φ = 0 ∴ P = VI
π
(ii) In purely inductive or capacitive circuit, φ = ∴ P=0
2
12. Wattless current. In a purely inductive or capacitive circuit, cos φ = 0 and no power is dissipated even though a current is
flowing in the circuit. Such current is known as wattless current.
13. LC oscillations. A circuit containing an inductor L and a capacitor C (initially charged) with no a.c. source and no resistors
exhibits free oscillations. The charge q of the capacitor satisfies the equation of simple harmonic motion,
d 2q 1
+ q=0
dt 2 LC
14. Transformer. It is a device which is used to change low alternating voltage at high current into high voltage at low current and
vice-versa.
There are two types of transformers:
(i) Step up transformer—low voltage to high voltage
(ii) Step down transformer—high voltage to low voltage
For an ideal transformer:

VS I NS
= P = = K, …where [K is called the transformer ratio]

s
VP IS NP

iv D a
15. Choke coil. It is an inductor used to control the flow of current in an a.c. circuit.

Sh
UNITS USED

Physical quantity Symbol Unit Dimensions

Inductive reactance XL Ohm (Ω) [ML2T–3A–2]
Capacitive reactance XC Ohm (Ω) [ML2T–3A–2]
Impedance Z Ohm (Ω) [ML2T–3A–2]
Resonant frequency ω or ωO Hz [T–1]
Quality factor θ No unit Dimensionless
Power factor cos φ No unit Dimensionless
 138 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Previous Years’ CBSE Examination Questions

Very Short Answer Type Questions (VSA) tion of the voltage and the current over one com-
plete cycle. (Comptt. Delhi)
(1 Mark) Ans.
V
E1
1. The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c.
I
circuit are given by
O
L = 10 sin 300 W A and V = 200 sin 300 W V.
What is the power dissipation in the circuit?
(All India) E
Ans. P = IrmsVrms cos φ
cos φ = 1 Q φ = 0° 7. A heating element is marked 210 V, 630 W. What
I0 V0 1
P= × = IV is the value of the current drawn by the element
2 2 2 0 0 when connected to a 210 V dc source? (Delhi)
1
∴ P= × 10 × 200 = 1,000 W Ans. I=
P
=
630
= 3A
2 V 210
2. The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c.
8. A heating element is marked 210 V, 630 W. Find
circuit are given by
the resistance of the element when connected to
L = 10 sin 314 W A and Y = 50 sin 314 W V.
a 210 V dc source. (Delhi)
What is the power dissipation in the circuit?
(All India) V2 ( 210)2 210 × 210
Ans. Resistance = = = = 70 Ω
1 10 × 50 P 630 630
Ans. P = IV = = 250 W
2 0  9. Why is the core of a transformer laminated?

s
2

a
3. The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c. (Comptt. Delhi)

iv D
circuit are given by Ans. The core of a transformer is laminated to minimize
π eddy currents in the iron core.

Sh
L = 10 sin 314 WA and Y = 50 sin (314W + )V.
2
What is the power dissipation in the circuit?
(All India) 10. Why is the use of a.c. voltage preferred over d.c.
Ans. P = Irms Vrms cos φ voltage? Give WZR reasons. (All India)
Phase difference between current voltage
Ans. a.c. voltage is preferred over d.c. voltage because
π π
= , φ= of following reasons :
2 2
π (L) it can be stepped-up or stepped-down by a
P = Irms Vrms cos ∴P=0 …[cos π/2 = 0 transformer.
2
(LL) carrying losses are much less.

4. Define the term ‘wattless current’. (Delhi)

Ans. Wattless current is that component of the circuit 11. Define capacitor reactance. Write its S.I. units.
current due to which the power consumed in the (Delhi)
circuit is zero. Ans. ‘Capacitor reactance’ is defined as the opposition
to the flow of current in ac circuits offered by a
capacitor.
5. Mention the WZR characteristic properties of the 1
XC =
material suitable for making core of a ωC
transformer. (All India) S.I. Unit : Ohm.
Ans. &KDUDFWHULVWLF SURSHUWLHV RI PDWHULDO VXLWDEOH IRU 12. A variable frequency AC source is connected to
FRUH RI D WUDQVIRUPHU  a capacitor. Will the displacement current
• It should have high permeability change if the frequency of the AC source is
• It should have low hysteresis loss. decreased? (Comptt. All India)
• It should have low coercivity/retentivity. Ans. On decreasing the frequency of AC source,
• It should have high resistivity. ($Q\ WZR) 1
6. When an ac source is connected across an ideal reactance, XC = will increase, which will lead
ωC
inductor, show on a graph the nature of varia- to decrease in conduction current. In this case
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 139

ID = IC T T
VI V0 I 0 ⎡ − cos 2 ωW ⎤
∫
Hence, displacement current will decrease. = 0 0 sin 2 ωW GW =
13. Plot a graph showing variation of capacitive 2T 2 T ⎢⎣ 2ω ⎥
⎦0
 0 
reactance with the change in the frequency of
the AC source. (Comptt. All India) ⎡ 2π ⎤
⎢Q ω = T ⎥
⎣ ⎦
T
Ans. Graph showing a variation of XC –V0 I 0 ⎡ ⎛ 4π T ⎞ ⎤
=
4 Tω ⎢cos⎜⎝ T ⎟⎠ ⎥
capacitive reactance with the ⎣ ⎦0
change in frequency of AC
–V0 I 0
source. = [cos 4π – cos 0]
4 Tω
ω
–V0 I 0
= [1 – 1] = 0
14. Define ‘quality factor’ of resonance in series 4 Tω
LCR circuit. What is its SI unit? (Delhi) Thus the average power dissipated per cycle in
ω 0L a capacitor is zero.
Ans. Quality factor (Q) is defined as, Q = . 17. Prove that an ideal inductor does not dissipate
R
It gives the sharpness of the resonance circuit. It power in an a.c. circuit. (Delhi)
has no SI unit. Ans. $YHUDJH SRZHU DVVRFLDWHG ZLWK DQ LQGXFWRU
15. For an ideal inductor, connected across a When a.c. is applied to an ideal inductor,current
sinusoidal ac voltage source, state which one of π
lags behind the voltage in phase by radian. So
the following quantity is zero : 2
(L) Instantaneous power we can write the instantaneous values of voltage
(LL) Average power over full cycle of the ac and current as follows :
voltage source (Comptt. All India)

a s V = V0 sin ωW and I = I0 sin (ωW – π/2)

iv D
Ans. Average power over full cycle of the ac voltage π
I = I0 sin – ( /2 – ωW) or I = – I0 cos ωW
source is ]HUR, when connected with an ideal Work done in small time GW is

Sh
inductor. GW = PGW = – V0I0 sin ωW cos ωW GW
[ Q 2 sin ωW cos ωW  VLQ  ωW ]
Short Answer Type Questions-I (SA-I) V0 I 0
=– sin 2 ωW GW
(2 Marks) 2
The average power dissipated per cycle in the
16. Prove that an ideal capacitor in an a.c. circuit inductor is
T T
does not dissipate power. (Delhi) W 1 − V0 I 0
Ans. Average power associated with a capacitor : PDY =
T
=
T ∫
GW =
2T ∫
sin 2 ωW GW
When an a.c. is applied to a capacitor, the current  0 0
T
π V0 I 0 ⎡ cos 2ωW ⎤ V0 I 0 ⎡ 4 πT ⎤
leads the voltage in phase by radian. So we =
2 T ⎢⎣ 2ω ⎥⎦ = 4 Tω ⎢⎣cos T − 1⎥⎦
2  0
write the expressions for instantaneous voltage VI
and current as follows : = 0 0 [1 – 1] = 0
4 Tω
⎛ π⎞ 7KXV WKH DYHUDJH SRZHU GLVVLSDWHG SHU F\FOH LQ
V = V0 sin ωW, I = I0 sin ⎜ ωW + ⎟ = I0 cos ωW DQ LQGXFWRU LV ]HUR
⎝ 2⎠
 18. Derive an expression for the impedance of an
Work done in the circuit in small time GW will be a.c. circuit consisting of an inductor and a
Gω = SGW = VI GW = V0 I0 sin ωW cos ωW GW resistor. (Delhi)
V0 I 0 Ans. From the phasor diagram, we get R
= sin 2 ωW GW OQ2 = OP2 + OM2
L
2
The average power dissipated per cycle in the V2 = VR2 + VL2 VR = RI V = XLI
I L
capacitor is, 2 2
= I R + I XL2 2 VR

T ∴ V2 = I2 (R2 + XL2)
W 1
Pav =
T
=
T ∫ GW Z=
V
= R 2 + X L2 ε0 sin ωW
 0 I A series LR–circuit
 140 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

2 Ans. &DSDFLWLYH UHDFWDQFH XC

Clearly R 2 + XL is
1 1
the effective resistance
M Q = =
ω
 C 2 πIC
of the series LR circuit 1
which opposes or =
V 2 × 3.14 × 50 × (15 × 10 −6 )
impedes the flow of VL 10000 1000
a.c. through it. It is = = = 212.3 Ω
φ P 3.14 × 15 4.71
called its impedence V 220
O and rms current = = = 1.04 A
and is denoted by Z. VR XC 212.3
I
2
Z= R 2 + XL = R 2 + ω 2 L2 [ Q XL = ωL]
19. The circuit arrange- 22. An electric lamp having coil C Lamp
ment as shown in of negligible inductance
the diagram shows connected in series with a
that when an a.c. capacitor and an a.c. source is
passes through the Source
glowing with certain
coil A, the current
→ brightness. How does the brightness of the lamp
starts flowing in the →
Coil A Coil B change on reducing the (L) capacitance, and (LL)
coil B.
the frequency? Justify your answer. (Delhi)
(L) State the underlying principle involved.
(LL) Mention WZR factors on which the current Ans. Brightness of lamp ∝ I0,
produced in the coil B depends.(All India) Assuming zero resistance and zero inductance of
Ans. (L) It is based on the principle of “mutual lamp
induction”. E0 V
I0 = = 0 = E0 (2πν) C
(LL) 7ZR IDFWRUV DUH XC 1

s
ωC

a
• distance between the coils. On reducing C or ν ; It would decrease

iv D
• orientation of the coils.
∴ Brightness of the lamp will decrease.
• Number of turns in the coil. DQ\ WZR

Sh
20. The figure given shows an arrangement by
which current flows through the bulb (X) 23. State the principle of working of a transformer.
connected with coil B, when a.c. is passed Can a transformer be used to step up or step
through coil A. down a d.c. voltage? Justify your answer.
(All India)
Ans. Transformer works on the principle of mutual
Bulb (X)
induction, LH, when a changing current is passed
through one of the two inductively coupled coils,
→ → an induced emf is set up in the other coil.
Coil A Coil B
No, WUDQVIRUPHUFDQQRWEHXVHGWRVWHSXSRUVWHS
(L) Name the phenomenon involved.
GRZQ a d.c. voltage because d.c. voltage cannot
(LL) If a copper sheet is inserted in the gap
produce a change in magnetic flux.
between the coils, explain, how the
24. Mention various energy losses in a transformer.
brightness of the bulb would change.
(All India)
(All India)
Ans. Refer to Q. 66 (LL), Page 151
Ans. (L) The phenomenon involved is mutual
induction.
(LL) When the copper sheet is inserted, eddy 25. State the underlying principle of a transformer.
currents are set up in it which opposes the How is the large scale transmission of electric
passage of magnetic flux. The induced emf in energy over long distances done with the use of
coil B decreases. This decreases the transformers? (All India)
brightness of the bulb. Ans. Refer to Q. 65, Page 151
26. A light bulb is rated 100 W for 220 V ac supply
of 50 Hz. Calculate
21. A 15.0 μF capacitor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz (L) the resistance of the bulb;
source. Find the capacitive reactance and the rms (LL) the rms current through the bulb.
current. (All India) (All India)
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 141

V2 V2 220 × 220 When ac source is connected, the capacitor offers

Ans. (L) P = ⇒ R= = = 484 Ω 1
R P 100 capacitive reactance XF = . The current flows in
V 220 ωC
(LL) Irms = rms = = 0.45 ampere the circuit and the lamp glows. On increasing
R 484
27. A light bulb is rated 200 W for 220 V ac supply capacitance, XF decreases. Therefore, glow of the
of 50 Hz. Calculate bulb increases.
(L) the resistance of the bulb;
(LL) the rms current through the bulb.
(All India) 33. A capacitor ‘C’, a variable resistor ‘R’ and a bulb
Ans. Similar to Q. 26, Page 140 ‘B’ are connected in series to the ac mains in a
Hint : (L) P = 242 Ω (LL) Irms = 0.90 ampere circuit as shown. The bulb glows with some
28. A light bulb is rated 150 W for 220 V ac supply brightness. How will the glow of the bulb
of 60 Hz. Calculate change if
(L) the resistance of the bulb; B
(LL) the rms current through the bulb. R
C
(All India)
Ans. Similar to Q. 26, Page 140
Hint : (L) P = 322.67 Ω (LL) Irms = 0.68 ampere
29. An alternating voltage given by V = 140 sin 314 Mains
W is connected across a pure resistor of
~
50 Ω. Find (L) a dielectric slab is introduced between the
(L) the frequency of the source.
plates of the capacitor, keeping resistance R
(LL) the rms current through the resistor.
to be the same;
(All India)
(LL) the resistance R is increased keeping the
Ans. (L) V0 = 140 V, ω = 314
⇒ 2πν = 314 ∴ ν=
314

a s same capacitance? (Delhi)

iv D
= 50 Hz. Ans. (L) Brightness will increase due to increase in
2π
V V
capacitance on introducing dielectric slab.

Sh
(LL) Irms = rms Where [Vrms = ] (LL) Brightness will decrease, as the resistance (R)
R 2
V0 / 2 V 140 140 is increased, the potential drop across the
= = 0 = = bulb will decrease (since both are connected
R 2R 2 × 50 1.414 × 50
= 1.98 A ≈ 2A in series).
R
30. An alternating voltage given by V = 280 sin 50π πW 34. The figure shows a
is connected across a pure resistor of 40 Ω. Find series LCR circuit
(L) the frequency of the source. connected to a E C
(LL) the rms current through the resistor. variable frequency L
(All India) 200 V source with
Ans. Similar to Q. 29, Page 141
L = 50 mH, C = 80 μF and R = 40 Ω.
Hint : (L) ν = 25 Hz (LL) Irms = 4.95 A
Determine
31. An alternating voltage given by V = 70 sin 100π πW
(L) the source frequency which derives the
is connected across a pure resistor of 25 Ω . Find
(L) the frequency of the source. circuit in resonance;
(LL) the rms current through the resistor. (LL) the quality factor (Q) of the circuit.
(All India) (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Similar to Q. 29, Page 141 1
Ans. (L) ω0 =
Hint : (L) ν = 50Hz (LL) Irms = 1.98 Ampere LC
32. A lamp is connected in series with a capacitor.
1 1
Predict your observation when this combination = =
is connected in turn across (L) ac source and (LL) ( 50 × 10 −3 )(80 × 10 −6 ) 4000 × 10 −9
a ‘dc’ battery. What change would you notice in
1 10 3 1000
each case if the capacitance of the capacitor is = = = = 500 rad S–1
4 × 10 −6 2 2
increased? (Comptt. Delhi)
Ans. When dc source is connected, the condenser is ω 0 500
charged but no current flows in the circuit, there- I= = = 80 hertz
2π 2π
fore, the lamp does not glow. No change occurs even
ω 0 L 500 × ( 50 × 10 −3 )
when capacitance of capacitor is increased. (LL) Q = = = 0.625
R 40
 142 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

35. The figure shows a

series LCR circuit R
38. The figure shows a series R
connected to a LCR circuit with L = 5.0 H,
variable frequency E C C = 80 μF, R = 40 Ω C
250 V source with connected to a variable
L
L = 40 mH, frequency 240 V source.
C = 100 μF and Calculate L
R = 50 Ω. (L) The angular frequency of the source which
Determine : drives the circuit at resonance.
(L) the source frequency which derives the (LL) The current at the resonating frequency.
circuit in resonance; (LLL) The rms potential drop across the capacitor
(LL) The quality factor (Q) of the circuit. at resonance. (Delhi)
(Comptt. All India)
1
Ans. Similar to Q. 34, Page 141 Ans. Angular frequency, ω =
Hint : (L) 80 Hz (LL) Q = 0.4. LC
1 1
(L) ω = =
Short Answer Type Questions-II (SA-II) 5 × 80 × 10 –6 400 × 10 –6

(3 Marks) =
1
=
1000
= 50 radians/sec.
20 × 10 – 3 20
36. An inductor of unknown value, a capacitor of Vrms 240
(LL) Irms = = A = 6A
100 μF and a resistor of 10 Ω are connected in R 40
series to a 200 V. 50 Hz a.c. source. It is found 1
that the power factor of the circuit is unity. (LLL) Vrms across capacitor = 6 ×
ωC
Calculate the inductance of the inductor and the
current amplitude. (Delhi)

a s = 6×
1
V

iv D
Ans. As power factor of circuit is unity : 50 × 80 × 10 −6
(L) XL = XC 6 × 10 6 6000

Sh
= V= V = 1500 V
1 1 4 × 10 3 4
L= or L = 2 × 50 × 100 × 10 −6 39. A series LCR circuit
4 π 2 YF 4 π R
∴ L = 0.1013H = 101.3 mH with L = 4.0 H, C = 100
(LL) Current amplitude, μF and R = 60 Ω is
connected to a variable C
V0 2 VUPV 1.414 × 200
I0 = = = = 28.28 A frequency 240 V
R R 10 source as shown in the
figure. L
Calculate :
37. Two heating elements of resistances R1 and R2
(L) the angular frequency of the source which
when operated at a constant supply of voltage,
derives the circuit at resonance;
V, consume powers P1 and P2 respectively.
(LL) the current at the resonating freqency;
Deduce the expressions for the power of their
(LLL) the rms potential drop across the inductor at
combination when they are, in turn, connected
resonance. (Delhi)
in (L) series and (LL) parallel across the same
voltage supply. (All India) 1
Ans. ω =
Ans. When two resistances R1 and R2 are operated at a LC
constant voltage supply V, (L) Angular frequency, ω
their consumed power will be P1 and P2 1 1
= =
V2 V2 4 × 100 × 10 −6 4 × 10 −4
respectively and is given by P1 = , P2 =
R1 R2
1 100
When they are connected in series, Power will be = = = 50 radians/sec
2 × 10 −2 2
1 1 1 R1 R R1 + R 2 V2
= + = + 22 = = Vrms 240
P P1 P2 V2 V V2 (R 1 + R 2 ) (LL) Current resonance, Irms = = = 4A
R 60
and Power in parallel will be
(LLL) Vrms, across capacitor, R = IXL = IωL
V2 V2 ( R 1 + R 2 )V 2 = 4 × 50 × 4 = 800 V
= P1 + P2 = + =
R1 R2 R 1R 2
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 143

40. The figure shows a R frequency of the applied emf. Identify the
series LCR circuit with elements X and Y.
L = 10.0 H, C = 40 μF,
R = 60 Ω connected to C

Opposition to
Opposition to

Cuurent
Cuurent
a variable frequency
240 V source.
L
Calculate :
(L) The angular frequency of the source which O Frequency O Frequency
drives the circuit at resonance. (i) (ii)

(LL) The current at the resonating frequency.

(LLL) The rms potential drop across the inductor (E) Write the expression for the impedance of-
at resonance. (Delhi) fered by the series combination of these
Ans. Similar to Q. 39, Page 142 two elements connected to an ac source of
(L) Angular frequency, ω = 50 radians/sec. voltage V = V0 sin ωt.
(LL) Irms = 4A Show on a graph the variation of the voltage and
the current with ‘ω ωt’ in the circuit.
(LLL) Vrms = IrmsXC = 2000 V
41. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac source. (Comptt. All India)
Using the phasor diagram, derive the expression Ans. (D) ‘X’ is 5HVLVWRU.
for the impedance of the circuit. Plot a graph to ‘Y’ is &DSDFLWRU.
show the variation of current with frequency of 2 1
(E) Impedance, Z = R +
the source, explaining the nature of its variation. ω C
2 2
(All India)
Ans. ⎡ −1 X F = 1
→ …where ⎢φ = tan
VC ⎣
 R ωCR
C

s
L R
→

a
VL →
ε f v

iv D
θ V
ωW i
I f

Sh
A.C. source wt1
0 wt1 p 2p wt1
→ → →
VC − VL VC

Bandwidth
I0 = ε0/R = 2Δω 43. Draw a sketch showing the basic elements of an
ε0 a.c. generator. State its principle and explain
I=
IR briefly its working. (Comptt. All India)
Ans. Refer to Q. 60, Page 148
Z↑

44. In a series LCR circuit connected to an ac source

ω1 ωU ωL ω → of variable frequency and voltage ν = VP sin ωt,
draw a plot showing the variation of current (I)
C with angular frequency (ω) for two different
values of resistance R1 and R2 (R1 > R2). Write
Z the condition under which the phenomenon of
XL – XC
resonance occurs. For which value of the
θ resistance out of the two curves, a sharper
A
R B resonance is produced? Define Q-factor of the
circuit and give its significance. (Delhi)
In ΔABC Ans. (D) Condition for resonance to occur is
XL = XC, and Z = R.
2
R 2 + ⎛⎜ ωL −
1 ⎞ (E) Sharper resonance is produced for R2.
Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2 = ⎟
⎝ ωC ⎠ (F) The Q-factor (quality factor) of series resonant
42. (D) The graphs (L) and (LL) shown in the figure circuit is defined as the ratio of the voltage
represent variation of opposition offered by developed across the inductance of capacitance
the circuit elements, X and Y, respectively to at resonance to the impressed voltage, which
is the voltage applied across the R.
the flow of alternating current YV the
 144 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

ω 0L 47. (D) When an a.c. source is connected to an ideal

Q=
R capacitor show that the average power
supplied by the source over a complete
1.0 cycle is zero.
(E) A lamp is connected in series with a
capacitor. Predict your observations when
R2
0.5
the system is connected first across a d.c.
i2, A

and then an a.c. source. What happens in

each case if the capacitance of the capacitor
R1 is reduced? (Comptt. Delhi)
ω0 Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 16, Page 139
0.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
ω, Mrad/s (E) (L) In this case, the bulb
will glow initially
6LJQLILFDQFH  Higher the value of Q, the for a very short Bulb C
narrower and sharper is the resonance and duration depending
+ –
therefore circuit will be more selective upon its time
45. (L) For a given a.c., L = LP sin ωW, show that the constant during the charging of capacitor.
average power dissipated in a resistor R Once the capacitor is fully charged, it will
1 2 not allow current to pass, hence the bulb
over a complete cycle is L R. ceases to glow.
2 P
(LL) A light bulb is rated at 100 W for a 220 V (LL) In this case, when
a.c. supply. Calculate the resistance of the connected to a.c.
bulb. (All India) source, the bulb Bulb
Ans. (L) L = LP sin ωW, where LP is peak current, ω is will glow with the
angular frequency same brightness.
P = Vrms Irms cos φ, R = resistance

a s When the capacity of capacitor is re-

iv D
In a.c., across resistance Vrms and Irms are in duced, it will have no appreciable effect
phase ∴ cos φ = 1 (φ = 1)
when connected to d.c. source.

Sh
However, in case when connected to a.c.
VP
P = Vrms Irms cos 0, Vrms = source, capacitance is reduced, hence
 2 1
χC =
VPLP L ωC
⇒ P= , Irms = P
 × 2
2  2 χC capactive reactance will increase and
thus the brightness of bulb will reduce.
VPLP
∴ P= …(L)
 2
We know VP = LPR 48. A voltage V = V0 sin ωt is applied to a series
2 LCR circuit. Derive the expression for the
LP
∴ Equation (L) becomes P = R average power dissipated over a cycle.
 2 Under what condition is
(LL) P = 100 W, V = 220 V (L) no power dissipated even though the
V2 V2 220 × 220 current flows through the circuit,
P= ∴ R= = = 484 Ω
(LL) maximum power dissipated in the circuit?
R P 100
46. (D) For a given a.c., L = Lm sin ωW, show that the (All India)
average power dissipated in a resistor Ans. Average power in LCR circuit :
Let the alternating emf applied to an LCR circuit,
1 2
R over complete cycle is LP R. V = V0 sin ωW …(L)
2 If alternating current developed lags behind the
(E) A light bulb is rated at 125 W for 250 V a.c. applied emf by a phase angle φ
supply. Calculate the resistance of the then, I = I0 sin(ωW – φ) …(LL)
bulb. (All India) Total work done over a complete cycle is,
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 45 (L), Page 144 T T
(LL) P = 125 W, V = 250 V
Where P = Power and V = Voltage
W = ∫ VI GW = ∫ V0 sin ωW.I0 sin(ωW – φ) GW
0 0
T
V2 V2 250 × 250
P=
R
or R =
P
,R=
125
= 500 Ω = V0I0 ∫ sin ωW sin(ωW – φ) GW
0
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 145

V0 I 0
T (E) Calculate the value of the additional
=
2 ∫ 2 sin ωW sin(ωW – φ) GW capacitor which may be joined suitably to
0 the capacitor C that would make the power
T
V0 I 0 factor of the circuit unity. (All India)

2 ∫ [cos(ωW – ωW + φ) – cos(ωW + ωW – φ)] GW Ans. (D) Given : V = V0 sin(1000 W + φ), R = 400 Ω,
0
[ Q 2 sin A sin B = cos(A – B) – cos(A+ B)] L = 100 mH, C = 2 μF, ω = 1000
T ⎛ χC − χL ⎞
V0 I 0 θ = tan–1 ⎜
= ∫ [cos φ – cos(2 ωW – φ)] GW ⎝ R ⎟⎠
2
0 ⎛ 1 ⎞
T − ωL
sin(2ωt − φ) ⎤
= tan–1 ⎜⎜ ωC ⎟
VI ⎡
= 0 0 ⎢t cos φ − ⎥⎦ ⎟
2 ⎣ 2ω 0 ⎜ R ⎟
V0 I 0 V0 I 0 ⎝ ⎠
= [W cos φ] = . (cos φ). W
⎛ 1 ⎞
2 2 − 1000 × 100 × 10 −3
∴ Average power in LCR circuit over a –1
= tan ⎜ ⎜ 1000 × 2 × 10 −6 ⎟
complete cycle is, 400 ⎟
⎜ ⎟
W V0 I 0 V V ⎝ ⎠
P= = cos φ = 0 . 0 cos φ 400
 W 2 2 2 = tan–1 = 1 θ = 45°
∴ P = EV IV cos φ 400
(E) Let the additional capacitor be C′ which is to
(L) No power is dissipated in purely inductive
or purely capacitive circuit, because phase be connected in parallel with C, to increase
π the value of combined capacitances; hence
difference between voltage and current is resulting into ‘capacitive reactance’ reduced.
2
and cos φ = 0. It is known as ZDWWOHVVFXUUHQW In parallel Cnet = C + C′
(LL) Maximum power is dissipated in a LCR When the power factor is unity
circuit at Resonance, because XC – XL = 0 and When χ L = χ C
φ = 0, cos φ = 1
Power = I2Z = I2R

D a s ωL =
1
ω(C + C′)

49. An inductor L of inductance XL is connected in

series with a bulb B and an ac source. How
S h i v C + C′ = 2

C′ =
1
ω L
1
C′ = 2 – C
1
ω L
– 2 × 10–6
would brightness of the bulb change when (L) (1000)2 × (100 × 10 -3 )
number of turns in the inductor is reduced, (LL) C′ = (10 × 10–6) – (2 × 10–6)
an iron rod is inserted in the inductor and (LLL) a = (10 – 2) × 10–6 = 8μμF
capacitor of reactance XC = XL is inserted in 51. A circuit containing an 80 mH inductor and a
series in the circuit. Justify your answer in each 250 μF capacitor in series connected to a 240 V,
case. (Delhi) 100 rad/s supply. The resistance of the circuit is
Ans. (L) Increases. XL = ωL negligible.
As number of turns decrease, L decreases, (L) Obtain rms value of current.
hence current through the bulb increases. (LL) What is the total average power consumed
Also voltage across bulb increases. by the circuit? (Comptt. Delhi)
(LL) Decreases : Iron rod increases the inductance Ans. (L) XL = ωL = 100 × 80 × 10–3 = 8 Ω
which increases XL, hence current through 1 1
the bulb decreases./Voltage across the bulb XC = = Ω = 40 Ω
ωC 100 × 250 × 10 −6
decreases.
(LLL) Increases. Under this condition (XC = XL) the L = 80 mH C = 250 μF
current through the bulb will become
maximum.
50. (D) Determine the value of phase difference 240 V, 100 Rads
between the current and the voltage in the
given series LCR circuit. Total impedence, (Z) = XC – XL = 32 Ω
R = 400 Ω Vrms 240
Irms = = = 7.5 A
R 32
(LL) Average power consumed = 0 (Zero)
V = V0 sin(1000t + φ) C = 2 μF (As there is no ohmic resistance in the current)
52. A source of ac voltage V = V0 sin ωW is connected
to a series combination of a resistor ‘R’ and a
L = 100 mH capacitor ‘C’. Draw the phasor diagram and use it
 146 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

to obtain the expression for (L) impedance of the (LL) Brightness decreases because as iron rod is
circuit and (LL) phase angle. (Comptt. All India) inserted its value of inductance increases.
Ans. Phasor diagram and circuit diagram for the Thus, current decreases and also brightness
given circuit are, decreases.
V 54. Derive the expression for the average power
R C dissipated in a series LCR circuit for an ac
source of a voltage, ν = νP sinω ωW, carrying a
current, L = LPsin(ωωW + φ).
Hence define the term “Wattless current”. State
←⎯⎯⎯
VR ⎯→ A I
O φ I under what condition it can be realized in a
V circuit. (Comptt. Delhi)
VL
Ans. Refer to Q. 48, Page 144
V = V0 sinωt
55. Obtain the expression for the magnetic energy
D P
stored in an ideal inductor of self inductance L
Expression for impedance and phase angle : A
when a current I passes through it.
resistor and a capacitor are connected in series to
Hence obtain the expression for the energy
a source of alternating current, V = V0 sin ωW
density of magnetic field B produced in the
Let ‘I’ be the instantaneous value of current in this
inductor.
circuit.
Ans. Expression for Magnetic Energy density in an
(L) Voltage across ‘R’ = VR = RI (in phase)
ideal inductor :
(LL) Voltage across ‘C’ = VC = XCI (lags by 90°)
Instantaneous induced emf in an inductor when
V= OA 2 + OD 2 = VR2 + VL2 current changes through it
⎛ 1 ⎞ GI
= I ⎜ R2 + ⎟ H = –L
⎝ (ωC)2 ⎠ GW
V
= R2 +
1
=Z ( Q XC =
1
)
a s Hence instantaneous applied voltage

iv D
I ωC)2
(ω ωC GI
H=V=L
Which is the effective resistance of L – C GW

Sh
circuit and is called its ‘impedance’. Work done GW = V.GT = VIGW
Phase angle : ⎛ GI ⎞
XC GW = ⎜ L ⎟ IGW
tan φ =
R ⎝ GW ⎠
⎛ 1 ⎞ ∴ GW = LIGI
⎜ ωC ⎟
⎛ X ⎞ ⎝ ⎠ I
φ = tan–1 ⎜ C ⎟ = tan–1
⎝ R ⎠
1
R ⇒
∫ ∫
GW = LI GI
φ = tan–1  0
RωC
1 2
W= LI
2
53. (L) When an AC source is connected to an ideal Total Energy Stored
Energy Density (X) =
inductor show that the average power Volume
supplied by the source over a complete ⎛ 1⎞ 2 1
cycle is zero. ⎜ ⎟ LI (LI)I
⎝ 2⎠ 2
(LL) A lamp is connected in X= = …(L)
L Lamp  AO AO
series with an Flux = NBA = (LI) …(LL)
inductor and an AC
μ 0 NI BO
source. What happens and B = ⇒I= …(LLL)
 O μ 0N
to the brightness of
the lamp when the key is plugged in and an Putting the values of (LI) and (I) from equations
iron rod is inserted inside the inductor? (LL) and (LLL) in equation (L), we have
Explain. (All India) 1 BO
( NBA).
Ans. (L) PAV = IDY × HDY cos φ = IAV × EAV cos φ 2 μ0N B2
π
X= =
For an ideal inductor, φ =  AO 2μ 0
2 56. The current, in the LCR circuit shown in the
π π
∴ PDY = ODY × HDY cos Q cos =0 figure is observed to lead the voltage in phase.
2 2
∴ PDY = 0 Without making any other change in the circuit,
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 147

a capacitor, of capacitance C0, is (appropriately) V0

joined to the capacitor C. This results in making L0 = = V0.ωF
⎛ 1⎞
the current, in the ‘modified’ circuit, flow in ⎜ ⎟
phase with the applied voltage. ⎝ ωF ⎠
= (70.7) × (1000) × (5 × 10–6 A)
L = 353.5 × 10–3 A = 0.3535 A
∴ Expression for current is
C R
π
L = (0.3535) sin ⎛⎜ 1000 W + ⎞⎟
⎝ 2⎠
⎡ π ⎤
V = V0 sin ωt Q ⎢L = L0 sin⎛⎜ ωW + ⎞⎟ ⎥
⎝ 2⎠
Draw a diagram of the ‘modified’ circuit and ⎣ ⎦

obtain an expression for C0 in terms of ω, L and

C. (Comptt. All India)
58. (L) Find the value of the phase difference
Ans. Since the current leads the voltage in phase,
between the current and the voltage in the
hence, XC > XL
For resonance, we must have series LCR circuit shown here. Which one
New value of X′C = XL leads in phase: current or voltage?
We, therefore, need to decarease the value of XC = L = 100 mH C = 2 PF R = 400 :
⎛ 1 ⎞
⎜ ⎟.
⎝ ωC ⎠
This requires an increase in the value of C. Hence,
capacitor C0 should be connected in parallel
across C. V = V0 sin (1000 t + I)
The diagram of the modified circuit is shown.

a s (LL) Without making any other change, find the

iv D
)RU UHVRQDQFH we then have value of the additional capacitor C1, to be
C0 connected in parallel with the capacitor C,

Sh
in order to make the power factor of the
R circuit unity. (Delhi)
L C
Ans. Given : L = 100 mH = 100 × 10–3 H,
C = 2μF = 2 × 10–6 F
R = 400 Ω, V = V0 sin (1000 W + φ)
V = V0 sin ωt
1 (L) XL = ωL = (1000 x 100 x 10–3) Ω = 100 Ω
= ωL ⇒ ω(C + C0) × ωL = 1
ω(C + C0 ) 1 ⎛ 1 ⎞
XC = =⎜ ⎟ Ω = 500 Ω
ωC ⎝ 1000 × 2 × 10 −6 ⎠
∴ C0 = ⎡⎢ 2 − C ⎤⎥
1
⇒ ω2L(C + C0) = 1
⎣ω L ⎦ The current L leads the voltage V by an
57. A 200 mH (pure) inductor, and a 5μ μF (pure) angle φ, where
capacitor, are connected, one by one, across a
XC − XL 500 − 100
sinusoidal ac voltage source V = [70.7 sin (1000 tan φ = ⇒ tan φ = =1
R 400
W)] voltage. Obtain the expressions for the
current in each case. (Comptt. All India) π
∴ φ= = 45°
Ans. Given : For the applied voltage V = 70.7 sin (1000 W), 4
we have V0 = 70.7 volts, ω = 1000 s–1 As XC > XL , (phase angle is negative), hence
(L) For the inductor, the peak value of current current leads voltage.
(L0) is : (LL) To make power factor unity, φ = 0˚, hence we
V0 70.7
L0 = = A need to adjust C to a new value C′, the
ωL (1000) × ( 200 × 10 −3 ) condition is :
= 35.35 × 10–2 A = 0.3535 A
∴ XC′ = XL = 100 Ω
∴ Expression for current is L = (0.3535) sin
Thus, phase angle is 45˚ with the current
⎛ π⎞ ⎡ π ⎤
⎜ 1000W − ⎟ Q ⎢L = L0 sin⎛⎜ ωW − ⎞⎟ ⎥ leading the voltage.
⎝
 2⎠ ⎣
⎝ 2⎠ ⎦ To make power factor unity, we need to have
(LL) For the capacitor, the peak value of current XC also equal to 100 Ω. For this, C needs to
(L0) is have a value of 10 μ.
 148 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

We, therefore, need to put an additional (E) R = 200 Ω, C = 15.0 μF = 15.0 × 10–6 F,
capacitor of (10 – 2), LH, 8 μF in parallel VUPV = 220V, I = 50 Hz
with the given capacitor. 1 1
(L) XC = =
2πI& 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 15.0 × 10 −6

Long Answer Type Questions (LA) = 212.3 Ω
(5 Marks) Z = R 2 + XC2 = ( 200 ) 2 + ( 212.3 ) 2
= 291.5 Ω
59. An a.c. source generating a voltage Y = YP sin ω W ∴ Current in the circuit,
is connected to a capacitor of capacitance C. Find VUPV 220 V
the expression for the current, L, flowing IUPV = = = 0.755 A
 Z 291.5 Ω
through it. Plot a graph of Y and L versus ω W to
(LL) As the current is same throughout the
show that the current is π/2 ahead of the voltage.
series circuit, we have
A resistor of 200 Ω and a capacitor of 15.0 μF are
R
connected in series to a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. source. V = IUPV.R = 0.755 × 200 = 151 V
 UPV
Calculate the current in the circuit and the rms C
voltage across the resistor and the capacitor. Is V = IUPV.XC = 0.755 × 212.3 = 160.3 V
 UPV
the algebraic sum of these voltages more than The algebraic sum of the two voltages,
the source voltage? If yes, resolve the paradox. VR and VC is 311.3 V which is more than
(All India) the source voltage of 220 V. These two
Ans. (D) Voltage applied to the capacitor, Y = YP sin voltages are 90° out of phase. These
ωW …(L) cannot be added like ordinary numbers.
Let instantaneous voltage across the The voltage is obtained by using
capacitor = Y Pythagoras theorem,
T
we have, Y =
C

a s VR + C = VR 2 + VC 2

iv D
According to C = (151) 2 + (160.3 ) 2 = 220 V
.LUFKRII·V ORRS UXOH,

Sh
Thus if the phase difference between two
the voltage across
voltages is properly taken into account,
the source and the
the total voltage across the resistor and
capacitor are equal
the capacitor is equal to the voltage of the
at any instant of
source.
time.
60. Explain briefly, with the help of a labelled
T
∴ YP sin ω W = ⇒ T = CYP sin ω W diagram, the basic principle of the working of
C

GT an a.c. generator.
= ω CYP cos ω W In an a.c. generator, coil of N turns and area A is
GW
GT YP rotated at Y revolutions per second in a uniform
⇒ = cosω W[ Q cos ω W = sin(ω
ω W + π/2] magnetic field B. Write the expression for the
GW 1 / ωC
L = LP sin (ω W + π/2) …(LL) emf produced.
⎡ YP A 100-turn coil of area 0.1 m2 rotates at half a
where ⎢ L P =
( 1 / ω C) revolution per second. It is placed in a magnetic
⎢⎣
From equations (L) and (LL) we conclude that field 0.01 T perpendicular to the axis of rotation
current leads the voltage by a phase angle of of the coil. Calculate the maximum voltage
π/2, generated in the coil. (All India)
Ans. (D) 3ULQFLSOH RI $& JHQHUDWRU  The working of
V1 I I
V I an a.c. generator is based on the principle of
V0
I0
↓ ↓ electromagnetic induction. When a closed
ωW coil is rotated in a uniform magnetic field
0
π/
with its axis perpendicular to the magnetic
2
V field, the magnetic flux linked with the coil
I either changes and an induced emf and hence a
π/
2
or current is set up in it.
(E) Let N = number of turns in the coil
A = Area of face of each turn
B = magnitude of the magnetic field
V
3KDVRU GLDJUDP
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 149

θ = angle which normal to the coil makes P = VI = VP IP sin (ωW ± φ) sin ωW

→
with field B at any instant W = VP IP (sin ωW cos φ ± cos ωW sin φ) sin ωW
ω = the angular velocity with which coil = VP IP (sin2 ωW cos φ ±
1
sin 2ωW sin φ)
rotates 2
T
Coil Axle
∫ PGW VP I P
0
PDY = =
T T
∫ GW
 0
N S
⎡ ⎤
∫ ∫ sin φ sin 2ωW GW ⎥⎦
1
⎢Q sin ωW cos φ GW + 2
2

Slip ⎣

rings Alternating emf VP I P ⎡ T ⎤
PDY = ⎢ 2 cos φ + 0 ⎥
 T ⎣ ⎦
Carbon ⎡ T T ⎤
brushes ⎢Q sin 2 ωW GW = T and sin 2ωW GW = 0⎥
⎢
⎢
∫ 2 ∫ ⎥
⎥⎦
⎣ 0 0
The magnetic flux linked with the coil at any VP I P
instant W will be, PDY = cos φ
 2
φ = NAB cos θ = NAB cos ωW ⇒ PDY = VUPV IUPV cos φ
By )DUDGD\·V IOX[ UXOH the induced emf is
(E) Quality factor should be high to have the
given by,
current corresponding to a particular
Gφ −G frequency to be more and to avoid the other
E=– = NAB (cos ωW)

s
GW GW unwanted frequencies. Q-factor depends on
E = NAB (sin ωW) . ω
⇒ E = E0 sin ωW …where [E0 = NABω
When a load of resistance R is connected
iv D a I, L, R and C.
Sharpness of resonance is determined by

Sh
quality factor (Q) of the circuit LH,
across the
ω 0L 1 1 L
terminals, a current I flows in the external Q= = =
circuit. R ω 0 CR R C
Larger the value of Q,
E E0 sin ωW
I= = = I0 sin ωW Sharper is the resonance LH sharper peak in
R
 R the current.
… where ⎡ E0 62. (D) Derive the relationship between the peak
⎢⎣I0 = R and the rms value of current in an a.c.
(F) Y = 0.5 Hz; N = 100; A = 0.1 m2; B = 0.01 T circuit.
Hmax = NAB (2πY) (E) Describe briefly, with the help of a labelled
Hmax = 100 × 0.01 × 0.1 × (2π × 0.5) diagram, working of a step-up transformer.
A step-up transformer converts a low
∴ Hmax = 0.314 volt
voltage into high voltage. Does it not
violate the principle of conservation of
energy? Explain. (Delhi)
61. (D) Derive an expression for the average power
Ans. (D) R.M.S. value of current say I = IP sin ωW is
consumed in a series LCR circuit connected
given by
to a.c. source in which the phase difference
T
between the voltage and the current in the
∫ IP sin 2 ωW GW
2
circuit is φ. T
IP
(E) Define the quality factor in an a.c. circuit. IUPV = 0
T
=
T ∫ sin2 ωW GW
Why should the quality factor have high
value in receiving circuits? Name the ∫ GW 0

 0
factors on which it depends. (Delhi) T
Ans. (D) Let an alternating current I = IP sin ωW be IP ⎛ 1 − cos 2 ωW ⎞ IP ⎡ T ⎤ IP
passing through a network of L, C and R
=
T ∫ ⎜⎝ 2
⎟ GW =
⎠
⎢ ⎥=
T ⎢⎣ 2 ⎥⎦ 2
 0
creating a potential difference of V = VP sin where [IP is the peak value of current]
(ωW ± φ) where φ is the phase difference. (E) The supply of DF to the primary will bring a
Then the power consumed is varying flux in the secondary causing emf.
 150 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Gφ S (L) VL = XLI. It is ahead of current I in phase

Since IS ∝ NS and εS ∝ the emf induced by 90°.
 GW
in the secondary flux will be more than the (LL) VR = RI. It is in phase with current I.
primary as the condition NS > NP is satisfied. (LLL) VC = XCI. It lags behind the current in
Production of high voltage does not violate phase by 90°.
→
the law of conservation of energy as the As it is evident from the figure, VL and
current will be reduced in the process. →
VC are in opposite directions. Hence their
→ →
resultant will be ( VL − VC ) . Using the ODZ
→ → →
RI SDUDOOHORJUDP VR and ( VL − VC ) ’s
Ip VP VS
resultant is equal to the applied emf →
ε,
as given by the diagonal of the
>
>

>

>
parallelogram.
ε0 sin ωW
VL
VL – VC →
Is ε
Primary π/
leakage flux Secondary 2
π/
NS > NP leakage flux 2 VR I
As VS > VP with NS > NP, IS will become less
φ
than IP. VC
I VR
)LJXUH  )LJXUH 
63. Describe briefly, with the help of a labelled In Figure 2, from triangle,
diagram, the basic elements of an a.c. generator. → →

s
2
ε2 = ( VR ) + ( VL − VC ) 2

a
State its underlying principle. Show diagra-

iv D
mmatically how an alternating emf is generated as VR = LR, VL = LXL, VC = LXC
by a loop of wire rotating in a magnetic field. Write ε2 =L2 [R2 + (XL – XC)2]

Sh
the expression for the instantaneous value of the ε
emf induced in the rotating loop. (Delhi) or = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2
L
Ans. Refer to Q. 60, Page 148 ε
'LDJUDP RI KRZ DQ DOWHUQDWLQJ HPI LV JHQHUDWHG Clearly is the effective resistance of the
L
E\ D ORRS RI ZLUH series LCR circuit and is called its
⎯→

impedance (Z)
emf
⎯⎯

⎯ ⎯⎯⎯⎯
⎯ → Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2
⎯W→
2
64. A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c. ⎛ 1 ⎞
= R 2 + ⎜ ωL − ⎟
source having voltage ν = νP sin ω W. ⎝ ωC ⎠
Derive the expression for the instantaneous 1
[ Q XL = ωL and XC = ]
current I and its phase relationship to the ωC
applied voltage. When XL = XC, the voltage and current are
Obtain the condition for resonance to occur. Define in the same phase. In such a situation, the
‘power factor’. State the conditions under which circuit is known as non-inductive circuit.
it is (L) maximum and (LL) minimum. (Delhi) ε
(E) As = Z (known as impedence)
Ans. (D) Suppose a resistance R, an inductance L and L
capacitance C are connected in series to a Z= R 2 + ( X L − X C )2
source of alternating emf ε given by We know that XL = ωL, XC =
1
,
ε = ε0 sin ωW ωC
←VR = RI → ←VL = XLI → ←VC = XCI → when ω = 2πI
2
⎛ 1 ⎞
VL I Z=R 2 + ⎜ ωL − ⎟
⎯⎯→ I π/
2
π/
2 ⎝ ωC ⎠
I
⎯⎯→ VR VC 1 1
When Z = R, ωL = ∴ω=
~ ωC LC
(F) Phase angle φ can be determined by
Let I be the instantaneous value of current in
VL − VC
the series circuit. Then voltage across the tan φ =
three components are VR
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 151

as XL > XC, because in a LCR series circuit V of the primary will be equal to that linked with
leads I each turn of the secondary.
XL − XC Gφ Gφ
tan φ = V P = – NP and VS = – NS
R
GW GW
Impedance, Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2 …where [NP and NS are number of turns in the primary
For resonance XL = XC and secondary respectively,
VP and VS are their respective voltages]
∴ Z = R2 = R
Hence for the condition of resonance, impedance VS N
∴ = S …(L)
is equal to resistance. VP NP
Power factor : P =EY IY cos φ NS
…where ⎡P is called true power, This ratio is called the turns ratio.
⎢ NP
⎢(EY IY) is called apparent power or virtual power Assuming the transformer to be ideal one, so that
⎢
⎢cos φ is called power factor of the circuit there are no energy losses, then
⎢⎣
true power (P) Input power = output power
∴ Power factor = = cos φ VPIP = VSIS
apparent
 power ( E Y I Y )
…where [IP and IS are the current in the primary and
(L) Power factor is maximum ZKHQ WKH FLUFXLW secondary respectively
FRQWDLQV RQO\ UHVLVWDQFH 5. In that case φ = 0,
cos φ = 1. VS I
= P …(LL)
(LL) Power factor is minimum ZKHQ WKH FLUFXLW VP IS
FRQWDLQVSXUHO\FDSDFLWLYHRULQGXFWLYHFLUFXLW. In IP V N
this case cos φ = 0 and no power is dissipated From (L) and (LL), we get = S = S
IS VP NP
even though a current is flowing in the
In a step up transformer, NS > NP LH, the turns
circuit.
65. Draw a schematic diagram of a step-up
a s ratio is greater than 1 and therefore VS > VP.

iv D
transformer. Explain its working principle. The output voltage is greater than the input

Sh
Deduce the expression for the secondary to voltage.
primary voltage in terms of the number of turns 0DLQ DVVXPSWLRQV 
in the two coils. In an ideal transformer, how is (L) The primary resistance and current are small.
this ratio related to the currents in the two coils? (LL) The same flux links both with the primary
How is the transformer used in large scale and secondary windings as the flux leakage
transmission and distribution of electrical from due core is negligible (small).
energy over long distances? (All India) (LLL) The terminals of the secondary are open or
Ans. A transformer is an electrical device for the current taken from it, is small. (DQ\WZR)
converting an alternating current at low voltages For long distance transmission, the voltage output
into that at high voltage or vice versa. of the generator is stepped-up (so that current is
If it increases the input voltage, it is called step- reduced and consequently, IR loss is reduced). It
up-transformer. is transmitted over long distance and is stepped-
down at distributing substations at consumers’
end.
AC ~ P S To load

Primary Secondary
66. (L) With the help of a labelled diagram,
↑ Laminated iron core
describe briefly the underlying principle
3ULQFLSOH  It works on the principle of mutual and working of a step-up transformer.
induction LH, ´ZKHQ D FKDQJLQJ FXUUHQW LV SDVVHG (LL) Write any WZR sources of energy loss in a
WKURXJK RQH RI WKH WZR LQGXFWLYHO\ FRXSOHG FRLOV DQ
transformer.
LQGXFHG HPI LV VHW XS LQ WKH RWKHU FRLOµ
(LLL) A step up transformer converts a low input
:RUNLQJ  As the alternating current flows
voltage into a high output voltage. Does it
through the primary, it generates an alternating
magnetic flux in the core which also passes violate law of conservation of energy?
through the secondary. This changing flux sets up Explain. (Delhi)
an induced emf in the secondary, also a self- Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 65, Page 151
induced emf in the primary. If there is no leakage (LL) 7ZRVRXUFHVRIHQHUJ\ORVVLQDWUDQVIRUPHU
of magnetic flux, then flux linked with each turn 1. Copper loss : Some energy is lost due to
 152 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

heating of copper wires used in the primary What is the source of energy generation in this
and secondary windings. This power loss device? (All India)
(= I2R) can be minimised by using thick Ans. AC generator : A dynamo or generator is a device
copper wires of low resistance. which converts mechanical energy into electrical
2. Eddy current loss : The alternating energy. It is based on the principal of
magnetic flux induces eddy currents in electromagnetic energy into electrical energy. It is
the iron core which leads to some energy based on the principle of electromagnetic
loss in the form of heat. This loss can be induction.
reduced by using laminated iron core.
&RQVWUXFWLRQ It consists of the four main parts :
(LLL) No, a step up transformer does not violate
law of conservation of energy because (L) Field Magnet : It produces the magnetic
whatever is gained in voltage ratio is lost in field. In the case of a low power dynamo, the
the current ratio and YLFHYHUVD. It steps up the magnetic field is generated by a permanent
voltage while it steps down the current. magnet, while in the case of large power
67. Derive an expression for the impedance of a dynamo, the magnetic field is produced by
series LCR circuit connected to an AC supply of an electromagnet.
variable frequency. (LL) Armature : It consists of a large number of
Plot a graph showing variation of current with turns of insulated wire in the soft iron drum
the frequency of the applied voltage. or ring. It can revolve round an axle between
Explain briefly how the phenomenon of the two poles of the field magnet. The drum
resonance in the circuit can be used in the or ring serves the two purposes : (L) It serves
tuning mechanism of a radio or a TV set. (Delhi) as support to coils and (LL) It increases the
Ans. ([SUHVVLRQ IRU LPSHGDQFH Refer to Q. 61 (D), magnetic field due to air core being replaced
Page 149 by an iron core.
Resonant circuit can be used in the tuning
mechanism of a radio or a TV set.

a s (LLL) Slip Rings : The slip rings R1 and R2 are the

iv D
two metal rings to which the ends of
1.0
armature coil are connected. These rings are

Sh
fixed to the shaft which rotates the armature
Lm,A ←

coil so that the rings also rotate along with

0.5 ←(L) the armature.
←(LL) (LY) Brushes : These are two flexible metal plates
or carbon rods (B1 and B2) which are fixed
ω0
0.0 and constantly touch the revolving rings. The
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
← output current in external load RL is taken
ω, Mrad/s
through these brushes.
The antenna of a radio accepts signals from many :RUNLQJ  When the armature coil is rotated in
broadcasting stations. The signals picked up in the the strong magnetic field, the magnetic flux
antenna acts as a source in the tuning circuit of the linked with the coil changes and the current is
radio, so the circuit can be driven at many induced in the coil, its direction being given by
frequencies. But to hear one particular radio Fleming’s right hand rule. Considering the
station, we tune the radio. In tuning, we vary the armature to be in vertical position and as it
capacitance of a capacitor in the tuning circuit such rotates in anticlockwise direction, the wire ab
that the resonant frequency of the circuit becomes moves upward and cd downward, so that the
nearly equal to the frequency of the radio signal direction of induced current is shown in fig. In
received. When this happens, the amplitude of the the external circuit, the current flows along
current with the frequency of the signal of the B1RLB2. The direction of current remains
particular radio station in the circuit is maximum. unchanged during the first half turn of armature.
68. State the working of a.c. generator with the help During the second half revolution, the wire ab
of a labelled diagram. moves downward and cd upward, so the
The coil of an a.c. generator having N turns, each direction of current is reversed and in external
of area A, is rotated with a constant angular circuit it flows along B2RLB1. Thus the direction of
velocity ω. Deduce the expression for the induced emf and current changes in the external
alternating emf generated in the coil. circuit after each half revolution.
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 153

ω Armature Ans. (D) V = V0 sin ωW, L = L0 sin ωW

⎯⎯
b
Instantaneous power =
VI = (V0 sin ωW) (L0 sin ωW) = V0L0 sin2ωW

→
c
If the instantaneous power remains constant
for a small time GW
→
B S
then small amount of work done in maintain-
N Field magnet ing the current for a small time GW is,
GW = V0L0 sin2 ωWGW
a
Total work done or energy spent in maintain-
d
B1
ing current over one full cycle,
R1 T
→→

⎯→

2
⎯→

∫ V0L0 sin ωW GW
⎯⎯

Load
⎯

W=
⎯

Brushes
Slip rings RL
0
⎯
⎯⎯
⎯

T
B2 ⎛ 1 − cos 2 ωW ⎞
→→

R2
or W = V0L0 ∫ ⎜ ⎟ GW
⎝ 2 ⎠
0
T
1XPHULFDO  VL V0 L0 T
N = number of turns in the coil or W = 0 0
2 ∫ GW − 2 ∫
cos 2ωW GW
A = area enclosed by each turn of coil  0 0
→
B = strength of magnetic field V0 L0
⇒ W= T–0
θ = angle, which is normal to the coil, makes  2
→ ∴ Average power supplied to R over a
with B at any instant W complete cycle,
∴ Magnetic flux linked with the coil in this
position

a s P=
W VL T V L
= 00. = 0 0

iv D
→ →
T 2 T 2 2

φ = N ( B . A) = NBA cos θ
V0 L

Sh
As VDY = , LDY = 0 ∴ P = VDY. LDY
2 
→
B  2
(E) Refer to Q. 65, Page 151
(F) :DWWOHVV FXUUHQW The current which
θ consumes no power for its maintenance in
the circuit is called wattless current or idle
Q
where Q is current.
normal vector

If the coil rotates with an angular velocity ω and 70. (D) An ac source of voltage Y = Y0 sin ωW is
turns through an angle θ in time W connected across a series combination of an
θ = ωW ⇒ φ = NBA cos ωW inductor, a capacitor and a resistor. Use the
−Gφ phasor diagram to obtain the expression for
ε= = NAB ω sin ωW  ∴ ε = + ε0 sin ωW
 GW (L) impedance of the circuit and (LL) phase
ε = ε0 sin 2πνW angle between the voltage and the current.
(E) A capacitor of unknown capacitance, a
6RXUFHRIHQHUJ\ This induced emf is the source
of energy generations in this device. resistor of 100 Ω and an inductor of self-
inductance L = (4/π π2) henry are in series
connected to an ac source of 200 V and 50
69. (D) A voltage V = V0 sin ωt applied to a series Hz. Calculate the value of the capacitance
LCR circuit drives a current L = L0 sin ωt in and the current that flows in the circuit
the circuit. Deduce the expression for the when the current is in phase with the
average power dissipated in the circuit. voltage. (Comptt. All India)
(E) For circuits used for transporting electric Ans. (D) L ,PSHGDQFH RI FLUFXLW  The effective
power, a low power factor implies large
resistance offered by a series LCR circuit
power loss in transmission. Explain.
(F) Define the term ‘wattless current’. is called its impedance.
(Comptt. Delhi)
154 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

L C R 2
R 2 + ⎛⎜ ωL −
1 ⎞
= ⎟
⎝ ωC ⎠
←⎯
⎯→ ←⎯
⎯→ ←⎯
⎯→
VL = XLI VC = XCI VR = IR
⎡Q X L = ωL ⎤
⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ X C = 1/ ωC ⎥⎦
Figure 1
LL3KDVHDQJOHEHWZHHQYROWDJHDQGFXUUHQW
Suppose an inductance L, capacitance C
and resistance R are connected in series ⎛ X − XC ⎞
Phase angle, φ = tan–1 ⎜ L ⎟
to a source of alternating emf, V = V0 sin ⎝ R ⎠
ωW. (E) When current is in phase with voltage, R = Z
Let I be the instantaneous value of V V 200
current in the series circuit. I= = = = 2A ∴ Current = 2 A
Z R 100
Then voltages across the three For resonance or in phase, XC = XL
components are :
1
→ → = ωL
(L) VL = XL I . It is ahead of current I in ωC

phase by 90° 1 1
C= × [ Q ω = 2πν
→ ω2 L
→
(LL) VC = XC I . It lags behind the 1 1 1 × π/ 2
⇒ C= × = [ Q ν = 50Hz
( 2 πν)2 4 / π2 4 π/ 2 ν2 4
current I in phase by 90°
1
→ → = = 25 μF [Given L = 4/π2
(LLL) VR = R I . It is in phase with current 16 × 50 × 50
I. 71. (D) Explain with the help of a labelled diagram,
the principle and working of a transformer.

s
These voltages are shown in the phasor

a
Deduce the expression for its working
in Figure 2.

iv D
formula.
Y (E) Name any IRXU causes of energy loss in an

Sh
VL B actual transformer. (Comptt. All India)
P
D Ans. (D) 3ULQFLSOH It is a device which converts high
VL–VC V voltage a.c. into low voltage a.c. and YLFH
O YHUVD It is based upon the principle of PX
X
VC C VR A I WXDO LQGXFWLRQ When alternating current
passes through a coil, an induced emf is set
Y
Figure 2 up in the neighbouring coil.
→ → &RQVWUXFWLRQ A transformer consists of two
As VL and VC are in opposite directions,
coils of many turns of insulated copper wire
→ → → wound on a closed laminated iron core. One of
their resultant is OD = VL – VC , in the
the coils known as Primary ‘P’ is connected to
positive Y-direction. A.C. supply. The other coil known as
%\ SDUDOOHORJDP ODZ the resultant voltage
Secondary ‘S’ is connected to the load.
is,
:RUNLQJ When an alternating current passes
V = OP = OA 2 + OD 2 through the primary, the magnetic flux
through the iron core changes which does two
= VR 2 + ( VL − VC )2
things. It produces emf in the primary and an
= R 2 I 2 + ( X L I − X C I )2 induced emf is also set up in the secondary. If
we assume that the resistance of primary is
= I R 2 + ( X L − X C )2 negligible, the back emf will be equal to the
V voltage applied to the primary.
∴ = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2
I dφ dφ
∴ VP = – NP and VS = – NS
Clearly V/I is the effective resistance of dt dt
the series LCR circuit and is called its
⎡ N and N are number of turns in the primary
LPSHGDQFH (Z). ⎢ P S
where ⎢ and secondary respectively.VP and VS are their
∴ Z= R 2 + ( X L − X C )2 ⎢⎣ respective voltages
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 155

Primary Secondary (E) A choke coil is an electrical appliance used

for controlling current in an a.c. circuit.
VS N P S To load Therefore, if we use a resistance R for the
∴ = S
VP NP A.C. same purpose, a lot of energy would be
source wasted in the form of heat etc.
Laminated Core 73. (D) A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c.
NS
This ratio is called the WXUQV UDWLR source of variable frequency. Draw a
NP
suitable phasor diagram to deduce the
,Q D VWHSXS WUDQVIRUPHU NS > NP ∴ VS > VP expressions for the amplitude of the current
,Q D VWHSGRZQ WUDQVIRUPHU NS < NP ∴ VS < VP and phase angle.
(E) )RXU FDXVHV RI HQHUJ\ ORVV  (E) Obtain the condition at resonance. Draw a
(L) Magnetic flux loss plot showing the variation of current with
(LL) Hystersis loss (LLL) Iron loss the frequency of a.c. source for two
(LY) Losses due to the resistance of primary resistances R1 and R2 (R1 > R2). Hence
and secondary coils. define the quality factor, Q and write its
role in the tuning of the circuit.
(Comptt. Delhi)
72. (D) Draw a schematic sketch of an ac generator Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 64, Page 150
describing its basic elements. State briefly (E) Refer to Q. 44 Page 143
its working principle. Show a plot of 74. (D) Draw a labelled diagram of a.c. generator
variation of and state its working principle.
(L) Magnetic flux and (E) How is magnetic flux linked with the
(LL) Alternating emf versus time generated by armature coil changed in a generator?
a loop of wire rotating in a magnetic (F) Derive the expression for maximum value
field. of the induced emf and state the rule that
(E) Why is choke coil needed in the use of

a s gives the direction of the induced emf.

iv D
fluorescent tubes with ac mains? (Delhi) (G) Show the variation of the emf generated
versus time as the armature is rotated with
Ans. (D) $& JHQHUDWRU Refer to Q. 60 (D) and (E),

Sh
respect to the direction of the magnetic
Page 148
field. (Comptt. Delhi)
(L) Graph between magnetic flux and time,
Ans. For (D) and (E), Refer to Q. 60, Page 148
according to equation (L), shown below
(F) Direction of induced emf can be determined
in Graph (L)
by using )OHPLQJ·V /HIW KDQG UXOH
(LL) As the coil rotates, angle θ changes.
(G)
Therefore, magnetic flux φ linked with
the coil changes and an emf is induced in Induced
the coil. At this instant W, if H is the emf emf
↑ 0 90° 180° 270° 360° Time →
induced in the coil, then
↓
Gθ G
H = − =− (NAB cos ωW)
 GW GW
G 0 T T 3T
⇒ H = –NAB (cos ωW) 4 2 4
GW 75. (D) Draw a schematic arrangement for winding
⇒ H = – NAB(– sin ωW) ω of primary and secondary coil in a
∴ φ = NAB ω sin ωW transformer when the two coils are wound
(LLL) The graph between alternating emf on top of each other.
versus time is shown below in Graph (LL). (E) State the underlying principle of a
\ transformer and obtain the expression for
the ratio of secondary to primary voltage in
terms of the
H
(L) number of secondary and primary
φ windings and
Alternating emf

2T/4 T
[ (LL) primary and secondary currents.
T/4 3T/4
(F) Write the main assumption involved in
W
deriving the above relations.
²H
(G) Write any WZR reasons due to which
energy losses may occur in actual
*UDSK L *UDSK LL transformers. (Comptt. All India)
 156 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

Ans. (D), (E) and (F). Refer to Q. 65, Page 151 IS NV 5

(G) Reasons due to which energy losses may (G) = ⇒ = 100
I NS I V
occur :  V
(L) Flux leakage 5
⇒ IV = = 0.05 A
(LL) Losses due to the resistance of 100
primary and secondary coils (H) Power in secondary = Power in primary
(LLL) eddy currents (LY) hystersis = 1100 W …(given)
78. (L) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down
transformer. State the priciple of its
76. (L) An a.c. source of voltage V = V0 sin ωW is working.
connected to a series combination of L, C (LL) Express the turn ratio in terms of voltages.
and R. Use the phasor diagram to obtain (LLL) Find the ratio of primary and secondary
expressions for impedance of the circuit currents in terms of turn ratio in an ideal
and phase angle between voltage and ntransformer.
current. Find the condition when current (LY) How much current is drawn by the primary
will be in phase with the voltage. What is of a transformer connected to 220 V supply
the circuit in this condition called? when it delivers power to a 110V – 550 W
(LL) In a series LR circuit XL = R and power refrigerator? (All India)
factor of the circuit is P1. When capacitor Ans. (L) (D) Input
with capacitance C such that XL = XC is put A B
in series, the power factor becomes P2.
Calculate P1/P2. (Delhi) Primary
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 70 (D), Page 153
R R R
(LL) P1 = = = Secondary
R 2 + XL2 R2 + R2 2R 2

=
R
=
1
[ QXL = R]

D a s C D

v
2R 2

i
Output
R R

∴
P2 =

P1
P2
=
Z R
1
= 2 =
1
=1

1
2
S h
[ QZ = R at resonance]
/DEHOOHG GLDJUDP RI D VWHSGRZQ WUDQVIRUPHU 
(E) Mutual Induction, which means
“whenever an alternative voltage is
77. (L) Write the function of a transformer. State its applied in the primary windings/coil,
principle of working with the help of a an emf is induced in the secondary
diagram. Mention various energy losses in windings (Coil).”
this device. ⎛N ⎞
(LL) Turn ratio : ⎜ V = VV
(LL) The primary coil of an ideal step up ⎟
transformer has 100 turns and ⎝ S ⎠ VS
N

transformation ratio is also 100. The input (LLL) For an ideal transformer,
voltage and power are respectively 220 V LS VV N
and 1100 W. Calculate LSVS = LVVV ∴ = = V
(D) number of turns in secondary L VS NS
 V
(E) current in primary LS NV
(F) voltage across secondary ∴ =
L NS
(G) current in secondary  V
(H) power in secondary (Delhi) (LY) We haveLSVS = LVVV = 550 w …(Given VS = 220 V)
Ans. (L) Refer to Q. 71, Page 154 550 550 5
(LL) Given : NS = 100, U = 100, VS = 220 V, ∴ LS = = = = 2.5 A
VS 220 2
PS = 1100 W, NV = ?, IS = ?, VV = ?, IV = ? 
and PV = ? 79. Discuss how Faraday’s law of e.m. induction is
(D) NV = U × NS = 100 × 100 = 10000 applied in an ac-generator for converting
(E) Input power (PS) = Input voltage × current mechanical energy into electrical energy.
in primary = VS × IS Obtain an expression for the instantaneous
1100 = 220 × IS ⇒ IS = 5A value of the induced emf in an ac generator.
VV N VV 10000 Draw graphs to show the ‘phase relationship’
(F) = V ⇒ = between the instantaneous (L) magnetic flux (φ)
VS

NS 220 100
⇒ VV = 2.2 × 104 volts linked with the coil and (LL) induced emf (ε) in
the coil. (Comptt. Delhi)
 Chapter 7 : ALTERNATING CURRENT 157

Ans. )DUDGD\V ODZ RI HP LQGXFWLRQ DQG H[SUHVVLRQ Maximum value of  L0 = mA
IRU LQVWDQWDQHRXV YDOXH RI LQGXFHG HPI [ Q Numerical value of R is not given]
Refer to Q. 60 (D) and (E), Page 148 82. (D) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-up
Graph : transformer. Obtain the ratio of secondary
*UDSK IRU PDJQHWLF IOX[ φ
 1%$FRVωωW to primary voltage in terms of number of
φ→

turns and currents in the two coils.

(L) (E) A power transmission line feeds input
T/4 T
0 power at 2200 V to a step-down transformer
3T/4
T/2 W → with its primary windings having 3000
turns. Find the number of turns in the
secondary to get the power output at 220 V.
(Delhi)
*UDSK IRU LQGXFHG HPI H Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 65, Page 151
H →

 1%$ωωVLQω
ωW (E) Given : VS = 2200 V, NS = 3000 turns,
(LL) VV = 220 V, NV = ?
T/2 T
W → NV V NV 220
0 T/4
3T/4 = V ∴ =
N VS 3000 2200
 S
∴ NV = 300 turns
80. Draw an arrangement for winding of primary 83. A device ‘X’ is connected to an ac source V = V0
and secondary coils in a transformer with two sin ωW. The variation of voltage, current and
coils on a separate limb of the core. power in one cycle is shown in the following
State the underlying principle of a transformer. graph:
Deduce the expression for the ratio of secondary (D) Identify the device ‘X’.
voltage to the primary voltage in terms of the

a s(E) Which of the curves A, B and C represent

iv D
ratio of the number of turns of primary and the voltage, current and the power
secondary winding. For an ideal transformer, consumed in the circuit? Justify your

Sh
obtain the ratio of primary and secondary answer.
currents in terms of the ratio of the voltages in Y A
the secondary and primary voltages. B C
Write any two reasons for the energy losses
which occur in actual transformers.
(Comptt. Delhi) 0
Zto
S 2S
Ans. Refer to Q. 71, Page 154

81. (D) Draw a labelled diagram of AC generator.

(F) How does its impedance vary with
Derive the expression for the instantaneous
frequency of the ac source? Show
value of the emf induced in the coil.
graphically.
(E) A circular coil of cross-sectional area 200
(G) Obtain an expression for the current in the
cm2 and 20 turns is rotated about the
circuit and its phase relation with ac voltage.
vertical diameter with angular speed of 50
(All India)
rad s–1 in a uniform magnetic field of
Ans. (D) The device X is a capacitor.
magnitude 3.0 x 10–2 T. Calculate the
maximum value of the current in the coil. (E) Curve B ⎯⎯→ voltage
(Delhi)
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 60, Page 148 Curve C ⎯⎯→ current
(E) Given : A = 200 cm2 = 200 × 10–4 m2 Curve A ⎯⎯→ power consumption over a
N = 20 turns, Z = 50 rad s–1, full cycle.
B = 3.0 × 10–2 T, L0 = ? Reason: The current leads the voltage in
Maximum value of emf (H0) π
phase, by a plane angle of , for a capacitor.
= NBAZ 2
= 20 x (3.0 × 10–2) x (200 × 10–4) x 50 1 ⎛ 1⎞
= 600 × 10–3 V = 600 mV
(F) XC = ⎜ XC ∝ ⎟
ωC ⎝ ω⎠
 158 Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

85. In the given circuit, calculate (D) the capacitance

of the capacitor, if the power factor of the circuit
is unity, (E) the Q-factor of this circuit. What is
XC the significance of the Q-factor in a.c. circuit?
Given the angular frequency of the a.c. source
to be 100/s. Calculate the average power
dissipated in the circuit. (Comptt. Delhi)
10 : 200 mH
Z
R L C
(G) V = V0 sin ωW
Q = CV = CV0 sin ωW
C
V = 50 V
Ans. Given : R = 10 Ω, L = 100 mH = 100 × 10–3 H,
V = 50 V, = 100 s–1
(D) As power factor is unity,
∴ X L = XC
V = V0 sin Zt ⇒ ω=
1
LC
π
= ωF V0 cos ωW = I0 sin ⎛⎜ ωW + ⎞⎟
GT
I= 1
GW ⎝ 2⎠ 100 =
π 200 × 10 −3 ) × C
Current leads the voltage, in phase, by Squaring both sides, we have
2
84. (D) Draw a labelled diagram of an ac generator. 104 × (2 x 102) × 10–3 × C = 1
Obtain the expression for the emf induced

a s C=
1
F = 0.5 × 10–3 F = 0.5 mF

iv D
in the rotating coil of N turns each of cross- 2 × 10 3
sectional area A, in the presence of a 1 L

Sh
→ (E) Quality factor, Q =
magnetic field B . R C
(E) A horizontal conducting rod 10 m long 1 (200 × 10 −3 ) 1
= = × 20 = 2
extending from east to west is falling with 10 (0.5 × 10 −3 ) 10
a speed 5.0 ms–1 at right angles to the Significance: It measures the sharpness of
horizontal component of the Earth’s resonance.
magnetic field, 0.3 × 10–4 Wb m–2. Find the Average Power dissipated—
instantaneous value of the emf induced in
P = Vrms Irms cos
the rod. (All India)
= 50 × 1
Ans. (D) Refer to Q. 60, Page 148
(E) Given : O = 10 m, ν = 5.0 ms–1, [ Q cos ϕ = 1 for power factor to be unity]
B = 0.3 × 10–4 wb m–2 = 250 watts
Induced emf = BOV
∴ E = (0.3 × 10–4) × (10) × (5) volt


E = 1.5 × 10–3 V = 1.5 mV
 OMR Based
Sample Question Paper

Time Allowed : 90 minutes Maximum Marks : 35

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
(i) Question paper comprises three Sections—A, B and C. There are 35 questions in the question paper. All
questions are compulsory.
(ii) Section A – Questions no. 1 to 12 are Multiple Choice Questions (MCQs).
(iii) Section B – Questions no. 13 to 19 are Assertion-Reason type Questions.
(iv) Section C – Questions no. 20 to 35 are Case Study Based MCQs.
(v) The Answer sheet is inside this Test Booklet. When you are directed to open the Test Booklet, take out
the Answer Sheet and fill in the particulars on SIDE-2 carefully with Blue/Black ball point pen only. In no
case pencil is to be used. Read “General Instructions for Candidates” on SIDE-1 carefully.
(vi) The candidate should ensure that the Answer Sheet is not folded. Do not make any stray marks on the Answer

s
Sheet. Do not write your Roll Number anywhere else except in the specified space in the Test Booklet/Answer

a
Sheet.

Sh iv D
SECTION-A (Multiple Choice Questions)
1. Which of the following figures represent the electric field lines due to a single negative charge?

(a) – (b) –

(c) – (d) – 

2.
Two spherical conductors each of capacity C are charged to potential V and –V. These are then con-
nected by means of a fine wire. The loss of energy is
1

(a) zero (b) CV2 (c) CV2 (d) 2 CV2
2
3.
In the series combination of two or more than two resistances
(a) the current through each resistance is same.
(b) the voltage through each resistance is same.
(c) neither current nor voltage through each resistance is same.
(d) both current and voltage through each resistance are same.
V
4.
The rms value of potential difference V shown in the figure is
V0

(a) (b) V0
3 V0
V
(c) 0 (d) V0
2 2
O t
T/2 T
OMR–1
OMR–2 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

5.
Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry current I in opposite sense. A simple amperian loop
passes through both of them once. Calling the loop as C, then which statement is correct?
 
(a)  B .dl = ± 2m0I

c
 

(b) the value of  B .dl is independent of sense of C.
c
(c) there may be a point on C where B and dl are parallel.
(d) none of these.
6.
A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field in four different orientations as shown in
figure. Arrange them in the decreasing order of potential energy.

→
B → n →
→
n B B B

n n

1 2 3 4

(a) 4, 2, 3, 1 (b) 1, 4, 2, 3 (c) 4, 3, 2, 1 (d) 1, 2, 3, 4

7. The north pole of a long bar magnet was pushed slowly into a short solenoid connected to a short
galvanometer. The magnet was held stationary for a few seconds with the north pole in the middle of
the solenoid and then withdrawn rapidly. The maximum deflection of the galvanometer was observed
when the magnet was
(a) moving towards the solenoid (b) moving into the solenoid

a s
(c) at rest inside the solenoid (d) moving out of the solenoid

iv D
8. When a metal conductor connected to left gap of a meter bridge is heated, the balancing point
(a) shifts towards right (b) shifts towards left

Sh
(c) remains unchanged (d) remains at zero
→ →
9. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in a uniform electric field E . Then
→ →
(i) the torque on the dipole is p × E
→ →
(ii) the potential energy of the system is p . E

(iii) the resultant force on the dipole is zero.
Choose the correct option.
(a) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (b) (i) and (iii) are correct and (ii) is wrong
(c) only (i) is correct (d) (i) and (ii) are correct and (iii) is wrong
10. If number of turns in primary and secondary coils is increased to two times each, the mutual inductance
(a) becomes 4 times (b) becomes 2 times
(c) becomes 1 times (d) remains unchanged
4
11. When a magnetic compass needle is carried nearby to a straight wire carrying current, then
I. the straight wire cause a noticeable deflection in the compass needle.
II. the alignment of the needle is tangential to an imaginary circle with straight wire as its centre and has
a plane perpendicular to the wire.
(a) (I) is correct (b) (II) is correct
(c) both (I) and (II) are correct (d) neither (I) nor (II) is correct
12. In series LCR circuit, the phase angle between supply voltage and current is
R

(a) tan f = X L - X C (b) tan f =
R XL - XC
R
(c) tan f = (d) tan f = X L + X C
XL + XC R
 OMR Based Sample Question Paper n OMR–3

SECTION-B (Assertion-Reason Questions)

DIRECTION: Read the two statements Assertion (A) and Reason (R) carefully to mark the correct option out
of the options given below:
(a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements and Reason is correct explanation for Assertion.
(b) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements but Reason is not correct explanation for Assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is wrong statement.
(d) Assertion is wrong statement but Reason is correct statement.
13. Assertion (A): The surface densities of two spherical conductors of different radii are equal. Then the
electric field intensities near their surface are also equal.
Reason (R): Surface charge density is equal to charge per unit area.
14. Assertion (A): Aclinic lines on the magnetic map represents lines of equal dip.
Reason (R): When the horizontal and vertical components of the earth magnetic field are equal, the angle
of dip is 45º.
Assertion (A): Fuse wire must have high resistance and low melting point.
15.
Reason (R): Fuse is used for small current flow only.
16. Assertion (A): When two coil are wound on each other, the mutual induction between the coils is maximum.
Reason (R): Mutual induced does not depend on the orientation of the coils.
17. Assertion (A): When air between the plates of a parallel plate condenser is replaced by an insulating
medium of dielectric constant its capacity increases.
Reason (R): Electric field intensity between the plates with dielectric in between it is reduced.

a s
18. Assertion (A): A bulb connected in series with a solenoid is connected to A.C. source. If a soft iron core is

iv D
introduced in the solenoid, the bulb will glow brighter.

Sh
Reason (R): On introducing soft iron core in the solenoid, the inductance decreases.
19. Assertion (A): The magnetic field at the centre of circular coil carrying current changes, if the current
through the coil is doubled.
Reason (R): The magnetic field intensity is dependent on current in conductor.

SECTION-C (Case Study Based Questions)

Read the given para and answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate options (Question No.
20 to 23):
Mutual inductance. Mutual inductance is the phenomenon of inducing
emf in a coil, due to a change of current in the neighbouring coil. The
amount of mutual inductance that links one coil to another depends
G
very much on the relative positioning of two coils, their geometry and
relative separation between them. Mutual inductance between the two
coils increase µr times if the coils are wound over an iron core of relative
permeability µr.
20. A short solenoid of radius a, number of turns per unit length n1, and length L is kept coaxially inside
a very long solenoid of radius b, number of turns per unit length n2. What is the mutual inductance of
the system?
(a) µ0πb2n1n2L (b) µ0πa2n1n2L2
(c) µ0πa2n1n2L (d) µ0πb2n1n2L2
21. If a change in current of 0.01 A in one coil produces a change in magnetic flux of 2 × 10-2 weber in
another coil, then the mutual inductance between coils is
(a) 0 (b) 0.5 H (c) 2 H (d) 3H
22. Mutual inductance of two coils can be increased by
(a) decreasing the number of turns in the coils
(b) increasing the number of turns in the coils
 OMR–4 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

(c) winding the coils on wooden cores

(d) none of these.
23. When a sheet of iron is placed in between the two co-axial, then the mutual inductance between the coils
will
(a) increase (b) decrease
(c) remains same (d) cannot be predicted
Read the given para and answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate options (Question No.
24 to 27):
An arrangement of two conductors separated by an insulating medium can be used to store electric charge
and electric energy. Such a system is called a capacitor. The more charge a capacitor can store, the greater
is its capacitance. Usually, a capacitor consists of two capacitors having equal and opposite charge + Q and
–Q. Hence, there is a potential difference V between them. By the capacitance of a capacitor, we mean the
ratio of the charge Q to the potential difference V. By the charge on a capacitor we mean only the charge Q
on the positive plate. Total charge of the capacitor is Zero. The capacitance of a capacitor is a constant and
depends on geometric factors, such as the shapes, sizes and relative positions of the two conductors, and the
nature of the medium between them. The unit of capacitance Farad (F), but the more convenient units are F
and pF. A commonly used capacitor consists of two long strips or metal foils, separated by two long strips
of dielectrics, rolled up into a small cylinder. Common dielectric materials are plastics (such as polyester and
polycarbonate) and aluminum oxide. Capacitors are widely used in television, computer, and other electric
circuits.
24. A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the plate are pulled apart,
(a) the capacitance increases.

s
(b) the potential difference increases.

iv D a
(c) the total charge increases.
(d) the charge and the potential difference remains the same.

Sh
25. If n capacitors, each of capacitance C, are connected in series, then the equivalent capacitance of the
combination will be
(a) n C (b) n2 C (c) C/n (d) C/n2
26. Three capacitors 2.0, 3.0 and 6.0 microfarad are connected in series to a 10 V source. The charge on the
3.0 microfarad capacitor is:
(a) 5 microcoulomb (b) 10 microcoulomb
(c) 12 microcoulomb (d) 15 microcoulomb
27. What is the potential difference across 2 microfarad capacitor in the circuit shown?
6V

2mF 3mF

16V


(a) 12 V (b) 6 V

(c) 4 V (d) 18 V

Read the given para and answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate options (Question No.
28 to 31):
Helical Motion. The path of a charged particle in magnetic field depends upon angle between velocity and
 →
magnetic field. If velocity  is at angle θ to B , component of velocity parallel to magnetic field ( cos θ)
remains constant and component of velocity perpendicular to magnetic field ( sin θ) is responsible for
circular motion, thus the charge particle moves in a helical path.
 OMR Based Sample Question Paper n OMR–5

 sin θ

Helical path

→ r
θ B

 cos θ

The plane of the circle is perpendicular to the magnetic field and the axis of the helix is parallel to the
magnetic field. The charged particle moves along helical path touching the line parallel to the magnetic
field passing through the starting point after each rotation.
m sin 
Radius of circular path, r =

qB
→
Hence the resultant path of the charged particle will be helix, with its axis along the direction of B shown
in figure.
28. When a positively charged particle enters into a uniform magnetic field with uniform velocity, its
trajectory can be (I) a straight line (II) a circle (III) a helix.
(a) (I) only (b) (I) or (II)

s
(c) (I) or (III) (d) any one of (I), (II) and (III)

iv D a
29. Two charged particles A and B having the same charge, mass and speed enter into a magnetic field in
such a way that initial path of A makes an angle of 30º and that of B makes an angle of 90º with the

Sh
field. Then the trajectory of
(a) B will have smaller radius of curvature than that of A
(b) both will have the same curvature
(c) A will have smaller radius of curvature than that of B

(d) both will move along the direction of their original velocities.
30. An electron having momentum 2.4 × 10–23 kg m/s enters a region of uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T.
The field vector makes an angle of 30º with initial velocity vector of the electron. The radius of the
helical path of the electron in the field shall be
(a) 2 mm (b) 1 mm

(c) 3
mm (d) 0.5 mm
2
→
31. The magnetic field in a certain region of space is given by B = 8.35-2 × 10 -2 i T . A proton is shot into the

field with velocity  = (2 × 10 5 i + 4 × 10 5 j ) m/s. The proton follows a helical path in the field. The distance
moved by proton in the x-direction during the period of one revolution in the yz-plane will be
(a) 0.053 m (b) 0.136 m
(c) 0.236 m (d) 0.157 m

Read the given para and answer the following MCQs by choosing the most appropriate options (Question No.
32 to 35):
The flow of charge in a particular direction constitutes the electric current. Current is measured in Ampere.
Quantitatively, electric current in a conductor across an area held flowing across that area per unit time.
Current density at a point in a conductor is the ratio of the current at that point in the conductor to the area
of cross section of the conductor of that point. The given figure shows a steady current flows in a metallic
conductor of non uniform cross section. Current density depends inversely on area, so, here J1 >J2 as A1 <
A2.
 OMR–6 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

A1 A2

32. What is the current flowing through a conductor, if one million electrons are crossing in one millisecond
through a cross-section of it?
(a) 2.5 × 10–10 A (b) 1.6 × 10–10 A
(c) 7.5 × 10 A –9 (d) 8.2 × 10–11 A
33. A steady current flows in a metallic conductor of non-uniform cross-section. Which of these quantities
is constant along the conductor?
(a) Electric field (b) Drift velocity
(c) Current (d) Current density
34. A constant current I is flowing along the length of a conductor of variable cross-section as shown in the
figure. The quantity which does not depend upon the area of cross-section is

(a) electron density (b) current density

s
(c) drift velocity (d) electric field

iv D a
35. When a current of 40 A flows through a conductor of area 10 m2, then the current density is
(a) 4 A/m2 (b) 1 A/m2

Sh
(c) 2 A/m 2 (d) 8 A/m2
 OMR Based Sample Question Paper n OMR–7

mÙkj if=kdk / ANSWER SHEET i`"B&1 / SIDE-1

uhps fn, x, fjDr LFkkuksa dks osQoy i`"B&2 ij mÙkj vafdr djus osQ fy;s vuqns'k
uhys@dkys ckWy IokbaV isu ls Hkjsa INSTRUCTIONS FOR MARKING ON SIDE-2
FILL IN THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES
WITH BLUE/BLACK BALL POINT
PEN ONLY 1. mi;qDr xksys dks xgjs fu'kku ls Hkjus osQ fy, osQoy uhys@dkys
ckWy IokbaV isu dk iz;ksx djsaA
iathdj.k la[;k / Registration No. Use Only Blue/Black Ball Point Pen to Darken the
appropriate Circle.
        /             /         2. Ñi;k iwjs xksys dks xgjs fu'kku ls Hkfj,A
Please darken the complete circle.
vH;FkhZ dk uke (cM+s v{kjksa esa)
Candidate’s Name (IN CAPITAL LETTERS) 3. izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj osQoy ,d gh xksys esa xgjk fu'kku
yxkdj nhft, tSlk uhps fn[kk;k x;k gS %

Darken ONLY ONE CIRCLE for each Question as shown
below:
firk dk uke (cM+s v{kjksa esa) xyr xyr xyr xyr lgh
Father’s Name (IN CAPITAL LETTERS) Wrong Wrong Wrong Wrong Correct
2 3 ✘  2  3   ✘  2  3  ✔   2  3  4 1   2  3  
     
4. fdlh mÙkj osQ fy, ,d ckj xksys esa fu'kku yxkus osQ i'pkr~
dksbZ ifjorZu vuqekU; ugha gSA
fo|ky; dksM / School Code No change in the Answer once marked is allowed.
5. izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj] mÙkj if=kdk esa ml iz'u osQ laxr Øekad
osQ lkeus fn, x, mi;qDr xksys esa fu'kku yxkdj nhft,A
Mark your answer only in the appropriate space in the

s
fo|ky; dk uke (pyrs gkFk ls fy[ksa) Answer sheet against the number corresponding to the

a
School Name (in running hand)

iv D
question.
6. mÙkj if=kdk ij vU; dgha dksbZ fu'kku u yxk,aA

Sh
Please do not make any stray marks on the Answer Sheet.
7. bl mÙkj if=kdk ij dPpk dke djuk euk gSA
Rough work must not be done on the Answer Sheet.
8. mÙkj if=kdk ij lisQn @ la'kks/u rjy dk iz;ksx u djsaA
Do not use white/correction fluid on the Answer Sheet.

mnkgj.kµi`"B&2 dks Hkjus dh fof/ (osQoy uhys@dkys ckWy IokbaV isu ls Hkfj,)
EXAMPLES—HOW TO FILL AND MARK ON SIDE-2 (WITH BLUE/BLACK BALL POINT PEN ONLY)
vxj vkidk iathdj.k la[;k vxj vkiosQ fo|ky; vxj vkidh iz'u vxj vkidh vxj iz'u uaú 08
A252/73552/7356 gS dk dksM 11266 gS iqfLrdk la[;k 1353646 gS p;fur Hkk"kk osQ fy, vkidk
If your Registration No. is If your School If your Test Booklet fgUnh gS mÙkj (2) gS
A252/73552/7356 Code is 11266 No. 1353646 If language If your Response
fo|ky; dksM iz'u iqfLrdk la[;k attempted is to Question No.
iathdj.k la[;k @ Registration No. School Code Test Booklet No. Hindi 08 is (2)
p;fur Hkk"kk
A 2 5 2 / 7 3 5 5 2 / 7 3 5 6 1 1 2 6 6 1 3 5 3 6 4 6 Language
attempted
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
C 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
D 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
G 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Q.No. Response
M 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 6 Hindi
English 08 1 3 4
P 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
R 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

vH;FkhZ bl ckr dk è;ku j[ksa fd iz'u iqfLrdk esa Nik gqvk dksM mÙkj iqfLrdk osQ Nis gq, dksM osQ leku gksuk pkfg,A blesa dksbZ folaxfr
gksus ij vH;FkhZ iz'u iqfLrdk vkSj mÙkj iqfLrdk dks cnyokus osQ fy, rqjar fujh{kd dks lwfpr djsaA
The candidate should check carefully that the Test Booklet Code printed on Side-2 of the Answer Sheet is the same as printed on
Test Booklet. In case of discrepancy, the candidate should immediately report the matter to the invigilator for replacement of both
the Test Booklet and the Answer Sheet.
OMR–8 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

i`"B&2 / SIDE-2 osQoy uhys@dkys ckWy IokbaV isu dk iz;ksx djsa /  mÙkj if=kdk la[;k/
USE BLUE/BLACK BALL POINT PEN ONLY Answer Sheet No.

p;fur Hkk"kk iz'u iqfLrdk dksM

Test Booklet Code
fo|ky; dksM iz'u iqfLrdk la[;k Language
iathdj.k la[;k @ Registration No. School Code Test Booklet No. attempted

/ / A1

A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

C 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Hindi

G 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

M 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 English

P 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

R 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Q.No. Response Q.No. Response

01 a b c d 20 a b c d

02 a b c d 21 a b c d

03 a b c d 22 a b c d

04 a b c d 23 a b c d

a s
05 a b c d 24 a b c d

D
a b c d 25 a b c d

v
06

h i
a b c d 26 a b c d
07

S
a b c d 27 a b c d
08
a b c d 28 a b c d
09
a b c d 29 a b c d
10
a b c d 30 a b c d
11
a b c d 31 a b c d
12
a b c d 32 a b c d
13
a b c d 33 a b c d
14
a b c d 34 a b c d
15
a b c d 35 a b c d
16
17 a b c d

18 a b c d

19 a b c d

mÙkj if=kdk fujh{kd dks lkSaius ls igys vH;FkhZ ;g tk¡p dj ysa fd iathdj.k la[;k] fo|ky; dksM] iz'u iqfLrdk la[;k vkSj
p;fur Hkk"kk lgh <ax ls Hkj fn;s x, gSa vkSj fpfUgr dj fn;s x, gSaA
Before handling over the Answer Sheet to the invigilator, the candidate should check that Registration No., School Code,
Test Booklet No. & Language Attempted have been filled in and marked correctly.

vH;FkhZ dk uke
Candidate’s Name

vH;FkhZ osQ gLrk{kj (pyrs gkFk ls fy[ksa)

Candidate’s Signature (in running hand) fujh{kd osQ gLrk{kj@Invigilator’s Signature
 OMR Based Sample Question Paper n OMR–9

HINTS AND EXPLANATIONS

13. (b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct explanation for

assertion.
Given. σ1 = σ2
q1 q2 q1 r12
∴  , or 
4 r12 4 r2 2 q2 r2 2
Then the ratio of electric field intensities near the surface of spherical conductors,
E1 q1 4 0r2 2 E1 q1 r2 2 q1 q2
        1 ....[Let r1 and r2 be two different radii
E2 4 0r12 q2 E2 q2 r12 q2 q1

i.e. E1 = E2
14. (d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.

The angle of dip is the angle between the axis of the dip needle in the magnetic meridian and the horizontal direction.
Vertical component of the earth's magnetic field B
tan θ = = V when BV = BH, tan θ = 1 ⇒ θ = 45º
Horizontal component of the earth's magnetic field BH
15. (c) Assertion is correct statement but Reason is wrong statement.
Fuse wire must have high resistance because in series current remains same. Therefore according to Joule’s law
i 2 Rt
H = , heat produced is high if R is high. The melting point must be low so that wire may melt with increase
4.2

s
in temperature. As a current equal to maximum safe value flows through the fuse wire it heat up, melt and breaks

iv D a
the circuit.
16. (c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.

Sh
The manner in which the two coils are oriented determines the coefficient of coupling between them i.e.,
M
K = where L1 and L2 are self inductance of two coils. When the two coils are wound on each other the
L1L 2
coefficient of coupling is maximum and mutual inductance between the coil is maximum.
17. (a) Assertion and Reason both are correct statements and Reason is correct explanation for
Assertion.
q

Given. Capacity of parallel plate condenser, C = ...(i)
V
1
Electric field intensity becomes times [as K = Eo/E
K
1
 Potential V also becomes times. Hence, from equation (i) capacity becomes K times. Thus electric field decreases
K
and capacitance increases when condenser is filled with insulated medium of some dielectric constant.
18. (d) Assertion is false statement but reason is correct statement.

On introducing soft iron core, the bulb will glow dimmer. This is because on introducing soft iron core in the
solenoid, its inductance L increases, the inductive reactant, XL =wL increases and hence the current through the
bulb deceases.
19. (a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct explanation for
assertion.
0 2nl
Given. The magnetic field at the centre of circular coil is given by B = 4 .
a
So if current through coil is double then magnetic field is B’ = 2B.
 The magnetic field also get doubled as magnetic field is directly proportional to the current in conductor.
21. (c) 2 H
Given: φB = 2 × 10-2 Wb, I = 0.01 A
As φB = MI
fB 2×10 -2 Wb
∴ Mutual inductance between two coils, M = I = =2H
0.01 A
OMR–10 n Shiv Das Chapterwise Question Bank (Physics XII)

26. (b) 10 microcoulomb

2F 3F 6F

q=?

+ –
10 V

1 1 1 1 1 3+ 2+1

C
= 2+ 3+6 
C
= 6
=1

∴ c = 1mF  q = CV
∴ q = 1 × 10 = 10 mC

27. (b) 6 V
Given. Total potential, V = 16 - 6 = 10 V
...[As batteries are placed in same direction
2× 3 6
Total Capcitance, C = = 5 mF
2+ 3
6
Total charge, q = CV = 5 ×10 = 12 mC
q 12mC
 Potential difference across 2 mC, V1 = c = = 6V ...[q is same for both as they are in series
2mC

29. (a) B will have smaller radius of curvature than that of A

s
mν 2

a

Using, q sin θ =

iv D
r
1
r ∝ for the same values of m, , q and B

Sh
sin θ
rA sin 90 º
∴ = =2
rB sin 30 º
∴ rA = 2rB or rB < rA
30. (d) 0.5 mm
m  m sin  (2.4 ×10 -23 kg m/s)× sin 30º
r =
qB

eB

(1.6 ×10 -19 C)× 0.15 T

= 5 × 10–4 m = 0.5 × 10–3 m = 0.5 mm

31. (d) 0.157 m
 
Given. B = 8.35 ×10 2 i T ,  = (2×10 5 i + 4 ×10 5 j) m/s ,
m = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg
2m
Pitch of the helix =
qB
2× 3.14 ×1.67 ×10 -27 × 2×10 5
= = 0.157 m
1.6 ×10 -19 × 8.35 ×10 -2

32. (b) 1.6 × 10–10 A

q = 106 × 1.6 ×10–19 C = 1.6 × 10–13 C
t = 10–3 s
q 1.6 ×10 −13
I = = = 1.6 × 10–10 A
t 10 −3
35. (a) 4 A/m2
Given. I = 40 A ; A = 10 m2

I 40
∴ Current density, J = A = 10 = 4 A/m2
----------